JP2019187621A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing reduction of an amusement felt by a player by making a player enjoy a performance by protrusion of a protrusion member.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine comprises: a performance operation part unit 350 which can be moved forward/rearward; a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body which can detect approach or contact of a player to the performance operation part unit 350; a performance operation part lifting mechanism 360 capable of protruding the performance operation part unit 350 to a player side by detection by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body; and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 capable of changing protrusion force of the performance operation part unit 350 by the performance operation part lifting mechanism 360.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 55

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In a pachinko machine as a gaming machine, a plurality of receiving openings (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a variable starting opening, a variable winning a prize can be received in a gaming area into which a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation. A bonus, a prize winning opening, a prize winning opening, etc., and a privilege (for example, a predetermined number of gaming media to be paid out, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous) Etc.) is given to the player so that the player can be entertained.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed an operating button that can be operated by a player so that the operating button can be protruded highly in accordance with the gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1). According to the technique of this patent document 1, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation such as the arrival of a chance by projecting the operation button, so that the player can be entertained.

  However, in the conventional technique such as Patent Document 1, since the operation button (protruding member) protrudes regardless of the player's trend, it is easy for the player to overlook the protrusion of the operation button. It was not possible to fully demonstrate.

JP 2017-124046 A

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can entertain a presentation effect of a protruding member and suppress a decrease in the interest of a player.

Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“A projecting member provided to be able to advance and retreat,
Detection means capable of detecting the approach or contact of the player to the protruding member;
Advancing / retreating means capable of projecting the projecting member toward the player by detection of the sensing means;
And a projecting output changing means capable of changing the projecting output of the projecting member by the advancing / retreating means ".

  Here, as the “protruding member”, “a member that can be pressed by the player (pressing operation portion)”, “a member that the player cannot press”, “a device having a predetermined decoration (movable decoration) Body) ", etc. Further, examples of the direction in which the protruding member advances and retreats include “vertical direction”, “front-rear direction”, “left-right direction”, and the like.

  Further, the position where the “projection member” or the like is provided is “a bulging portion that bulges forward and below the game area in the door frame that closes the front surface of the game area (for example, a game medium can be stored). Plate unit) ”,“ at least one of the left and right outer sides of the game area in the door frame closing the front of the game area (for example, the door frame left side unit, the door frame right side unit, etc.) ”,“ game area And the like above the game area in the door frame that closes the front surface of the door (for example, the door frame top unit).

  Examples of the “detecting means” include “thing detected by electrostatic capacitance”, “thing detected by reflected light of irradiated light”, “thing detected by brightness”, and the like.

  Further, examples of the “advance / retreat means” include “things that are projected by the urging force of the projection spring”, “things that are projected from the drive motor”, “things that are projected by the solenoid”, and the like. The protrusion of the protruding member by the advancing / retreating means may be protruded by detecting the approach or contact of the player by the detecting means, or protrudes depending on the game state regardless of the detection of the approach or contact of the player by the detecting means. You may let them.

  The "projection output changing means" includes "changing the biasing force of the projecting spring for projecting the projecting member", "changing the voltage and current for driving the drive motor for projecting the projecting member" "," Changing the gear (gear ratio) for transmitting the rotation from the drive motor for driving the protruding member "," changing the voltage or current for driving the solenoid for protruding the protruding member ", "Change the number of driving of a plurality of solenoids for projecting the projecting member", and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the protruding member provided in the gaming machine so as to be able to advance and retreat, the detecting means capable of detecting the approach or contact of the player to the protruding member, and the detecting member detects the protruding member. The advancing / retreating means capable of projecting to the side and the projecting output changing means capable of changing the projecting output of the projecting member by the advancing / retreating means are provided.

  As a result, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the protruding member provided so as to be able to advance and retreat, the protruding member protrudes by the advancing and retracting means, so that the player is not in contact with the advancing and retracting member. When the protruding member protrudes in a state, the player abuts (collides) with the player, and when the protruding member protrudes while the player is in contact with the advancing / retreating member, the player exerts an effect by physical force such as pushing the player. Can be presented. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player due to an effect that the conventional gaming machine does not have, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly to the protruding member, and to the player of the protruding member Protrusion can be noticed reliably. When projecting this projecting member, the projecting member can be projected with various projecting outputs by the projecting output changing means, so that variations in performance by physical force can be increased, making the player less tired. In addition, it is possible to entertain the effects produced by the protruding members, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, since the bump output changing means that can change the bump output of the protruding member is provided, for example, the expectation that an advantageous gaming state in which the player becomes a game due to `` big hit '', `` small hit '', etc. occurs, The player can be made to suggest by the projecting output of the projecting member. In detail, when the projecting force is strong, the expectation is high, and when the projecting output is weak, the expectation is low, and when the player brings a finger or the like close to or in contact with the projecting member, the projecting member When it comes into contact, it can have a strong impact on the player, so it can make the player strongly think that there is something good (the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state), and expect the game It can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the projecting output changing means capable of changing the projecting output of the projecting member is provided, for example, when projecting with a weak force, it becomes difficult for the player to notice the projecting of the projecting member, and the projecting member is untimely. It is possible to surprise the player by protruding, and to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  As a concrete relationship between the detection of the approach or contact of the player to the protruding member by the detecting means and the protrusion of the protruding member by the advancing and retracting means, the player's finger or the like has approached within the protruding range of the protruding member. If the projecting member is detected by the proximity detection means and the projecting member is projected, the projecting member can come into contact with the player's finger or the like to give an impact, and the player can be surprised by the contact of the projecting member. Alternatively, when the detection means detects that the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the protruding member, and the protruding member is protruded, the player's fingers or the like are pushed up by the protruding member. Can surprise you. Further, when the detecting means detects that the player's finger or the like has approached within a predetermined distance from the protruding member outside the movement range of the protruding member, and the protruding member is protruded, the protrusion of the protruding member causes The generated wind pressure can be applied to the player's fingers and the like, and the player can be surprised.

  And, as described above, when projecting the projecting member, the projecting member can be projected with various projecting outputs by the projecting output changing unit, so that the detection range by the detecting unit and the projecting output by the projecting output changing unit are By appropriately combining, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and suggesting the degree of expectation such as the arrival of a chance due to the difference in the protruding output of the protruding member It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Note that it is desirable to change the sudden output according to the gaming state by the sudden output changing means. Thereby, since the projecting output of the projecting member is changed according to the gaming state, when the player makes a finger or the like approach or contact the projecting member, when the projecting member comes into contact with a strong force, the player Given the strong impact on the game, it can be made to strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). Can be suppressed.

  Further, the protruding member may be pressed by the player. Thereby, since the protruding member is configured to be capable of pressing operation (pressing operation unit), when the player participation type effect is executed, by causing the player to press the protruding member, the player participation type A player can participate in the production, and the depressing of the projecting member can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Also, if the protruding member can be pressed, a player participation type effect that presses the protruding member for a player who places a finger or the like on the protruding member so that the protruding member can be operated at any time. When the player is executed, the projecting member is projected by the advancing / retreating means, so that the player can start performing the player participation type production without having to guide the player participation type production using the production image or sound. Can be recognized, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the projecting member can be enhanced to further enhance the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, the advancing / retreating means may have a projecting spring that urges the projecting member toward the player, and the urging force of the projecting spring can be changed by the projecting output changing means. As a result, the projecting member is projected by the biasing force of the projecting spring in the advancing and retracting means, so that the projecting member can be easily and vigorously projected as compared with the case where the projecting member is projected using the drive motor. It is possible to make it easier to achieve the effects described above.

  Further, when the projecting member is caused to project by the biasing force of the projecting spring, the projecting output of the projecting member can be easily changed by changing the biasing force of the projecting spring in the projecting output changing means. It is possible to easily implement a gaming machine that exhibits the above effects.

  The projecting output changing means may have a spring holding member that holds one end of the projecting spring and is movable in the advancing and retracting direction of the projecting member. As a result, when the spring holding member of the projecting output changing means is moved in the direction of the other end of the projecting spring, the projecting spring is strongly compressed and the biasing force can be increased. If it moves to the direction away from an edge part side, compression of a protrusion spring will become weak and energizing force can be made small. Therefore, by moving the spring holding member, the projecting output of the projecting member can be changed, and a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, it is desirable that the detection means detects the approach or contact of the player by detecting the capacitance. As a result, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the projecting member provided so as to be able to advance and retreat, the capacitance of the part changes, so that the player can approach by detecting the capacitance from the detection means. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can detect contact and can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, when detecting the approach or contact of the player to the protruding member by detecting the electrostatic capacity by the detecting means, the electrostatic capacity varies depending on the distance between the protruding member and the player. It is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance threshold values and allow the protruding member to protrude with a different output for each threshold value. Accordingly, since the detection means can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the projecting member in multiple stages, it can be projected with a projecting output corresponding to each stage. As a result, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the projecting output changing means, when the series of effects for projecting the projecting member is completed, the projecting output is set to the weakest state. In other words, in a state where the projecting member is not projected (normal state), the projecting output is set to the weakest state, and when the effect of projecting the projecting member is executed, the projecting output is increased by the projecting output changing means. When finished, the sudden output is returned to the normal weakest state. As a result, when using a device in which the projecting force always acts on the projecting member as the advancing / retreating means, when the projecting power is kept standing in a state where the projecting output is strong, the member on which the projecting output is acting becomes early due to the strong projecting output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the member deteriorates and the protruding member cannot be protruded due to deterioration.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
“The sudden output change means
The impact output is changed according to the game state ".

  Here, “according to the gaming state” means that “a reception port (for example, a general winning port, a starting port, a big winning port, an accessory winning port) arranged in a game area into which a game medium is to be placed by a player. , “According to the acceptance of game media into the V prize opening, etc.” ”,“ According to the fact that the game media circulating in the game area has passed a specific area (eg, gate, warp passage, stage, etc.) ” "According to the result of a special lottery drawn by receiving a game medium at a reception port (for example, a start port) arranged in the game area", "A reception port (for example, a start port) arranged in the game area ) Depending on the type of production (for example, reach production, jackpot production, lost production, etc.) to suggest a special lottery result drawn by accepting game media to) As an opportunity, each has multiple designs `` According to the rotation of a plurality of spinning bodies '', `` When a game medium is inserted, a plurality of spinning bodies each provided with a plurality of designs are rotated and then stopped sequentially, and the combination of the stopped spinning bodies is combined. "Depending on", "according to the amount of game medium to be driven into the game area", "according to the length of the blank of game medium driven into the game area", and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the impact output is changed according to the game state by the impact output changing means.

  Thereby, since the projecting output of the projecting member is changed according to the gaming state, when the player makes a finger or the like approach or contact the projecting member, when the projecting member comes into contact with a strong force, the player Given the strong impact on the game, it can be made to strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). Can be suppressed.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
"The protruding member is
It is characterized in that the player can perform a pressing operation.

  Here, as the “protruding member”, “thing that can be pressed regardless of the presence or absence of protrusion”, “thing that can be pressed when protruding”, “thing that can be pressed when not protruding”, Etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the player can press the protruding member.

  Thereby, since the protruding member is configured to be capable of pressing operation (pressing operation unit), when the player participation type effect is executed, by causing the player to press the protruding member, the player participation type A player can participate in the production, and the depressing of the projecting member can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the projecting member can be pressed, a player participation type effect in which the projecting member is operated by pressing the projecting member for a player who places a finger or the like on the projecting member so that the projecting member can be operated at any time. When the player is executed, the projecting member is projected by the advancing / retreating means, so that the player can start performing the player participation type production without having to guide the player participation type production using the production image or sound. Can be recognized, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the projecting member can be enhanced to further enhance the player participation type effect.

  When the player presses the projecting member, it is desirable that the projecting output of the projecting member is set to the weakest state by the projecting output changing means. Thereby, the protruding member can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation can be improved. Further, when the player presses the projecting member, various sudden output states may be set by the sudden output changing means according to the game state. This allows the player to push the protruding member strongly or weakly, so that the operation force of the pressing operation of the protruding member can be part of the production, and the pressing operation of the protruding member can be enjoyed Can do.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“Advance and retreat means
A projecting spring that biases the projecting member toward the player;
The sudden output changing means is
The urging force of the projecting spring can be changed ".

  Here, examples of the “protruding spring” include “coil spring”, “torsion spring”, “plate spring”, and the like.

  The “projection output changing means” that can change the urging force of the projecting spring includes “one that can move one end of the projecting spring (coil spring) in the advancing and retracting direction of the projecting member”, “projecting spring (coil spring, Torsion springs that can change the torsion of the torsion spring ”and“ the one that can move one end of the projecting spring (plate spring) in a direction perpendicular to the advancing and retreating direction of the projecting member ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the advancing / retreating means has a projecting spring that urges the projecting member toward the player side, and the urging force of the projecting spring can be changed by the projecting output changing means. .

  As a result, the projecting member is projected by the biasing force of the projecting spring in the advancing and retracting means, so that the projecting member can be easily and vigorously projected as compared with the case where the projecting member is projected using the drive motor. It is possible to make it easier to achieve the effects described above.

  Further, since the projecting member is projected by the biasing force of the projecting spring, the projecting output of the projecting member can be easily changed by changing the biasing force of the projecting spring in the projecting output changing means. It is possible to easily implement a gaming machine that achieves the above-described effects.

  When the series of effects for projecting the projecting member is completed in the projecting output changing means, it is desirable to set the projecting output to the weakest state. Thereby, in the advancing / retreating means, since the urging force (projection output) of the projecting spring always acts on the projecting member or the like, if the projecting force is kept strong until the next effect is started, The site (member) on which the projecting force acts is likely to fatigue early due to the strong projecting force, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the member deteriorates and the projecting member cannot be projected.

Means 5: In the constitution of means 4,
“The sudden output change means
It has a spring holding member that holds one end of the protruding spring and is movable in the advancing / retreating direction of the protruding member ”.

  Here, the “spring holding member” may hold the end portion side of the protruding spring far from the protruding member, or may hold the end portion side of the protruding spring close to the protruding member.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the projecting output changing means has a spring holding member that holds one end of the projecting spring and is movable in the advancing and retracting direction of the projecting member.

  As a result, when the spring holding member of the projecting output changing means is moved in the direction of the other end of the projecting spring, the projecting spring is strongly compressed and the biasing force can be increased. If it moves to the direction away from an edge part side, compression of a protrusion spring will become weak and energizing force can be made small. Therefore, by moving the spring holding member, the projecting output of the projecting member can be changed, and a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
"The detection means is
It is characterized in that it detects the approach or contact of the player by detecting the capacitance.

  Here, as the “detection means”, “the detection body for detecting the capacitance and the detection body for detecting the capacitance of the detection body are provided separately. "Detecting the approach or contact of the player", "Detecting the approach or contact of the player by the capacitance of the detection body itself", "Detecting the approach or contact of the player by the capacitance of the protruding member" Thing ", etc. are mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the detection means detects the approach or contact of the player by detecting the capacitance.

  As a result, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the projecting member provided so as to be able to advance and retreat, the capacitance of the part changes, so that the player can approach by detecting the capacitance from the detection means. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can detect contact and can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, by detecting the electrostatic capacity by the detecting means, the approach or contact of the player to the protruding member is detected, and the electrostatic capacity varies depending on the distance between the protruding member and the player. It is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance threshold values and allow the protruding member to protrude with a different output for each threshold value. Accordingly, since the detection means can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the projecting member in multiple stages, it can be projected with a projecting output corresponding to each stage. As a result, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
“Protruding members that are provided so as to be able to advance and retreat, and can be pressed by the player,
Detecting means capable of detecting the approach or contact of the player to the protruding member by detecting capacitance;
The advancing / retreating means having a projecting spring that is capable of projecting the projecting member to the player side by detection of the sensing means and biasing the projecting member to the player side;
It has a spring holding member that holds one end of the protruding spring in the advancing / retreating means and is movable in the advancing / retreating direction of the protruding member, and the protruding by moving the spring holding member according to the gaming state And a projecting output changing means capable of changing a projecting output of the projecting member by the advance / retreat means by changing a biasing force of a spring ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat, and the player can press and operate, and the approach or contact of the player to the protruding member can be detected by detecting the capacitance. A detecting means, a projecting member capable of projecting to the player side by detection of the detecting means, and a projecting spring for biasing the projecting member to the player side, and a protrusion in the advancing / retreating means It has a spring holding member that holds one end of the spring and can move in the forward and backward direction of the protruding member, and by moving the spring holding member according to the game state, the biasing force of the protruding spring is changed to advance and retract Projecting output changing means capable of changing the projecting output of the projecting member by the means.

  As a result, the electrostatic capacity of the projecting member changes due to the player approaching or coming into contact with the projecting member provided so as to be able to advance and retreat. The player's approach or contact can be detected. When the approach or contact of the player to the projecting member is detected by the detection means, the projecting member projects by the biasing force of the projecting spring of the advance / retreat means, so that the player projects without contacting the advance / retreat member. When the member protrudes, the player abuts (collises) the player, and when the protruding member protrudes while the player is in contact with the advancing / retreating member, the player is presented with a physical force effect that pushes the player. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player due to an effect that the conventional gaming machine does not have, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly to the protruding member, and to the player of the protruding member Protrusion can be noticed reliably.

  When projecting the projecting member, if the spring holding member of the projecting output changing means is moved in the direction of the other end of the projecting spring, the projecting spring is more compressed and the biasing force can be increased. When the projection spring is moved away from the other end, the compression of the projection spring becomes weak and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the spring holding member to an appropriate position, The biasing force of the protruding member can be changed. In this way, the projecting member can be projected with various projecting outputs, so it is possible to increase variations in performance by physical force, to make the player hard to get tired, and to produce the projecting member. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the projecting force of the projecting member is changed according to the game state, if the projecting member comes into contact with a strong force when the player approaches or contacts a finger or the like, Given a strong impact, it can be made to strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage) The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the protruding member is a member that can be pressed (a pressing operation unit), when the player participation type effect is executed, the player can press the protruding member to perform the player participation type effect. A player can be allowed to participate, and a pressing operation of the protruding member can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the projecting member can be pressed, a player participation type effect in which the projecting member is operated by pressing the projecting member for a player who places a finger or the like on the projecting member so that the projecting member can be operated at any time. When the player is executed, the projecting member is projected by the advancing / retreating means, so that the player can start performing the player participation type production without having to guide the player participation type production using the production image or sound. Can be recognized, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the projecting member can be enhanced to further enhance the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, since the projecting member is projected by the biasing force of the projecting spring in the advancing / retreating means, the projecting member is easily and vigorously projected as compared with the case where the projecting member is projected using the drive motor. It is possible to make it easier to achieve the effects described above.

  Further, by detecting the electrostatic capacity by the detecting means, the approach or contact of the player to the protruding member is detected, and the electrostatic capacity varies depending on the distance between the protruding member and the player. It is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance threshold values and allow the protruding member to protrude with a different output for each threshold value. Accordingly, since the detection means can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the projecting member in multiple stages, it can be projected with a projecting output corresponding to each stage. As a result, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 7,
The gaming machine is
A game area into which a game medium is to be driven by a player's operation;
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media into the receiving port.

  Here, the “reception entrance” includes “a general prize opening that is always open in the game area”, “an open game opening that is always open in the game area, and an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by receiving game media "A start prize opening where a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate" (start opening), "by receiving a game medium in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, in the game area, "Variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus prize opening, etc.) that can be accepted" "," Normal lottery that is drawn by passing game media through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be assigned to a variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus game prize prize opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted, or a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery, the game medium can be accepted, and a variable lottery in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not an advantageous gaming state that would be advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium is generated. Mouth (variable starting port) ”,“ V winning port that generates an advantageous gaming state where the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed and received by the distributing means ”,“ Game As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are, for example, a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern and can receive gaming media.

  In addition, the “pachinko machine” includes “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the start port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. The special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the stop symbol, and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result display means has an advantageous gaming state. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), Distribution means for distributing game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V prize opening, the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called honey machine) "," a game medium having a big prize opening and an accessory prize opening, When the special winning lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern according to the result of the special lottery, and the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed to the V winning award, the prize winning port Or, a device having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multi-function machine).

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the gaming machine is a gaming area into which a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of gaming machines that are arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving the gaming medium, and a game to the receiving hall This is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to receiving of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  It is desirable that the effect of projecting the projecting member by detecting the approach or contact of the player to the projecting member is executed when the game medium that has been driven into the game area is received in the receiving port. As a result, when the game medium is received at the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the effect that the protruding member protrudes is detected by detecting the approach or contact of the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue to play the game medium aimed at the entrance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when a special lottery is generated to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the starting port, and the result of the lottery is indicated to the player, the result is presented to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the protruding member may be protruded by detecting the approach or contact of the player. As a result, since the projecting member projects, it is possible to entertain the player with a strong impact due to the above-described effects, so that the player has an advantage of the special lottery result that is drawn for the player. It can be assumed that the advantageous gaming state becomes (for example, “big hit”), and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be enhanced, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since the player can be presented with a more highly effective effect by projecting the projecting member, an effect (for example, reach) for suggesting the player with the lottery result of the special lottery. It can be suitably used for production), and it can entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 9: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 7,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of swirl bodies each having a plurality of designs,
A start operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of revolving bodies by a player operating after inserting a game medium;
A plurality of stop operation portions for stopping rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that have been rotated and stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation portions. It is characterized by being.

  Here, “slot machine” means “the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols depending on the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, An internal lottery is executed at the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of stop symbols and the lottery result of internal lottery is given. ”And the like. The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ", etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine is operated by a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of designs, and a start operation unit that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by the player operating after the game medium is inserted. And a plurality of stop operation parts for stopping rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating parts. A slot machine including a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  The effect of projecting the projecting member by detecting the approach or contact of the player to the projecting member is that the combination of the symbols that have stopped rotating except for one on the active line satisfies the combination of the winning role symbols. As one of the effects presented to the player during the game (so-called reach), the protruding member may be protruded by detecting the approach or contact of the player. Thereby, the protrusion of the protruding member can attract the player's interest strongly, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the protruding member may be protruded by detecting the approach or contact of the player, so that the protruding member protrudes and has a strong impact on the player. Therefore, when the game is stopped with a specific symbol combination, it can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “BB”) that the player has an advantage is generated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the occurrence and suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, it is possible to present the player with a more highly effective effect by projecting the protruding member by detecting the approach or contact of the player. It can be used suitably for the performance to do, and it can entertain a player and can suppress the fall of interest.

Means 10: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 7,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, a “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused together is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. Is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the change in the symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out in accordance with the combination of the stop symbols, or a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, , An advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the effect of either of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  The effect of projecting the projecting member by detecting the approach or contact of the player to the projecting member is that the combination of the symbols that have stopped rotating except for one on the active line satisfies the combination of the winning role symbols. As one of the effects presented to the player during so-called reach (so-called reach), the protruding member may be protruded by detecting the approach or contact of the player, and the lottery result of the internal lottery is At the time of winning combination, the protruding member may be protruded by detecting the approach or contact of the player, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

  Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the effects produced by the protrusion of the protruding member and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of an outer frame, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back front, (c) is the cylinder in the conventional pachinko machine It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the back. is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the handle unit and handle cover unit in a door frame, (b) is an enlarged perspective view which shows the part of the handle unit and handle cover unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle | steering-wheel cover unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle | steering-wheel cover unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line | wire in Fig.41 (a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the AA line in FIG. 1. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. (A) is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects horizontally in the part of a lower tray ball supply port in a door frame, and shows a principal part, (b) cut | disconnects the same part as (a) in the conventional door frame. FIG. It is a top view which expands and shows the site | part of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of a door frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front in the state where the production operation button was turned up, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of (a) from the back. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the top and disassembled for each main member. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the front lower side after disassembling each main member. (A) is a sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the position of the moving end upward, and (b) is the effect operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the production operation unit of the state which moved to the raise position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is in the position of the moving end downward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of an effect operation part outer periphery decoration board | substrate, an external decoration board outside a button, and an decoration board in a button in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of the production operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the production operation unit of the production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which connected the some contact detection body to the one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is a contact detection sensor main body and a some contact detection body in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part in the middle, (c) is the stage operation unit which can move back and forth the dish left decoration unit, dish right decoration unit, stage operation unit, etc. of a dish unit in the front-back direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body in the front side and rear side, such as. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the contact detection body which has the decorativeness, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows typically another embodiment of an effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the Wu line in Fig.62 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the air line in Fig.66 (a). FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O in FIG. (A) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame showing the two-color molded outer layer in the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a transparent outer layer while leaving the inner layer in (a). It is a right view of the door frame right side unit shown in the state made into. It is a front view which shows each decoration board | substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board | substrate of the site | part of the production | presentation operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decoration board provided in the circumference | surroundings of the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 100 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the site | part of a tank rail seeing the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail of another embodiment from back. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the front, and (c) is ( It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail of a) from the back. 107A is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107B is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the tank rail etc. which were cut | disconnected by the car line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 108 is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. (A) is the front view of the board | substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of (a) from the front right, (c) is the board | substrate unit of (a) from the front left. FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of Fig.111 (a) from upper right back, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board unit of Fig.111 (a) from lower right back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit of Fig.111 (a) and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit of Fig.111 (a) and was seen from back. (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the key line in Fig.111 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the hawk line in (a), (c) is in (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the cake line. It is a bottom view which shows the site | part of the rear side rather than a door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the board | substrate unit of Fig.111 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guidance piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball path. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which made the out sensor removable, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the out sensor in (a). It is a front view of the game board which made the center role etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 119 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 119 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the routing of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. It is a front view of the game board of the state which made the center role etc. transparent. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board showing a game area in which a game ball circulates by cutting a front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel and an obstacle nail. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the start opening unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and attacker unit in a front unit from the front, (b) is the start opening unit, side unit, side upper left unit in the front unit, and It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center combination in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center combination in a front unit from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a center accessory and the opening part of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a center accessory, a game panel, and the back left decoration body of a back unit, (b) is a front view of (a). (A) is a top view of the 3rd distribution apparatus in a center character, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd distribution apparatus in a center character from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd sorter | distribution apparatus of the center accessory and was seen from the upper front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center distribution apparatus 3rd sorting apparatus and was seen from the lower front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the 3rd sorting apparatus in a center character. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the projection part provided in the 2nd V winning opening and the 3rd loser opening in the 3rd sorter | distribution apparatus of a center character, (b) is the 2nd V winning opening and the 1st It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the game ball when the projection part is not provided in the three lose mouth. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the right game ball in a table | surface unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which distribute | circulates the 1st guide path in a guide passage group, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which distribute | circulates the 2nd guide path in a guide passage group. is there. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball received in the prize winning opening, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part of the 3rd sorting apparatus in (a) from a plane, (c) These are explanatory drawings which show the site | part of the 2nd distribution apparatus in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of operation | movement of the prize winning opening according to the kind of "small hit", a 1st distribution apparatus, and a 2nd distribution apparatus. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in an attacker unit, and is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in (a). (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment of the guide passage group different from FIG. (E) And (f) is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment of a further different guide channel group. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the light-guide plate production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the light-guide plate production unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light-guide plate and the pattern board | substrate in a light-guide plate effect unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which light-emitted the 1st pattern of the light-guide plate, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which light-emitted the 2nd pattern of the light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of each decoration board | substrate of the back front effect unit in a back unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back right decoration board | substrate of a back front direction production unit in a back unit, a sub-state indicator, and the site | part on the right side of a center role by a left side cross section, (b) is (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back right decoration board | substrate of a back front effect unit in a back unit, a sub-state indicator, and the site | part on the right side of a center accessory from the front. It is a wiring diagram which shows the wiring of some LED of the LED for sub states in a back right decoration board | substrate. (A) is a front view of the out sphere detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out sphere detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out sphere detection unit, and (d) is a back view. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit as viewed from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit as viewed from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit and the right front lower position. It is a figure and (g) is the perspective view which looked at the out ball detection unit from the lower right back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the out ball | bowl detection unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the out sphere detection unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a game panel and an out ball | bowl detection unit, (b) is a perspective view which shows the state which made the out ball | bowl detection unit contact | abut on a game panel. It is the expanded sectional view seen from the right side by assembling to the game board, cutting up and down at the center of the out port right sensor. It is a perspective view which shows the vicinity of an out mouth from the front in the state assembled to the game board. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state which made the 2nd pattern light-emit on the light guide plate of the light guide plate production | presentation unit of a back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate rendering unit of the back unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the connection structure of each board | substrate, a motor, etc. in a game board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. 168 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 168. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 175 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 174. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 175; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electrically-powered object control processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit | judging determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for the lottery process for the big hit, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process for the big hit type, and (C) is the type of the big hit It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process about. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and a normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hits start process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hitting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is an example of an aspect of error notification. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a table which shows the winning probability etc. according to the setting value of a gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing shown about the procedure which changes a setting value. It is a fluctuation pattern table used for determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a right detection sensor is provided in a 1st guide path. It is a specific example of the effect at the time of execution of the warning effect using the right detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which a detection sensor is provided in a 1st guide path and a 2nd guide path. It is a specific production example when executing a warning production using the right detection sensor and the left detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a ball clogging elimination hole is provided in a 1st guide path and a 2nd guide path. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a ball clogging elimination hole is provided in a 1st guide path and a 2nd guide path. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which a 2nd out port is provided in the entrance vicinity of a 1st guide path and a 2nd guide path. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which a 2nd out port is provided in the exit vicinity of the inside of a 1st guide path. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the calculation when abnormality occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the calculation when abnormality occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment in which a 2nd out port and a 3rd out port are provided separately from an out port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of a calculation in case the 2nd out port and the 3rd out port are provided separately from the out port. It is the light emission color pattern table in which the light emission color pattern of the light-guide plate was set. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a some decoration body is provided around the display area of an effect display apparatus. It is a concrete example of a production | presentation with the light-guide plate and the some decoration body at the time of execution of light emission production | presentation. It is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. It is the specific example of an effect in a light guide plate and an effect display device at the time of execution of imitation effect. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the setting information determination process performed by main control MPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a setting value holding | maintenance production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image data which combined the display aspect of the hold notice effect, and the display aspect of the setting value hold suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a setting value continuous suggestion effect. It is a table which shows the winning probability etc. according to the setting value of a gaming machine. It is a table which shows the winning probability etc. according to the setting value of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of the cheating during the setting change of a setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of cheating when the cheating is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity in case fraudulent activity is partially monitored during the setting value confirmation display. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of a fraud when the fraud is partially monitored during the setting value setting change. It is a front view of the game board of a modification. It is an example of the table used by a lottery process. It is a modification of setting value suggestion production.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 195 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout control board 63 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 provided with a power switch 630a capable of powering on the pachinko machine 1. Between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, the board unit 620, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. A locking unit 650 for locking.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a rear panel of the game panel 1100 Peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) arranged and a predetermined effect image arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view A performance display device 1600 capable of displaying includes a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game balls B A general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 for giving (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  The player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, the player can enjoy the operation of driving the handle 195.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the light guide plate effect unit 3100, in front of the game area 5a. A player can be entertained by performing a light emission effect by the effect unit 3200 or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a square frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short in the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the lateral fixing portion 23b, the flat lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b, and the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b And a flat plate-like contact portion 23d extending short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is placed between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 has a strip shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46 b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 communicates the interior (curtain plate internal space 40a) of the curtain plate front member 42 with the outside through a gap between the blade portions 46b.

  The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46 b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. Thus, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking between the connection tube portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

  According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the handle cover unit 290 that is obliquely upward and forward is caused by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b to cause the air vibration released from the curtain inner space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622. Can be directed through the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 into the front cylinder 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated. As a result, when the player pushes his / her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (game ball B driving device), the main body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending the wind into the front tube portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

  Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, a part of the sound pressure discharged from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is discharged forward. Therefore, it is also released from the port member 47 to a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players who are traveling in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's interest by the effect sound and has high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a production sound with a deeper bass, and to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like upright portion 60b rising upward from a rear side portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a from the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 195 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door, a handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200 The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and the tray unit The door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, and the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrilateral (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 attached in the vicinity of the right end in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the rear face of the door frame main relay board 104 The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, the rear handle relay board 106 attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a post-handle relay board cover 108 that covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable that covers the wiring cable It includes a cover 109, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player. The handle unit 180 operates the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, thereby launching the game ball B in the upper plate 201. This is for playing a game that is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the device 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the door frame can be hinge-rotated, closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and is attached to the main body frame 4. The game area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from the back. .

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42 and the like) inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a in the front-rear direction, and a left side in front view of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. And a ball feeding opening 101e for allowing the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower dish facing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to the front. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And a part of (see FIG. 83) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decoration board 422 and a door frame left side lower decoration board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The relay is for relaying the connection, and the remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, so that part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 (parts extending upside down in an inverted L shape). The rear side is covered. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end position from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is configured such that the door frame 3 can be rotated with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the front, and (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock from the front, (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. FIG. FIG. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows the state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, (c) is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degree | times to the clockwise direction from the state of (a).

  The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening and closing locking with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular key inserted in the key hole 132 provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with a first cam member 134 that rotates together with a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. The second cam member 135 is attached to the lower part of the cylinder body 131 so as to be rotatable about the longitudinal axis, and the upper end of the second cam member 135 is rotated to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 in the form of a band plate that is attached so as to be rotatable at the lower end side of the second cam member 135 at the right side of the center of rotation, and the upper end side is rotated at the first cam member 134. It is rotatably mounted at a position below the center and the lower end side can be rotated at a position below the rotation center of the second cam member 135. A second arm 137 strip-shaped mounted, and a.

  Further, the cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). 115, a rear cover 138 attached to 115, and the upper and lower ends of each of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139.

  The first cam member 134 has an upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and an upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder attachment frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder attachment frame 115 so as to be integrally rotatable. The second cam member 135 has a lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and a lower end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

  In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the part to which the first arm 136 is attached and the part to which the second arm 137 are attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axes. is doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the part to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than the part to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

  The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a projecting in a cylindrical shape outward from the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces and is locked to an L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the upper end side is not shown. Thus, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is detachably mounted.

  In this cylinder lock 130, a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137 are formed of metal. .

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430.

  Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. Yes. The cylinder lock 130 </ b> A is provided with a rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

  Subsequently, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 is provided with a rotation transmission member 133 on the axial center of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B and the like, a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

  In the normal state, the cylinder lock 130 has upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 at the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively, as shown in FIG. The upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower part of the respective rotation centers in the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated at an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state to the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by a regular key.

  In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder main body 131 by the key inserted into the key hole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 will rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise. On the other hand, the second arm 137 has the upper end attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second arm 137 has the second cam member 135 counteracted. The force to rotate in the clockwise direction hardly acts.

  Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. The rotation transmitting member 133 is rotated together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by the rotation of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is a portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134, and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction between the center of rotation 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 decreases, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 acts. The power to do is increased.

  Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting on the second arm 137 upward is greater than the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly through the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees counterclockwise (see FIG. 36B).

  When the key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state and returned to the normal state by rotating 90 degrees clockwise, the reverse action is performed. Will work.

  On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the upper side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached at the upper end below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 tries to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, the second arm 137 has the upper end attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second arm 137 rotates the second cam member 135 clockwise. Almost no force acts to rotate in the direction of.

  Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. The rotation transmission member 133 is rotated together with the second cam member 135. The force for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is a portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. And the distance in the left-right direction between the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases in the first arm 136, whereas the second cam member 134 decreases in the second direction. In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 is increased.

  Therefore, when the first cam member 134 has a rotation angle in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeding 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 rather than the first arm 136. Thus, the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly through the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 36C).

  When the key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to return to the normal state by rotating 90 degrees clockwise, the operation is reversed. Will be.

  Thus, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 that are attached with the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 being phased at an angle of 90 degrees with each other. Are connected to transmit the rotation, so that at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 regardless of the rotation position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the key hole 132). Thus, the rotation can be transmitted to rotate the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked satisfactorily.

  Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation transmission member 133 (with respect to the axis of the cylinder body 131 is transmitted by transmitting the rotation by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism. Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder main body 131 (key hole 132) can be provided in a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high decorative property of the door frame 3 can be provided.

  Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted, and the pachinko machine 1 An increase in cost can be suppressed.

  By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, an unauthorized person who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131. Rotating the rotation transmitting member 133 with the tool illegally may open the door frame 3 and perform an illegal act. On the other hand, the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment has the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, so that a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if the rotation transmission member 133 is to be rotated, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist in the part, and the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like are opened. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 that are separated from each other at a rotation angle of 90 degrees. A portion where one arm 136 or second arm 137 is attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other side of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It becomes a state. Accordingly, one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is positioned at the dead point of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, so that the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. There is no great resistance to rotation, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated, unlocking and locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole is forcibly rotated. It is possible to prevent the key from being broken and to prevent the key from being damaged.

  Further, since the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason. Thus, even if one arm is broken, rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

  Further, the rotation of the key inserted into the key hole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (band plate-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, there is a possibility that the gear is rotated and the rotation transmitting member 133 is rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the gear teeth. Since the arms 136 and the second arm 137 have rod shapes with smooth surfaces, it is possible to make it difficult for the tool tip to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are moved. The rotation transmitting member 133 can be prevented from rotating, and the locking unit 650 is illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It can be reliably prevented from being provided.

  In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, a mechanism using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 is shown. For example, the rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, the rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, the rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, and the rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , Etc.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the ball supply unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 38B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 166) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 222 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b, and the operation transmission unit 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball exit 141b. The partition is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by a spring, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operating rod 143c, and the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is separated by the partition portion 143a. It can be prevented from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud preventing member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right, and has an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center at a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece 148b, and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the distal end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed by operating the laced string to cause an illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port 2002, etc., the illegal game ball B launched (hit) by the ball launcher 540 A string attached to the illegal game ball B by momentum is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39A is a perspective view of the door cover base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. A full sphere receiver that opens to the rear on the lower right side of the front passage of the through ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a and that can communicate with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 540 of the main body frame 4. A game ball B that receives the game ball B (foul ball) and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full ball reception port 150b and the foul ball reception port 150c. And a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear side and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) and The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 96).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and a left-right separated space. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 41A is an enlarged front view showing parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41B is an enlarged perspective view showing parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

  The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the dish unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and the player operates the game ball B in the upper dish 201 by operating it. The game board 5 can be driven into the game area 5a.

  First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 has a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 described later, and is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181. A handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 to be described later, and a disk-like shape attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195 Cover base 183, handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and handle attached to cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of handle decoration board 184 Front lens 185 , And a.

  In addition, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so that the handle 195 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291 c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 to be described later. Accordingly, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d are respectively inserted into the three grooves 181c. Is inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

  The handle 195 includes a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality (three in this case) of spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes An annular outer ring portion 195c that connects the tips of the portions 195b, and two that extend in an arc shape around the rotation shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrate the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction A slit 195d, and a locking projection 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and that locks the other end of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the handle outer peripheral surface of a conventional pachinko machine.

  The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and centered around one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally from the central hub portion 195a in a state where the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from the portions of 120 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. The three spoke portions 195b extend to such a length that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c.

  The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped rounded side facing forward.

  The handle 195 is formed so as to be transparent as a whole, and is provided with a plating portion that is partially electrically continuous from the central hub portion 195a to the outer ring portion 195c. As a result, even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is rotated.

  The handle guide 196 includes a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. Yes. The three handle guides 196 are attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291 described later into the guide portion 196a.

  The cover base 183 is formed in a disk shape having a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover base 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  There are a total of 10 handle decoration substrates 184, one at the center, three spaced apart on the middle circumference in the circumferential direction, and six spaced apart along the outer circumference in the circumferential direction. The LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric shape. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one at the center, three in the middle, two at the upper left of the outer periphery, two at the upper right of the outer periphery, and two at the lower side of the outer periphery. (See FIG. 72). On the handle decoration board 184, a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted. The LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 15 systems of 3 systems per group so that 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups can each emit light in full color. I am doing so.

  Although not shown in the figure, the handle decoration board 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. Are connected to one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. . When the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. Ten LEDs 184a can emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  As described above, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the LED 184a having a larger number of light emission than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected is individually (here, set). Therefore, the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration related to the electric wiring can be simplified.

  The front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The front lens 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The front lens 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength according to the angle.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 195, the static electricity acting on the player is detected, and the player touches the handle 195. To detect. If the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven.

  Therefore, even if the player does not touch the handle 195 and tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 195 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  The single button operation sensor 194 detects a pressing operation of the single button 193 by the player. When the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, the driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped by the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the player presses the single button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the player can temporarily stop the game ball B without returning the rotary operation of the handle 195, and the single button By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength before operating the single button 193.

  Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery behind the handle 195 in the handle unit 180, and the handle cover base 291 attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 at the rear end, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner handle 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, an annular handle cover decoration board 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292, and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface; An annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 are provided.

  The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front tube portion 291a that extends back and forth with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and an inner diameter that decreases toward the front from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a. An inner wall portion 291b that extends through the inner wall portion, a cylindrical rear tube portion 291c that passes through the inner wall portion 291b and extends forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows insertion of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and an inner periphery of the rear tube portion 291c And a plurality of (three in this case) ridges 291d provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

  Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a rear side portion of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front tube portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. A cylindrical outer tube portion 291f protruding forward, a guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front tube portion 291a at a portion between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and the front tube And an opening 291h penetrating in the lower portion of the portion 291a.

  The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in a circular arc shape whose cross section swells outward from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 at the rear end. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 and are inserted into the groove portions 181c, so that the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to each other. The outer cylinder part 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange part 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

  The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer tube portion 291f to a position closer to the front tube portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in the circumferential direction with an interval of an angle of 10 degrees. Through the space between the guide pieces 291g, the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 is inserted rearward of the guide piece 291g, and the handle 195 is rotated, whereby a U-shaped guide portion. The guide piece 291g can be positioned in 196a to restrict the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

  The opening 291h has a length from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction and a size in the range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front tube portion 291a. .

  The inner 292 extends rearwardly from an annular base 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and an outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. The leg 292b has a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c that are notched from the rear end of the leg 292b to the vicinity of the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e with the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292 b extends in a curved shape that bulges outward, and the rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notch 292c is provided in each of the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b.

  The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. On the handle cover decorative board 293, 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light are mounted. The twelve LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are provided in a line at intervals in the circumferential direction. These twelve LEDs 293a are divided into six groups: two at the lower left from the center, two at the left, two at the upper left, two at the upper right, two at the right, and two at the lower right. (See FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls the total of 18 systems of 3 systems per group so that 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can each emit full color. I have to.

  Although not shown in the figure, the handle cover decorative board 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, commands from the peripheral control board 1510, and A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one control signal line for receiving a signal such as an address and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. Yes. When the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (production control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b is divided into six groups according to the command. Further, the 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. A cylindrical side plate portion 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends short rearward. The board cover 294 has a front plate portion 294 a located between the flange portion 291 e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and a side plate portion 294 b extending to the base portion 292 a of the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and a spindle base (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , Etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) cutout openings 295b cut out from the rear end toward the front are provided in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of notch openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the notches 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors with two types of resin, that is, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. A circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When forming the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, the handle 195 in the handle unit 180. The rear part is inserted, and the handle 195, the front handle lens 185, and the like are positioned in front of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is a handle mounting seating surface of the door frame base 101 with a portion of the handle cover unit 290 closing the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 interposed therebetween. 101b.

  The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a at the center supported by a handle base 181 so as to be rotatable. In addition, the handle 195 has an outer peripheral ring portion 195c outside the central hub portion 195a that is rotatably supported by a handle cover unit 290 by a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side thereof. The handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) on the rear end side of the guide portion 196a between the front tube portion 291a and the outer tube portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. And is supported rotatably in a state where movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) is restricted.

  The handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, and cause the LED 293 a of the handle cover decoration board 293 to emit light. Thus, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light emission, and the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that coincide with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover unit 290 has the handle cover base 291 on the left and right sides and the lower side. It can be seen that a hole communicating with the inside of the front tube portion 291a is opened. Thereby, the mental anxiety to thrust a hand (finger) into the inside of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub part 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring part 195c is relieved. Can do.

  Note that the upper notch opening 295 b (the upper notch 292 c of the inner 292) of the handle cover 295 is closed by the dish right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

  In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted passes through the opening portion 291h, and the lower side of each of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or game ball B enters the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the lower side The opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290.

  Further, when liquid or game ball B has entered the notch openings 295b on the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, it passes through the gap between the front cylindrical portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, and the lower side It can discharge | emit below from the notch opening part 295b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower notch 292c of the inner 292, and the lower notch 295b of the lower handle cover 295 are formed on the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The three-dimensional body 40 is provided on an extension line in the inclination direction of the blade portion 46 b of the grill member 46. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) discharged obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 through the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b. It can be made to enter the portion 291a. Accordingly, when the player pushes his / her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (game ball B driving device), the main frame speaker The player can be surprised by vibrating the 622 and sending the wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

  Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the body frame 4, the right notch opening 295b can be hooked and pulled, It can be used as a handle when opening.

  In addition, since the handle 195 has a plated portion up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and the game ball B can be touched only by touching the outer ring portion 195c. Can be typed.

  In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by placing a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 and grasping it. It is possible to fix the game ball B into the game area 5a with a certain strength even if the hand is not continuously twisted. As described above, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting a driving operation suitable for the player can be provided.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  Thus, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the left side is provided as an axis that can be opened and closed, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. In the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c are provided, so that a handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 that have never been seen before can be seen in Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to attract the player's interest, and to increase the player's willingness to play with the pachinko machine 1 The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by a player who is traveling in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  In addition, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When operating the handle 195 to drive the game ball 5 into the game area 5a, when the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine with respect to the operation of the handle 195, and to entertain and entertain the player by driving the game ball B with a new sense. Can be suppressed.

  Then, when the player operates the handle 195, if a production sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is caused by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air in the enclosure 624 is vibrated by the box 623, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is transmitted through the curtain inner space 40 a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 allows the sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 to be transmitted to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (in the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Stimulation by sound pressure can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , Can surprise the player, make it possible to foresee the arrival of a chance, change the operation amount of the steering wheel operation, can entertain the player, and make it difficult for the player to get bored It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover The inside of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, so that the stress on the player can be alleviated and the lowering of interest in the game can be suppressed. it can.

  Further, as described above, the handle 195 or the finger of the player who operates the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) discharged forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is transmitted to the grill member 46. Since the stimulation is given by being guided by the plurality of blade portions 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensors) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the vibration device is provided on the handle 195. 189, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism are not damaged. It is possible to make it difficult to break the 180, it can be avoided that uncomfortable feeling to the player by the breakage of the handle unit 180, a drop in interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, the handle 195 looks like a steering wheel of an automobile. Even if the appearance is greatly different, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine can be operated without hesitation of the player. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

  Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at portions facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 through which the player's fingers can be inserted through the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Therefore, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower side of the handle cover unit 290 is below the opening portion 291h and the lower notch opening portion 295b. Since it can be seen and a feeling of opening can be given to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290 can be reduced, and the player can The handle 195 can be operated without causing a heel.

  Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing the lower side on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the handle cover unit 290, the member 47 is discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, the liquid or the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h can be made difficult to enter the port member 47.

  Further, the handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 having the same diameter as the outer ring portion 195c has a plurality of front end diameters. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the center hub portion 195a can be operated by grasping with a hand like a handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated only with a finger, The steering wheel cover unit 195c can be operated like a steering wheel of an automobile, can be operated by placing a finger on the outer ring part 195c and the notch opening part 295b, or can be held across the outer ring part 195c. You can do operations like picking the inside and outside of the 290 with your fingers Can be various hammering operation of the gaming balls B (steering) provides pachinko machine 1 as possible. Accordingly, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the player's state, etc., and the player can be made less tired. It is possible to entertain the game ball B, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Also, the handle 195 can be gripped by placing a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b, or the finger can grip the inner side and the outer side of the handle cover unit 290 across the outer ring portion 195c. As a result, the operation position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, handle operations that cannot be achieved with conventional pachinko machines can also be performed, so a variety of handle operations can be provided to players. It is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by making the handle operation enjoyable.

  Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c in the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195 and can be attractive and attract the player's interest.

  Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and the handle cover unit 290 By suppressing the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward by the above, it is possible to avoid the game area 5a from becoming narrower and relatively enlarge the game area 5a, The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract the player's interest can be obtained.

  Furthermore, the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 is appropriately illuminated, so that the handle cover unit 290 (in the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 are illuminated. Therefore, even when the player operates the handle 195, the light emission decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are made conspicuous. The pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power that can strongly attract the player's interest can be provided.

  A handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided at a portion facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when the door frame 3 is opened and closed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a handle that makes the appearance of the door frame 3 worse, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

  The handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports a peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction, and The guide piece 291g is provided, and even when the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer ring portion 195c can be restricted by the guide piece 291g or the like. The spoke portion 195b that connects the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a is not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and accepts the operation of the handle 195 to hit the game ball B, only the spoke part 195b and the outer ring part 195c are used. Even if the handle 195 is operated in the touched state, the game ball B can be driven, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of various driving operations (handle operations) as described above can be obtained. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle operation using the tool from being performed and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper plate 201 and is supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is attached to the front and that protrudes forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) that is attached to the right of the mounting base, and a ball that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base A lending operation unit 220, a unit before removing the upper plate ball (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and a unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball attached behind the unit before removing the upper plate ball, It has.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252 at left and right sides, respectively. A dish-right decoration unit 275.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 that is accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular stage operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral substrate cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation unit base 315. A partial relay board unit 330.

  The production operation unit 300 can be projected upward from the production operation unit cover unit 310 and is attached to the production operation unit unit 350 provided with the production operation unit 301 and the operation unit base 315. A production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that supports the production unit unit 350 so as to be movable up and down, and a projecting output adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the projecting output of the production operation unit unit 350 by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Yes.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is bulged forward and opened upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion to the right in the front view, the front end retreats backward, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 73). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lowered on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 extends from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of the game ball B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper bowl feeding port.

  The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball B. It is possible to remove static electricity charged on the surface.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 48 and FIG. FIG. 50A is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the part of the lower tray ball supply port, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the principal part. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by a lower dish ball extraction lid 265 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned to the left of the front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the lower plate ball supply port 211 j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 is provided. On the other hand, a lower dish ball hole 202b of the lower dish 202 is provided in front of the central axis. And the lower tray ball supply port 211j is made into the cylinder shape extended straight ahead so that the game ball B discharge | released ahead from the ball discharge port 150d may go straight to the lower tray ball | bowl hole 202b. Accordingly, the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202b by movement of the shortest distance.

  By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower dish ball hole 202b by the lower dish ball supply port 211j, if the lower dish ball hole 202b is closed by the lower dish ball hole 265, Since the dishball hole 202b and the lower dishball supply port 211j are provided in the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish 202, the storage of the game balls B may concentrate in a region on the right side of the center in the lower dish 202. There is. Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right region in the lower plate 202 block the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are moved from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. Is not released, the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated, and it may be determined that the lower dish 202 is full even though there is still room in the left side area in the lower dish 202. There is.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50A, the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend obliquely to the left front. More specifically, at least one game ball B can circulate at a distance between the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the dish unit base 211 at a position directly behind the lower dish ball hole 202a. It is inclined diagonally to the left front so as to be a distance.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is located on the left side of the center axis (line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (sphere discharge port 150d) of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. Has been moved to.

  Accordingly, by moving the lower dish ball hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower dish 202 (the part of the lower dish ball hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower dish ball hole is opened. It is possible to reduce that the game balls B are concentrated and stored on the right side in the lower plate 202 in a state where the 202a is closed. Then, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (the front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the left side wall of the mouth 211c extends obliquely and forms a gap through which the game ball B can flow between the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B released from the unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c) to the lower dish ball supply port 211c side is guided and released to the left side in the lower dish 202 along the left side wall extending obliquely. The game ball B can be properly stored in the entire lower plate 202.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the full tank is informed even though there is a sufficient area where the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 are provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and an upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. A pre-pull unit (not shown), and a post-pull ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the pre-pull ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish unit base 211 is attached to the lower side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow with the rear open). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper dish ball feeding port (not shown) whose upper part extends vertically and is located at the right end of the upper dish main body 212.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved by the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222, the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper plate. After the ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guidance path 241b and the ball withdrawal guidance path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. The game balls B are supplied from the ball receiving port of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. Is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner of the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a part of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, or the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash and prepaid cards have been lent, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 which is arranged on the right side of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and has translucency; a ball lending button 224 which is arranged on the left side of the front part of the ball lending operation base 223; The return button 225 disposed on the right side of the front portion of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display portion 226 disposed below the rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 outside the base portion 221. A volume adjustment button 227 disposed in front and a light amount adjustment button 228 disposed on the left side of the volume adjustment button 227 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has a “ball” character on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-type LED, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display unit 226, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

  The volume control button 227 controls the volume of sound for production such as music, voice, sound effects, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjusting. The volume control button 227 is formed in a double circular gourd shape in which two circles are combined. The volume control button 227 has a “+” character in the center of one (upper) circle and a “−” character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. A pattern that sounds from the speaker is applied to the part. The volume adjustment button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The volume adjustment button 227 increases in volume when the “+” side is pressed, and decreases in volume when the “−” side is pressed.

  The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of the LED of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicyclic gourd shape in which two circles are combined. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has a character “+” at the center of one (upper) circle and a character “−” at the center of the other (lower) circle. The pattern of the light bulb is given to the part. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the “+” side is pressed, and dark when the “−” side is pressed.

  The volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 are different from each other (for example, the volume adjustment button 227 is white and the light amount adjustment button 228 is black), so that it is difficult for the player to make a mistake.

  By the way, when the volume and the light amount are adjusted using the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. In some cases, the display operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation unit 302 is operated. The volume and brightness of the light amount are changed, and it takes time (time) to adjust the volume and light amount. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be directly adjusted, and it is troublesome to adjust the volume and the light amount. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can be adjusted in a short time can be provided.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the top plate ball]
The unit before removing the upper dish ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. After the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear, and is attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. And a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. The upper tray ball removal slider 242, a spring (not shown) that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. ing.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and a ball receiving opening (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the receiving port downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a rear surface of the rear base 241 that is lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the game ball B from the position downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving opening is opened forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in a state assembled to the plate base unit 210. Formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Thus, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and an operation receiving portion (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface that is the rear side of the operation receiving portion from the rear. And an operation transmission portion 242b that protrudes. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  When the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving part penetrates the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed on the upper surface of the operation receiving part. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

  In the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball, the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper dish ball is removed via the operation receiving portion of the upper dish ball removing slider 242. The removal button 222 is positioned at the upward movement end. Further, since the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the both.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the ball pulling member 143 can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 so that the partition portion 143a and the ball inlet 141a Retreat from between the mouth 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper dish ball removal button 222 is lifted and is in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to return to the original state.

  In this way, the unit ball 240 after the upper plate ball is removed allows the game ball B in the upper plate 201 to be fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower plate 202 side. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 A left decoration unit 270 and a dish right decoration unit 275.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends to the left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Is provided with a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a have the dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 attached to the front surfaces thereof.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the plate unit main body 252 is provided between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction, and includes an effect operation unit attachment portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. . The effect operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 includes a lower dish ball removal button 263 and a lower dish ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower dish ball removal button 263.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 is coincident with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the dish unit body 252, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 closes the lower dish ball hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 moves and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B can be discharged below the dish unit 200.

  When the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is moved by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the lower dish ball removal cover 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open. Thus, the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower dish ball extraction hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball extraction button 263 that is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b is pressed backward and then released, the lower dish ball extraction cover 265 is released. Returns to the normal position, and the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish left decorative unit and Dish right decorative unit]
The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish left decoration unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish left decoration body 271 has a translucency, and the dish left decoration body 271 penetrates the dish left decoration body 271. A lens 272 and a dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being coincident with the front surface of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the dish left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  The dish left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. The dish left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish left decorative body 271. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish left decorative substrate 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish left decorative body 271 is displayed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency. The dish right decoration body 276, and the dish right decoration body 276 that penetrates the dish right decoration body 276. A lens 277 and a dish right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish-right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish-right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish-right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being coincident with the front surface of the dish-right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish-right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and the dish-right decoration body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish right decoration body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish right decoration board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish right decoration body 276 is removed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 are partly projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. A step with the dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 side raised can be formed between the upper side bulging part 252a. Accordingly, the player can hook his / her finger using the step between the dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper dish 201 is leveled. Can be used as a finger hook when operating the production operation unit 301 described later. Further, the game balls B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward by the steps between the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front with the rendering operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit of FIG. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit broken down into main members and viewed from above. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit broken down into main components and viewed from the front bottom. is there. FIG. 55A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the position of the moving end, and FIG. 55B is an effect operation from the state of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the production operation unit of the state which the part unit moved to the raise position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is in the position of the moving end downward.

  The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The production operation unit 301 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by a player and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by the player. The production operation unit 301 can accept the player's operation or move the production operation unit 301. (Vibration) can be performed and the player can participate not only in the operation of driving the game ball B but also in an effect during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, a contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 with respect to the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

  The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200, and the effect operation part cover unit 310 having a spherical outer shape and the effect operation part cover unit 310 are attached to the outside. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and an effect operation unit which is provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a for emitting and decorating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 The outer periphery decorative board 320, the outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation part base 315 so as to cover the effect operation part outer periphery decorative board 320 from above, and the operation part relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 315 330.

  The production operation unit 300 also adjusts the production operation unit unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the production operation unit unit 350, and the sudden output of the production operation unit unit 350. And a projecting output adjusting mechanism 380. The effect operation unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation part base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit unit 350) at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is opened upward and rearward, and an insertion port 312a that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. A unit upper cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the production operation unit cover unit 310 has an outer surface that is substantially spherical. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

  When the production operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has at least the unit upper cover 312 having translucency, and can be decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320 described later.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the dish left decorative body 271 and the dish right decorative body 276 extend outward from the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit base 315 is attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 212 a of the upper plate body 212 in the dish base unit 210 on the rear side. The operation unit base 315 is covered with a unit lower cover 311 at the front and lower sides, and is covered with the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 at the upper side. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape with the top opened.

  The operation portion base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a that is open at the top, and a flange portion 315b that extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion and has a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body 315a accommodates the effect operation unit 350. Further, the lower end of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit unit 350 described later is attached to the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjustment screw 384 of the projecting output adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the substrate base 331 of the operation unit relay substrate unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

  On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the effect operation portion outer periphery decorative substrate 320 is placed. In addition, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral substrate cover 325.

  In the state where the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange unit 315 b is positioned substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear. A substrate cover 333 attached to the substrate base 331 as described above.

  The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer periphery decoration board 320 (a front decoration board 321 and a rear decoration board 322), a button outside decoration board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inside decoration board 364, and an operation button. The lift drive motor 367, the press detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374, the bump output detection sensor 375, and the bump output adjustment drive motor 381 are connected to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production control unit]
The production operation unit 350 in the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit 350 is provided to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303. It is.

  The production operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end is closed, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and the button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 that is inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be movable up and down, and disposed above the button base 354 And an annular non-button decoration board 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 disposed between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detector 352. And a contact detection sensor main body 358 attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

  The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button main body 351 includes a disc-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. And a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape that forms a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to have a diameter that is approximately ½ of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button main body 351 of the present embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

  The contact detection body 352 is formed in a dish shape in which the outer periphery is circular and the inner side of the constant width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, and bulges obliquely upward, and the inside thereof is formed flat. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button main body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat plate-like downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward from the left and right ends and the rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. In the contact detector 352, the electrostatic capacity with respect to the entire area is suppressed by the plurality of holes of the punching metal, and erroneous detection is prevented. Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button decoration board 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the center portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is excellent. It is possible to decorate with light emission in any state.

  The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connection connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. Thereby, the contact detector 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and detects contact or approach of a detection target (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. Can do. That is, the button body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

  The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve main body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve main body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The sleeve main body 353a has an outer diameter that is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button main body 351, and a length that is substantially the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button main body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit the light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the non-button decorative substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

  The button base 354 has a disk shape having a diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the opened lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 protrudes from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center with a pair of guide holes 354a passing vertically in a portion that is symmetrical with respect to the center, a center hole 354b penetrating vertically in the center. A pair of guide pins 354c. The pair of guide holes 354a are slidably inserted into the guide shafts 362 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, respectively. The central hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis, and are rotatably attached around the axis.

  The button base 354 extends downward and further includes a flat plate-like detection piece 354d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. As for the button base 354, the latching | locking part 351c of the button main body 351 is latched by the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354 c being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371. The upper end of the pair of lifting springs 365 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is in contact with the lower surface of the button base 354 and is urged upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

  A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outside decorative board 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a concentric double circumference. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve main body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 355a of the button decoration board 355, a portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and a side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light emission.

  The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is disposed such that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation unit 301. Moreover, the vibration motor 356 is provided in the site | part on the straight line which passes along a pair of guide shaft 362 which guides the effect operation part 301 (effect operation part unit 350) to an up-down direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation unit 301. The influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced by the vibration of the vibration motor 356.

  The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to the sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. A constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode provided inside. The connection connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects an electrostatic capacity with a sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when a predetermined electrostatic capacity set by an external resistance is exceeded. In this embodiment, an ON signal is output when a predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a signal of a plurality of stages may be output according to the size of the capacitance.

  In the presentation operation unit 350 according to this embodiment, a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect contact or approach of the detection target (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button main body 351 via the contact detector 352. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body in a state in which the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward. It is possible to detect a detection target (player's hand) contact or approach to the side surface of 351. For this reason, the rendering operation unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

  The effect operation unit 350 is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be moved up and down. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved downward (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The unit 300 can be seen as one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

  More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved downward (normal state), even if it is pressed, it does not move any further downward, and the pressing operation cannot be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. When the production operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. . When the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressure. Detected by sensor 373. Thereby, the pressing operation of the rendering operation unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button main body 351, when the contact operation unit 302 is operated, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button main body 351 is touched. In other words, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having irregularities due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, an arbitrary tactile sensation with respect to the contact operation unit 302 is formed by forming fine irregularities, a plurality of streaks, etc. on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can increase the degree of freedom of design for the contact operation unit 302 and that can make the player more entertained.

  In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent because it is difficult to visually recognize the lower side through the button body 351. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the presentation operation unit unit 350 can be improved in appearance. Further, when the button main body 351 is opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be illuminated with light from the LED 355a of the button outside decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inside decoration board 364, etc. provided below, and the player can be illuminated by the light emission effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production control unit lifting mechanism]
The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315 and can raise and lower the production operation unit unit 350. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit unit 350, and the elevating mechanism base 361 having a substantially circular outer periphery, and the center axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical shapes that are arranged symmetrically and whose lower ends are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and whose upper ends extend upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. The guide shaft 362 is connected to the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the outer periphery is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353. The upper base 363 is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and emits light upward. A button interior decoration board 364 on which a plurality of LEDs 364a that can be irradiated are mounted.

  In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted to urge the button base 354 upward, and at the centers of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. A central shaft 366 penetrating vertically and having a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

  Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotary shaft protrudes upward, and to the rotary shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367. A spur gear-like elevating drive gear 368, a spur gear-like driven gear 369 that meshes with the elevating drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361, and is rotated by the driven gear 369. And an elevating cam drive gear member 370 that is rotatably inserted with a central shaft 366 inserted therethrough.

  In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. The elevating cam elevates the button base 354 by rotating. A member 371 and a disk-like gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

  Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and a press detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 and the elevating mechanism base 361 and the elevating cam drive gear member 370. A lift detection sensor 374 that detects the lift of the rendering operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (lift cam member 371), and a lift spring lower holding member of the bump output adjustment mechanism 380 that is attached to the lift mechanism base 361. And a bump output detection sensor 375 that detects the bump output of the rendering operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of 385.

  The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a lifting spring together with a pair of guide shafts 362 passing through the base body 361a. A pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 315 a in the operation unit base 315. A driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a collision output detection sensor 375 are attached to the base body 361a on the upper surface. In addition, an operation button lifting drive motor 367, a lift detection sensor 374, and a projecting output adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a. In the lifting mechanism base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a in the operation portion base 315. Thereby, a space in which the projecting output adjustment mechanism 380 is disposed is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of through-holes 361c are respectively provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center to the front and rear.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 passes through a pair of through holes 361c provided at a position half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center to the front and rear in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361. Each of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315 a of the operation unit base 315 and an upper end attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars.

  The upper base 363 is formed so that the outer diameter is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. The upper base 363 can form a space in which the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower protruding portion into contact with the upper protruding portion of the gear cover 372. it can.

  A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button interior decoration board 364 are full-color LEDs. The in-button decoration board 364 can make the central part of the upper surface of the button main body 351 be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 364a.

  The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and a guide shaft 362 is inserted through each of them. The pair of elevating springs 365 has lower ends in contact with the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the projecting output adjustment mechanism 380 and upper ends in contact with the button base 354.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c which is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by a lift detection sensor 374. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is attached rotatably by inserting a central shaft 366 in the center. The lifting cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 354c of the button base 354.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The lifting cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view of the lifting cam member 371. Is formed. The elevating cam member 371 can be rotated to guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 biased upward by the elevating spring 365 (effect operation unit unit 350). Can be moved up and down.

  The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space in which the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper protruding portion into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

  The press detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the rendering operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the rendering operation unit unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 always detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation unit 350 is moved downward (normal state). When the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit raising / lowering mechanism 360, the press detection sensor 373 is not detected because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. When the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 has a button base 354. The detection piece 354d can be detected, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

  The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, and thereby the elevation cam member 371 is connected to the connection portion 371f connected to the connection portion 370b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370. The rotational position of is detected.

  The bump output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the bump output adjustment mechanism 380.

  The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the production operation unit unit 350 so as to be movable up and down via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and rear, and the button base 354 by a pair of elevating springs 365. The production operation unit 350 can be urged upward via this. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 rotates the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to move the effect operation unit unit 350 (the effect operation unit 301) up and down with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310. Can be made. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can make the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button decoration board 364 to emit light.

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 has the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 engaged with the engaging portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55A). See). In this normal state, the production operation unit 350 is located at the lower end of movement via the button base 354, and the production operation is performed even if the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. In a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit unit cover 310 and the upper surface of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit unit 350 coincide with each other. And the button body 351 form one sphere.

  When the elevation drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 in the normal state (the production operation unit unit 350 is in the lowered position), it engages with the elevation drive gear 368. The lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55A moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the locking portion. While rolling from 371c to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

  When the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 354c upward along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 354c Together, the button base 354 is raised, and the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

  The lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various vertical positions by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. it can. Since the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit unit 350 is lifted by a projecting output corresponding to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. Can be projected into position.

  In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 has the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third of the remaining cam portions 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (the effect operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351 is moved from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

  When the button main body 351 (the pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the effect operating unit 350 is moved up and down. Accordingly, the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

  As described above, when the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button main body 351 ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

  In order to return the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367 as shown in FIG. In (b), since the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), the third cam 371e causes the guide pin 354c to move. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

  In addition, when returning the production operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the protruding output adjustment drive motor 381 of the protruding output adjustment mechanism 380 to reduce the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. A state is set (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operating unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also increased. The load on the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 for rotating the lifting / lowering cam member 371 can be reduced, and the damage (failure) of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive one having a low torque can be used.

  When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 is stopped, and the guide pin 354c is moved to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the effect operation unit unit 350 is in the original lowered position.

  In the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation cam elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction, whereby the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( The example in which the button base 354 (button body 351) is moved from the lowered position to the raised position at a stretch by moving from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d has been described. However, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is a lifting cam member. In a normal state where the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) is moved to the lowered position by being engaged with the engagement portion 371c of the 371, the operation cam elevating drive motor 367 causes the elevating cam member 371 to be watched in a plan view. You may make it rotate in the surrounding direction. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the rendering operation unit 350) by the rendering operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

  When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to the third cam 371e. Will move upward along the line. If the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 protrudes upward at an arbitrary position between the lowered position and the raised position. Can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button main body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button main body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button main body 351 can be pressed. Can function as.

  When the button body 351 is protruded upward by the third cam 371e, the lowering spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. Is desirable. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the rotation of the lift cam member 371 (the operation button lift drive motor 367), and it is possible to lighten the operation feeling of the pressing operation of the button body 351.

  Thus, since the protrusion amount of the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) can be changed according to the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, according to the gaming state (for example, the first start port 2002, By varying the amount of protrusion of the button main body 351 according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, it is possible to make the player expect the game.

  It should be noted that at least one shallow recess capable of locking the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thereby, the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protrusion amount, and variation in the protrusion amount can be prevented. Further, when a recess is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the operation cam lift drive motor 367 stops the lifting cam member 371 by stopping the guide pin 354c in the recess. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Impact output adjustment mechanism]
The impact output adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The projecting output adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 that biases the effect operation unit 350 upward, and thus the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) projects upward ( (Sudden output) can be changed. The projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315 a in the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

  The bump output adjusting mechanism 380 includes a bump output adjusting drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-like pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the bump output adjusting drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a An adjustment screw 384 that extends downward in a cylindrical shape and has a screw portion 384b in which a spiral groove is formed on the outer periphery, and is rotatably supported with a central shaft 366 inserted therethrough, and an adjustment screw 384 is engaged with the screw portion 384b, the pair of guide shafts 362 penetrates, and the pair of ascending The lower end of the spring 365 is provided with an elevating unsprung holding member 385 abutting the.

  The projecting output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the lowering mechanism base 361 and the lower surface of the base body 361a. The projecting output adjusting drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft projecting in the gap between the base body 361a.

  The adjustment screw 384 has a length that extends from the bottom wall of the main body 315 a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

  The elevating spring lower holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw-engagement hole 385b penetrating vertically in the center of the main body portion 385a and screwing into the screw portion 384b, and the front-rear direction of the main body portion 385a. A spring holding recess 385c that is provided at both ends and is recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the lifting spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. . The elevating spring lower holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 penetrating therethrough at the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the collision output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

  When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the bump output adjusting drive motor 381, the bump output adjusting mechanism 380 can rotate the adjusting screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 rotates the adjusting screw 384 by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381 to move the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction through the screwing hole 385b engaged with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

  When the thrust output adjusting mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 upward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held by the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is large. Become. On the other hand, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 is reduced (see FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the lifting / lowering spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for biasing the effect operating unit 350 by the lifting / lowering spring 365 can be increased, and the lifting / lowering spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward. And the urging | biasing force which urges | biases the effect operation part unit 350 by the raising / lowering spring 365 can be made small. Thereby, the sudden output adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the sudden output upward of the effect operation unit 350.

  The detection piece 385d of the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 is detected by the collision output detection sensor 375 when the lifting / lowering spring lower holding member 385 is raised most. That is, the detection piece 385d is detected by the collision output detection sensor 375 when the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 is maximized. As a result, when the lift output lower holding member 385 is moved upward by the bump output adjustment drive motor 381, if the bump output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d, the lift spring lower holding member by the bump output adjustment drive motor 381 is detected. By stopping the upward movement of 385, further compression of the elevating spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projecting output of the effect operating unit 350, so that the button body is moved by the contact detector 352 when the effect operating unit 350 is in the lowered position. 351 detects the contact or approach of a detection target (for example, a player's finger) to 351, and causes the presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360 to project the presentation operation unit unit 350 to contact the detection target. At times, the vertical output position of the lifting / lowering spring lower holding member 385 may be appropriately selected so that the projecting output of the button body 351 is different. Thereby, when the button main body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers and the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button main body 351 abuts strongly, something may be good for the player. It can be thought that it is, and the expectation with respect to a game of a player can be raised. Therefore, according to the sudden output adjustment mechanism 380, the button is selected according to the game state (for example, according to the special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). By increasing or decreasing the impact output of the main body 351, it is possible to make the player indicate the degree of expectation for the game.

  By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the effect operation unit 350, and if the urging force is changed by twisting the compression coil spring, it is impossible to use it. Stress acts on the compression coil spring, and there is a risk that the internal tissue will deteriorate early and be damaged. On the other hand, in the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the projecting output of the effect operating unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 by the vertical movement of the lifting spring lower holding member 385. Urging force) is adjusted, so that excessive stress does not act on the lifting spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the lifting spring 365 at an early stage. It can project stably over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship among the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching a player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

  The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state where the protruding direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) that can protrude upward is inclined so that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located in front of the top of the spherical effect operation unit 300. Thereby, it is easy to see the production operation unit 301 from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the production operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 (production operation unit unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button main body 351 of the production operation unit unit 350 is produced. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the production operation unit 300 looks like a simple spherical decorative body and can be operated.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation portion outer periphery decorative board 320 disposed below a unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation portion 303 (effect operation portion unit 350). An annular button outer decoration board 355 is arranged inside the vicinity of the outer edge of the pressing operation portion 303, and a button inner decoration board 364 is arranged further inside. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outwardly in the order of the button outside decoration board 355 and the effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 with the button inside decoration board 364 as the center. The LED 355a on the inside of the button decoration board 364 and the button decoration board 355 is disposed below the contact detection body 352. However, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal so as to be translucent. Since it has, the light from them can be favorably permeate | transmitted upwards (player side).

  The effect operation unit 300 can decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 with light emission by the LEDs 320a of the effect operation portion outer periphery decorative substrate 320. Further, the LED 355a of the button outside decorative substrate 355 can be used to decorate the vicinity of the periphery of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the button interior decoration board 364 can be used to decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 with light emission.

  Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operation portion outer periphery decorative substrate 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decorative substrate 364 are arranged in a circle on the circumference, respectively, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LED355a, and LED363a are arranged concentrically, light emission effects such that light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or light from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges.

  In the normal state, the rendering operation unit 300 is in a lowered position in which the pressing operation unit 303 (the rendering operation unit 350) has its upper surface coincided with the surface of the unit upper cover 312 as shown in FIG. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is impossible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable a contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

  As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state where the pressing operation unit 303 (the effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image that prompts the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. The information is displayed on the device 1600, and voice, sound effects, and the like are output. And if the contact detection body 352 detects the contact (or approach) to the button main body 351, it will shift to the next production stage. When contact is detected, the button body 351 is illuminated with the light emitted from the LED 355a of the button outside decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inside decoration board 364, thereby recognizing that the player has received a contact operation. The touch operation unit 302 may be given a feeling of operation. At this time, the player is given a degree of expectation for a game (for example, an occurrence of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to a player such as a “hit” game) by the light emission color, light emission luminance, light emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

  Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. Thereby, the operation feeling with respect to the contact operation part 302 can be provided, and it can be made to recognize strongly that the contact operation was received with respect to the player. It should be noted that at this time, by giving strong vibration, weak vibration, or vibration having a predetermined rhythm by the vibration motor 356, the player may be expected to expect the game. good.

  In addition, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image that prompts the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or voice or sound effects are output. After that, when the contact detecting body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) is moved up and down by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360. The spring 365 is projected (popped up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, when the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), and the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, together with the button base 354, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351, pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrudes upward to enter the raised position (FIG. 55 (b)). In the raised position, the upper surface of the button main body 351 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 and the button main body 351 protrudes upward. Since the button main body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button main body 351 is pushed upward together with the button main body 351, which can greatly surprise the player, It can attract interest.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the player can enjoy the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button main body 351 (press operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button main body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button main body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350) is The button body 351 moves downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. Thereby, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (the pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the player can be entertained by the player participation type effect by changing the effect with the pressing operation as a trigger.

  In addition, in the above-described production, the sudden output adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the sudden output (momentum) that causes the button main body 351 to protrude, so that the player can increase the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the sudden output. You may make it suggest. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed.

  In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like has approached the moving range (within the protruding range) of the button main body 351 protruding upward, The main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruded upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like and an impact is applied, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the impact output adjustment mechanism 380 may increase or decrease the impact output from which the button main body 351 protrudes, and may allow the player to indicate the degree of expectation for the game based on the strength of the impact output.

  Further, in the effect of causing the effect operation unit 350 to protrude, the contact detection body 352 allows the player's fingers and the like to be outside the protruding range of the button main body 351 protruding upward and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button main body 351. When it is detected that the button has been approached, the button main body 351 (the production operation unit 350) may be protruded upward. Thereby, since the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button main body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers and the like, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 increases or decreases the projecting output from which the button body 351 projects, and suggests the player's expectation for the game by the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers. You may do it.

  Further, as an effect for causing the effect operation unit 350 to protrude, the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) may be protruded upward regardless of detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detector 352. At this time, if the button body 351 protrudes with a strong output by the sudden output adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously and a sound (protruding sound) is generated. Can do. Further, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak projecting output by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects gently, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the projecting of the button body 351. The player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 protrudes without notice.

  As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is weakened by the projecting output adjustment mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is generally used. An effect such as a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button may be executed. Alternatively, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 may be strengthened by the projecting output adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed such that the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

  Further, as an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), an effect of performing a contact operation on the protruding button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button main body 351 may be contacted. At this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation) Part 302) can be easily operated.

  As an effect for projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button base 354 is rotated by rotating the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at a stretch. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is lifted and lowered. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 clockwise in plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is in the middle of the third cam 371e. The button body 351 may be stopped from projecting upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

  Thus, even when the button main body 351 is projected halfway by the third cam 371 e of the elevating cam member 371, the button main body 351 can be pressed and the button main body 351 can function as the pressing operation portion 303. Thus, the player can entertain the player-participation type production. In this case, the amount of protrusion upward of the button main body 351 can be varied according to the rotational position of the lift cam member 371, so that the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button main body 351. , Can entertain the player.

  Further, as an effect of pressing the projected operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. To the minimum state. Thereby, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, it is possible to press the production operation unit 350 with a light (weak) force, and to improve the operability of the pressing operation. Can be entertained. Further, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the lifting spring 365 is biased by setting the lifting spring lower holding member 385 to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result. May be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can push the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more versatile. An effect can be presented, and it can be made difficult to get the player bored.

  Further, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection body can be detected in a plurality of contact stages (approaching stages) with respect to the contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351). A plurality of levels of thresholds may be provided according to the capacitance of 352, and the production may be changed according to each level. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. May be detected in multiple stages and used for production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers are away from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, a game The player's fingers etc. are in contact with the button body 351, etc., and various effects are presented to the player even with one contact detection sensor body 358 by changing the effects according to each stage. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the above embodiment, as the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the lowered position, and the lifting spring lower holding member Although the state in which 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the production operation unit unit 350 is set to the lowered position, and the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is It is good also as the state moved below. Thereby, since the raising / lowering spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, it can suppress that the raising / lowering spring 365 deteriorates (fatigue) at an early stage. In addition, the button base 354 and the lifting spring lower holding member 385 can be prevented from deteriorating (fatigue) at an early stage by the urging force of the lifting spring 365 that is strongly compressed.

  Thus, according to the production operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for player participation type production of various patterns, various productions can be enjoyed by the player, and the player is bored. It can be difficult to suppress the decline of interest.

  By the way, the production operation unit 300 is provided with an annular (with two arcs) production operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 provided on the upper part of the spherical production operation unit cover unit 310 and the production operation unit outer periphery. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the effect operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. In addition, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit 350, a button interior decoration board 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with sensor electrodes for detecting capacitance, when the presentation operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) ) Approaches the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320 and the button inner decoration substrate 364, and the proximity of the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320 and the button inner decorative substrate 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, thereby detecting the contact detection sensor. The main body 358 may be erroneously detected.

  Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 and between the button inside decoration board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. Thereby, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the effect operation portion outer periphery decorative board 320 or the button inside decorative board 364 is changed by moving the effect operation section unit 350 up and down, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is changed. And the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320 and the button inner decorative substrate 364 by a shield connected to a ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change. It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the proximity of the decorative board 364 in the button, and prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of dish unit]
Subsequently, a dish unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a contact detection sensor main body and a plurality of contact detection bodies in FIG. FIG. 6C is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a switching unit is provided between the front and rear, and (c) is a stage unit in which a dish left decoration unit, a dish right decoration unit, a presentation operation unit, and the like can be moved forward and backward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body in the front side and rear side, such as an operation unit. FIG. 61 (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a contact detector having a decorative property, and FIG. 61 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into the left and right of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R on the lower side of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit unit 350. The contact detection sensor body left 391L and the contact detection sensor body right 391R are connected to the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his / her fingers etc. from the left side to the right side, first, when the player's fingers etc. are located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left side 390L of the contact detection body changes to detect the left side 391L of the main body of the touch detection sensor, and the right side of the right side 391R of the touch detection sensor body 391R remains undetected. It becomes. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R change, so that the contact detection sensor body left 391L and the contact detection sensor body Both right 391Rs are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body left 390L is restored, the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes undetected, and the electrostatic of the contact detection body right 390R. The capacitance has changed, and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R remains detected.

  In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc., by the combination of detection / non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R and the change pattern Can be detected. Accordingly, it is possible to detect a contact operation with a variety of movements and to present a player participation type effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. In addition, it is possible to more entertain the player-participation type effect that operates the contact operation unit 302. If more contact detectors are added, more complex operations can be detected.

  The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, in a state where a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like in any one of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

  For example, by disposing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 on the inner side (lower side) of the button main body 351, no matter which part of the surface of the button main body 351 touches any part of the surface of the button main body 351, The contact can be detected by the contact detector 393, and the detection accuracy for the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be increased.

  In addition, a plurality of contact detectors 393 may be placed on a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may be injured or other players may be annoyed) It may be provided in a certain part, a part where a fraudulent act may be performed, etc., and when any human body or the like is detected by any of the contact detection bodies 393, a caution or warning may be notified.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 60B, switching is performed such that only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (contact detection body 352). . Note that the switching unit 394 includes “things to be switched by a switching circuit using a relay or transistor”, “things to be switched by another electronic circuit”, “movable member (for example, a movable left plate decoration as shown in FIG. 60C). And the like which are switched in accordance with the movement of the unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the rendering operation unit 300).

  For example, in the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are distributed and a player participation type production is performed in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched by the switching unit 394 in the order of touching, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's finger or the like has touched. good. Thereby, it is possible to present a player-participation-type production with high gameability by the plurality of contact detectors 393 to the player, and to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60C, when the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first operation is performed on the front side of the effect operation unit 300. When providing the contact detection body 393a and providing the second contact detection body 393b on the rear side of the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, and projecting the effect operation unit 300 and the like forward, When the switching unit 394 connects the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and retracts the presentation operation unit 300, the switching unit 394 connects the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392. You may make it switch so.

  Thus, when the production operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detector 393a, and the forward movement of the production operation unit 300 or the like is stopped. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production operation unit 300 or the like from unnecessarily squeezing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and to avoid discomforting the player. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the production operation unit 300 or the like is protruded forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the production operation unit 300 or the like, and the player's fingers or the like are inserted in the gap. If the operation unit 300 or the like is moved back to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the rendering operation unit 300 moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detector 393b, the backward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, and the finger or the like is released from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. Is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detector 393b is not detected, the effect operation unit 300 or the like is moved backward to return to the initial state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the production operation unit 300 and the like, and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61 (a), the outer shape of the contact detector 395 that detects the contact of the player's finger or the like is used as a star shape so as to have decoration (designability). In addition, the shape of the touch detection body 395 having a decorative property is not limited to a star shape, but a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a predetermined item. It may be a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame shape, or the like. Thereby, since the contact detection body 395 seen through the transparent button main body 351 has a decorative property (designability), the touch detection body 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button main body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed by punching metal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact detection body may be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, You may make it form by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and there can exist an effect similar to the above. In addition, it is desirable to provide the contact detector on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers or the like do not touch it directly. It can be smooth.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the button decoration board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detector 352. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. A contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. Thereby, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be improved, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

  In the embodiment of FIG. 61 (b), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the decoration body 398 provided below is made invisible due to the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397. The decoration body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396. good.

  Moreover, you may make it form the contact detection body 352 unrecognizable from a player. Here, examples of the contact detector that cannot be recognized include “a member formed of a transparent member”, “a member formed so as to be seen integrally with a decoration of a surface member such as a button body”, and the like. As a result, the production operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, and therefore does not detect or perform contact operation with a finger on the player. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and a player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By projecting to the side, the player will first notice the presence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302), which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest. Can do.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 62A is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 62B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 62C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Wu in FIG. The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a are installed vertically with a certain interval on the front surface, and the door frame left side base 421 are attached to the lower part of the front surface. The door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed vertically with a predetermined interval are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 are covered. The door frame left side base 42 so as to cover the left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. A left side lower reflector 425 attached to the left side upper reflector 424 and a door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425. I have.

  The door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and an upper and lower sides of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. The left side middle light guide member 428 that guides light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction forward, and the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. And a left side lower light guide member 429 for guiding the light forward.

  The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opened forward. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors with two types of resin, that is, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. A circular or radial pattern is formed by appearing on the outer surface through the layer 3b. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at a certain interval in the vertical direction, and the second LEDs are arranged in a row vertically between the first LEDs 422a. An LED 422b is mounted. On the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted.

  On the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, a total of 12 full-color LEDs, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted. In addition, the first LED 422a in which the second LEDs 422b are provided on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) the second LEDs 422b. In addition, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED that can irradiate light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three groups: two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

  Although not shown, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510 and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of a wire is connected. In the LED driver 422c of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and the right side is formed to be uneven. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame with a certain interval in the vertical direction, and the second LEDs are arranged in a row vertically between the first LEDs 423a. An LED 423b is mounted. The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light.

  On the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, a total of 18 full-color LEDs, which are six first LEDs 423a and twelve second LEDs 423b, are mounted. In addition, the first LED 423a in which the second LEDs 423b are provided on both the upper and lower sides is provided in the center (center between) the second LEDs 423b. In addition, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED that can irradiate light in an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top Are divided into four groups, three from the top and three from the tenth to the twelfth. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

  Although not shown, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510 and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of a wire is connected. When the LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are set according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The left side upper reflector 424 has a through-hole 424a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and also corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the front side of the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a plate that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. It is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided at the center between the through holes 424a. Thereby, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the holding cylinder 424b, the second of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 facing the through holes 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated with an equal amount of light from the upper and lower sides to the light guide shaft portion 427a, and the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

  In the left side upper reflector 424, an attachment hole for attaching to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. Thereby, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

  The left side lower reflector 425 has a through-hole 425a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and also corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a is in contact with the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side of the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a plate that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

  In the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, a columnar light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 described later and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided at the center between the through holes 425a. Accordingly, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that protrudes forward through the holding cylinder 425b, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 that is more exposed to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the upper and lower sides. Shadows of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a on the back side of the side decorative body 426 can be avoided.

  Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, an attachment hole for attaching to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. Thereby, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

  The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424 b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425. In these openings 426a, a light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and a light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, Each tip of is inserted from behind. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a certain shape that is recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. is doing.

  The left side upper light guide member 427 includes four light guide shaft portions 427a extending in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. It is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427 a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424 b of the left side upper reflector 424. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends in the front-rear direction with substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is the left side of the door frame. It will be in the state corresponded with the surface of the side decoration body 426. FIG. The left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate it from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be brightly illuminated.

  The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a that extend in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. It is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428 a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends in the front-rear direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is the left side of the door frame. It will be in the state corresponded with the surface of the side decoration body 426. FIG. The left side middle light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a and irradiate it from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be brightly illuminated.

  The left side lower light guide member 429 includes three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. It is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left side lower reflector 425. The light guide shaft portion 429a extends in the front-rear direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the front end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in the state corresponding to the surface of the side decoration body 426. FIG. The left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate it from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be brightly illuminated.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295. In addition, the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern in the door frame left side base 421 is formed in the same color as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern in the handle cover 295.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward from the lower portion, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. The door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end positioned above the door window 101a and below the door frame hinge assembly 120, and a lower end positioned below the door window 101a and the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. Is located above the speaker opening 211b. Further, the upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is positioned on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the assembled state with the door frame 3, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are located at a position somewhat rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Because the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is irradiated. The left side decorative body 426 can be decorated with light emission uniformly.

  Further, the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided at a position rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light), and the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit light brighter in a dot-like manner than other portions.

  Also, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, and the left side middle light guide member 428. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LED 422b and second LED 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even when the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the left side decorative body 426 from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is made even. Light emission decoration can be made in a planar shape.

  Furthermore, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. Thereby, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the decoration portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be difficult to understand, and the door frame left The appearance of the side decoration 426 in the light emitting decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the air line in FIG. FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O in FIG. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are installed on the front face with a certain interval are mounted on the front face, and the door frame right side base 431 is attached to the lower part of the front face. And a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed on the front and lower sides with a certain interval are mounted, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433 and the front side of the right side reflector 434 are covered. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 435 which is attached to the door frame right side base 431, to.

  The door frame right side unit 430 also includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 first. A right-side lower light guide member 437 that guides light from one LED 433a forward.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is covered and attached so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of light-transmitting right side left lenses 439 having decorative portions 439a to be fitted and a right side surface of the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the right side surface and penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having the decorative hole 440a, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 are provided. Decorative body 44 Includes a right side right lens 441, a having a decorative hole 440a translucent having a decorative portion 441a which is fitted to close the.

  The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width on the left and right. Further, the door frame right side base 431 has a rear end side that extends vertically over the entire height, and a front end side that curves straight from the upper end downward to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curves to the rear side. After extending obliquely rearward, it curves in the vertical direction near the lower part and extends vertically to the lower end.

  The door frame right side base 431 includes a decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens). A plurality of reflector portions 431a that are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end are provided at a height portion where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided. The reflector portions 431a have rear end sides that are inside the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a incline toward the side surface and have a curved bottom surface.

  The door frame right side base 431 includes a decoration hole 438a and a decoration hole 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to the (decoration part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decoration part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is a front part excluding the part inside the decoration part 439a and the decoration part 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (recessed from the left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

  These reflector portions 431a of the door frame right side base 431 right and left light irradiated backward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. Reflecting in the direction, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are illuminated and decorated (see FIG. 70 and the like).

  The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame with a certain interval in the vertical direction, and the second LEDs are arranged two by two vertically between the first LEDs 432a. An LED 432b is mounted. In addition, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 with an interval in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432.

  On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs, four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c, are mounted. In addition, the first LED 432a in which the second LEDs 432b are provided on both the upper and lower sides is provided in the center (center between) the second LEDs 432b. In addition, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light in an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups: two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

  Since this door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c, respectively, the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, In order to cause the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, there are a total of 21 systems of 3 systems per set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the 21 systems described above, in the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 described later. A total of 24 systems of three systems for one set on the upper side of the third LED 433c divided into two groups are controlled.

  Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED. Two power lines for supplying power for driving the driver 432d (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable composed of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. When the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. Four first LEDs 432a divided into three groups, eight second LEDs 432b divided into three groups, four third LEDs 432c divided into two groups, and 2 on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group among the groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

  The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame with a certain interval in the vertical direction, and the second LEDs are arranged in a row vertically between the first LEDs 433a. An LED 433b is mounted. A plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 with a space in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433.

  In the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs are mounted, including six first LEDs 433a, twelve second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c. In addition, the first LED 433a in which the second LEDs 433b are provided on both the upper and lower sides is provided in the center (center between) the second LEDs 433b. In addition, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light in an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top Are divided into four groups, three from the top and three from the tenth to the twelfth. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

  Since the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c, respectively, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, In order to cause the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems per set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has the third LED 433c divided into two sets. Among them, the upper one set of three systems is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is controlled. Thereby, the increase in the number of LED drivers can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 supplies two electric power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power lines (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and 1 for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable composed of four clock wires and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. 6 first LEDs 433a divided into four groups, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and two third LEDs 433c in the lower group among the two groups. Light can be emitted with an appropriate color and intensity every time.

  The right side reflector 434 is formed with a through-hole 434a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. At the same time, a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 434a is in contact with the front surfaces of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The periphery of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

  A holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 is inserted with a columnar light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided at the center between the through holes 434a. Accordingly, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a protruding forward through the holding cylinder 434b, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing the through holes 434a on both upper and lower sides thereof The light from the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is irradiated with an equal amount of light from the upper and lower sides to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a. It is possible to avoid shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a appearing on the back side of 435.

  In the right side reflector 434, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. Thereby, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434 b of the right side reflector 434. The front ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into the openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. Further, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further includes a decorative portion 435b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction and has a certain shape that is recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. is doing.

  The right side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. It is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. The light guide shaft portion 436a extends in the front-rear direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the right side of the door frame. The surface matches the surface of the decorative body 435. The right side upper light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a, and irradiate it from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light brightly.

  The right side lower light guide member 437 includes six light guide shaft portions 437a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. It is made of a transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided at regular intervals vertically from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. The light guide shaft portion 437a extends in the front-rear direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the right side of the door frame. The surface matches the surface of the decorative body 435. The right side lower light guide member 437 can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a, and can irradiate from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light brightly.

  The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a horizontal direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a front end formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors by two types of resins, that is, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. In addition, a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, so that a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected to the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes leftward to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The hole 438a has a decorative portion 439a fitted from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state where the decorative portion 439a is fitted in the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decoration part 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. Light emission decoration can be performed by the light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433.

  The right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decoration part 439a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

  The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in a horizontal direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). Further, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a key hole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130. The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the overall height of the door frame 3. Further, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed such that the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is similar to the handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, and door frame right side left side decorative body 438. Are formed in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected to the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes rightward to project the right side of the door frame. A decoration portion 441a that fits into the decoration hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side) is provided. The decoration portion 441a is fitted in the decoration hole 440a, and the surface thereof coincides with the outer (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decoration part 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. Light emission decoration can be performed by the light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433.

  The right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. Thereby, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 441a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side. The side base 421 is formed in the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion, and outside the circular or radial pattern in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The color of this part is formed in the same color as the color of the part outside the circular or radial pattern in the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side base 421.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes more forward than the portion of the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

  The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

  The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes greatly from the top to a portion having a substantially half height, and forms a partition. This makes it difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side in the island facility of the game hall to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a partition shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. It is possible to make it possible to play a game without hesitation of other players by making it difficult to receive a feeling as seen from other players.

  According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are located at a position somewhat away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Since the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is irradiated, so the door frame The right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated and decorated uniformly.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate that are provided rearward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided (light-guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and then the door frame. The part of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light brighter in a spot shape than other parts.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 causes the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 to emit light, thereby reflecting the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. 431a is inserted into the decoration part 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decoration part 439a and the decoration part 441a) of the screen-like door frame right side unit 430 can be illuminated and decorated, this pachinko machine 1 is provided to other players. The pachinko machine 1 that can be conspicuous and has high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to light-decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side With the third LED 433c on the rear surface side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are illuminated and decorated. Because of the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, The light from the ED 433a and the second LED 433b irradiates and decorates the rear door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, or from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c. It is possible to prevent the light from irradiating and decorating the front door frame right side decorative body 435. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 435, the rear door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be decorated with light emission independently. The pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting the player with a light-emitting effect having a higher effect can be provided.

  The door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, a first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and a light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. And the light guide shaft part 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 is provided in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. Accordingly, light is emitted from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with an equal amount of light, so that the door frame right side decorative body 435 is irradiated. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadow becomes difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated and decorated in a planar shape without unevenness.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has a decoration part 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of opening parts 435a to the door frame right side decoration body 435. . Thereby, even if the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a is projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b, the shadow is projected. Since the decoration portion 435b is provided at the portion to be illuminated, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to understand, and the appearance of the light emission decoration of the door frame right side decoration body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the front upper part. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. (See FIG. 72).

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and a front surface of the door frame top base 451 A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. Yes.

  The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right at substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top upper cover 452 in plan view. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a front surface formed in a semicircular arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative board 455, a plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 455a.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can make the left part of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs 456a.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can light-decorate the right part of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 457a.

  The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker or the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward.

  The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to the rear part of the upper side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Has been. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 22 to 28 and FIG. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown with the two-color molded outer layer made opaque in the door frame, and FIG. 71 (b) is an outer layer with the inner layer left as it is in FIG. It is a right view of the door frame right side unit shown in the state made transparent. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271 and a dish right decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, a unit upper cover 312 and a button body 351 of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a are formed in a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, the dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the unit upper cover 312, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, a dish left decorative board 273, a dish right decorative board 278, a production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and a door frame. Since the right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, these decorative substrates are arranged. By appropriately emitting the LED, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is decorated with light emission, or the light emission effect is shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Door can be.

  In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical effect operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper dish 201 is attached to the center in the left-right direction. Thereby, since the large spherical production operation unit 300 is located in the center of the dish unit 200, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the production operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit) of the production operation unit 300 can be increased. The operation unit 303) can be made conspicuous.

  Further, in a normal state, since the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, a single sphere is formed. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the operation unit 301 (button main body 351) can be operated, and to the player by using the operation unit 300 composed of a huge sphere, The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized as being different from the pachinko machine, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal power to the player can be enhanced. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

  Further, in the dish unit 200, the center (center) of the rendering operation unit 301 of the rendering operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the apex of the spherical rendering operation unit 300, and therefore the rendering operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302). And the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Accordingly, the player who has recognized that the giant sphere provided in the center of the dish unit 200 is the production operation unit 301 can easily see the entire content of the production operation unit 301. Can look big. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the giant sphere-shaped production operation unit 301, and to increase the expectation for the execution of the player participation type production that operates the production operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type production is executed, the player can actively operate the production operation unit 301, and the operation of the production operation unit 301 makes the player participatory production entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5 and the like, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a plurality of circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

  Specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns on the outer surface are two colors using two types of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The exterior part of the door frame 3 on which the pattern is applied is molded in two colors with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. A circular or radial pattern is formed by appearing on the outer surface.

  For example, the door frame right side unit 430 will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the inner layer 3a has a honeycomb pattern and the outer layer 3b is opaque, The honeycomb-like pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in portions other than the pattern, so that the outer appearance of the circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, a honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b can be seen. The radial pattern is difficult to see. That is, it becomes the exterior of the appearance in which the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

  In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a different member from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, even if the outer layer 3b is transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorating portion 441a) does not change.

  Thus, according to this embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthesis) By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the light transmittance, and the like, the appearance can be greatly varied even with the shape as it is.

  Therefore, for example, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen at the time of a minor change or the like, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost.

  Or, by changing the color of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b for each production lot, shipping pachinko machines 1 of different lots to the same game hall and installing them in the island facilities, the player feels colorful Can increase the appeal power against.

  In the above embodiment, the two-color molding is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-color molding such as a three-color molding or a four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the two-color molded door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 are combined to form the exterior. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

  In the above-described embodiment, a circular or radial pattern is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various patterns may be formed.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a in which the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and the two-color molding is used to decorate the polka dot pattern. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape and at the same time the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body, the desired shape is obtained as in the conventional decorative body of a pachinko machine. In addition, it is not necessary to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like, and the labor for decoration can be omitted to suppress an increase in cost.

  Moreover, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin to be used. More specifically, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, light is transmitted through the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle, respectively. When formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are the same color, so that the polka dot circle becomes difficult to see and the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a constituting the inner side of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outer side of the circle is pink, due to the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. The polka dot circle can be seen clearly, and the appearance is a white polka dot decoration on a pink background. As described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used. Cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used. When the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row in the island facility, the island facility is made colorful. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to a player who is traveling in the game hall, and a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player can be provided.

  Furthermore, a handle cover 295 having a decoration molded in two colors with a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances at a portion outside the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward in the door frame 3, a door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are provided, so that the exterior of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorative body to improve the appearance. Can do.

  Moreover, since the outer layer 3b of the decorative body molded in two colors is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a may be difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) constituted by the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

  Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The inner layer 3a is not seen through from the outside as a low rate, and the inner layer 3a is seen through by using a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance for the outer layer 3b during the model change. Thus, the way of viewing the decoration of the decorative body can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

  Further, as described above, the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a difficult to see, so that a pattern (pattern depending on the shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc.) In the initial model, the pattern of the inner layer 3a is made transparent through the outer layer 3b by the opaque outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance, and the outer layer 3b is transparent when the model is changed. By using a simple synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so that the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , Increase in cost for model change can be suppressed.

  Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate capable of irradiating light. Since the third LED 433c of 433 is provided and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inner side of 440 are caused to emit light, the inner side of the decoration formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 The part of the layer 3a (the part of the polka dots) can be brightly decorated, and the appearance can be improved by decorating the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a. Both the player to be able to entertain emission decoration door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be decorated with light emitted from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be illuminated and decorated, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be clearly shown. The pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power that can attract the person's attention strongly can be obtained.

  Further, as described above, the decorations of the decorative bodies such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are molded in two colors (multicolor) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. The LED (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c is caused to emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that can be seen when there is no LED can be different from the decoration that can be seen when the LED is lit, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by changing the decoration. More specifically, for example, in the case of two-color molding as an example of multicolor molding, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion covered by the outer layer 3b in the inner layer 3a, the LED is caused to emit light. In the absence, only a portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is caused to emit light, light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a in the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a can be seen, the part exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a and the part of the hole can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not emitting light can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits light in yellow, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the decoration on the surface is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED emits light in green (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion on the surface are lit and decorated, so that the luminescent decoration on the decorative body depends on the color of light emitted from the LED. It is possible to change the parts to be illuminated, and to change the decoration to be luminescent. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. Further, by causing the LED to emit light according to the gaming state, a change in the decoration of the decorative body may cause the player to have an opportunity or change the driving operation (for example, “right-handed”). The pachinko machine 1 which can be made to suggest and can produce various productions can be provided.

  In addition, since the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) is different, Since this pachinko machine 1 can be viewed from the left front and from the right front, the impression (how it looks) can be made different, so that the pachinko machine 1 is traveling in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if a player passes the front of the pachinko machine 1 once and approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the player will be interested in the pachinko machine 1 because the appearance is different from the previous tour. The pachinko machine 1 can be attached to the pachinko machine 1 and can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1 in order to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. .

[3-10. LED arrangement and system in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board at the portion of the door frame effect operation unit. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when the player rotates it in the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, an annular outer ring portion 195c that connects the tips of the spoke portions 195b, It has an appearance similar to that of an automobile steering wheel.

  In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with a front handle lens 185, and a handle decorative board 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. Is provided. A handle cover decorative board 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

  There are a total of 10 handle decoration substrates 184, one at the center, three spaced apart on the middle circumference in the circumferential direction, and six spaced apart along the outer circumference in the circumferential direction. The LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric shape. These LEDs 184a have one in the center, three in the middle connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, two at the upper left of the outer periphery and two at the upper right of the outer periphery, each connected by a broken line. And two sets on the lower side of the outer periphery. The LEDs 184a divided into these five groups are controlled in 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit light in a full color as appropriate.

  On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, 12 LEDs 293a are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. As these twelve LEDs 293a are connected with a broken line in FIG. 72, two from the center to the lower left, two to the left, two to the upper left, two to the upper right, two to the right, It is divided into six sets, two in the lower right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 sets are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  As described above, since the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293 are provided on the handle 195, a light emission effect in which light rotates around the handle 195, or toward the center of the handle 195. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated and a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the outer side and the inner side of the handle cover 295 can be decorated with light emission by the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293.

  Moreover, the door frame 3 has the substantially square door window 101a extended in the up-down direction closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the front view center so that it may show in figure. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a have a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which almost the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a dish left decorative board 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish right decorative board 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decorative body 435 A side lower decorative substrate 433, a door frame top central decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 provided behind the door frame top decorative body 453 are provided forward.

  More specifically, the left-side decorative board 273 has an LED driver for emitting four LEDs 273a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction, and an LED 273a and an LED 273a of the right-side decorative board 278 described later. (Illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two sets are controlled by the LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  The dish-right decorative substrate 278 includes four LEDs 278a that are mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as shown by the broken line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the dish left decorative board 273, and each group of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  On the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two each mounted side by side vertically between the first LEDs 422a. Eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are provided. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected to the upper two, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided into three groups, up to three. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled in 15 systems by the LED driver 422c, and the first LED 422a and the second LED of each set are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in a full color as appropriate.

  On the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each side by side are mounted between the first LEDs 423a. There are twelve second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of eighteen first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets as a set in order of two from the top, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top, and from the top to the third from the fourth to the sixth. In addition, it is divided into four groups, three from the seventh to the ninth from the top and three from the tenth to the twelfth from the top. Six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled in 21 systems by an LED driver 423c, and the first LED 423a and the second LED of each set are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in a full color as appropriate.

  On the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface with a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a arranged vertically between the first LED 432a on the front surface. Eight second LEDs 432b are mounted, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 emits light in total for the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. LED driver 432d. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected to the upper two, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and from the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided into three groups, up to three. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown in FIG. 1st LED 432a divided into 2 sets, 2nd LED 432b divided into 3 sets, 3rd LED 432c divided into 2 sets, and 3rd divided into 2 sets in door frame right side lower decoration board 433 Of the LEDs 433c, the upper set of the third LEDs 433c is controlled in 24 systems by the LED driver 432d, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

  The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 has six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface with a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two front-to-back surfaces arranged side by side between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b that are mounted, four third LEDs 433c that are mounted on the rear surface with a space in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c LED driver 433d for emitting light. As shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets as one set in order of two from the top, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, and from the top to the third from the fourth to the sixth. In addition, it is divided into four groups, three from the seventh to the ninth from the top and three from the tenth to the twelfth from the top. Furthermore, the rear four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the broken line in FIG. Six first LEDs 433a divided into three sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and one set of two third LEDs 433c on the lower side among the two sets The LED driver 433d is controlled in 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are formed in a left-right asymmetric shape with the center in the left-right direction of the door window 101a as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are also different from each other in the front-rear direction. .

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. The number of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b is the same as each other, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72). A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. Thereby, it is possible to easily create data of LED lighting patterns for performing a light emission effect.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front face with a space in the left-right direction, the LED 455a and the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. And an LED driver (not shown). The six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets of two from the left as shown by the broken line in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three sets are controlled by nine systems by an LED driver, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 includes four LEDs 456a that are mounted on the front surface in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as shown by the broken line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a that are mounted on the front surface in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets of two on the left side and two on the right side as connected by a broken line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, The light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is guided by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The opening portion of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the optical member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. 426a and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are guided to the opening 435a and irradiated outward (forward). As a result, the player can show the player a light emitting effect that emits bright light in a dotted manner on the front side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The player can be made to “ha” by the light emitting effect of spot light emission.

  Moreover, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side lower The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the LED 455a of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, and the door frame top left decorative substrate. The LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately lit so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is decorated with light emission, or light is emitted so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

  That is, in the door frame 3, a light emitting effect of spot light emission is executed on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the LED system connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar shape (surface light emission) by the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Can do.

  Moreover, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide. By the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening portion 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and then forward. As compared with the general surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be spot-lit with high brightness and brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are disposed outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided. And even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is spot-lighted with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing the door window 101a does not become difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a can be viewed in a good state.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 protrude forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front end of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 protruding forward (the front end protruding in an arc shape forward in plan view). Since it is provided on the vertical line, spot light is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot emission light in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected to the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and is behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a does not become difficult to see, and the spotlight is emitted with high brightness, so that the interest of other players can be directed to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, according to the door frame 3, the spot light emitting portions are provided in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward from the door window 101 a in the door frame 3. For this reason, the spot emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player, and therefore the player does not block the spot light. Thus, when spot light is emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, high brightness spot light can be seen from other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine to be played can be selected in the game hall. The pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power capable of attracting a player traveling around the machine to the pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  The spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is disposed on both sides. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. Thus, both sides sandwiching the light guide pins (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) for guiding the light of the spot LED. Since the surface LEDs have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is irradiated from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made more difficult to see.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape on which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted. An effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320 is provided. The effect operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320 is divided into a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

  Eighteen LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative substrate 321 in the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320. Sixteen LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are provided with a gap on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three with a gap on the circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the outer periphery.

  The remaining thirteen LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Thirteen LEDs 320a on the rear decoration board 322 are provided two by two on the circumference close to the inner circumference and spaced near both ends of the arc, and three are intermediate between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining six pieces are provided on the circumference at intervals, and the remaining six pieces are provided on the circumference close to the outer periphery at intervals near both ends of the arc.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321 are connected by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 73, three on the inner circumference, two in the circumferential direction, and three on the middle circumference. Are divided into 9 sets, 3 sets of 1 each, and 9 sets on the outer circumference, 3 sets of 3 sets in the circumferential direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a on the back decoration board 322 are connected on the inner circumference by two sets of two on the inner circumference, two on the inner circumference, as shown in FIG. Three groups are divided into three groups, one set of three, and nine groups on the outer circumference are divided into two groups of three groups near the both ends. That is, in the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 sets are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in a full color as appropriate.

  According to the effect operation portion outer periphery decorative substrate 320, the light emission effect in which the light is rotated in the effect operation portion 301 or the light is concentrated in the center by appropriately emitting light of the 31 and 48 LEDs 320a. It is possible to show the player an effect or a light emission effect in which light spreads outward.

  Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, it extends vertically along the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different from the outside of one of the left and right directions of the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces. A door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. A door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 in which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted behind each of 435, and a door frame left side lower decoration in which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted. A board frame 423, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 4 3b is mounted on the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is used for the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that guides to the front side of the frame right side decorative body 435 and irradiates forward, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower light guide. Since the light guide shaft portion 429a of the member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432. The second LED 433b emits light, so that the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated in a planar shape (surface light emission), and the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a of the left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are caused to emit light, they are irradiated forward. The light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the columnar light are used to form the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface, it is emitted forward from the front end (front end surface) thereof, and is guided in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The portions corresponding to the tips of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be lit in a spot shape. .

  Therefore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a The door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by causing the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b to emit light appropriately. 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are entirely decorated with light emission, a part of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is light emitting decorated, or the door frame left side decoration body 435 The entire side decorative body 426 and door frame right side decorative body 435 can be decorated in a light emitting manner while part of the side decorative body 435 is illuminated in a planar shape. Because, it is possible to show the variety of emission effect to the player, it entertained while hardly get bored the player can be suppressed a decrease in interest in the game.

  At this time, a system in which the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are separated, and the door frame right A system in which the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are separated from each other, and Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a and the plurality of second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are different systems, the left side of the door frame The first LED 422a and the second LED 4 on the decorative body 426 side When creating lighting pattern data of 2b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, for example, the door The data for the frame left side decorative body 426 side is diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or similar on the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. Since it is possible to use flow data, it is possible to simplify the process of creating lighting pattern data, and to construct more complicated lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). This makes it easy to show the player a variety of lighting effects with lighting patterns, as well as show the player a variety of lighting effects with high effects. , It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect against emission effect at the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 left and right outer sides of Tobiramado 101a.

  In addition, since the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are in the same system. The first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a) are sandwiched. Since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in the LED are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, The shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b The light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, which are thinned to be canceled and projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, The shadow of the light guide shaft part 437a can be made difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated and decorated in a uniform manner.

  In addition, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 which are decorated with light emission in a planar shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, A portion corresponding to the front end of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a is decorated with light emission in a dot shape by the one LED 432a and the first LED 433a. Because it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as emitting light partially in a spot shape while emitting light in a planar shape, it emits brightly in a dot shape The player's interest can be strongly attracted by lighting effects, etc., and spot light can be emitted in a spot like a conventional pachinko machine. The emission effect, the player can be a "hash" can be a pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 on one side (left side) in the left and right direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and door door right side lower on the other side (right side). Since the decoration board 433 is asymmetric to each other, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly operation of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to prevent the right side lower decorative board 433 from being mistaken, to improve the assembly workability and to suppress the increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Next, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, a dish left decorative board 273, a dish right decorative board 278, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and a door frame right provided on the door frame 3 around the door window 101a. The side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a white substrate is used as a decoration board on which LEDs are mounted, and LED drivers and connection connectors other than white attached to the decoration board are attached to the rear surface side of the board. I am doing so. Thereby, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board can be reflected to the front side so that the front decorative body and the like can be brightened and decorated, and the front side (player side). The decorative board is made inconspicuous.

  The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the substrate material itself may be white.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 is different from the character identification unit 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbol, number, model number, and the like, and the color identification unit 7b using different colors (indicated by different shades in FIG. 74). And have.

  Specifically, as the character identification unit 7 a, the character “lower left” is displayed on the dish left decorative substrate 273, the character “lower right” is displayed on the dish right decorative substrate 278, and the character “upper left” is displayed on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422. Of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the character “upper right” of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the character “lower right” of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The letters “upper middle” on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the letters “upper left” on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the letters “upper right” on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each has been given.

  Moreover, the color identification part 7b is made into a different color for every decoration board | substrate, and is given over the substantially front surface of the rear surface. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is partially applied so as not to hinder the soldering of LEDs or the like mounted on the decorative substrate, not the entire rear surface. .

  The identification unit 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a seal, applying a paint, and the like.

  In the above description, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example. However, various types of boards provided in the handle unit 180, the rendering operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like are described. An identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a or a color identification unit 7b may be provided on the decorative substrate.

  In the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the identification unit 7 (the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, a decoration board having a similar shape can be easily formed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the wrong decorative board from being assembled during the assembly operation, and to improve the assembly workability.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front side of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. Can be reflected on the front side of the decoration board to the front side to make the front decoration body brighter and decorated, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front side (player side) Can be better.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification unit 7b as the identification unit 7 is provided over substantially the entire decorative substrate, a desired (desired color) can be obtained only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. It is possible to recognize whether it is a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative boards overlap each other during assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative board is visible, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor involved in the assembly work is reduced. Can be simplified.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification unit 7b is different for each decoration board, when preparing the decoration board necessary for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identification unit 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when there is not enough color in the color identification unit 7b of the prepared decorative board, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing a decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or that the prepared decorative board is insufficient. For this reason, it is possible to reliably prepare the decorative board for the necessary amount, and the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to set up during assembly can be obtained. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, the time required for the assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification part 7a as the identification part 7 for distinguishing from another board | substrate is given to the rear surface of the decoration board | substrate, an operator reads the character of the character identification part 7a. Thus, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decorative board are white, and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear face, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative board is high. However, the decorative board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative board. It is possible to brighten and decorate the decorative body, and the player can be entertained by the light-emitting effect having a high effect, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional components such as LED drivers are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board so that the functional components are not seen from the front (player side). It is possible to prevent the appearance from deteriorating by being visible, and to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). Moreover, since the functional component is made invisible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional component white (or yellow) so that it is not noticeable, and the functional component can be used as it is. It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. 75 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  The main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame opening switch is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released from being pressed and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. Yes. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch can release the pressure and detect the opening of the main body frame 4. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to a side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove 530 a is inserted into the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is meandered in a plan view, and an illegal tool is seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated in a state where the ball is in a state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front side to the right side from the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The sphere straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B circulating in two upper and lower stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying the flow so that it flows in a single stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the back. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 91).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. 89A is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89B is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side when viewed from the back. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 89).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is lifted to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592, so that more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580 b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full sphere path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower rear portion of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 91).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. From any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed by voice (for example, “please pull out the ball!”) And the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the lower back. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main configuration. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  A body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 is formed with a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear power supply unit that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 96). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main body frame base 501 with the right side extending in the vertical direction of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about the vertical axis, and the left side is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame cage 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing the upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind. FIG. 100A is a perspective view of the ball tank as viewed from the front and the tank rail and the like assembled, and FIG. 100B is a perspective view of FIG. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the tank rail and its vicinity in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lowered in front view, and a front wall and a rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. The main guiding portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature that is curved on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical bite can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game by the interruption of the game can be enhanced. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of this can be achieved.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side becomes the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side becomes higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B, Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween, and a discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface overflows A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a flat plate shape from the position lower than the distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step 501n and the right step 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step 501n and the right step 501o, and extend in the form of a strip in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lowered. And a weir portion extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552d on the passage surface 552h to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end being slanted so that the distribution direction thereof is perpendicular to the slant rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends obliquely (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Accordingly, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 on the downstream side of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left and right direction outward and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (the right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank shape in the left-right direction in a plan view and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )is doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can hold the tip of the electric wiring by opening the holding portion by operating a lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are configured such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lowered as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper end edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent clogging due to the engagement of the game balls B (so-called ball balls).

  Since the bypass passage 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from strongly acting backward on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from pressing strongly in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 and flowing into the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour path 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed and bitten by the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the game balls B can be prevented from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Accordingly, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored in the overflow surface portion 501g and the bulging portion 553b is provided in the tank rail 553. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be moved away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 from the overflow surface portion 501m is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 103, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclination, and the game balls B are spilled outside the main body frame 4 to cause problems. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game ball is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Accordingly, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[4-12. Another embodiment such as a tank rail]
Subsequently, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the tank rail when a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail or the like according to another embodiment is viewed from behind. FIG. 107 (a) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the front, and (c). FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like shown in FIG. 107 exploded and seen from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like shown in FIG. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like cut along the car line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 553A and the like of the embodiment different from the above include the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A, the tank rail 553 of the above embodiment, The one rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 are different from each other, and the same components are described with the same reference numerals.

  The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment rectifies the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers it to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward. The tank rail 553A includes a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball rectifying member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stop member 557 capable of preventing the game ball B from flowing is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

  As shown in FIG. 107A and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c that meanders in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. The circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (spherical tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

  The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in a front view) including the meandering portion 553c on the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-like cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from the front and rear ends upstream of the center in the left-right direction of the cover portion 555a, An opening 555c penetrating the cover 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion where the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a spherical rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

  The sphere straightening member 556A is attached so that the upstream end side extends in the front-rear direction and is rotatable around an axis. The sphere straightening member 556A is provided between the pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a in the second rail cover 555A, passes through the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. It has a flat plate rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A makes contact with the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, so that the stages of the game balls B are easily broken and aligned in a row, and the uppermost side This prevents the game ball B from rapidly moving to the downstream side and prevents the ball biting from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

  According to the tank rail 553A and the like of the present embodiment, the assembled ball rectifying member 556A is located below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. Thereby, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion where the ball rectifying member 556A is attached in the tank rail 553A, It is possible to prevent contact with the sphere straightening member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A. May not be able to turn upward, and the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the contact of the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a with respect to the spherical rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted so that the ball bite and the ball in the tank rail 553A Occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

  Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A, the height of which becomes narrower toward the downstream side, among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages, if the upper game ball B first moves to the downstream side, the ball bite is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, the upper game ball B moves first downstream. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball biting.

  Further, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the contact of the electric wire to the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging. A terminal board (for example, the external terminal board 558) to which the electric wire is connected or a control board is arranged, or a terminal board or a control board to which many electric wires are connected is arranged near the tank rail 553A. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arrangement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), the terminal board, and the like can be provided.

[4-13. Another embodiment of substrate unit]
Next, a substrate unit 620A according to another embodiment different from the above will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 111 (a) is a front view of a substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the front right, and (c) is a diagram of the substrate unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. 112A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111A viewed from the upper right rear side, and FIG. 112B is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111A viewed from the lower right rear side. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) as seen from the front and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) as seen from the back. 115A is a cross-sectional view cut along the key line in FIG. 111A, FIG. 115B is a cross-sectional view cut along the cook line in FIG. 111A, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 116 is a bottom view showing a part on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a).

  The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is greatly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the substrate unit 620 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The base unit 660 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front base 661, and the power supply unit 620c is attached to the rear surface. An out ball passage 663 that is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 flows, and a game that flows through the out ball passage 663. An out sensor 664 for detecting the balls B one by one, a ball removal guiding portion 627 for receiving the game balls B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guiding them to the right in front view; A game ball B guided by the ball pulling guide portion 627 circulates and is provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662. And exits passage 665, and a passage wall member 666 is attached to the rear base 662 so as to close the rear side of the ball 抜排 out passage 665, a.

  The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is open to the left and right and left. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball pulling guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. In addition, a ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is opened rearward.

  In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of a transparent member. Therefore, the ball extraction guide 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball discharge passage 665 are also formed transparently. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be satisfactorily viewed from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, and it becomes easy to check the clogging of the ball. Yes.

  The out ball passage 663 is formed in a state in which the front is opened and opened on the front side of a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the up-down direction in the rear base 662. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

  The out ball passage 663 opens the ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is opened upward at the substantially central position in the left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1 and extends to the left and right, and the game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the lower guiding portion 663c, an out ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in one row while greatly meandering in the left-right direction, a lower guiding portion 663c that guides the game balls B rectified in one row by the out ball rectifying portion 663b, and the lower guiding portion 663c There is an out-ball discharge port 663d that opens downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 116).

  The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

  The out sphere rectifying unit 663b is inclined at a gentle angle so that the left end side becomes lower from the right end of the sphere discharge receiving unit 663a toward the lower side of the sphere discharge receiving unit 663a. The out-ball rectifying unit 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that becomes narrower toward the downstream side (left side), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving unit 663a. It is a depth. In addition, the portion on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b has a lower vertical height as it goes downstream (leftward). The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, in the out ball | bowl rectification | straightening part 663b, the game balls B can be arranged in a line.

  The lower guiding portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b that is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the vertical direction. It is bent in a curvilinear shape in the shape of a crank. Thereby, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guide portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranked portion of the lower guiding portion 663c. The lower guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the portion bent in the crank shape does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing part, it does not jump to the upper side of the out sensor 664, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

  The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch with high durability and long life because the game ball B passes frequently.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663 a in the out ball passage 663. The ball extraction guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens to the left in an upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream side that is bent rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. And connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 115 (a) and the like).

  The ball discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state of being opened rearward, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The ball extraction / discharge passage 665 has a rear end positioned forward by one outer diameter of the game ball B from the rear end of the rear base 662. That is, a gap corresponding to one or more game balls B is formed between the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

  The ball discharge / discharge passage 665 has an upstream end (left end) connected to the downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627 and has the same inclination as the ball discharge / reception portion 663a of the out-ball passage 663 than the ball discharge reception portion 663a. A lateral guiding portion 665a extending rightward, a longitudinal guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guiding portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the longitudinal guiding portion 665b ) And a ball outlet 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 116).

  Further, the ball extraction / discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that protrude inward alternately at a certain interval in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b. The ball removal / discharge passage 665 causes the game ball B flowing through the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward to alternately contact the plurality of protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag manner. The increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball discharge outlet 665c can be suppressed.

  Since the ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, the ball release lever 593 is operated to discharge the game ball B in the ball tank 552. Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

  According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 and then the out sensor 664. Is detected and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the like, the game ball B discharged to the ball extraction passage 580b side by operating the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is used as the out ball passage 663. It is made to discharge to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ball extraction discharge passage 665 which are separated from each other. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the exact number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (outballs) counted by the out sensor 664 are accurate. A pachinko machine 1 that can calculate a payout rate (a payout rate) can be obtained.

  The number of game balls B (the number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, The number of game balls B received in the winning holes such as the big winning hole 2005 and the prize winning hole 2006 and discharged from the game board 5 and after being put into the game area 5a, received in any winning hole. The number of game balls B that are received in the outlet 1008 and discharged from the game board 5 without being added, and the number of game balls B (number of shot balls) that are driven into the game area 5a That is.

  Since the payout rate (playing rate) changes depending on the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) The number is calculated as follows: number ÷ number of out balls in a predetermined period = payout rate in a predetermined period.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball path 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, and the out ball The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. Therefore, the game board 5 detects “out ball”. There is no need to provide the out-ball detection unit 3030, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce the cost.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided between the rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. Therefore, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge / discharge passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge / discharge passage 665 are moved to many game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 can reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like due to the electric noise caused by the static electricity, the induction current, etc. generated by the circulation of the game ball B and the malfunction of the game ball B. It can be.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the game ball B whose distribution speed is suppressed by the out-ball rectifying unit 663b of the out-ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the out sensor 664 from being consumed at an early stage and being damaged.

  In addition, when the payout rate per game (calculation rate) calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player wants to pay out a lot of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, the player can immediately recognize that the game ball B is highly likely to be paid out. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act in which a large amount of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. Since other players and game hall staff who install the pachinko machine 1 are more likely to be aware of fraudulent acts, they can be discouraged from executing fraudulent acts and have high deterrence against fraudulent acts. It can be.

  In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position that is not visible from the player side, the same reason as above can be seen by the attendant of the game hall, etc. Can detect misconduct. Further, when the displayed payout rate is different from a normal value during maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 or the like, the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay) The possibility of malfunctions in the board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.) can be considered, so that malfunctions can be dealt with at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

  Further, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, There is no need to provide an out-ball detecting unit 3030), the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the discharged game ball B. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) that can make the player more entertained by providing the production device in the secured space.

  Further, since the ball extraction / discharge passage 665 has the vertical guide portions 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude alternately, the game balls B can be distributed through the vertical guide portions 665b. Since the speed can be controlled, damage in the ball discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the game ball B that circulates, damage on the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

  In addition, an out-ball rectifying portion 663b meandering in the out-ball passage 663 is provided, and a vertical guiding portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrudes is provided in the ball discharge / discharge passage 665. Since the electric noise emitted from the game ball B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 can be reduced, it is provided nearby. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and to make the pachinko machine 1 with few malfunctions due to the circulation of the game balls B.

  In addition, since the out-ball discharge port 663d and the ball-out discharge port 665c of the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-out discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-out discharge passage Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, it is difficult for the game ball B to collide with other pachinko machines or walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility. It is possible to avoid damage to the machine or the wall. Further, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is difficult to scatter, and from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge discharge passage 665 on the island facility side. It is possible to easily collect the discharged game balls B.

  Further, a base unit 660 having a ball discharge passage 665 and an out ball passage 663 is provided below a portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached. The game ball B that has been driven into the area 5a can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 only by discharging downward, so that the configuration for discharging the game ball B in the game board 5 is provided. Thus, a simple (easy) configuration can be achieved, and the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced.

  Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are separated from each other. Since it is possible to avoid the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B that vigorously circulates in the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. The outer frame 2 can be prevented from being damaged, and the pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged can be provided.

  Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a part for collecting the game ball B on the island facility side ( It is not necessary to advance the out receiving part, the bucket, etc.) to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the labor of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the labor of moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball discharge in substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. 118A is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 118B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in FIG.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the site of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a joining portion 663e that merges with the ball discharge passage 665 is provided in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663. The joining portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end thereof is an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball-extraction discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d.

  According to the embodiment of FIG. 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out-ball discharge port 663d abuts on the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be inclined obliquely downward downward. . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, a portion for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island facility) from the front of the island facility (out receiving part, bucket, Etc.), the game ball B can be easily released to the side, and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island facility side.

  In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely rearward and downward by the guide piece 667, so that the out ball discharge port 663 d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if it is provided at a position near the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (position near the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received in a bucket or the like in the island facility. Accordingly, since the out ball passage 663 (out ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged as far as possible in the front part, the space behind the out ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, when the out ball passage 663 moves away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., it is caused by electric noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. that are generated when many game balls B flow through the out ball passage 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to circulation of the game balls B can be obtained.

  Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from the lower part of the out ball passage 663 at the part of the out ball discharge port 663 d. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the lower guiding portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opened downward so as to be able to receive the out sensor 664, and an out sensor accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f. And a sensor cover 668 for restricting the downward movement of the 664.

  The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the lower guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out sphere rectifying portion 663b in the out sphere passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660.

  The sensor cover 668 extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and has a base end portion 668a rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and detection of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass at a portion that matches the hole, and a locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the opposite side of the base end side of the main body 668a and can be elastically deformed. Have.

  The sensor cover 668 is attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outer side opposite to the out-sphere rectifying unit 663b so that the base end side is rotatable. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided on the outer side of the out-sphere rectifying portion 663b with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

  The sensor cover 668 is arranged so that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward in a state where the out sensor 664 is accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, and the downward movement of the out sensor 664 is restricted, and the out A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 118 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 is coincident with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is opened. It is discharged downward through. The through hole 668 b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663 d of the out ball passage 663.

  When the out sensor 664 is exchanged (removed), the latching claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the latching claw portion 668c and release the latching with the latching portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated around the base end side of the main body portion 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, so that the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 is moved to the lower surface of the out sensor 664. The out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 118B).

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in this embodiment, with the sensor cover 668 rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact fear object indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the outer frame 2) To the upper end surface of the lower assembly 40 of the outer frame, the upper end of the connecting cylinder 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. Thereby, even if the main body frame 4 is opened / closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a contact risk object, and the sensor cover 668 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

  According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B that are driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a large number of game balls B are distributed. However, since the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668 as described above, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the sensor cover 668 being opened, the sensor cover 668 is in contact with a contact risk object such as the outer frame 2. However, the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged. Specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, contact of many game balls B is possible. There is a possibility that the latching claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the vibration and the sensor cover 668 may be opened. If the sensor cover 668 is opened during the game and the out sensor 664 falls off, the game ball B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Due to the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality, the player of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the opened sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the contact cover such as the sensor cover 668, the main body frame 4 can be opened without contacting the contact cover, and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 118, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at a portion of the sensor attachment recess 663f on the outer side opposite to the out-sphere rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be seen well from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is clogged in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside. Therefore, the place where the game ball B is clogged can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B at an early stage.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright, and the out sensor 664 can be exchanged by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, or the out ball path 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform a check operation in the inside or the ball discharge passage 665.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. Therefore, the game that has been interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be resumed early. In addition to alleviating the frustration of the player due to the interruption of the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest, and also to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side it can.

  Further, since one end portion of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the sensor cover 668 is removed from the base unit 660 even when the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664. The sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being lost because it is in a suspended state and does not fall off.

  Further, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from the lower side, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) at the outer portion of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B circulate. Since the game ball B is attached so as to be rotatable, the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 by the circulation of the game ball B is the side (one side) that is rotatably attached to the base unit 660. The end portion of the base unit 660 is relatively small and is relatively small on the side of the locking claw portion 668c (the other end portion side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 as a result of many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 can be rotated at one end side. Since a large amount can be received, it is difficult to release the locking at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the sensor cover 668 from opening and the out sensor 664 falling off. .

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 129. FIG. 119 is a front view of the game board in which the center role etc. is made opaque in the pachinko machine. 120 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 119 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 119 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. . FIG. 123 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 124 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center role etc. is made transparent. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. 127 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 119, and FIG. 128 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. FIG. 129 is a front view of the game board showing a game area in which game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel and the obstacle nail.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a normal winning for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B are provided. A mouth 2003, a second start opening 2004, a grand prize winning opening 2005, and an accessory winning prize opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B includes a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, a big winning port 2005, a bonus winning port 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, in order to be accepted, a game for performing the operation of driving the handle 195 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a is performed.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 129, etc.) that abut on the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 127 and 166 and the like) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 The panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. And further.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 is composed of a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a prize winning opening sensor 2513. , First V winning port sensor 2514, first lose mouth sensor 2516, second V winning port sensor 2515, third lost port sensor 2518, start port solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning port solenoid 2512, first swing Minute solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution drive motor 2560, third distribution left drive motor 2561, third distribution right drive motor 2562, third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563, third Distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, magnetic sensor 2010, Movement sensor 3003 and out the sensor 664, is for relaying the connection with the like.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (three here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are game regions. A first start opening 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and a normal winning opening 2003 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a. And the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port that allow the game ball B to be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the normal winning port 2003. The big winning opening 2005 and the first start opening 2002 or the second start enabling the reception of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by the reception of the game ball B to 2004 Mouth 2 In response to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to 04, it is accepted in the accessory prize winning port 2006 and the feature prize winning port 2006 that can accept the game ball B. A first V winning port 2007 and a second V winning port 2008 to which an opportunity for acceptance is given to the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a. I have.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning ports 2001, and a side upper left unit that is attached on the left side of the side unit 2200 slightly on the front side. 2300 and an attacker having a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005, which are attached to the right side of the front port of the starting port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. Above the unit 2400, the start-up unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, in the center in front view in the game area 5a And the upper attached to and character object winning opening to close 2006 includes a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 frame-shaped center won game 2500 has the.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning port 2003, a second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the second starting port 2004, And a big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005. The center prize 2500 includes a prize winning sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006, and a first V prize opening for detecting the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. A sensor 2514 and a first lose mouth sensor 2516 for detecting the game ball B received in the first lose mouth 2535 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall in a box shape attached to the rear face of the game panel 1100 and opened frontward. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 has a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a first unit provided in the start port unit 2100. And a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in one start port 2002 (see FIG. 166).

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached in the back box 3010, and the lower front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and from the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. A lower ball discharge unit 3150 that receives the game ball B and discharges it downward, and a first distribution device 2530 and a second distribution of the center accessory 2500 that are attached to the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. A back right ball discharge unit 3170 for receiving the game ball B from the device 2540 and discharging it downward.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 extending along the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the light guide plate effect unit 3100. A back front lower right presentation unit 3300 attached to the lower left side on the front side, a back front lower right production unit 3400 attached to the lower right side on the front side of the light guide plate production unit 3100, and a back upper decorative body in the back front production unit 3200 A sub-status indicator 3500 provided in the vicinity of the right end of 3211 so as to be visible at all times.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 130A is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 130B is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left side in front view, and the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side thereof is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000 and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with the notch portion 1103 of the game panel 1100, and penetrates the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1103 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. Yes.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparently so that the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 129 and the like).

  The game panel 1100 is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The gaming panel 1100 is the lowest position in the gaming area 5a, and an out recess 1101 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. The gaming panel 1100 is formed with a plurality of openings 1102 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the game panel 1100 includes a notch 1103 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1103 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch 1103 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 face forward. Although not shown in detail, a decorative sheet with a pattern and decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 125 and FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 115). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 166) for controlling game contents and payout of the game ball B, a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 123) for setting game performance, A main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200 is provided.

  The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed, Or, whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor. 2513, first V winning port sensor 2514, first lose mouth sensor 2516, second V winning port sensor 2515, third lost mouth sensor 2518, start port solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning port solenoid 2512, first The distribution solenoid 2532, the second distribution solenoid 2545, the third distribution drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, the third distribution right drive motor 2562, the third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563, the first Three rotations left rotation detection sensor 2564, Third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, Magnetic sensor 20 0, and is connected to the vibration sensor 3003, and the out-sensor 664, etc.

  The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting value, a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the setting value, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) It may be electrically connected via By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The setting change board 1311 has vertical distance dimensions of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal dimension of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310. A center line that is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction and passes through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and a center line that passes through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311. It matches.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the center line along the right side of the setting change board 1311 on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is A position that becomes the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line along the left side of the control board 1310. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is disposed, and a setting having a pressing operation unit above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A change button 1311b is disposed, and is a setting change permission lamp that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and at the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting change button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting indicator 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED indicator with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and in the vicinity of the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310 A base monitor 1310h is arranged which is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) from the center toward the right side from the center to the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation portion is arranged.

  In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape extends in the vertical direction) In this state, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted in the insertion slot, there is no other The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

  When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turned on for the first time, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the setting key ON signal is set. Input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to be turned ON, and the determination key ON signal Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF, and the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the setting key switch 1311a turned ON. When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. Can be turned OFF. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions that are completely different from the function of the setting key ON and the function of the determination key ON can be realized by only the single setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. Only the setting key switch 1311a can be used to perform the operation for turning the setting key ON and the operation for turning the enter key ON together.

  The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are each via an opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although it is exposed, the “clearance” formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, respectively. In order to prevent the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 from being modified by intruding a wire or the like from the wire, a wire intrusion prevention portion is formed on the cover body with respect to these openings. . Although the setting indicator 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparently as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

  In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting key switch As a routing between the wiring pattern through which the 1311a OFF signal is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is not brought close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) of the setting change board 1311 is also formed at a distance, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed on the main control board 1310. Is transmitted through the wiring pattern (that is, the setting key switch 1311a A wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting the determination key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a) and the setting switching button 1311b. Are routed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the routing from the RAM clear switch 1310f is also routed to each other. It is formed so that it may not approach to (separate from each other).

  The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, the case where the setting value setting is changed will be briefly described first, and the case where the current setting value confirmation display is performed will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the set key is an important key that can be used to check the current set value that has been set. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

  When changing the set value, the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. The “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is set ON must be satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting value checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), Setting is performed by opening the main body frame 4 and then inserting the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Note that, as the “predetermined set value change permission condition” described above, a condition that an operation signal is input by further operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be used. That is, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure), and the setting key switch 1311a is opened. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and When the “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied, the setting value setting change may be executable.

  A person who changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then attaches the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Setting is performed by performing an opening operation, then inserting a setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform a first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a of FIG. Thus, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has a current set value stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 when the set key cylinder of the set key switch 1311a is first turned ON). The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

  When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is input. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a determines the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the setting value 6 is incremented by 1 and reaches the setting value 6 which is the maximum value, the control returns to the setting value 1 which is the initial value, and is incremented by 1 again to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

  The person who changes the setting value sets the setting value by rotating the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the setting key with the setting key switch 1311a turned ON). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotational position of the cylinder, The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  The setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position that is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set ON) (that is, the setting key When the switch 1311a is turned back to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder), a determination key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. After pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, the setting value is determined simply by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder as it is. Workability is improved.

  The person who changes the setting of the setting value returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the determination key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it OFF. The setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which it is not displayed, and switches from a state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is lit to a state in which it is turned off.

  The person who changes the setting of the setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value setting. To complete.

  When confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, the outer frame 2 after power recovery after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on first. It is necessary to satisfy the “predetermined setting value display permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the operation. In other words, the person who performs the confirmation display of the set value that is actually set first checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (the state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Then, the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the first key is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key 1313a is turned on.

  A person who confirms and displays the currently set value first checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (the state in which power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure), and then the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has a current set value stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 when the set key cylinder of the set key switch 1311a is first turned ON). The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c is kept off, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the pressing operation is not performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

  When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set value completes the confirmation of the currently set value, the original position (i.e., the original position (i.e. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder. The setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which it is not displayed.

  A person who confirms and displays the currently set value removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to set the current setting. Complete the confirmation display of the set value.

  As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is that the predetermined set value change permission condition is the power after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the 60-degree rotation operation and the first ON operation, the preset setting value display permission condition is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 after the power is restored or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Key cylinder Set jack key is inserted, it is necessary to set the key cylinder is set key ON operation by the first ON operation is 60 degrees rotation operation toward the clockwise direction. As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on when the setting key is inserted, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. The set value change permission condition requires “when power is restored”, while the predetermined set value display permission condition requires “after power recovery”.

  Here, the set value will be briefly described. The “set value” is a probability for determining whether or not a big hit or not, and a probability for determining whether or not a lottery or not. It is possible to change the probability for the lottery determination at the time of transition to time, the distribution ratio to the area advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous for the player (that is, what the player acquires) The probability (advantage) that the number of game balls B that can be increased can be increased) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, from setting value 1 to setting value 6. A probability (advantage degree) that is advantageous for the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, Big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of decision value for decision, small hit determination table that defines the proportion of small hit determination value that indicates winning for small hit, and the ratio of decision value for determination of small hit symbol A small hitting symbol determination table, a normal transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from the time of probability change to normal times is specified), or used at various allocation rates associated with set values Select various tables (for example, a distribution table in which a distribution time is defined, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid) That. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, the various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used in various allocation rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. In some cases, the values differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. In addition, as the setting values described above, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 were used, but the setting values may be smaller or larger than this. It may be a thing. For example, four set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4 may be used, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting indicator 1310g displays the set value, and the main control MPU 1310a checks the contents of the RAM contained in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is turned off, the content stored in its own RAM is abnormal (or trusted) Display an error message to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 out of the game balls B launched in the game area 5a. The number of game balls B is displayed. Out of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 166 and the like), and this detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. Input to the main control MPU 1310a.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the count result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is set from the initial position to the setting key switch 1311a. Rotate only the range up to the rotational position of the set key cylinder with the key turned on. It may be used as the setting key switch 1311a 'that can be. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a ′ is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a ′ can be turned ON by turning it 60 degrees toward the direction and turning OFF, and the signal of this decision key ON is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be described as “determination key modification (1)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation part of the determination key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the determination key button, and corresponds to the pressing operation part of the determination key button. The wire intrusion prevention portion is attached to the cover body so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by intruding the wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the opening. It becomes the structure to be molded. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the determination key button pressing operation unit is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the determination key button pressing operation unit When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

  Note that the position where the determination key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be in the vicinity of the setting key switch 1311a or in the vicinity of the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused with each other. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). In addition, a button with a cover that covers either one of the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b so as not to confuse the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation unit). The cover may need to be opened.), The pressing operation unit may have a different color, or the outer shape of the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. Different parts may be employed, or other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part may be employed as the determination key button. As other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation section as a determination key button, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide section, a rotary switch having a rotation operation section, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key board and the setting switch button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switch button 1311b are routed. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection of the setting change board 1311 to the terminal of the connector SMCN (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the routing of the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the determination key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are not close to each other ( Formed apart from each other). Further, when the determination key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The setting key switch 1311a ′ can be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the set key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “decision key modification (2)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a palm A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not a finger is touching, and play A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the game ball B is forcibly stopped at the will of the person is branched at the payout control board 633 and is controlled via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310 and the presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 195. When not touching, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the enter key is ON. While it can be determined that the game ball B has not been forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (including a handle touch sensor mode (including a single button operation sensor mode). May be described as “determination key modification (3)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a firing control unit of the payout control board 633, which will be described later, is used. The firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b on the payout control board 633 and paid out. Through the control board 633, is input to the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse with which 100 gaming balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the firing reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, and determines that the determination key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “determination key modification (4)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the operation of the player sitting on the facing side of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. Range sensor is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from this distance sensor is controlled peripherally via the relay board When the signal is input to the plate 1510, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and is determined based on the detection signal. The presence or absence of key ON may be determined. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted from the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the player's action can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on this detection signal. While it can be determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when it is determined that there is no operation (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be described as “determination key modification (5)”). .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by setting the setting key cylinder to be rotated by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to ON, and a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (i.e. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so as to return the key switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. At the same time, the setting key cylinder returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the determination key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as serial information, a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with the serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and the It is possible to determine which one of OFF is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as “determination key modification (6)”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by setting the setting key cylinder to be rotated by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to ON, and a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (i.e. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so as to return the key switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. At the same time, the setting key cylinder returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the determination key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as a pulse signal, a pulse output circuit which can output to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311. Instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . For example, when the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is information for transmitting the setting key ON, the pulse width is set to 1 ms, and for the information for transmitting the determination key ON, the pulse width is set to 3 ms. In the case of information indicating OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting key ON, the decision key ON, It is possible to determine which information is to be transmitted between OFF and OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as “determination key modification (7)”).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by setting the setting key cylinder to be rotated by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to ON, and a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position (i.e. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off so as to return the key switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. At the same time, the setting key cylinder returns the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the determination key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key O The intermediate voltage (for example, from zero V to 5 V) between the substrates ranging from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control substrate 1310 A comparator circuit is provided in the main control board 1310 and a comparison result by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310a. You may determine ON / OFF, ON / OFF of the determination key ON signal, and ON / OFF of the OFF signal. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as “determination key modification (8)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the dispensing control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing key button pressing operation portion is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the determining key button, and the pressing key button pressing operation portion corresponds to this. And a structure in which the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the wire or the like cannot enter from the “gap” formed in the opening and the payout control board 633 cannot be modified. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the determination key button pressing operation unit is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the determination key button pressing operation unit When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

  Note that the position where the determination key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. A sticker on which the name of each button is printed is attached to the cover body of the payout control board 633 at a position corresponding to each of the decision key button and the error release switch so that the decision key button and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). Also, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation part of either the determination key button or the error release switch (a cover for pressing the pressing operation part is used so that the determination key button and the error release switch are not confused). May be used, or the pressing operation unit may have a different color, or the outer shape of the determination key button and the error release switch or the shape of the pressing operation unit. Different types of switches may be employed, or other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit may be employed as the enter key buttons. As other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation section as a determination key button, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide section, a rotary switch having a rotation operation section, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. A switch can be mentioned. Also, in the case where the payout control board 633 is provided with a decision key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, payout is performed as a wiring pattern between the decision key button and the error release switch. The control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection of the payout control board 633 to the connector terminals (connector terminals of the main control board 1310) is also formed apart from each other. Also on the main control board 1310, the routing of the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are not close to each other (separate from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The setting key switch 1311a ′ can be used (the determination key button mode (the setting key switch 1311a ′ mode may be included) may be described as “determination key variation (9)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the dispensing control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The signal from the error release switch is branched in the payout control board 633 and passed through the payout control board 633. Is input to the main control MPU1310a control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of this signal. As described above, the error cancel switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display. After the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completely started up (turns on various control boards at power-on). When the time process is completed and the interrupt process is performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while based on the signal from the error release switch. Thus, when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Accordingly, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as “determination key modification (10)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the dispensing control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 determines the logic of the signal from the error release switch. A command is created by monitoring in the port input process of the time process, the command created in the command transmission process of the power-on process of the payout control unit described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 that has received this command The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the enter key is ON. As described above, the error cancel switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display. After the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completely started up (turns on various control boards at power-on). When the time process is completed and the interrupt process is performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on a signal from the error release switch in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, and notifies the fact that the payout control MPU has operated. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON. On the other hand, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to notify that. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Accordingly, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the error release switch mode 2 may be described as “determination key modification (11)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Rotate 60 ° counterclockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311a turned OFF) and turn OFF 60 °, and further rotate 60 ° counterclockwise) Second ON operation Thus, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to ON, and a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the R An operation signal from the M clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, branched at the payout control board 633, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the enter key may be determined based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more accurately, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f) ), When performing a setting change in which the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) Be sure to clear all of the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so the RAM clear switch 1310f Can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the decision key ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. In That. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON.

  The pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The wire intrusion prevention unit covers the opening so that the dispensing control board 633 cannot be modified by intruding the wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the opening and the corresponding opening. It becomes a structure to be molded.

  Note that the position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation section described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be formed on the cover body instead of this seal). In addition, a button with a cover that covers either one of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch (to press the press operation portion so as not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch). The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation portion may be used, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch or the pressing operation. Different parts may be employed, or other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. Various switches can be mentioned. When the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection of the payout control board 633 to the connector terminal (the connector terminal of the main control board 1310) is also formed apart from each other. Also, in the main control board 1310, the routing of the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are not brought close to each other (mutually. Formed apart). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only within the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be referred to as “determination key modification (12)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Rotate 60 ° counterclockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311a turned OFF) and turn OFF 60 °, and further rotate 60 ° counterclockwise) Second ON operation Thus, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to ON, and a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the R The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the operation signal from the M clear switch 1310f in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and creates a command. The command created in the command transmission process of the process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has received this command may determine whether the determination key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more accurately, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f) ), When performing a setting change in which the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) Be sure to clear all of the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so the RAM clear switch 1310f The main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated and receives a command to notify that, it can be determined that the determination key is ON. On the other hand, from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 Operation of It can be determined not determined key ON when receiving a command to communicate that fact to determine that RAM clear switch 1310f pressing element when is not being operated dispensing control MPU of based on No.. Accordingly, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (RAM clear switch mode 2 (the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) “decision key modification (13)”. ").

  In the embodiment described above, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the original position, and further counterclockwise The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees toward the main axis), and the determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The MPU 1310a is input, but instead, the outlet left sensor 30 2 and the out port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via (via) the payout control board 633, and the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal from 3033. As described above, the game ball B launched into the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. The game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a is a case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, and the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor. Based on the detection signal from 3033, when the out port 1008 collects the game ball B, it can be determined that the enter key is ON. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not opened (that is, closed) with respect to the main body frame 4, and / or based on the detection signal from the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 When the out port 1008 is not collecting the game ball B, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (out port switch). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “determination key modification (14)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to set the determination key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the original position, and further counterclockwise The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees toward the main axis), and the determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The MPU 1310a is input, but instead, the outlet left sensor 30 2 and the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitor the logic of the detection signals from the outlet right sensor 3033 in the port input process of the power-on process described later, and creates a command. The command created in the command transmission process at the time of turning on the power may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has received this command may determine whether the determination key is ON. As described above, the game ball B launched into the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. The game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a collects the game ball B by the out port 1008 based on the detection signal from the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later. The payout control MPU determines that the determination key is ON when the payout control MPU determines and receives a command to that effect, while the payout control MPU determines that the game ball B is not collected through the out port 1008. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (out port switch). Mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key modification (15)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to set the determination key ON.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the full detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574 or a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the payout control board 633 branches and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the decision key is ON. Alternatively, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 uses the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 to perform port input processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later. The command generated in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has received this command determines The presence or absence of key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the payout unit of the payout unit). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key modification (16)”.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on this detection signal, it is determined that the determination key is ON when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. While it is possible to, it can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set ON. The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “decision key modification (17)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to set the determination key to ON. Thus, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a receives the signal from the door frame opening switch. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it is determined that the enter key is ON based on the detection signal While it is Rukoto can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the body frame 4 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “decision key modification (17)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to set the determination key to ON. Then, the door frame 3 is closed again, the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the main body frame 4 needs to be closed with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set ON. ) By turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position) and turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise) and setting it to the second ON position by setting the key switch 1311a. The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is connected to the main control board 1310. 1310 (set key switch mode may be changed to “decision key modification ( 8) "and there is a case to be described).

  In the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set ON. ) By turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position) and turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise) and setting it to the second ON position by setting the key switch 1311a. The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is connected to the main control board 1310. 1310 and a setting key with the setting key switch 1311a turned ON The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the Linda from the rotation position to the initial position and turning it off, and this OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the enter key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (setting key switch 1311a ′). Mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key modification (19)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation unit. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation part of the determination key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the determination key button, and corresponds to the pressing operation part of the determination key button. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the determination key button pressing operation unit is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the determination key button pressing operation unit When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

  Note that the position where the determination key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The cover of the main control board box 1320 is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused with each other. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). In addition, a button with a cover that covers one of the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so as not to confuse the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the pressing operation unit). The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation unit may be used, or the outer shape of the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f or the pressing operation. Different parts may be employed, or other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part may be employed as the determination key button. As other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation section as a determination key button, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide section, a rotary switch having a rotation operation section, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the determination key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). When the determination key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The setting key switch 1311a ′ can be used (the determination key button mode 2 (the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key variation (20)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more accurately, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f) ), When performing a setting change in which the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) Be sure to clear all of the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so the RAM clear switch 1310f The main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (RAM clear switch). Mode 3 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key modification (21)”. Note that the period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is sent to the payout control board 633 as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to function as an error release switch described later, an error release switch is not required on the payout control board 633.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a normal winning opening provided on the game board 5 is provided. 2003 normal winning opening sensor 2401, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second start opening sensor 2402, large winning opening) The main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input based on these detection signals. The presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (various sensors and the like). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “determination key modification (22)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 in order to set the determination key ON. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the winning port or to send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a receives a stepping motor, a DC motor, Controls the operation of movable bodies (actors) by controlling the drive of electrical drive sources such as solenoids, and optical When determining the original position or operating position of the movable body (workpiece) based on the detection signal from a sensor (photo sensor, distance measuring sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a is based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. May determine whether the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (optical role). An aspect of the object sensor (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key modification (23)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to set the determination key to ON, and the optical sensor is located at the original position of the movable body (the accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (the accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input is output from the magnetic sensor 2010. Whether the decision key ON based on the output signal may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the magnetic sensor of the magnetic sensor). The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key modification (24)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to set the enter key ON.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined in the game board 5. In the case where the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting an illegal act of entering various winning holes and gate portions (gates) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310 a detects a signal from the vibration sensor 3003. The presence / absence of fraudulent behavior may be determined based on the above and the presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set ON. A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key modification (25)”). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to set the enter key ON.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to play the game. The game ball B is operated by malfunctioning various sensors of various winning openings provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580. When the game board 5 or the payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor that detects a fraudulent act that is acquired correctly, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraud based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and from the radio wave sensor. The presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor). The mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key modification (26)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to set the enter key ON.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). In this way, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation section unit 350 can be used. The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 for detecting the pressing operation of the touch, the touch operation unit of the effect operation unit 350 The detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of 02 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched at the peripheral control board 1510, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the above, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (effect operation button). The unit form (the form of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “determination key modification (27)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 configured by the cover body and the base body. It may be accommodated in the body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then to open the main control board box 1320 The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding thereto. The setting change board 1311 can be modified by infiltrating a wire or the like from a “gap” formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the determination key button. The wire intrusion prevention portion is formed in the cover body with respect to the opening portion so that the opening portion cannot be formed. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is different from that of the main control board box 1320 described above, when the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. A setting change board cover opening / closing switch that can detect opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirect) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. You may comprise. Based on the detection signal from the opening / closing switch for setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the preset setting value change permission condition described above (setting change board box) May be described as “determination key modification (28)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected to each other, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to prevent unauthorized modification. Wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal, wiring pattern for transmitting the determination key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and setting switching button 1311b As a routing with the wiring pattern to which the signal from the terminal is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the terminal (main control) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 The connection of the board 1310 to the connector MSCN terminal) is also formed at a distance. The main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a determination key ON for the setting key switch 1311a). The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of (1) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b should not be brought close to each other ( The wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted are formed. For any one of the wiring patterns, the setting change board 1311 is used. The connector is connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN (inter-board connection). Alternatively, the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (a wiring pattern routing mode). It may be described as “determination key modification (29)”).

  Moreover, you may employ | adopt the aspect suitably selected among the modification (1)-(29) of the determination key mentioned above, and may employ | adopt the aspect of the selection combination of a modification ("determination key modification (30)" ").

  In addition to the probability for the lottery determination as to whether or not the big hit or the probability for the lottery determination as to the small hit with the set value described above, in order to determine the lottery when shifting from the probability change to the normal time , The distribution ratio to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of game balls B that can be acquired by the player is increased). The probability (degree of advantage) is preset. In the present embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 toward setting value 6. The probability (degree of advantage) that would be advantageous to the player was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from the set value 1 to the set value 6, there is a probability (advantage degree) that other pachinko machines are advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value set in advance. That is, a game specification that has a probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player as a plurality of set values in advance and requires a setting change, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification with a probability (advantage) that has a single preset value in advance and does not require any setting change. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in design according to such a game specification and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are changed. Therefore, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations are provided depending on the game specifications. Therefore, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are required not to depend on the game specifications, that is, to be able to be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

  For example, in a game specification where the probability (advantage degree) that is advantageous for the player has only a single set value in advance and the setting change is not required at all, the probability (advantage degree) that the setting value is advantageous for the player The setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 should be dealt with by a design change by software that assigns the following contents. Can do.

  For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area (excluding a specific area of the entire RAM area) of the RAM built in itself (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (the activation method of the pachinko machine 1 can be varied). In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (object) to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of a light emitter such as a lamp or LED, the set value 1 is “all operations (movable body (portable object). The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that designates “operation of the object (lighting object)” is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that designates “operation of the movable object (object)” is assigned as the setting value 2 and is set. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that designates “lighting of the luminous body” is assigned as the value 3, and the detailed operation of the movable body (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation region, other An actual machine check operation pattern 4 for designating an interference check with a structure or another movable body (an accessory) and an operation order such as an operation order with another movable body (an accessory)) is assigned. 1 port unit of light emitter (main control MP An actual machine check operation pattern 5 that designates “lighting of a light emitting body in a predetermined output port unit 1310a (that is, for each output port)” is assigned, and an actual machine check that designates “no operation” as a setting value 6 is assigned. An operation pattern 6 is assigned (the change setting mode of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared may be described as “variation example (1) by common hardware configuration)”. Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (instant) and the lighting of a light emitting body such as a lamp or LED by repeatedly performing a main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, after the RAM is cleared. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 171) from the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control with the contents (actual machine check operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. The operation of the movable body (the accessory) to be controlled by the substrate 1510 and the lighting of the light emitter can be performed. Variations in the activation method of the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared can be provided by the change setting mode of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (a demonstration effect performed in a player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 designating “10 seconds” as the setting value 1 is assigned, the time setting pattern 2 designating “15 seconds” as the setting value 2 is assigned, and “20 seconds as the setting value 3”. Is assigned a time setting pattern 3 that designates “25 seconds” as a setting value 4, and a time setting pattern 5 that designates “30 seconds” as a setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that designates “35 seconds” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the time from the end of the change of the symbol until the player waits is changed to “Modification by common hardware configuration (2 ) "). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of setting to change the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state, the time from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration can be varied.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (a demonstration effect performed while waiting for a player) performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates “comical effect” as the setting value 1 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates “comical effect, operation effect of movable body (function)” as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that designates “serious effect” as the setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that designates “serial effect, operation effect of movable body (function)” as the setting value 4 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 is designated as a setting value 5 that designates “period drama style production”, and a demonstration effect setting is designated as a setting value 6 that designates “period drama style production, movable body (function)” Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the contents of the demonstration effect may be described as “variation example by common hardware configuration (3)”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. According to the mode of changing the contents of the demonstration effect, it is possible to give variations to the contents of the demonstration effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, a volume setting pattern 1 that designates “volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a volume setting pattern 2 that designates “volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3. Is assigned a volume setting pattern 4 that designates “volume 4” as a setting value 4, and a volume setting pattern 5 that designates “volume 5” as a setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that designates “volume 6” is assigned as the setting value 6 (the default volume change setting mode may be described as “variation example (4) by common hardware configuration)”. Note that the volume is set to increase from the setting value 1 toward the setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to a default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of “volume 1” assigned to setting value 1 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch decreases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement to the end of the minimum volume is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of “volume 6” assigned to the setting value 6 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch increases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is decreased), and the movement to the maximum volume side end is completed. When the maximum volume is adjusted, the maximum volume may be set, or the volume may be a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. With this default volume change setting mode, it is possible to give variations to the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of error notification sound volumes in error notifications such as various problems, gotoes, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, not dependent), and the pachinko machine that generates the error notification sound by setting the maximum volume to the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a store clerk to notice, there may be a case where the player who plays the game with other pachinko machines feels annoying. Therefore, what can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, an error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and an error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies “error notification volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2. , An error notification volume setting pattern 3 designating “error notification volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3, an error notification volume setting pattern 4 designating “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and “ An error notification volume setting pattern 5 that designates “error notification volume 5” is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 that designates “error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)” is assigned as a setting value 6 (volume of error notification sound) ) May be described as “variation example with common hardware configuration (5)”. It should be noted that the setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute, and the volume that can recognize the error notification sound when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that generates the error notification sound) is set to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume, It is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume that allows the error notification sound to be sufficiently recognized even if it is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a performs control to generate an error notification sound at an error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied according to the change setting of the error notification sound volume.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance can be increased or decreased from the default luminance with respect to the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 that designates “luminance 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 that designates “luminance 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and “ A default luminance setting pattern 3 that designates “luminance 3” is assigned, a default luminance setting pattern 4 that designates “luminance 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default luminance setting pattern that designates “luminance 5” as the setting value 5 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that designates “luminance 6” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the default brightness may be described as “variation example by common hardware configuration (6)”). is there). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing a main control timer interruption process, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, thereby performing lighting, blinking, and gradation point of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is an object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default luminance (default luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The brightness of the illuminant can be adjusted to turn on, blink, and tone points. Variations in the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs can be provided by changing the default brightness content.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in error notification such as various problems, goto, and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates “error notification luminance 1” as a setting value 1 is assigned to a lamp that is to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and “error notification luminance 2” is set as a setting value 2. An error notification luminance setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 3 to specify “error notification luminance 3” as a setting value 3 is assigned, and an error notification to specify “error notification luminance 4” as a setting value 4 An error notification is assigned the luminance setting pattern 4, is assigned the error notification luminance setting pattern 5 that designates “error notification luminance 5” as the setting value 5, and designates “error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)” as the setting value 6. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the brightness of the illuminant in error notification is set as “common hardware It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that although the lamp is not turned off, the lamp brightness is low and the lamp brightness is such that an error notification can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine. The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the illuminant by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interruption process described later to change the luminance of the illuminant in the error notification, thereby adjusting the lighting of the illuminant, blinking, gradation point, etc. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The brightness of the illuminant can be adjusted to turn on, blink, and tone points. Variations in the luminance of the light emitters in the error notification can provide variations in the luminance of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

  In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration described above satisfy preset setting value display permission conditions in the setting value confirmation display processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. It is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (setting value display). May be described as “variation example (8) by common hardware configuration”).

  Further, any one of the modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above may be selected as appropriate and employed in the modification example (30) of the determination key described above.

  In addition, the predetermined set value change permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. Therefore, the setting key must be turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a performs a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on process described later. Clear the game except for, and then advance the game by setting interrupt permission. Further, when the predetermined set value change permission condition described above is satisfied at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in a main control side power-on process to be described later and the main control built-in RAM The game is advanced by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then setting interrupt permission. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the above-described predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored, In any case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then advances the game by setting interrupt permission and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the preset set value change permission condition described above, when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure), The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. In addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (may be described as "a modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition"). is there).

  In addition, the predetermined set value display permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 after the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. Therefore, the setting key must be turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the set current set value in a set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control timer interrupt process described later. Displayed on the vessel 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the pressing operation unit is pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period during which the pressing operation is performed is limited. Therefore, as a predetermined set value display permission condition as described above, the outer frame 2 can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. In addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be pressed (when described as “a modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition”) There is). In this case, when a modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later, and does not perform the main control side power supply described later. In the process at the time of throwing in, the game is advanced by performing the initial setting and starting setting of the built-in WDT before performing the interrupt permission setting. Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side timer interrupt processing because the interrupt permission setting is not yet performed when the modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition is established and the set value confirmation display processing is performed. Without setting, the setting key is inserted into the detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the first ON operation by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) The main control built-in RA is read as input information to be described later by reading the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. Not stored in the input information storage area of the. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

  By adopting both of the above-described modified example of the preset setting value change permission condition and the above-described modified example of the preset value display permission condition, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a when the power is restored after the power recovery after the instantaneous power failure. The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the assumption that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later, and excludes a specific area from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. After that, the game proceeds by making an interrupt permission setting or the like, but when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a The set value confirmation display process is performed in the time process, and then the game proceeds by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the set current setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in the ball count process of the main control side power-on process described later. The number of game balls B that have been collected and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main-control-side power-on process, which will be described later, and the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 To display. Therefore, the set current setting value displayed by the setting indicator 1310g may be displayed on the above-described base monitor 1310h (may be described as a “variation example of how to use the base monitor”). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that has been set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by performing an interrupt permission setting after power recovery, the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball path 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting indicator 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

  In addition, any one of the above-described modified example of the preset setting value change permission condition, the above-described modified example of the preset value display permission condition, and the above-described modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the modification (30) of the determination key described above.

  In addition, any one of the above-described modified example of the preset setting value change permission condition, the above-described modified example of the preset value display permission condition, and the above-described modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. You may select and employ | adopt as modification (1)-(8) by the common hardware structure mentioned above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status and a normal lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. A normal symbol display composed of two LEDs, and a normal hold display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has a round consisting of five LEDs for displaying the number of times the open / close pattern of the big winning opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “winning” or the like. Display.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 122 and 126. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 houses peripheral control board 1510 (see FIGS. 166 and 167) for controlling the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control board box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like (see FIGS. 166 and 167, etc.). ).

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side surface and one right fixing piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely behind 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. At this point, it is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it upward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. 131 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 132 (a) is a perspective view of the front opening unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 (b) is the starting opening unit, side unit, side upper left unit in the front unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of an attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 133 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 133 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as seen from behind.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. Yes.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and a plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a first start port 2002 that is attached at a different position in the game area 5a and that is always open so that the game ball B can be received. The normal start port 2003, the second start port 2004 that allows the game ball B to be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the normal win port 2003, and the first start port 2002. Alternatively, a first prize opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B at the second start opening 2004, and the first start opening The prize winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B at 002 or the second start opening 2004, The first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 are provided to the game ball B received in the winning port 2006.

  A plurality (three here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged below the center in the up-down direction in the game area 5a and on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The normal winning opening 2003 is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second start port 2004 is arranged at the lower left of the normal winning port 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a slightly lower height than the first starting opening 2002 between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002. The prize winning opening 2006 is arranged above the normal winning opening 2003. The first V winning opening 2007 is arranged at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the normal winning opening 2003. The second V prize winning port 2008 is arranged right above the first starting port 2002 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a. The start unit 2100 has a first start port 2002, and the start port unit 2100 is a front left view. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning ports 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 which is attached to the left side of the side unit 2200 slightly on the front side. An attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the start opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005. Above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in front view in the game area 5a. And character object winning hole 2006 attached to Ri, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 has a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, the.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 and 132. The start unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  The start port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, so that the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward. Located just below the center.

  The start opening unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the back bottom ball of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3150.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 and 132. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. Three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two right general winning openings 2001 are opened upward, and the left general winning opening 2001 is opened upward.

  In the state in which the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, three general winning ports 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. .

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 and 132. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that is inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

  In the state in which the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 and 132. The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 (see FIG. 141 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 is formed in a triangular shape whose outer shape in a front view increases in height from the lower side toward the right. In this attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open upward in the upper right corner. The second start port 2004 is provided at the lower left, spaced apart from the normal winning port 2003 by one game ball B, and is always open forward. The special winning opening 2005 is provided in the vicinity of the lower left lower end of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened and opened forward.

  The attacker unit 2400 has an ordinary winning opening 2003 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball B, and the big winning opening 2005 is approximately 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball B in the left-right direction. The width is open.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning port 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 and a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting illegal magnetism are provided (see FIG. 166 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second start opening 2004, and a normal lottery in which the second start opening door 2411 is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. The start opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the result, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by acceptance.

  As shown in FIGS. 141, 142, and 145, the attacker unit 2400 is provided at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and above the second start opening 2004, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the left. The second start-up upper guide shelf 2421, the second start-up left standing wall portion 2422 provided on the left side of the second start-up upper guide shelf 2421 and extending vertically, and the second start-up upper guide shelf 2421 A second starting port right upright wall portion 2423 extending downward from the right end, and provided below the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 to the right of the grand prize winning port 2005, A large winning opening guide shelf 2424 which is inclined so as to become lower toward the left.

  The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 is located at the center between the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 in the left-right direction from the right side of the second starting port 2004 to the left end of the second starting port 2004. It extends to the left until near. The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 prevents the game ball B from being received into the second starting port 2004 from above.

  The second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 is provided to the left from the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 with an interval through which one game ball B can pass. The second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 extends vertically from a position higher than the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and higher than the lower end of the second starting port 2004. ing. The second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 has an upper end bent to the right.

  The second starting port right standing wall 2423 extends vertically from the right end of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to the same height as the lower end of the second starting port 2004. The second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 prevents the game ball B from being received from the right side into the second starting port 2004.

  The big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting port 2004 and is located at a position closer to the left than the left end of the second starting port 2004, and one gaming ball B from the lower end of the second starting port 2004. At a height lower by a minute, the left-right direction extends to the left and right so that the left end side is lower than the second start-port left standing wall portion 2422 and to the same position as the right end of the big winning opening 2005. As shown in the drawing, the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so that the right end side rises upward, and the inclination angle becomes tighter toward the right.

  Also, the attacker unit 2400 opens to the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the attacker that guides the game ball B to a position below the large winning opening 2005 below the large winning opening guide shelf 2424. A right passage 2430 is provided.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is located between the first opening 2431 that is long and vertically open on the upper right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421. A second opening 2432 that opens toward the upper left, a third opening 2433 that opens upward on the lower side of the second start port 2004, and a large portion below the big prize opening guide shelf 2424. A fourth opening 2434 that is long in the vertical direction on the right side of the winning opening 2005 and opens toward the left, and a discharge opening that communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens toward the left. 2435. The attacker right passage 2430 has a first opening 2431, a second opening 2432, a third opening 2433, and a fourth opening 2434 through which the game ball B can enter and a discharge opening 2435. It is possible to release the game ball B only from the outside.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is formed in a plurality of steps that are lowered on the left side. More specifically, the attacker right passage 2430 extends downward from a portion above the normal winning port 2003 on the right side of the normal winning port 2003, and to the left at a portion lower than the normal winning port 2003. After bending and wrapping around the lower side of the normal winning port 2003, and bending downward with the second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 as a part of the left wall below the normal winning port 2003, the big winning port guiding shelf 2424 is bent. It is bent to the left again at the lower part of the height, bent downward from the center of the prize winning guide shelf 2424 to the lower side of the right part, and extends to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400.

  In the attacker right passage 2430, a plurality of protrusions 2436 projecting into the passage and extending left and right are provided on the inner walls on the front side and the rear side of the portion extending vertically. The plurality of protrusions 2436 are provided so that the heights are staggered between the front side and the rear side. The plurality of protrusions 2436 can be guided downward in a zigzag shape while the increase in the downward speed of the game ball B is suppressed when the game ball B abuts.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is to the right of the prize winning opening 2005, and has a plurality of protrusions 2436 provided in a portion that is vertically long and has a fourth opening 2434 open. And a protrusion 2437 protruding into the passage (see FIG. 145 and the like). The presence of the protrusion 2437 can prevent the game ball B in the attacker right passage 2430 from being released from the fourth opening 2434 to the outside (left side) and can pass through the fourth opening 2434. Thus, the game ball B can be entered into the attacker right passage 2430 from the outside. Accordingly, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is released from the attacker unit 2400 into the game area 5a without being accepted into the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005.

  In addition, the attacker right passage 2430 has a fourth opening 2434 that is long open up and down at a portion that passes to the right of the big prize opening 2005, so that the game ball released to the left from the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 A game ball B, which is in contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the winning prize opening 2005 and flows to the right of the winning prize opening 2005 above the winning prize opening 2005, It can be received by the opening 2434 and can enter the attacker right passage 2430. As described above, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is released to the outside only from the discharge port portion 2435 at the lower end, and thus is guided to the right by the obstacle nail N above the big winning port 2005. The game ball B does not bounce back to the big prize opening 2005 side due to the presence of the attacker right passage 2430.

  Therefore, when the game ball B released from the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right from the big prize opening 2005 by the obstacle nail when the big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, No entry will be accepted into the grand prize opening 2005. For this reason, even if a path for the game ball B (here, the attacker right path 2430) is provided adjacent to the grand prize opening 2005, the wall of the path (fourth opening 2434) is on the side of the big prize opening 2005. It is possible to provide a passage for the game ball B adjacent to the big prize opening 2005 while suppressing excessive acceptance of the game ball B to the big prize opening 2005 without being bounced back to the big prize opening 2005. The pachinko machine 1 having a passage that has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines can be obtained.

  The second start port door 2411 is a plate-like shape extending from the lower side of the second start port 2004 to the vicinity of the second start port left standing wall portion 2422 and is moved forward and backward by the start port solenoid 2412. The second start port door 2411 is inclined so as to be lowered from the left end side toward the second start port 2004 on the right side, and is inclined so as to be lowered rearward at a portion of the second start port 2004. is doing. The second start door 2411 is retracted in a normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that has entered between the second start port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start port left standing wall 2422 falls on the big winning port guide shelf 2424 without contacting the second start port door 2411. Therefore, the second start port 2004 is not entered (accepted).

  On the other hand, in the normal hit state (open state), since the second start opening door 2411 is moving forward, the game ball B entered between the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422. However, it comes into contact with the second starting port door 2411, is guided to the second starting port 2004 side by the second starting port door 2411, and enters (accepts) the second starting port 2004. As described above, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed by the advancement and retreat of the second start port door 2411. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Open.

  The grand prize winning door 2413 is a rectangle that is long to the left and right, and is attached so as to be rotatable about a left and right axis about the long side on one side. The big prize opening door 2413 can close the big prize opening 2005 opened forward by making the short side upright by the attacker solenoid 2414, and the other long side is forward. By turning so as to move, the special winning opening 2005 can be opened and the game ball B can be received. The special prize opening door 2413 closes the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when no power is supplied), and opens the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when current is supplied).

  In the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is discharged on the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. Further, the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is detected on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 by the special winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening decoration board 2451 for decorating the second start opening 2004, a large winning opening decoration board 2452 for emitting and decorating the big winning opening 2005, and an attacker right passage 2430. And a lower right decorative board 2453 for light emission decoration (see FIG. 167). The second start port decoration board 2451 is provided behind the second start port upper guide shelf 2421, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted thereon. When the “ordinary hit” is selected by accepting the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003, the second start opening decoration board 2451 changes its light emission mode so that the player's interest is transferred to the second start opening 2004. I try to attract.

  The big prize opening decoration board 2452 is provided behind the big prize opening 2005, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted thereon. The special prize opening decoration board 2452 is configured such that when the special prize opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern by “big hit game” or the like, the special prize opening 2005 is illuminated and decorated so that the game balls received in the special prize opening 2005 are received. B is easy to see. The front lower right decorative board 2453 is provided below the second start opening 2004 and to the right of the big prize winning opening 2005 and behind the attacker right passage 2430, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted thereon.

  When the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the normal winning opening 2003 is below the two outlets of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, which will be described later. The second starting port 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal winning port 2003 and the third distributing device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is located at a position higher than the third distributing device 2550) of the center accessory 2500. The prize winning opening 2005 is located below the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 while being located at a slightly lower height than the three-distribution table 2554. In the state where it is attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the upper portion of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421), and the big winning opening 2005. It is installed.

[5-8e. Center character]
Next, the center object 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 140 and the like. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center combination and the opening of the game panel. FIG. 135 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center accessory, the game panel board, and the back left decorative body of the back unit, and FIG. 135 (b) is a front view of FIG. 136 (a) is a plan view of the third sorting device in the center accessory, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the third sorting device in the center accessory as seen from the front. FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the center distributing device of the third sorter as seen from the top and front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the center feature as the sorter from the front and bottom. FIG. FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the third sorting device in the center accessory. FIG. 140 (a) is an explanatory view showing the action of the protrusions provided at the second V winning opening and the third loser opening in the third sorting device of the center character, and FIG. 140 (b) is the second V winning opening. And it is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the game ball when the projection part is not provided in the 3rd loser mouth.

  The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the front front effect unit 3200 provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. , The front lower left rendering unit 3300, the back lower right rendering unit 3400, the sub-status display 3500, and the like can be viewed from the front.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped center base 2501 attached to the game panel 1100. The center base 2501 has a frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 extending in a plate shape in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant thickness, and extends in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the front frame portion 2502 in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction. A flange portion 2503, a frame-like rear frame portion 2504 extending rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2503 in a plate shape, and the center portion 2500 through the flange portion 2503. An attachment hole 2505 for attaching to the panel 1100.

  The center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500 has a flat flange portion 2503 extending in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction with respect to the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 and rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it can be reinforced by the flange portion 2503, and the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 are hardly distorted. In the center accessory 2500, at least the center base 2501 is formed to be transparent.

  The front frame portion 2502 is formed in a frame shape with a smooth surface bent. The front frame portion 2502 has a front frame upper right portion 2502a that is inclined in a straight line so as to be lowered toward the right from a position on the left side of the upper side of the frame in the left-right direction. . A front frame upper right portion 2502a of the front frame portion 2502 has an upstream space portion 2506 having a predetermined width in which the game ball B can circulate between the front rail 10001 and the outer rail 1001 in a state assembled to the game board 5. To form.

  The rear frame portion 2504 is provided with a plurality of line-like decorations extending in the front-rear direction on the inner peripheral surface side in the circumferential direction. This makes it difficult to see the opposite side through the rear frame portion 2504, and the first LED 3222 a and the second LED 3222 b mounted on the back left decorative substrate 3222 in the back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is possible to make it appear as if it is emitting light by irradiating light from the above. The rear frame portion 2504 is formed along the inner periphery of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. By attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is placed on the player side. It can be difficult to see from (front).

  The center base 2501 has a mounting hole in a state where the rear frame portion 2504 is inserted from the front into the large opening 1102 at the center of the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the flange portion 2503 is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100. The machine panel 1100 is attached to the game panel 1100 with a small screw screwed into the game panel 1100 through 2505. In a state where the center base 2501 (center accessory 2500) is attached to the game panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a However, it can not enter the frame.

  Further, when the center base 2501 is attached to the game panel 1100, the rear frame portion 2504 is positioned so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100. The inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is difficult to see from the player side (front) by a plurality of streaky decorations formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rear frame portion 2504.

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135 and the like, a flange portion 2503 extends to the inside of the front frame portion 2502 at the frame-like left side portion of the center accessory 2500 (center base 2501). In addition, the inner side surface of the front frame portion 2502 substantially coincides with the inner peripheral surface of the opening portion 1102 of the gaming panel 1100 as a whole, and a part thereof is positioned larger than the opening portion 1102. . An attachment hole 2505 for attaching to the game panel 1100 is provided in a flange portion 2503 at a portion located outside the opening 1102 in the front frame portion 2502.

  In other words, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 protrudes inward larger than the front frame part 2502 in the frame-like left side portion of the center accessory 2500, and the game A center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel 1100.

  As a result, the flange portion 2503 is extended to the inside of the front frame portion 2502 and nothing is extended to the outside at the portion that is the left side of the frame in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500. The obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to 2502. Therefore, since the area where the game ball B substantially circulates in the game area 5a can be extended to the position in contact with the front frame portion 2502, the distribution area of the game ball B can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself.

  In the center accessory 2500, the flange portion 2503 extends in a direction orthogonal to the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction. 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504, that is, the entire center accessory 2500 can be reinforced, and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2503, so that the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 The strength can be further improved. Since the flange portion 2503 is attached to the game panel 1100 via the attachment hole 2505 even at the portion extending to the inside of the front frame portion 2502, the game ball B in the game area 5a is attached to the front frame portion. Even if the flange portion 2503 in 2502 is in contact with the portion extending inward, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 can be maintained by the attachment to the game panel 1100 by the flange portion 2503 or the attachment hole 2505, etc. Deformation and breakage of the frame portion 2502 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, the strength and rigidity of the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the flange portion 2503. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact, the front frame portion 2502 is elastically deformed and elastic body. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being played like (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B that circulates in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by coming into contact with the front frame portion 2502, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. It is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

  Further, as described above, since the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the front frame portion 2502, the front frame portion 2502 in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is provided. Even if the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 divided by is increased, the substantial distribution area of the game ball B is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the display of the effect provided at the rear through the frame by enlarging the frame of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the distribution region in which the game ball B circulates in the game region 5a from being substantially reduced. It is possible to make the first image 3110, the second pattern 3120, etc. of the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 more easily visible, and the movement of the game ball B in the game area 5a In addition, the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain both the various effects seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be provided.

  Further, in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500, as described above, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 can be increased by the flange portion 2503. Therefore, the center base 2501 is molded from a mold by resin molding. When removing, it is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product.

  In the above embodiment, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is decorated with light emitted from the LED mounted on the back left decorative substrate 3222 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, Although what showed the inner peripheral surface of the opening part 1102 of the game panel 1100 difficult to see was shown, it is not limited to this. For example, a surface that faces the center side of the opening 1102 along the inner periphery of the opening 1102 between the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 and the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500. A decorative board for openings having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon may be provided. As a result, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved, and the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 can also be hidden by the decorative substrate for the opening, so that the appearance in the game area 5a is improved. Can do. In this case, by making the surface of the decorative substrate for the opening portion white, it is possible to make the decorative substrate for the opening portion inconspicuous and to make the rear frame portion 2504 lighter and decorated when the LED is made to emit light. Can do. Alternatively, the surface of the opening decorative board may be colored in a predetermined color that matches the concept of the game board 5, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. In addition, an opening decorative substrate may be provided over the entire circumference of the opening 1102, and the center accessory 2500 may emit light in a frame shape (annular), or “right-handed” or “left-handed” may be used. By making it emit light so as to circulate in a predetermined direction so as to prompt, it is possible to present and entertain a variety of light emission effects to the player.

  The center accessory 2500 is provided at the upper right corner of the center base 2501 and includes a guide passage group 2520 including two passages through which the game balls B can flow. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game ball B to the upper side of the attacker unit 2400.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the middle of one passage of the guide passage group 2520, and the first special lot drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is selected. According to the lottery result and the second special lottery result, the prize winning hole 2006 that allows the game ball B to be received, and the gaming ball B received in the bonus prize winning hole 2006 are stored on the accommodation unit 2531a side (V prize side) and the second A first distribution device 2530 that distributes to any one of the lose holes 2535, and a game ball B that is stored in the storage unit 2531a by the first distribution device 2530 (distributed to the V winning side) is the first V winning port. A second distribution device 2540 that distributes to either the 2007 or second loser opening 2543 and the game balls B distributed to the second loser 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 And the struck component 2550 to distribute to any deviation port 2555, and a.

  In addition, the center prize 2500 accepts the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 by using the prize winning opening door 2511 that can open and close the prize winning opening 2006. A prize winning port solenoid 2512 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by the game, and a prize winning port sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006; The first V winning port sensor 2514 that detects the game ball B distributed by the second distributing device 2540 and received in the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning device that is distributed by the third distributing device 2550. A second V prize port sensor 2515 that detects a game ball B received in the mouth 2008 and a game ball B that is distributed by the first sorting device 2530 and received in the first lose mouth 2535 A first lose mouth sensor 2516 to be detected (see the enlarged view of FIG. 143 (a)) and a second lose ball that is detected by the second ball sorter 2540 that is distributed by the second sorter 2540 and received in the second lose mouth 2543. The mouth sensor 2517 and the third loser mouth sensor 2518 for detecting the game ball B distributed by the third sorting device 2550 and received in the third loser mouth 2555 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 141, FIG. 142, and the like, the guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and an upper entrance is provided in the portion of the stop portion 1006. The upper entrance is composed of a second guide passage 2522 provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Each of the guide passage group 2520 (the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522) is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the game ball B flowing through the inside can be viewed from the front.

  The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically and short downward from the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 and then bends to the right at a right angle. When the first guide passage 2521 hits the right rail 1005, the first guide passage 2521 bends downward to the right rail 1005. It extends to the left from the bottom of the height of the game area 5a and is bent to the left at a height of about 3/4, and extends to the left so as to be lowered at a loose angle. The ball B is bent downward at a position on the left side and extended to the center height of the game area 5a, then bent rightward and extended to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bent downward and the exit is downward. It is formed in an open shape. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The prize winning port 2006 is provided in a portion extending leftward in the first guide passage 2521, extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length in the left-right direction of the portion, and opens upward. ing. The prize winning opening door 2511 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. The prize winning opening 2006 opens upward by moving forward and backward. Can be opened and closed. The prize winning opening door 2511 can move forward to close the prize winning prize opening 2006, and in the state where the prize winning prize opening 2006 is closed, a portion extending leftward in the first guide passage 2521. Can be guided to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

  The prize winning opening door 2511 is retracted by driving the prize winning opening solenoid 2512 to open the prize winning opening 2006, and the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 is returned to the prize winning opening 2006. Can be accepted. The prize winning opening door 2511 closes the prize winning opening 2006 when the prize winning solenoid 2512 is OFF (when power is not supplied), and is used when the bonus winning solenoid 2512 is ON (when current is supplied). The prize winning opening 2006 is opened.

  The second guide passage 2522 has an inlet opening upward at a position spaced leftward from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521 on the right end side of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the upper end entrance, and the first guide passage 2521 is bent backward at a position lower than the height of the first bent portion to the right. A portion extending downward on the left side of the accessory winning prize opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521 in a state bent downward on the rear side of the front surface of the panel 1100 and aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction; It extends downward so that the left and right directions substantially coincide with each other, bends to the right in the form of a crank at the central height of the game area 5a, then bends downward, and the lower right of the first guide passage 2521 The first guide passage 2521 extends to the lower right in the first guide passage 2521 in a state where the first guide passage 2521 and the front-rear direction are flush with each other after being bent forward at a portion lower than the portion extending toward the front. Along the underside of the part Bent rightward in the building so, then bent downwards so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is formed in a shape of the outlet is open downward.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are overlapped from the front by being arranged in the front-rear direction at portions extending vertically on the left side of the prize winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. Part 2520a. In this heavy viewing portion 2520a, both the game ball B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 and the game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 can be seen well from the front, It is difficult for the player to determine which passage the game ball B that circulates in the heavy viewing portion 2520a circulates.

  In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis on the upper side of the overlap portion 2520a, and below the overlap portion 2520a, It is twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis in the direction opposite to the upper side. The respective outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are opened downward above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided with a plurality of protrusions 2520b at intervals in the distribution direction of the game ball B, and the distribution speed of the game ball B abuts on the protrusion 2520b. Can be suppressed (see FIG. 124).

  The first distribution device 2530 is provided at a height between the prize winning opening 2006 and a portion extending downward to the right in the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521 (game) It is provided behind the front surface of the panel 1100.

  The first sorting device 2530 has a housing portion 2531a capable of housing only one game ball B on the outer peripheral surface, and a sorting rotator 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a sorting rotator 2531. A first sorting solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 166 and the like) for rotating the sorting rotator 2531 between a state in which the housing portion 2531a is facing the right side and a state facing the upper side. The cylindrical peripheral wall 2533 covering the outer periphery of the minute rotating body 2531 and the game ball B received in the accessory winning prize opening 2006 are passed through the upper part of the distributing rotating body 2531 in the peripheral wall 2533. A first distribution guiding path 2534 that leads to the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the minute rotating body 2531 and a rear opening at the lower part of the first distributing guiding path 2534, and the receiving portion 2531 a of the distributing rotating body 2531 Games not contained The first loser hole 2535 into which B enters and the ball ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 circulates and passes through the right side portion of the allocating rotator 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533 to the right. And a first losing port sensor 2516 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 143 (a)) for detecting the game ball B that has entered the first losing port 2535.

  The sorting rotator 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose outer peripheral surface is narrowed backward. The first end passage 2536 has a right end side bent rearward and then bent downward to communicate with the second sorting device 2540 side.

  In the first sorting device 2530, in a state where the first sorting solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 faces rightward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the prize winning prize opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534 and comes into contact with the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the sorting rotator 2531, Since the surface is formed in the shape of a truncated cone confined to the rear, the game ball B is guided rearward by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface and enters the first loser opening 2535.

  On the other hand, in the state where the first sorting solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the sorting rotator 2531 rotates counterclockwise, and the housing portion 2531a faces upward (see FIG. 143 (a)). reference). In this state, when the game ball B received in the winning prize winning opening 2006 passes through the first sorting guide path 2534, only one is stored in the storage portion 2531a. If the game ball B is further guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the prize winning port 2006 side in a state where the game ball B is stored in the storage portion 2531a of the sorting rotating body 2531, the game ball After B comes into contact with the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a, it enters the rear first lost mouth 2535. The game ball B that has entered the first loser opening 2535 is delivered to the back right ball discharge unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  When the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2531a, the first rotating solenoid 2532 rotates the sorting rotator 2531 in the clockwise direction so that the housing portion 2531a faces rightward. The game ball B housed in 2531a rolls from the housing portion 2531a to the right first athletic passage 2536 side and circulates through the first attitious passage 2536. The game ball B which has circulated through the first atari passage 2536 is sent to the next second sorter 2540.

  As described above, in the first sorting apparatus 2530, the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is either the second sorting apparatus 2540 side (accommodating portion 2531a side) or the first lose mouth 2535 side. Can be sorted.

  As shown in FIG. 129, FIG. 141, and the like, the second distribution device 2540 is provided below the first distribution device 2530 and behind the exit of the guide passage group 2520. The second distribution device 2540 is provided behind the first distribution guide path 2534 and the first ate passage 2536 of the first distribution device 2530.

  As shown in FIG. 143, in the second sorting device 2540, the game balls B housed in the housing portion 2531 a of the sorting rotator 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 and distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 side are distributed The second distribution guiding path 2541 extending up and down, the first V winning opening 2007 opened on the right side of the lower part of the second distributing guiding path 2541, and the first V winning opening 2007 extending rightward. And a first V prize opening sensor 2 that is provided in the first V prize passage 2542 and that detects the game ball B received in the first V prize opening 2007. 2514.

  In addition, the second sorting device 2540 is provided at the lower end of the second sorting guide path 2541 so as to open upward, above the second losing port 2543 and the second losing port 2543. A sorting door 2544 capable of opening and closing the losing port 2543, a second allocating solenoid 2545 for moving the allocating door 2544 forward and backward to open and close the second losing port 2543, and a left extending from the second losing port 2543 A second losing passage 2546 that is bent downward later, a second losing port sensor 2517 that is provided at the downstream end of the second losing passage 2546 and detects the game ball B received in the second losing port 2543; It has. The sorting door 2544 has a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward, and is inclined so that the right side is lowered.

  In the second sorting device 2540, when the second sorting solenoid 2545 is OFF (not energized), the sorting door 2544 is retracted, and the second loser opening 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, the game ball B enters the second losing port 2543 and passes through the second losing passage 2546. It is sent to the tri-distributor 2550 side.

  On the other hand, in the state where the second sorting solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the sorting door 2544 moves forward above the second losing port 2543, the second losing port 2543 is closed by the allocating door 2544, and the game is performed. The ball B cannot be received. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the sorting door 2544, and It will be guided to the right by the inclination and will enter (accept) the first V prize opening 2007. Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 circulates through the first V winning path 2542 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and then the back right ball discharge unit 3170 of the back unit 3000. Is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  When the ball game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 is received by the first V prize opening 2007 and detected by the first V prize opening sensor 2514, the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern. A “big hit game” that opens and closes is executed. The second sorting device 2540 can be viewed from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520.

  As described above, in the second sorting device 2540, the game balls B housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 are used as the first V winning opening 2007 or the second loser mouth. 2543 (third sorter 2550) can be assigned to either side.

  As shown in FIG. 133 and the like, the third distribution device 2550 is provided in a lower part within the frame of the center base 2501 in the center accessory 2500. The third sorter 2550 communicates with the downstream end of the second lose passage 2546 of the second sorter 2540 and guides the game ball B detected by the second loser mouth sensor 2517 to the left. Distributing guidance path 2551, provided at the left end of third distributing guiding path 2551, and cruising 2553 for releasing game ball B while turning it around the vertical axis, and provided below cruising 2553. And a second V winning opening 2008 is provided in the vicinity of the front end of the center in the left-right direction, and a third distribution table 2554 on which the game ball B can roll and a third in the third distribution table 2554 Two third lose holes 2555 penetrating downward on both the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008, and a third provided near the rear end of the third distribution table 2554 in the center in the left-right direction. A minute rotation body 2556 and a third distribution left rotation body 2557 and a third distribution right rotation body 2558 provided near the front ends of the left and right ends of the third distribution table 2554 are provided (see FIG. 136 to 139).

  Further, the third sorting device 2550 is attached to the lower side of the third sorting table 2554, and is attached to the lower side of the third sorting base 2559 and the third sorting base 2559 attached to the center base 2501. The third sorting drive motor 2560 for rotating the third sorting rotating body 2556 and the third sorting left rotating body 2557 mounted on the lower side of the third sorting base 2559 are rotated. A third distribution left drive motor 2561 for rotating the third distribution right drive body 2558 attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559, I have. The third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (see FIG. 166). ).

  The third sorting drive motor 2560 has a rotating shaft that protrudes upward through the third sorting base 2559. The third sorting left drive motor 2561 has a rotating shaft that protrudes upward through the third sorting base 2559, and a third sorting left rotating body 2557 is attached to the rotating shaft. The third sorting right drive motor 2562 has a rotating shaft that protrudes upward through the third sorting base 2559, and a third sorting right rotating body 2558 is attached to the rotating shaft.

  Each of the third sorting devices 2550 is attached to the third sorting base 2559, and a third sorting rotation detection sensor 2563 for detecting the rotation of the third sorting rotating body 2556; A third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and a third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution right rotation body 2558. A second V winning port sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008, a third lose port sensor 2518 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the third lose port 2555, and It has. The second V prize opening sensor 2515, the third loss opening sensor 2518, the third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 are arranged on the panel. It is connected to the main control board 1310 via the relay board 1710 (see FIG. 166).

  Further, the third sorting device 2550 is a spur gear-like drive gear 2566 attached to the rotation shaft of the third sorting drive motor 2560 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559. And a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 2567 that is engaged with the drive gear 2566 and is attached to a shaft portion 2556a that protrudes downward in the rotating body 2556 in the third distribution. The transmission gear 2567 has a diameter larger than that of the drive gear 2566 and decelerates the rotation of the drive motor 2560 during the third distribution and transmits the rotation to the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. The transmission gear 2567 has a detection piece 2567a that extends outward in a flat plate shape and is detected by the rotation detection sensor 2563 during the third distribution.

  Further, the third sorting device 2550 is a spur gear-shaped left transmission gear attached to the rotation shaft of the third sorting left drive motor 2561 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559. 2568, a spur gear-like left rotation detection gear 2569 that meshes with the left transmission gear 2568 and is rotatably mounted by a third sorting table 2554 and a third sorting base 2559, and a third sorting. A spur gear-shaped right transmission gear 2570 and a right transmission gear 2570 that are attached to the rotary shaft of the third sorting right drive motor 2562 between the table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559 are in mesh. A spur gear-like right rotation detection gear 2571 that is rotatably mounted by a sorting table 2554 and a third sorting base 2559 is provided.

  The left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. Further, the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. The left rotation detection gear 2569 has a diameter larger than that of the left transmission gear 2568 and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third sorting left drive motor 2561. The left rotation detection gear 2569 protrudes downward in the radial direction in a flat plate shape, and has a detection piece 2569a detected by the third distributed left rotation detection sensor 2564. The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a larger diameter than the right transmission gear 2570 and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third sorting right drive motor 2562. The right rotation detection gear 2571 protrudes in a flat plate shape from the middle in the radial direction and has a detection piece 2571a detected by the third distributed right rotation detection sensor 2565.

  The third sorting device 2550 is provided below the third sorting rotating body 2556 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, and can emit light upward. Between the third sorting rotary body 2556, the third sorting base 2559, and the third sorting middle rotating body 2556 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted. And a third sorting table decoration board 2573 which is provided below a portion between the V prize winning port 2008 and on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted.

  The third sorting device 2550 is attached to the front end side of the third sorting base 2559, and receives the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555 in cooperation with the third sorting base 2559. Passage forming member 2575 for forming a third distribution ball discharge passage 2574 for guiding and discharging the game ball B, a third distribution drive motor 2560, and a third distribution left drive motor 2561 and the third sorting right drive motor 2562 are covered from below with the lower cover 2576 attached to the lower surface of the third sorting base 2559, the croon 2553 and the third sorting table 2554. A transparent upper cover 2577 (see FIG. 127).

  The third sorting table 2554 is formed to be transparent. The third sorting table 2554 is formed in a cannonball shape whose outer shape in plan view has a semicircular arc shape on the rear end side and whose length in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the diameter of the semicircular arc. The length of the third sorting table 2554 in the front-rear direction is 2.5 times the diameter of the third sorting rotating body 2556. In other words, the diameter of the third sorting rotating body 2556 is 0.4 times the length of the third sorting table 2554 in the front-rear direction. Further, the diameter of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is about four times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm), and the length of the third distribution table 2554 in the front-rear direction is equal to the diameter of the game ball B. About 10.5 times. Further, the central table 2554a in the third distribution table 2554 has a length (width) in the left-right direction that is slightly more than about five times the diameter of the game ball B, and a length (depth) in the front-rear direction is the diameter of the game ball B. 5 times to 7 times.

  The third sorting table 2554 is provided in front of the third sorting middle rotating body 2556 at the center in the left-right direction, and has a substantially rectangular center table 2554a inclined so that the front end side is lowered, and the center table 2554a. Left table 2554b and right table 2554c which are long in the front-rear direction from a position behind the front end of the central table 2554a to a position behind the rear end of the third sorting middle rotating body 2556; The left table 2554b and the right table are provided in front of the central table 2554a, tilted so as to be lowered to the left and right sides with respect to the center in the left-right direction, and then bent backward at the left and right outer portions of the central table 2554a. A collection table 2554d that is inclined downward toward 2554c, a left table 2554b, and a right table It provided one step higher in the left and right outer sides of the respective table 2554C, has a side table 2554e front end side and the inner is inclined to be lower, the.

  The third sorting table 2554 surrounds the weir portion 2554f protruding upward from the left and right sides of the central table 2554a, the rear end side of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and the outside of the left and right side tables 2554e. As described above, the peripheral wall portion 2554g is higher than the diameter of the game ball B and extends upward. The dam portion 2554f suppresses the entry / exit of the game ball B from the left and right sides of the central table 2554a. The peripheral wall portion 2554g cooperates with the upper cover 2577 to prevent the game ball B from falling off the third sorting table 2554.

  The central table 2554a has a length in the front-rear direction slightly longer than the diameter of the third allocating rotary body 2556, and a length in the left-right direction is longer than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the central table 2554a has a rear end extending to a portion ahead of the center of the third distributing middle rotating body 2556, and both left and right sides are bent obliquely toward the third distributing middle rotating body 2556. ing. The central table 2554a is only inclined in the front-rear direction, and is horizontal in the left-right direction. Near the front end of the center table 2554a, a third loser opening 2555 is opened on both the left and right sides with a second V winning opening 2008 in the center in the left-right direction. The second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555 are round holes having the same diameter. Note that the second V winning opening 2008 is rounded at the periphery of the hole and rounded.

  The front side of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are the same in the front-rear direction as the front ends of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555, and the game ball B is more than the same part in the front-rear direction in the central table 2554a. It is located at a lower height about the diameter of. In addition, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are inclined in the front-rear direction so that the distance from each front end to the same front-rear part as the rear end of the central table 2554a decreases toward the outside in the left-right direction. The rear side is substantially horizontal. Further, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the vicinity of the center and the portion of the third allocating medium rotating body 2556 in the front-rear direction are the same height as the general surface of the third allocating medium rotating body 2556. The rear side is higher than the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. A third sorting left rotating body 2557 and a third sorting right rotating body 2558 are provided on the left and right outer sides at the front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, respectively.

  The third distribution table 2554 extends from the rear end to the vicinity of the second V prize opening 2008 so that the width on the left and right becomes narrower toward the front at the center in the left-right direction of the center table 2554a. It has a bulging portion 2554h that slightly bulges upward. By this bulging portion 2554h, the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling in the center in the left-right direction of the center table 2554a can be directed outward in the left-right direction, and it is difficult to enter the second V prize opening 2008. is doing.

  The third sorting table 2554 protrudes upward from the front end sides of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third loser openings 2555 on the upper surface of the central table 2554a and extends to the front end of the central table 2554a. A protrusion 2554i. The protrusion 2554i is formed in a triangular shape in the second V winning opening 2008, and is formed in a bar shape having a narrow left and right width in the third loser opening 2555. Further, the protruding portion 2554 i of the third loser opening 2555 slightly protrudes into the third loser opening 2555. Although the details will be described later, these projecting portions 2554i are moved outward after the game ball B rolls around the edge of the opening by contacting the circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555. It is intended to prevent it from jumping out and entering the other third loser opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008.

  Further, the third sorting table 2554 protrudes lower than the projecting portion 2554i at the center in the left and right direction between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555 at the front end of the central table 2554a. A protrusion 2554j is provided.

  The third sorting rotating body 2556 protrudes downward from the center of the disk shape, is rotatably supported by the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, and has a shaft portion 2556a to which the transmission gear 2567 is attached. Have. Further, the third distributing middle rotating body 2556 includes three inner protrusions 2556b protruding in a fan shape near the center, and an outer protrusion 2556c protruding in an arc shape higher than the inner protrusion 2556b near the outer peripheral edge. ,have. The inner protrusions 2556b and the outer protrusions 2556c are provided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and are provided on the same radiation. The outer protrusion 2556c has a certain width in the radial direction, the outer peripheral side coincides with the general surface of the third allocating rotary body 2556, and is inclined in the radial direction so that the inner peripheral side becomes higher. Yes. In a state where the third sorting rotating body 2556 is assembled to the third sorting device 2550, the third sorting middle rotating body 2556 is parallel to the surface of the central table 2554a in the third sorting table 2554 and slightly above the central table 2554a. Is located. This third sorting rotating body 2556 is rotated counterclockwise by the third sorting drive motor 2560 via the drive gear 2566 and the transmission gear 2567 in plan view.

  The third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third distribution right rotator 2558 protrude in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction, and have a protruding piece 2557a and a protruding piece 2558a extending in the axial direction, respectively. ing. The protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a are the most in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c in a state where the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are assembled in the third sorting device 2550, respectively. With respect to the game ball B located at the left and right outer portions of the lower front end, it protrudes to a position substantially at the center of the game ball B. Each of the protruding pieces 2557a and the protruding pieces 2558a has a rounded tip in plan view. Accordingly, the protruding pieces 2557a and the protruding pieces 2558a of the third distributed left rotating body 2557 and the third distributed right rotating body 2558 make it difficult to hit the game ball B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c.

  Further, the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are assembled to the third sorting device 2550, and the lower ends of the respective projecting pieces 2557a and 2558a are connected to the left table 2554b and It is located above the center of the game ball B with respect to the game ball B located at the left and right outer portions of the lowest front end of each of the right tables 2554c. That is, the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a are provided so as to contact the upper part of the game ball B. Thus, the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a do not come into contact with each other so as to scoop up the game ball B, and the game ball B is difficult to jump up.

  The third sorting left rotating body 2557 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by a third sorting left driving motor 2561, and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 is driven by the third sorting right driving. The motor 2562 is rotated in the clockwise direction in plan view. Therefore, the game balls B of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are flipped backward by the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558.

  The third distribution base 2559 holds the second V prize opening sensor 2515 and the two third loss opening sensors 2518 in cooperation with the passage forming member 2575. In addition, the third distribution base 2559 cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to guide the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555 to discharge downward. A ball discharge passage 2574 is formed. The third allocating ball discharge passage 2574 divides the game balls B received in the second V winning port 2008 and the third loser ports 2555 on both the left and right sides of the second V winning port 2008 without joining them. It is formed so as to be guided as it is, and a second V winning opening sensor 2515 and a third loss opening sensor 2518 are provided in the middle of each.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the upper cover 2577 is formed so that the rear end side is lowered. The first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 are not blocked.

  In a state where the third sorting device 2550 is assembled to the game board 5, the front end is located in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 and slightly rearward of the front surface of the front component member 1000, and the rear end is a back surface which will be described later. The unit 3000 is located behind the light guide plate 3102 and slightly ahead of the front surface of the effect display device 1600. The collection table 2554d of the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 is positioned in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The third sorting device 2550 includes a third sorting middle rotating body 2556, a third sorting left rotating body 2557, and a third sorting right rotating body 2558, a third sorting middle driving motor 2560, and a third sorting left rotating body 2558. It is always rotated by a drive motor 2561 and a third distribution right drive motor 2562. The third sorting middle rotating body 2556 and the third sorting left rotating body 2557 rotate counterclockwise in a plan view, and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 rotates clockwise in a plan view. Yes.

  In the present embodiment, the third sorting rotating body 2556 is 16.7 rpm, and the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are far more than the third sorting rotating body 2556. Respectively, at a high speed of 625 rpm. As described above, since the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 have high rotation speeds, the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are provided with detection pieces. Even if the presence or absence of rotation is detected, there is a possibility that the sensor cannot reliably detect the detection piece. More specifically, since the sensor for detecting the detection piece operates at regular intervals to detect the detection piece, for example, if the rotation period of the detection piece is the same as the detection period of the sensor, the detection piece is detected. Since the piece may not be detected at all, the detection cycle of the sensor needs to be sufficiently shorter than the rotation cycle of the detection piece. If the detection piece rotates faster and the rotation cycle becomes shorter, the sensor detection cycle also needs to be shortened. However, if the sensor detection cycle is shortened, signals are frequently exchanged between the sensor and the control unit. This increases the load on the control unit and increases the risk of runaway and malfunction due to overload.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the rotation shafts of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 (third sorting left driving motor 2561 and third sorting right driving motor 2562) are used. The left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 are respectively attached, and the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 are engaged with the large-diameter left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571, respectively. The detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a are provided on the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 that have been decelerated and rotated, and the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation. Detection is performed by a detection sensor 2565. In the present embodiment, the rotation speeds of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 are 250 rpm.

  As a result, the rotation speeds of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are slowed down. 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 can reliably detect, and the presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 can be determined. Moreover, since the rotation speed of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a is slowed, it is not necessary to unnecessarily shorten the detection cycle in the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565. An appropriate detection cycle can be set, and an increase in load on the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

  The third distribution device 2550 is supplied with the game balls B distributed to the second loser opening 2543 by the second distribution device 2540. Specifically, the game balls B distributed to the second loser mouth 2543 are detected by the second loser mouth sensor 2517 and then supplied to the croon 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551. After turning around the vertical axis, it falls to the vicinity of the right end of the collection table 2554d in the lower third sorting table 2554. At this time, based on the detection of the game ball B by the second lose mouth sensor 2517, an effect corresponding to the distribution of the game balls B by the third sorting device 2550 is executed.

  The game ball B that has dropped from the croon 2553 to the vicinity of the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the right table 2554c behind the rolling table, then rolls toward the rightmost portion of the right end of the right table 2554c and rotates. The third distributed right rotating body 2558 is in contact with the projecting piece 2558a. Thereafter, the game ball B abutted against the projecting piece 2558a and bounced backward enters the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third distributing middle rotating body 2556, and the central table 2554a is inclined. Will roll forward. Then, it is received in either the second V prize winning port 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a, or enters the recovery table 2554d through the side thereof. The game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a rolls toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the part that has entered. The game ball B that has rolled from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is bounced by the projecting piece 2557a of the rotating third sorting left rotating body 2557 in the same manner as the movement on the right table 2554c. Then, the central table 2554a is entered from the rear end side of the left table 2554b through the third sorting intermediate rotating body 2556.

  As described above, the basic flow of the game balls B supplied to the third sorting table 2554 of the third sorting device 2550 passes from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the third sorting rotating body 2556. After the center table 2554a is rolled, the game ball B is received by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 to be sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c by the collection table 2554d. It repeats until.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the 3rd distribution left rotation body 2557 and the 3rd distribution right rotation body 2558 are rotating at high speed, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the game ball B is the protrusion piece 2557a or The projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a can hit the game ball B by the timing of entering the contact area where the projecting piece 2558a can contact and the timing of the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a contacting the game ball B. Or the game ball B is struck hard, and the momentum of the game ball B that is bounced back varies depending on the contact state of the protrusion 2557a and the protrusion 2558a.

  Therefore, even if the game ball B is bounced backward by the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a, if the contact state is weak, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c that are raised backward are not fully climbed, The game ball B may come back and forth, and the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c may move back and forth without entering the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. Alternatively, even when the game ball B bounced backward by the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a reaches the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, the three outer parts of the rotating third distributing body 2556 rotating Depending on the timing at which the protruding portion 2556c is positioned, the outer protruding portion 2556c may prevent the game ball B from entering, so that it cannot move to the central table 2554a side and may be returned to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. . Further, when the game ball B enters the third distributing middle rotating body 2556 from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the third distributing middle rotating body 2556 rotates, so that three outer protrusions 2556c. Therefore, the game ball B may be carried to the opposite left table 2554b or right table 2554c by the rotation of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. Further, when the game ball B is strongly bounced backward by the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a, the game ball B may pass through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution and enter the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side, It may enter the side table 2554e. The game ball B that has entered the side table 2554e rolls to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c that is in contact therewith.

  For this reason, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are bounced rearward by the projecting piece 2558a and the third sorting right rotating body 2558. The game ball B that has entered the middle rotating body 2556 enters the central table 2554a with a certain probability. At this time, since the rotating body 2556 in the third distribution is rotating, the game ball B enters the central table 2554a from various positions in the left-right direction according to the rotation position.

  The game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a rolls forward due to the inclination thereof, but enters the left and right outer tables 2554b and 2554c through the third sorting rotating body 2556. In addition, since the rotating body 2556 is rotating during the third distribution, it has a left-right movement vector, and it rarely rolls straight forward and rolls diagonally. Become. At this time, since the bulging portion 2554h bulges upward in the center in the left-right direction of the central table 2554a, the movement of the game ball B in the left-right direction is weakened by the bulging portion 2554h or returned to the opposite side. It will be done. Then, the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 provided near the front end, or the side of them. Or enters the collection table 2554d.

  By the way, depending on the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 in the central table 2554a, the game ball B may be moved to the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening. By touching the 2555 circular opening, the game ball B may move in a swing-by manner along the edge of the opening. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), when there is nothing at the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555, the rolling of the game ball B along the edge of the opening When there is another second V winning opening 2008 or third loser opening 2555 at a point where the direction has been changed and jumped outward from the edge of the opening, a game ball is placed in the second V winning opening 2008 or third loser opening 2555 B may enter. Due to such a phenomenon, for example, if it is thought that the game ball B has entered the second V winning opening 2008, the edge of the opening turns into the adjacent third loser opening 2555, which makes the player disappointed and interesting. There is a risk of lowering. In addition, due to such a phenomenon, the variation in the probability of receiving the game ball B (winning probability) to the second V winning opening 2008 in the third distribution table 2554 (third distribution device 2550) increases, and the player is There is a risk of distrust.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protruding portion 2554i is projected on the front end side of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555, the game ball B is going to rotate along the edge of the opening. In the middle, it can abut against the projecting portion 2554i and can be flipped from the edge of the opening to the front side or the inside of the opening. It is possible to prevent entry into the three-losing mouth 2555. Thereby, it can reduce that the game ball B approachs the 3rd loser opening 2555 unnecessarily, and makes a player disappointed, and the fall of the interest with respect to a player's game can be suppressed. Further, since it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being received into the second V winning opening 2008 unscheduled, variation in the probability of receiving the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 can be reduced. It is difficult to give distrust to the person.

  In the present embodiment, since the projecting portion 2554i protrudes to the inside of the opening in the third loser opening 2555, it is possible to reliably play the game ball B that has rolled along the edge of the opening. Further, since the edge of the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 is rounded and rounded, the movement vector of the game ball B can be easily directed to the outside or the inside of the opening by the chamfering. It is assumed that it is difficult to turn along the edge of the opening.

  When the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a passes between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555, it enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. . At this time, there is a possibility that the front end of the central table 2554a may come into contact with the protrusion 2554j protruding upward. Depending on the contact state of the game ball B with the protrusion 2554j, the game ball B may be reflected backward, and depending on the reflection angle, the game ball B may be received in the second V winning port 2008 or the third loser port 2555. There is sex. On the other hand, when the game ball B is abutted against the protrusion 2554j and reflected forward, it enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. When the game ball B passes between the third loser opening 2555 and the weir portion 2554f in the central table 2554a, it enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a without coming into contact with the protrusion 2554j. .

  In this way, the game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a rolls to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c in accordance with the part that has entered, and the third distributed left-rotating body. 2557 or the third allocating right rotating body 2558 is sent to the central table 2554a again through the third allocating rotating body 2556, and either the second V prize winning port 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 is sent. Until it is accepted, the above movement is repeated to circulate on the third sorting table 2554. In the present embodiment, the game balls B are distributed (accepted) to the second V prize opening 2008 with a probability of 1/5.

  Then, the game ball B received in the second V prize opening 2008 is guided by the third sorting ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the second V prize opening sensor 2515, and then discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing port 2555 is guided by the third allocating ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the third losing port sensor 2518, and then discharged downward. The game balls B discharged downward from the third sorting device 2550 are discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back bottom ball discharge unit 3150 in the back unit 3000.

  As described above, in the third distribution device 2550, the game balls B distributed to the second loser port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 are either the second V winning port 2008 or the third loser port 2555. Can be sorted.

  Further, according to the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment, the height and the amount of projection of the projecting piece 2557a of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are determined based on the game ball. Since B is hard to hit and the third distributed left rotating body 2557 and the third distributed right rotating body 2558 are rotated at high speed, the game ball B has entered the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c. Sometimes it can be unpredictable to the player how strong the game ball B is played backwards, and the player's line of sight is glued to the game ball B on the third sorting table 2554 The game ball B can be moved back and forth on the third distribution table 2554, and the expectation for the acceptance to the second V prize opening 2008 is raised and the interest is lowered. Suppress It can be.

  In addition, as long as the game ball B is not repelled to some extent by the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the center table 2554a from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. If the game ball B does not enter the center table 2554a and the game ball B enters the central table 2554a, it cannot be received in the second V prize opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555, and the left table 2554b or right table is collected by the collection table 2554d. Since it is returned to 2554c, the game ball B stays on the third sorting table 2554 for a relatively long time, and the game ball B is sorted for a longer time than a sorting device such as a croon in a conventional pachinko machine. It can be entertained, and the game ball B is distributed to the second V prize opening 2008, so “big hit game” Let me enhance expectation for generation thereby suppress the reduction of interest. In other words, since the “big hit game” is generated by the movement of the game ball B, which is the acceptance of the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008, the effect display device 1600 is connected to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A case where a “big hit game” occurs when an image effect is displayed in which a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed to suggest a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by acceptance. In comparison, even if the time until the occurrence of “big hit game” is confirmed, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored and to reduce the disappointment at the time of “lack” and suppress the decline of interest Can be made.

  By the way, in a conventional sorting apparatus using a clune or the like in a pachinko machine, acceleration of the game ball B is not essential in order to reach a distribution destination such as a V prize opening or a lost mouth, and the rolling path and rolling speed Even if no change is given to the game ball B, the game ball B can reach the distribution destination. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, although the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to some extent, the player is bored by getting used to, and there are problems as exemplified below. That is, for example, when the rolling path of the game ball B is guided to an unfavorable allocation destination without being changed, the player's interest before reaching the allocation destination because the allocation destination can be predicted from the rolling path. There was a risk of falling. Alternatively, even if the rolling path of the game ball B is changed by some means, if it is guided to an unfavorable allocation destination as a result, if it is originally (if the rolling path is not changed), an advantageous allocation If the development that could have been reached earlier was hampered by the means and suffered a disadvantage, it would cause the player to feel a sense of distrust and reduce the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the third sorting device 2550, the strength of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 that rotate at high speed. Whether or not the game ball B is accelerated and bounced cannot be clearly predicted by the player, and the game ball B is bounced by the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558. The number of times is not limited to one, and after drawing a complicated rolling path on the third sorting table 2554, the game ball B is assigned to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555. Since it will be accepted, it is possible to make the player feel that the distribution destination has been selected by random entrustment. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible not only to entertain the movement of the game ball B by natural flow but also to select a random allocation destination without causing the problems in the conventional pachinko machine as described above. Can be enjoyed and the player can have a strong interest and interest in the movement of the game ball B.

  Further, in the third sorting apparatus 2550 of the present embodiment, the two third loser openings 2555 are provided side by side on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 on the front end side of the central table 2554a. Even if the game ball B is received in the loser 2555, the player can feel that the advantageous / disadvantageous results are separated by a slight difference. As a result, even if the game is distributed to the disadvantageous third loser 2555, it is possible to expect an effect that the player can feel regretful and continue to increase the game motivation.

  Further, the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment is provided with one second V winning opening 2008 as an advantageous distribution destination, whereas two third loser openings 2555 are provided as disadvantageous distribution destinations. The third distribution table 2554 shows that it is difficult to accept the game ball B to an allocation destination that is more advantageous than an unfavorable allocation destination. By being clearly indicated, it is possible to make the player strongly wish to accept the game ball B to an advantageous distribution destination, and to enhance the interest by increasing the player's interest in the movement of the game ball B. The effect can be expected.

  Furthermore, since the third sorter 2550 of the present embodiment tilts the central table 2554a so that the front end side is lowered and the second V winning opening 2008 is provided near the front end, it enters the central table 2554a. The second V prize opening 2008 is located between the game ball B and the player who have played, and it is easy to understand whether or not the game ball B is rolling toward the second V prize opening 2008. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable. In addition, since the game ball B rolls toward the player side (forward) toward the second V prize opening 2008, the player should make the player think that the game ball B is attracted to the second V prize opening 2008. It is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for acceptance to the second V prize opening 2008 and to enjoy the distribution on the third distribution table 2554.

  Further, according to the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment, the game balls B distributed to the second loser opening 2543 side by the second distribution device 2540 are transferred to the second distribution table 2554 by the croon 2553. It is supplied to the collection table 2554d on the downstream side of the V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555, and the game ball is placed on the central table 2554a where the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555 are provided. In order to reach B, there is a certain amount of strength by the third sorting right rotating body 2558 (third sorting left rotating body 2557) that gets over the inclined right table 2554c (left table 2554b). It has the characteristic of making contact as a necessary condition. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B is supplied from the second sorting device 2540 side when the rotation of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 and the third sorting left rotating body 2557 is stopped for some reason, It will stay at the front end side portion of the right table 2554c which is the lowest position in the third sorting table 2554 via the croon 2553, and does not go to the central table 2554a where the second V winning opening 2008 is provided, The game ball B is not illegally accepted into the second V prize opening 2008.

  The center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment is provided between the lower side of the frame-shaped center base 2501 and the third sorting device 2550, and has a front center decorative board 2591 that can irradiate light forward, and a guide passage. The front upper right decorative board 2592 provided above the prize winning opening 2006 in the group 2520 and the table provided between the prize winning opening 2006 and the first athletic passage 2536 of the first sorting device 2530. A right middle decorative board 2593 and a front lower right decorative board 2594 provided below the second loss passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540 are provided (see FIGS. 124 and 167, etc.).

  A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front center decorative substrate 2591, the front right upper decorative substrate 2592, the front right middle decorative substrate 2593, and the front right lower decorative substrate 2594, respectively. By emitting the LED mounted on the front center decorative board 2591, the lower side of the center base 2501 can be illuminated. When the LEd mounted on the front right upper decorative board 2592, the front right middle decorative board 2593, and the front right lower decorative board 2594 is caused to emit light, the guide passage group 2520, the first sorting device 2530, and the second sorting device 2540 are used. Is made to be easily visible from the player side.

  The front center decorative board 2591 and the front right decorative board 2592 are respectively connected to the effect relay board 3026, and the front right middle decorative board 2593 and the front right lower decorative board 2594 are connected to the front right upper decorative board 2592. That is, the front right middle decorative board 2593 and the front right lower decorative board 2594 are connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the front right upper decorative board 2592.

[5-8f. The flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 129, FIG. 141 to FIG. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the right game ball in the front unit. 142 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls flowing through the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls flowing through the second guide passage in the guide passage group. FIG. FIG. 143 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game balls received in the prize winning opening, and FIG. 143 (b) is an explanatory view showing the part of the third sorting device in FIG. c) It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part of the 2nd distribution apparatus in (a). In addition, FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing operation timings of the prize winning opening, the first sorting device, and the second sorting device according to the type of “small hit”. FIG. 145 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG.

  In the state assembled to the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided on the upper right side with respect to the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion on the left and lower sides of the center accessory 2500 and a portion between the attacker unit 2400 and the center accessory 2500. Has been. In addition, a windmill W that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly enters the game ball B driven on the left side of the center accessory 2500 into a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. And is adjusted so as to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability. The windmill W has a plurality of obstacle nails arranged in a row so that most of the game balls B that have entered to the right of the center are lowered toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a below the center accessory 2500. N is entered, and the rest flows down to the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N, which are planted in a row so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a below the center accessory 2500, distribute the game balls B that circulate on the upper side, It is adjusted to be received in the first start port 2002 with a higher probability than the game ball B.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 and the normal winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 are distributed through the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. The ball B is adjusted so as to enter the first opening portion 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning port 2003, and the left side of the normal winning port 2003 with the same probability, and the second guide passage. The game ball B that circulates 2522 is adjusted to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is driven from the left side to the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 129, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center role 2500 N is mainly guided so as to enter the site on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and is guided to enter the site on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than them.

  The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 may be accepted. The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 is guided to the back of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the back bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 and detected by the general prize opening sensor 3001. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize opening sensor 3001, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly received in the first start port 2002.

  The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is centered in the left-right direction (first start port) by a plurality of obstacle nails N that are obliquely planted in a row along the lower side of the center object 2500. 2002) side and may be received by the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged in an oblique manner. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize opening 2001. The game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 is unlikely to be received in the special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400.

  The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the back bottom ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 and detected by the first start port sensor 3002. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given. Then, the game ball B that has not been received in either the general winning opening 2001 or the first start opening 2002 is discharged from the out slot 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  Note that the game ball B on the left side of the center object 2500 in the game area 5a is not likely to be received in the normal winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and in rare cases, the opened large winning opening 2005. May be accepted.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is compared with the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received by the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted by the first start port 2002 is set higher.

  On the other hand, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven with such a strength that the game ball B enters above the upper right portion 2502a (upstream space portion 2506) of the center accessory 2500. The game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 (see FIG. 142 (a)). The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning port door 2511 that closes the accessory winning port 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide passage group It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is received by the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal prize, by a plurality of obstacle nails N which are implanted between the attacker unit 2400 and the game ball B. It is guided to enter at the same probability with respect to either the mouth 2003 or the left part of the normal winning opening 2003.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is twisted rearward and the first guide passage in the overlap portion 2520a. After being aligned in the front-rear direction with 2521, it is twisted forward and discharged from the left outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is a portion of the left side of the normal winning port 2003 or the normal winning port 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N which are planted with the attacker unit 2400. And, in rare cases, is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  Then, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharge opening 2435 that is lower than the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the normal prize opening sensor 2401, a bonus such as a normal lottery is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  Further, the game ball B that has entered the portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 further abuts against the plurality of obstacle nails N and flows down onto the second start-up upper guide shelf 2421. The game ball B that has entered the left portion of the normal winning opening 2003 rarely passes through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second start-up upper guide shelf 2421 to the attacker right passage 2430. May enter. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the second start-up port guide shelf 2421 passes between the second start-up port guide shelf 2421 and the second start-up port left standing wall portion 2422 and flows down onto the big winning port guide shelf 2424. .

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so the second start There is a possibility that the game ball B passing between the upper guidance shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 may be received by the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given.

  The game ball B that has passed between the second start-up-port guide shelf 2421 and the second start-port left standing wall portion 2422 and has flowed onto the grand prize-winner guide shelf 2424 from the left end of the big-win-port entrance guide shelf 2424 To the site above. Then, when the game ball B is released from the grand prize opening guide shelf 2424, the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the “big hit” is drawn or when the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so The game ball B released to the left from the mouth guide shelf 2424 will be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By the detection of the game ball B by the big prize opening sensor 2403, a privilege that the predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. Note that the game ball B released to the attacker unit 2400 side through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is received in any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005. If not, the game area 5a is discharged from the lower outlet 1008 to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  In addition, although the case where it hits right was demonstrated above, the game ball B thrown in with the intensity | strength jumping over the entrance of the 2nd guide passage 2522 opened near the right end of the front frame upper right part 2502a is also Then, the vehicle enters the first guide passage 2521, and the same result as described above is obtained.

  As described above, the game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521 by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400. The possibility of being accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 is high.

  By the way, when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and “small hit” is selected as the first special lottery result or the second lottery result, The provided prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the sorting rotating body 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 and the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the “small hit” is drawn, the winning combination prize opening 2006 opens and closes. Therefore, in order to allow the player to receive the game ball B in the winning prize winning slot 2006, the winning combination winning prize is displayed. “Right-handed” can be performed so that the game ball B circulates in the first guide passage 2521 in which the mouth 2006 is provided.

  In this embodiment, “small hit” has a higher probability of being drawn than “big hit”. Three patterns are set, and in any pattern, the prize winning opening 2006 is roughly divided and opened and closed twice.

  First, the opening / closing of the prize winning opening 2006 for each “small hit” will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 144, in the “first small hit”, after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the accessory prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then is closed. After a short time (1252 ms), the open state is again closed for a short time (80 ms), and then the closed state is completed. In the “second small hit”, after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms) and then closed, and then the “first small hit” is selected. After a long time (5420 ms) has elapsed, it is opened for a long time (9414 ms), and then closed to complete. In the “third small hit”, after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms) and then closed, and then the “second small hit” is selected. After a long time (19366 ms) has elapsed, it is opened for a long time (9404 ms) and then closed to complete.

  The second open state of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the “first small hit” is started after the time when the “first small hit” is completed from the start of execution. In addition, the second open state of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the “third small hit” is started after the time when the “second small hit” is completed from the start of execution.

  In FIG. 144, in the second long time open state in “second small hit” and “third small hit”, eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms). . That is, the prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for “first small hit” and nine times for “second small hit” and “third small hit”.

  Next, the operation of the sorting rotator 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 in the “small hit” is 1 in which the container 2531a is turned upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms) by rotating counterclockwise simultaneously with the start of execution. When the storage unit 2531a is turned to the right, the storage unit 2531a cannot be stored in the rightward storage state, and a predetermined time (4560 ms) has elapsed, the second time (13446 ms) is reached. After being in a non-accommodable state for a short time (500 ms), after entering the third accommodable state for the same time (13446 ms) as the second time, the incapable state is entered.

  In the sorting rotator 2531, the first accommodating state ends in the middle of the first opening state of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the “small hit” and becomes an unaccommodating state. In addition, the sorting rotator 2531 enters the second accommodation state after the time when the “first small hit” is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of “first small hit”, the control of the sorting rotator 2531 is completed before the second accommodating state, and the second and third accommodating states are not executed. In the sorting rotator 2531, the second accommodating state is started before the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the “second small hit”, and the second opened state is the closed state. After that, it becomes impossible to accommodate.

  In addition, the sorting rotator 2531 enters the third accommodation state after the time when the “second small hit” is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of “second small hit”, the control of the sorting rotator 2531 is completed before the third accommodating state is reached, and the third accommodating state is not executed. That is, the sorting rotator 2531 can be accommodated once when “first small hit”, twice when “second small hit”, and three times when “third small hit”. In this sorting rotator 2531, the third accommodating state is started before the second opening state of the accessory winning award 2006 in the “third small hit”, and the second opening state is ended. And then closed.

  Next, the operation of the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 in the “small hit” is the first closed state in which the second losing port 2543 is closed for a predetermined time (3020 ms) by projecting forward simultaneously with the start of execution ( The first V winning opening 2007 is ready for distribution), and then retreats to open the second loser opening 2543 (state to be distributed to the third distribution device 2550) for a predetermined time (23006 ms). ) After a lapse of time (13446 ms) longer than the first open state, the second closed state and then the open state.

  The distribution door 2544 is in an open state in which the first closed state ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the “small hit”. In addition, the second sorting device 2540 starts the second closed state of the sorting door 2544 from the middle of the second open state of the accessory winning award 2006 in the “third small hit”, After the second open state in 2006 becomes the closed state, the sorting door 2544 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closed state of the sorting door 2544 is executed only at the “third small hit”, and at the “first small hit” or “second small hit”, The second closed state of the minute door 2544 is not executed.

  For this reason, in the “first small hit”, the opening / closing of the prize winning opening 2006 is executed twice in a short time. Therefore, the game that circulates through the first guide passage 2521 by “right-handed”. There is a low possibility that the ball B will be accepted into the prize winning prize opening 2006. In addition, since the first open state of the prize winning hole 2006 for the “second small hit” and “third small hit” is also short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B can be received in the bonus winning prize 2006. Is low. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the sorting rotator 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the accessory winning award 2006 in the “small hit” is the bonus winning award Since it is shorter than the time of the first open state of 2006, the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning port 2006 is in the first opened state is the housing portion of the sorting rotator 2531. The possibility of being accommodated in 2531a is even lower. And since the time which the 1st accommodation possible state of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the 1st closed state of the distribution door 2544 in the 2nd distribution apparatus 2540 complete | finish is the same, the distribution rotating body 2531 of In the first accommodable state, the game balls B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a are not distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 side.

  On the other hand, in the second open state of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in “second small hit” and “third small hit”, the game ball B passes through the first guide path 2521 and the prize is awarded for the special prize because the time is long. There is a high possibility of being accepted into the mouth 2006. At this time, the sorting rotator 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 is in a state where it can be accommodated before the prize winning opening 2006 is opened, and the prize winning opening 2006 is closed from the open state. Therefore, it is highly possible that the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 in the second open state is stored in the storage portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531. .

  As described above, in this example, it is unlikely that the game ball B is received in the prize winning opening 2006 in the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the “second small hit” and “third small hit”. In addition, the possibility that the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 when the prize winning opening 2006 is in the first open state is further low. Nevertheless, simultaneously with the start of the execution of the small hit gaming state, the sorting rotator 2531 is rotated counterclockwise so that the accommodating portion 2531a can be accommodated upward, and the accommodating portion 2531a is placed in a predetermined period (3020 ms). After turning upward, the storage unit 2531a is rotated in the clockwise direction so that the storage portion 2531a cannot be stored in the right direction. That is, although it is unlikely that the sorting rotator 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first athletic passage 2536 immediately after the start of the small hit gaming state, the sorting rotator 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first attrition passage. The distribution operation by the distribution rotating body 2531 is performed in advance by performing an operation of distributing to the 2536 side.

  Similarly, although it is unlikely that the sorting rotator 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first athletic passage 2536 immediately after the start of the small hit gaming state, the second allocation is performed simultaneously with the start of the small hit gaming state. The distribution door 2544 of the device 2540 protrudes forward to close the second loser opening 2543 so that it can be distributed to the first V prize opening 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has elapsed, the second loser opening When the 2543 is opened, the state is assigned to the third sorting device 2550. That is, although it is unlikely that the sorting door 2544 will distribute the game ball B to the first V prize opening 2007 immediately after the start of the small hit gaming state, the sorting door 2544 will distribute the game ball B to the first V prize opening. A sorting operation is performed on the 2007 side, and a sorting operation by the sorting door 2544 is shown in advance.

  In this example, the sorting rotator 2531 and the sorting door 2544 are produced at the same time as the execution of the small hit gaming state, that is, an effect at the start of the small hit gaming state (for example, an opening effect of the small hit gaming state, The action prize winning opening 2006 is the first time after the operation of the sorting rotating body 2531 and the sorting door 2544. Will be open. Thereby, the possibility of the distribution of the game ball B to the first athletic passage 2536 side by the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution of the game ball B to the first V prize opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544 is reduced. is doing. Note that there is no possibility of distribution of the game ball B to the first athletic passage 2536 side by the distribution rotating body 2531 and distribution of the game ball B to the first V prize opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544. Alternatively, as long as it is infinitely low, the prize winning opening 2006 may be opened for the first time simultaneously with the operation of the sorting rotating body 2531 and the sorting door 2544.

  Further, only one of the sorting rotator 2531 and the sorting door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. In other words, some of the movable parts (sorting rotating body 2531, sorting door 2544) that perform the sorting of the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 are operated in advance to show the sorting operation. The other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the sorting door 2544 that has a high possibility of entering the game ball B into the V prize opening (in this example, the first V prize opening 2007 in this example) (high V expectation expectation degree) is not operated in advance. Therefore, it is less likely that the game ball B will enter the V winning opening (the second V winning opening 2008 in this example) than the distribution door 2544 (only for the distribution rotating body 2531). You may make it operate. As a result, while it is possible to know in advance some of the distribution destinations of the game balls B that have won the prize winning prize opening 2006, other distribution destinations can be in an unknown state, and other distribution destinations are clear. As the number of distribution destinations increases, the player can be surprised and the expectation can be enhanced, and the game balls B that are distributed can be watched and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the moving part (distribution door 2544) having a high V winning expectation is not operated in advance so that its presence is concealed, and the player is assumed to have the game ball B enter the third distribution device 2550. When the “third small hit” is executed, the movable part (distribution door 2544) having a high V winning expectation operates to move the game ball B to the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). In addition to providing unexpectedness by entering the game ball B, it is possible to improve the game interest by allowing the game ball B to enter a distribution destination that was not expected. In addition, the distribution to the first V prize opening 2007 side is concealed as a distribution destination, and it can be assumed that there are only two of the first loser opening 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side. The player is not discouraged even if “second small hit” having a lower V-winning expectation level is executed and the game ball B is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 side.

  Further, in this example, the sorting rotating body 2531 is arranged in a manner that the player can easily see, whereas the sorting door 2544 is a flat plate that moves forward and backward with respect to the game board 5 and has an area on the front side. Because it is narrow, even if it is operating, it is difficult to notice its operation. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the first V prize opening 2007 side that can be entered when the sorting door 2544 protrudes forward. For this reason, when the “third small hit” is reached, when the sorting door 2544 operates and the game ball B enters the first V winning opening 2007, it becomes difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball B. Without noticing that B has entered the first V prize opening 2007, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if a V prize suddenly occurred and a 15R jackpot was executed.

  Further, when the sorting rotator 2531 is operated in advance during the opening effect in the small hit gaming state, in addition to the instruction content in the opening effect, for example, “Aim at the winning prize winning opening 2006”, the sorting rotator 2531. By this operation, the player can easily recognize the driving destination, that is, the position to be aimed during the small hit gaming state.

  As described above, when the “small hit” is drawn, the game ball B that has flowed down the first guide passage 2521 is received in the prize winning slot 2006 when the prize winning slot 2006 is opened. And then sent to the first sorting guide path 2534 of the first sorting device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the prize winning port sensor 2513, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  Among the “small hits”, in the “second small hit”, the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is in the open state when the prize winning opening 2006 is in the second open state. When the body 2531 rotates from the accommodable state to the unaccommodable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first athletic passage 2536 and the second distribution guiding path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. , Flows through the second loss passage 2546 from the second loss opening 2543 at the lower end, is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517, and is then sent to the third sorting device 2550 side.

  The game ball B sent to the third sorting device 2550 side is supplied to the croon 2553 through the third sorting guide path 2551, and then falls to the lower third sorting table 2554 after turning inside the croon 2553. To do. The game ball B that has dropped from the croon 2553 to the vicinity of the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the right table 2554c behind the rolling table, then rolls toward the rightmost portion of the right end of the right table 2554c and rotates. The third distributed right rotating body 2558 is in contact with the projecting piece 2558a. Thereafter, the game ball B abutted against the projecting piece 2558a and bounced backward enters the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third distributing middle rotating body 2556, and the central table 2554a is inclined. Will roll forward.

  Whether the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a from the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is received in any of the second V winning port 2008 and the third loser port 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a , And enters the collection table 2554d through the side. The game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a rolls toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the part that has entered. Then, the game ball B rolling from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is bounced by the projecting piece 2557a of the rotating third sorting left rotating body 2557 in the same manner as the movement on the right table 2554c. Then, the central table 2554a is entered from the rear end side of the left table 2554b through the third sorting intermediate rotating body 2556.

  As described above, the basic flow of the game balls B supplied to the third sorting table 2554 of the third sorting device 2550 passes from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the third sorting rotating body 2556. After the center table 2554a rolls, the game ball B is received by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 to be sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c by the collection table 2554d. Is repeated on the third sorting table 2554.

  Then, the game ball B received in the second V prize opening 2008 passes through the third allocating ball discharge passage 2574 and is detected by the second V prize opening sensor 2515 and then discharged from the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3150. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loser opening 2555 passes through the third allocating ball discharge passage 2574 and is detected by the third loser outlet sensor 2518, and then the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000. Is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, a privilege to open and close the special winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

  On the other hand, in the “third small hit”, since the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is closed when the prize winning opening 2006 is in the second opened state, the sorting rotating body 2531 is closed. Is rotated from the accommodable state to the unaccommodable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a flows down the second distribution guiding path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first athletic passage 2536. Then, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the sorting door 2544 in the closed state, is guided rightward, and enters (accepts) the first V winning opening 2007. The game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 through the first V winning path 2542, and then the board is passed through the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a privilege to open and close the special winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

  For this reason, in order to open and close the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 receives the game ball B, and the “small hit”, “big hit”, etc. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result must be drawn. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, there is an opportunity to be received at the first start port 2002, but there is no opportunity to be received at the second start port 2004.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B is driven so as to flow down on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Although there is an opportunity to be accepted by the normal winning port 2003 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 even if both pass through the passage, the first guidance is made by “right-handed” for easy driving operation. If the passage 2521 is distributed, there is a possibility of entering the attacker right passage 2430 that is sent to the out port 1008 without an opportunity to be received at the normal winning opening 2003 or the like, and the game ball B is distributed to the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. In order to allow the second starting port 2004 to receive the game ball B, it is necessary to cause the normal winning port 2003 to receive the game ball B and to derive the “normal winning” normal lottery result. The second start port 2004 is lower than the first start port 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player inserts the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002. The operation of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. Can raise the expectation for the acceptance of.

  Then, when the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 and the “small hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the winning combination winning opening 2006 opens and closes. In order to allow the ball B to be received, the operation for driving the game ball B is changed to “right-handed” and the game ball B can be driven into the first guide passage 2521 provided with the prize winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the expectation for the reception of the game ball B to the winning prize winning opening 2006.

  Even if the game ball B that has been struck to the right side of the center bonus 2500 is not received in the bonus prize winning hole 2006, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the downstream regular prize winning hole 2003. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the second starting port 2004 that has been opened according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the game, and “small hit” or “big hit” as the second special lottery result May be drawn.

  When the game ball B struck into the first guide passage 2521 is received in the prize winning opening 2006, the game ball B is sent to the first sorting device 2530. Therefore, the game ball B is placed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531. Players can be thrilled by whether they are housed or not.

  When the game ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540. The player can be excited and excited by whether the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second loser opening 2543 in the distribution device 2540. In the second distribution device 2540, even if the game ball B is distributed to the second loser opening 2543, the game ball B passes through the second loser passage 2546 and has the second V winning opening 2008. Since it is sent to the minute device 2550, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the second V prize opening 2008, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The game balls B distributed to the second loser opening 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 are supplied from the croon 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 to the third distribution table 2554. Then, it is bounced by the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 of the third sorting table 2554, enters the central table 2554a through the third sorting middle rotating body 2556, and moves forward. When the player rolls, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the second V prize opening 2008 is accepted, and the player can be entertained.

  When the game ball B is received in the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, or when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special ball ball B is received. When the “big hit” is drawn as the lottery result and the second special lottery result, an opportunity for a lot of game balls B to be paid out by opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 in a predetermined pattern, The game ball B can be driven to aim at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the open / close grand prize opening 2005.

  At this time, the probability that the game ball B reaches the winning prize opening 2005 is higher when the second guide passage 2522 is distributed than when the first guide passage 2521 is distributed. It is possible to adjust the driving strength so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 while avoiding “right hitting”, and it is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B.

  By the way, the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 has a heavy portion 2520a in which a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine which passage the game ball B is circulating, so the player should have entered the second guide passage 2522 but entered the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B circulating in the guide passage group 2520 can be noticed. In addition, the game ball B that has been shot aiming at the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 can be thrilled by whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the second guide passage 2522. , It can increase the expectation of the game, and when it comes out of the unexpected exit of the first guide passage 2521, it can surprise the player with surprise and entertain the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-8 g. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center character]
Subsequently, the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 according to an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIGS. 146 (a) to (d) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from FIG. 129, and FIGS. 147 (e) and (f) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a further different guide passage group. It is. In FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 146 (a), compared to FIG. 129, the upper end entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is separated from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 to the left. It is what. This guide passage group 2520 can provide the same effects as described above.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 146 (b), the angle of the hitting portion 1006 is such that the hitting ball 1006 in the front component member 1000 is likely to rebound to the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In addition, the portion between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame is set so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lowered. It is slanted. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 side, so the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B into which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 becomes wider. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the two guide passages 2522.

  In the guide passage group 2520 shown in FIG. 129 and FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the embodiment shown in FIG. In contrast to the opening, the upstream side of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 extends to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective inlets are lined up and down. It is made to open toward the left in the state.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5 a) constitutes a part of the first guide passage 2521, and a part of the front frame upper right part 2502 a constitutes the second guide passage 2522. Part of it. In this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space portion 2506 between the front frame upper right portion 2502a and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) is the first from the left end of the front frame upper right portion 2502a. Each of the guide passages 2521 and the second guide passages 2522 has a length up to the respective entrances, and is narrower than the upstream space portion 2506 shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving strength of contacting the narrower portion on the left side of the front frame upper right portion 2502a than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with a driving strength that directly enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens toward the left, the game is compared with the embodiment of FIG. The adjustment range of the driving strength of the ball B is narrowed. In addition, a game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 on the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 divides the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. When it comes into contact with the left end of the wall portion (the portion between the two entrances), there is a possibility of deviating from the upstream space portion 2506 depending on the momentum and angle of the rebounded game ball B. In other words, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2506, it deviates leftward from the upstream space portion 2506 and does not enter any of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 may be distributed. For this reason, since the difficulty level for the game ball B driving operation is increased, the player's willingness to drive the game ball B can be increased, and the player can insert game media. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 146 (d), in the embodiment of FIG. 146 (c), a branching portion 2524 communicating with the second guide passage 2522 in one way is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521. It is. The branching portion 2524 is provided immediately above a portion that is bent downward from the right end of a portion (the front frame upper right portion 2502a) that extends to the left and right in the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is struck with the strength to enter the first guide passage 2521, the game sphere B is second in the branch portion 2524 depending on the strength of the stake (if the drive strength is weak). Since branching to the guide passage 2522 side, the difficulty of circulation of the game ball B with respect to the second guide passage 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 146 (c).

  In order to allow the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521. Since the branch portion 2524 that communicates is provided above the portion bent downward in the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 is bent downward. It does not jump upward (branch portion 2524 side) and does not enter the first guide passage 2521 side through the branch portion 2524. In other words, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522 in one way.

  Further, in this embodiment, when entering the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle and flowing through the first guide passage 2521, the first guide passage 2521 side is located at the branch portion 2524. Or, since it branches to either side of the second guide passage 2522, the player can be throbbing and throbbing depending on whether the game ball B branches to which side at the branching portion 2524, and the first guidance It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Since the branching portion 2524 of the first guide passage 2521 may branch to the second guide passage 2522 side, whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side may cause the player to It can be thrilled and entertained by the player, and when the branching portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side, a player's driving operation mistake is covered and the desired second guide passage 2522 is opened. The game ball B will be distributed, and it can be made to the feeling obtained with respect to a player, and the fall of the interest with respect to a player's game can be suppressed.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 147 (e), the second guide passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that traverses the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position on the left side of the left end of the front frame upper right portion 2502a. Accordingly, all of the game balls B that have been driven into the upstream space 2506 above the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame circulate through the first guide passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side Since the distribution of the game ball B can be conspicuous from the player, if the game ball B distributes the bypass portion 2525, it is possible to make the player think that there is something better after that. The game ball B can be driven in at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and the game ball B can be driven in to prevent a decrease in interest. it can.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 147 (f), the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided behind the first guide passage 2521, and the respective entrances are arranged in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined rightward and rearward along the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 in the upstream space portion 2506. B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. Further, the stopper portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 is inclined so that a portion in the vicinity of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves to the right as it goes rearward, and faces the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has been driven vigorously can be reflected toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, since the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap each other in the front-rear direction, the game that has been driven into the upstream space 2506 above the center accessory 2500 It can be difficult to determine which passage the ball B has entered, and can draw attention to the player.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the back. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit when the back unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit when the back unit is disassembled and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 has a general winning port sensor 3001 for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a first unit provided in the start port unit 2100. A first start port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in one start port 2002, and a vibration sensor 3003 that detects vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) are provided.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and has a rectangular opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the cage effect display device 1600 and a left side of the rear surface below the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 are connected to connect the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Relay panel relay board 1710, panel relay board cover 3025 attached to back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of panel relay board 1710, and the rear surface below opening 3010a of back box 3010 An effect that relays the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 attached to the right side. It includes a relay board 3026, and a rendering relay board cover 3027 attached to Urabako 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the presentation relay board 3026.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the left on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and a liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction on the right side of

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-like fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the like. A vibration sensor 3003 is attached to a portion of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached in the back box 3010, and the lower front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and from the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. A lower ball discharge unit 3150 that receives the game ball B and discharges it downward, and a first distribution device 2530 and a second distribution of the center accessory 2500 that are attached to the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. A back right ball discharge unit 3170 for receiving the game ball B from the device 2540 and discharging it downward.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 extending along the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the light guide plate effect unit 3100. A back front lower right presentation unit 3300 attached to the lower left side on the front side, a back front lower right production unit 3400 attached to the lower right side on the front side of the light guide plate production unit 3100, and a back upper decorative body in the back front production unit 3200 And a sub-status indicator 3500 provided near the right end of 3211.

[5-9a. Light guide plate production unit]
Subsequently, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. FIG. 153 (a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 153 (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern substrate in the light guide plate effect unit from the front. FIG. 155 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate is caused to emit light, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is caused to emit light.

  The light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent flat light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and the unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. Attached to the unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 and a first pattern substrate 3103 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted. And a second pattern substrate 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

  The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 includes a top substrate cover 3105 attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the first pattern substrate 3103, and a unit so as to cover the front of the second pattern substrate 3104. A left substrate cover 3106 attached to the left side of the base 3101, and a left cooling fan 3107 and a right cooling fan 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 in the left-right direction are provided.

  The light guide plate 3102 includes a first pattern 3110 (see FIG. 155 (a)) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex first reflecting portions that reflect only light from above to the front, and only light from the left side. And a second pattern 3120 (see FIG. 155 (b)) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex second reflecting portions that reflect the light forward. That is, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 can cause the first pattern 3110 to emit light when the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 emits light, and emit the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 to emit light. 3120 can be displayed with light emission.

  The light guide plate 3102 is a point light emitting unit 3102a (a shaded portion in FIG. 155) that emits light in a dot shape by light irradiated from a corresponding direction as a reflection portion constituting the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120. A linear light emitting unit 3102b that emits light linearly by light emitted from the corresponding direction (cross-hatched portion in FIG. 155), and a spectral light emitting unit that emits light by splitting the cocktail light irradiated from the corresponding direction. 3102c (the spotted pattern portion in FIG. 155). That is, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are formed by appropriately combining the point light emitting unit 3102a, the linear light emitting unit 3102b, and the spectral light emitting unit 3102c. Although not shown in the drawings, the point light emitting unit 3102a, the linear light emitting unit 3102b, and the spectral light emitting unit 3102c can also form the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 by changing the densities thereof. Yes.

  Here, cocktail light is light of a color including two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is radiated to the spectroscopic light emitting part as cocktail light, the yellow light component is split into red light and green light, and red or The part that looks green appears. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated as a cocktail light to the spectral light emitting unit, the white light component is split into red light, green light, and blue light, and the portion that looks red, green, or blue in the part or As a result, light of a color in which they are appropriately mixed appears, and a rainbow-colored light emission can be displayed. Note that when this spectral light emitting unit is irradiated with light of only one of the three primary colors of light, the light does not have a component to be spectrally divided, and thus light of that color is emitted. For this reason, the spectral light emitting unit can emit light with a single color or with multiple colors, depending on the color of the irradiating light. it can.

  The light guide plate 3102 has innumerable irregularities in each of the innumerable first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 3110 and the innumerable second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 3120. In a state where the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 are not emitting light, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side appears transparent. It can be visually recognized in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the first pattern 3110 is a pattern composed of characters “decision battle”. The first pattern 3110 has a portion where the shadow of the “decision battle” extends radially outward centered on the letters “decision battle” and a plurality of arc-shaped portions radially arranged outside the portion. ing. In the first pattern 3110, the character portion of “decision battle” is formed by the point light emitting portion 3102 a, and the portion is formed by the linear light emission portion 3102 b in the shadow outside the character of “decision battle”, Are formed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c and the linear light emitting portion 3102b.

  The second pattern 3120 is a pattern imitating a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. 155 (b). The second pattern 3120 is interspersed so that the central pattern part 3121 made of characters, the radial pattern part 3122 extending radially outward from the central pattern part 3121, and the petals dance outside the central pattern part 3121. And a distributed pattern part 3123. The central pattern portion 3121 is formed by a point-like light emitting portion 3102a whose periphery is trimmed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c. The radiation pattern portion 3122 is formed by a spectral light emitting portion 3102c bordered by a linear light emitting portion 3102b. The scattered pattern part 3123 is formed by the spectral light emitting part 3102c.

  The radiant pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 is formed so as to be continuous with a radiant decorative portion 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212 and a radiant decorative portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front rendering unit 3200 described later ( (See FIG. 165). As a result, when the second pattern 3120 is displayed with light emission, since the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b appear to be connected, the second pattern 3120 can be shown larger, and the radiation decoration portion. The 3212b and the radiation decoration part 3213b project forward, whereby a sense of depth can be given to the second pattern 3120, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

  The light guide plate 3102 includes a lower notch 3102d that is notched upward from the lower side, and a right notch 3102e that is notched to the left from the right side. The lower notch 3102d is for preventing contact with the third sorting table 2554 and the upper cover 2577 of the third sorting device 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the right notch 3102e is the center accessory. This is for preventing contact with the second guide passage 2522 twisted rearward in the 2500 guide passage group 2520.

  The first pattern substrate 3103 is divided into three in the left-right direction, such as a light guide plate upper decorative substrate 3103a, a light guide plate middle decorative substrate 3103b, and a light guide plate upper decorative substrate 3103c. A plurality of full-color LEDs that irradiate light downward are mounted on the lower surface of the LED. The first pattern board 3103 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026. The effect relay substrate 3026 is connected in a daisy chain in the order of the left upper decorative substrate 3103a on the light guide plate, the middle decorative substrate 3103b on the light guide plate, and the right decorative substrate 3103c on the light guide plate (see FIG. 167).

  The second pattern substrate 3104 is divided into two parts in the vertical direction, such as a light guide plate upper left decorative substrate 3104a and a light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3104b, and a plurality of pieces irradiate the right surface of each substrate to the right. Full color LED is mounted. The second picture board 3104 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026. The effect relay board 3026 is connected in a daisy chain in the order of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3104b and the light guide plate upper left decorative board 3104a (see FIG. 167).

  The two left cooling fans 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 are a third sorting drive motor 2560 and a third sorting left drive of the third sorting device 2550 in the center accessory 2500. The motor 2561 and the third sorting right drive motor 2562 are for cooling. The left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, and are attached obliquely toward the front in the center in the left-right direction. The left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 have a left fan motor 3107a and a right fan motor 3108a that are connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the production relay board 3026, respectively (see FIG. 167). .

  This light guide plate effect unit 3100 has a back lower sphere discharge unit 3150, a back right sphere discharge unit 3170, a back front effect unit 3200, a back front left lower effect unit 3300, and a back front right lower effect on the outer front surface of the unit base 3101. A unit 3400 is attached. That is, all the rendering units in the back unit 3000 are attached to the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. As a result, when assembling the back unit 3000 (game board 5), all other effect units of the back unit 3000 such as the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 are attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100. All the production units can be attached to the back box 3010 simply by attaching the unit 3100 to the back box 3010.

  The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 is unitized by attaching a light guide plate 3102, a first pattern substrate 3103, a second pattern substrate 3104, and the like to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101. Thereby, in the state assembled to the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the light guide plate 3102 can be handled by having the unit base 3101 without touching the light guide plate 3102. By touching the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to avoid fingerprints, dirt, scratches, and the like from being attached to the light guide plate 3102, and handling of the light guide plate 3102 can be facilitated.

  By the way, when a decorative body that is decorated with light emission is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate, light by the light emission decoration of the decorative body is irradiated to the player side ahead through the light guide plate. In some cases, the light guide plate may appear to shine partially, or a picture displayed on the light guide plate may be displayed. And if the light guide plate shines or sees a picture, it will appear to overlap with the decorative body that is decorated with light emission behind, so that it will be difficult to see the light emitting decoration of the decorative body, and the effect of the light emitting decoration may be reduced. There is. In addition, if the light emitting decoration of the decorative body provided at the back of the light guide plate makes it possible to see the light emitting display on the light guide plate in advance, when the player actually displays the light emitting display on the light emitting display, There is a risk that the impact given will be reduced, and the effect of the light guide plate cannot be obtained sufficiently. In addition, when the decorative body is provided behind the light guide plate, when the light emitting plate displays the pattern on the light guide plate, the rear decorative body appears to overlap through the pattern, so depending on the shape and color of the decorative body, There is a risk that the light-guided pattern of the light guide plate is difficult to see.

  On the other hand, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is located at the rearmost position in the back box 3010 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and is more than the light guide plate effect unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102). There is no decorative body on the rear side. That is, since the back front effect unit 3200, the back front lower left effect unit 3300, and the back front right lower effect unit 3400 are provided in front of the light guide plate 3102, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and Even if the back right decorative body 3213 and the like are decorated with light emission, the light can hardly reach the light guide plate 3102.

  Therefore, the light guide plate 3102 (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) appears to be shining even if the decorative body such as the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 is illuminated. Since it can be suppressed, the luminous decoration of the decorative body does not become difficult to see, the luminous decoration of the decorative body can be shown in a good state, and the effect of the luminous decoration of the decorative body is fully exhibited. be able to.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) appears to be shining even if the decorative body such as the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 is illuminated. Since the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 are visible from the player before the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 are displayed by light emission, the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 are displayed. The impact on the player when the two-pattern 3120 is displayed in a light-emitting manner can be avoided, and the effect of the light-emitting display of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be sufficiently exhibited. it can.

  Further, since the decorative body such as the back upper decorative body 3211 is not provided behind the light guide plate 3102, even if the first design 3110 and the second design 3120 are displayed on the light guide plate 3102, the first design 3110 and the second design 3120 are displayed. The decorative body does not appear to overlap the back side of the two patterns 3120, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are produced by light emission display. The effect can be exhibited sufficiently.

  In addition, as described above, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the like do not overlap each other on the rear side of the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120. Since the one pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state, the first pattern is independent of the shape and color of the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the like. 3110 and the 2nd pattern 3120 can be shown in a favorable state. Accordingly, the shape and color of the decorative body such as the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are considered in consideration of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102. There is no need, the design freedom of the decorative body can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with the decorative body having a higher decorative effect can be provided.

  Furthermore, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is provided at the rearmost side in the back box 3010, and the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close as possible to the effect display device 1600. Since the direction of the light is substantially perpendicular to the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 appears to shine partially, or the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 appear to shine. The same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close as possible to the effect display device 1600, depending on the effect image (including the color of the screen) displayed on the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate 3102 that is lit and displayed. The first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be made conspicuous or emphasized, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be further enhanced. Further, by bringing the light guide plate 3102 close to the effect display device 1600, the first picture 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are illusioned with the effect image of the effect display device 1600, or the effect of the effect display device 1600. An image can be illusioned with the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, and more various effects can be shown to the player.

  The effect display device 1600 may be mounted on the rear side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. Thus, when the effect display device 1600 is mounted on the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is covered with the effect display device 1600, so that the light guide plate 3102 can be more difficult to touch. Similar effects can be achieved.

[5-9b. Bottom ball discharge unit]
Next, the back lower sphere discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152 and the like. The back lower sphere discharge unit 3150 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3101. The back bottom ball discharge unit 3150 receives the game balls B received at the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below. It is. The back bottom ball discharge unit 3150 is connected to a general winning port sensor 3001 that separately detects the game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 and a first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. And a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the received game ball B.

  In addition, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 receives the game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 and the third loser port 2555 and discharged downward in the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500. The sheet is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Further, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 has an out ball detection for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008 below the opening for receiving the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. It has a mounting portion 3155 that allows the unit 3030 to be mounted. By attaching the out ball detection unit 3030 to the mounting portion 3155, the game ball B received in the out port 1008 can be detected.

[5-9c. Back right ball discharge unit]
Next, the back right sphere discharge unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152 and the like. The back right sphere discharge unit 3170 is attached to the lower part of the right side of the unit base 3101. The back right ball discharge unit 3170 receives the game ball B received in the first loser port 2535 of the first distribution device 2530 and the first V winning port 2007 of the second distribution device 2540 in the center accessory 2500. Thus, it is for discharging to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-9d. Front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 148 to 152 and 156. FIG. 156 is a front view showing the arrangement of the decorative boards of the front front effect unit in the back unit. The back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100.

  The front effect unit 3200 is formed in a U-shape with the front view opened downward, and has a decorative base 3201 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate directing unit 3100 and a front side of the upper side of the decorative base 3201. A back upper decorative body 3211 attached and extending left and right, a back left decorative body 3212 attached to the front side of the left side of the decorative body base 3201 and extending vertically, and a front side of the right side of the decorative body base 3201 And a back right decorative body 3213 which is attached and extends vertically.

  Further, the front front effect unit 3200 is provided between the back upper decorative body 3211 and the decorative body base 3201, and has a back upper decorative substrate 3221 for illuminating and decorating the back upper decorative body 3211, and a back left decorative body 3212. And the decorative body base 3201 are provided between the back-left decorative body 3213 and the back-right decorative body 3213 for decorating the back-left decorative body 3212 with light emission. And a back right decorative substrate 3223 for decorating the right decorative body 3213 with light emission.

  In addition, the front stage production unit 3200 suggests the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by the game ball B being received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and those A sub-status display 3500 that displays the number of holds is provided. The sub status indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of the backside decorative body 3211.

  The back upper decorative body 3211 has translucency as a whole. The back decorative body 3211 includes a logo part 3211a in which three circles are arranged in the left-right direction, and a logo decorative part 3211b in which small spheres are arranged in a rosary shape along the outer periphery of the logo part 3211a. Have. In the logo portion 3211a, a character of a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is formed as a relief. The front surface of the back decorative body 3211 is inclined so as to protrude forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, a part of the logo decoration portion 3211b constitutes a sub status display portion 3501 of the sub status display 3500.

  The back left decorative body 3212 has translucency as a whole. The back left decorative body 3212 has a front surface inclined so as to protrude forward as it goes to the left. The back left decorative body 3212 has a main decorative portion 3212a that is formed in a three-dimensional concavo-convex shape with a flame over the entire surface, and extends radially from the right outer side so as to cross the main decorative portion 3212a. And a radiation decoration portion 3212b. The main decoration portion 3212a is formed so that a colorless (transparent) portion, a red portion, and a yellow portion are mixed. The radiation decorative portion 3212b is formed colorless (transparent). The radiating decoration portion 3212b is formed to be continuous with the radiating pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is displayed on the light guide plate 3102 with light emission.

  The back right decorative body 3213 has translucency as a whole. The back right decorative body 3213 is slightly inclined with respect to the front-rear direction surface so that the front surface is directed substantially to the left and the front side is positioned slightly to the right rather than the rear side. The back right decorative body 3213 has a main decorative portion 3213a formed in a three-dimensional concavo-convex shape with a flame over the entire surface, and extends radially from the left outer side so as to cross the main decorative portion 3213a. And a radiation decoration portion 3213b. The main decoration part 3213a is formed in red. The radiation decorative portion 3213b is formed colorless (transparent). The radiating decorative portion 3213b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiating pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is caused to emit light on the light guide plate 3102.

  The back upper decorative substrate 3221 has a flat plate shape that is substantially constant up and down and extends to the left and right, and is provided in an inclined state along the front surface of the back upper decorative body 3211. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface. ing. The back decorative substrate 3221 has a white surface. The back upper decorative board 3221 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 through the back left decorative board 3222.

  The back left decorative substrate 3222 has a flat plate shape extending vertically, and is attached with the substrate surface facing in the front-rear direction, and the surface is formed in white. The back left decorative board 3222 has a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted behind the main decorative part 3212a of the back left decorative body 3212 and a plurality of mounted behind the radiation decorative part 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212. Second LED 3222b. The first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are full-color LEDs, respectively. The back left decorative board 3222 is connected to the effect relay board 3026. When the first LED 3222a is caused to emit light, the back left decorative substrate 3222 is capable of causing the main decorative portion 3212a of the back left ornament 3212 to emit light, and when the second LED 3222b is caused to emit light, the back left decorative body 3212 is radiated. The portion 3212b can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of second LEDs 3222b are arranged in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the radiation decoration portion 3212b at each radiation decoration portion 3212b.

  The back right decorative substrate 3223 has a flat plate shape extending vertically, and is attached with the substrate surface directed in the left-right direction, and the surface is formed in white. The back right decorative board 3223 is mounted on the right side of the first LED 3223a mounted on the right side of the main decorative portion 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213 and the radiation decorative portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213. Two LEDs 3223b. The first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are full color LEDs, respectively. The back right decorative board 3223 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back upper decorative board 3221 and the back left decorative board 3222. When the first LED 3223a emits light, the back right decorative board 3223 can make the main decorative portion 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213 emit light, and when the second LED 3223b emits light, the back right decorative body 3213 emits radiation. The portion 3213b can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of second LEDs 3223b are arranged in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction or front-rear direction) of the radiation decoration portion 3213b at the portion of each radiation decoration portion 3213b (see FIG. 157 (a)).

  The back right decorative board 3223 is mounted on the board surface facing right, and has a plurality of third LEDs 3223c that can illuminate the right part of the center accessory 2500. The third LED 3223c is a full color LED. When the third LED 3223c is caused to emit light, it is possible to brightly illuminate the accessory winning prize opening 2006, the first sorting device 2530, and the like in the center accessory 2500.

  The back right decorative board 3223 is mounted with a plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 for displaying sub-designs and the like on the sub-state display 3500 on the board surface facing leftward in the upper part. The sub-state LED 3510 is a side view type LED that irradiates light in a direction parallel to the mounted substrate surface. Light from each sub-state LED 3510 is guided by the light guide pins 3520 to the sub-state display portion 3501 at the right end of the logo decoration portion 3211b of the backside decorative body 3211 and emitted forward. The sub-state LED 3510 includes one first sub-design LED 3511 composed of a full-color LED for suggesting a first special lottery result and one second sub-design LED 3512 composed of a full-color LED for suggesting a second special lottery result. And two first sub-holding number LEDs 3513 composed of single-color LEDs for displaying the number of retained first special lottery results and two second LEDs composed of single-colored LEDs for displaying the number of retained second special lottery results. A sub-holding number LED 3514.

  This back front effect unit 3200 is assembled to the game board 5 and is guided behind the space surrounded by the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213. The first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 that are emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 3102 in the light board effect unit 3100, the effect image that is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like are viewed in good condition from the front (player side). Can do. In addition, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can decorate the first pattern 3110, the second pattern 3120, and the effect image, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be seen. Can be improved.

  In addition, according to the back front rendering unit 3200, the LEDs mounted on the back top decorative board 3221, the back left decorative board 3222, and the back right decorative board 3223 are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the back top decorative body 3211 and the back left decorative board 3221 are emitted. The decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 can be decorated with light emission, and a light emission effect using them can be shown to the player.

  Further, according to the back front rendering unit 3200, the second LED 3222b of the back left decorative substrate 3222 and the second of the back right decorative substrate 3223 are matched with the light emission display of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100. The LED 3223b is caused to emit light, and the radiation decoration part 3212b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the radiation decoration part 3213b of the back right decoration body 3213 are light emission decorated, so that the radiation is emitted to the left and right outer sides of the radiation pattern part 3122 of the second pattern 3120. It can be seen that the decoration part 3212b and the radiation decoration part 3213b are continuous.

  Further, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are inclined so that the front end side protrudes forward from the center side of the game area 5a toward the outside in the left-right direction. A feeling of depth can be imparted to the second pattern 3120 by the radiation decoration part 3212b and the radiation decoration part 3213b which are continuous with the radiation pattern part 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102.

  For this reason, the player gives a wide and large light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) spread to the left and right by the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200. Can make a strong impact on the player, attract the player's attention, and think that there may be something good for the player It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the back left decorative body 3212 of the back front effect unit 3200 is located on the rear side of the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, so the first LED 3222 a and the second LED When the two LEDs 3222b are caused to emit light, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 can be illuminated with the light, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 is difficult to see from the player side (front). Can do.

[5-9e. Front left bottom production unit]
Next, the back front lower left effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152, FIG. 156, and the like. The front left lower rendering unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is attached above the left cooling fan 3107 on the left side of the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100.

  The back left lower rendering unit 3300 guides the back bottom left decorative body 3301 having translucency and the back bottom left decorative body 3301 formed so that the character “OK” has a relief shape and protrudes obliquely upward. A decorative body base 3302 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light plate effect unit 3100, and provided between the decorative body base 3302 and the back lower left decorative body 3301. The lower back upper left decorative board 3303 for decorating the part of the back and left lower decorative board 3304 attached to the lower surface of the decorative base 3302 and the lower lower left decorative board 3304 for lighting up the outer periphery of the back lower left decorative body 3301 (FIG. 167).

  The back lower left upper decorative substrate 3303 and the back lower left decorative substrate 3304 have a white surface. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surfaces of the lower back upper left decorative substrate 3303 and the lower lower left decorative substrate 3304, respectively. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back upper left decorative board 3303 and the lower back lower left decorative board 3304 are appropriately caused to emit light, so that the “decided” character portion of the lower back left decorative body 3301 can be decorated. Can be decorated with light emission, or the entire back lower left decorative body 3301 can be decorated with light emission.

[5-9f. Front right bottom production unit]
Next, the back right front rendering unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152, FIG. 156, and the like. The front right lower rendering unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the upper right side of the right lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 above the right cooling fan 3108.

  The back front right bottom rendering unit 3400 includes a back bottom right decorative body 3401 having translucency and a back bottom right decorative body 3401 formed so that the characters of “war” are relief and project obliquely upward. The decorative body base 3402 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 is provided between the decorative body base 3402 and the back lower right decorative body 3401. A lower back upper right decorative board 3403 for illuminating the character part and a lower back right lower decorative board 3404 attached to the lower surface of the decorative base 3402 for luminescent decoration of the outer periphery of the lower right decorative body 3401. (See FIG. 167).

  The back lower right decorative substrate 3403 and the back lower right decorative substrate 3404 have a white surface. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the lower back upper right decorative board 3403 and the lower lower right decorative board 3404, respectively. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back upper right decorative board 3403 and the lower lower right lower decorative board 3404 are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the character portion of “war” of the lower back right decorative body 3401 can be lighted decorated. The outer periphery of the character of “battle” can be decorated with light emission, or the entire back lower right decorative body 3401 can be decorated with light emission.

[5-9g. Sub status indicator]
Next, the sub status indicator 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back right decorative board, the sub status indicator, and the right part of the center accessory in the back unit in the back unit in the left side section, and FIG. a) It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the relationship between the back right decoration board | substrate of a back front effect unit in a back unit, a sub-state indicator, and the site | part on the right side of a center accessory. FIG. 158 is a wiring diagram illustrating the wiring of some of the sub-state LEDs on the back-right decorative board.

  The sub status indicator 3500 is drawn in the effect display device 1600 by accepting the game ball B at the first start opening 2002 separately from the effect image for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 are displayed to indicate, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result The number of holds is displayed.

  The sub status indicator 3500 is provided in the vicinity of the right end of the back upper decorative body 3211 in the front front effect unit 3200 so that it can be always viewed from the front (player side). The sub status indicator 3500 includes a sub status display portion 3501 forming a part of a logo decoration portion 3211b in which small spheres of the back upper decoration body 3211 in the back front production unit 3200 are arranged in a rosary shape, and a front front production. A plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 mounted on the upper left surface of the back right decorative board 3223 of the unit 3200, and a plurality of light guide pins 3520 for guiding light from the sub-state LEDs 3510 to the front end of the sub-state display unit 3501. And.

  The sub-state display part 3501 extends vertically in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the logo part 3211a in the backside decorative body 3211. Further, the sub-state display unit 3501 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward.

  The plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are vertically arranged on the back right decorative substrate 3223, and are side view type LEDs that irradiate light in a direction parallel to the mounted substrate surface (here, forward). Since the plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are mounted on the back right decorative board 3223, they are connected to the production relay board 3026 via the back upper decoration board 3221 and the back left decoration board 3222. Light emission is controlled by the connected peripheral control board 1510.

  The sub-state LED 3510 includes one first sub-design LED 3511 composed of a full-color LED for suggesting a first special lottery result and one second sub-design LED 3512 composed of a full-color LED for suggesting a second special lottery result. And two first sub-holding LEDs 3513 composed of single-color LEDs for displaying the number of first special lottery results, and a single-color LED (for example, red LED) for displaying the number of second special lottery results. And two second sub-holding number LEDs 3514.

  The rear end of the light guide pin 3520 is located on the front surface of the sub-state LED 3510, and the front end passes through one sphere in the sub-state display unit 3501 and is located near the front end of the sphere.

  The sub status indicator 3500 displays the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, etc.) of the sub status LED 3510 as a sub symbol. Specifically, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected is suggested, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are blinked in red for a predetermined fluctuation time. In this embodiment, lighting and extinguishing are repeated every 2F (2/30 sec).

  When the lottery result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result is “losing”, the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 are lit in red as the “losing” symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first special lottery and the second special lottery result is “winning”, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are lit in green as the “hit” symbol.

  The display of the number of first special lottery results and the number of second special lotteries held in the sub-status display 3500 is indicated by two first sub-hold numbers LED 3513 and the number of second sub-holds arranged vertically. The number of reservations is displayed by a combination of lighting states of the LED 3514. Specifically, when the hold number is “0”, the upper and lower two are turned off, when the hold number is “1”, the upper is turned on and the lower is turned off, and when the hold number is “2” The upper and lower two are lit. When the holding number is “3”, the upper is blinked and the lower is lit. When the holding number is “4”, the upper and lower two are blinking. In this way, the number of holds is displayed by the combination of the lighting states of the two LEDs in the first sub hold number LED 3513 and the second sub hold number LED 3514.

  By the way, in this embodiment, although the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, as described above, the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 emit light in red or green as the sub-design. It does not emit blue light. Therefore, in the back right decorative substrate 3223, as shown in FIG. 158, the anodes and cathodes of the blue light emitting elements of the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 are connected and short-circuited. Thereby, even if some malfunction occurs, electricity is not supplied to the blue light emitting element, and the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 do not emit blue light. Therefore, the sub-symbol is not displayed in blue, which does not normally emit light, and it is possible to avoid giving distrust to the player and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. it can. Further, since the anode and cathode of the blue light emitting element which is not used are connected and short-circuited, it is possible to avoid the accumulation of static electricity in the light emitting element, and the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3511 due to static electricity can be avoided. The sub-design LED 3512 can be prevented from being damaged, and the sub-design can be reliably displayed.

  As described above, according to the sub status display 3500 of the present embodiment, the sub-design indicating the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) selected by the sub status display 3500 is displayed. Therefore, even if the display of the main symbol by the effect image on the effect display device 1600 is missed or the suggestion of the special lottery result by the main symbol is not well understood, the special symbol drawn by looking at the sub symbol The lottery result can be recognized by the player.

  Further, in the sub status indicator 3500, since the sub status display portion 3501 forms a part of the logo decoration portion 3211b in the backside decorative body 3211, the sub status LED 3510 is caused to emit light to display a sub symbol or the like. The logo decoration portion 3211b appears to be decorated with light emission, but the game ball is received at the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. Is lottery, the light emission mode of the portion of the sub-state display portion 3501 in the logo decoration portion 3211b changes. Thereby, it can be made to recognize that the light emission aspect is changing according to the 1st special lottery result and the 2nd special lottery result which were drawn, and can make a player recognize a sub symbol. At this time, since the sub-state display part 3501 forming a part of the logo decoration part 3211b decorates the sub-design indicating the lottery result of the first special lottery and the second special lottery result, The sub symbol does not look inorganic like the above technique, and the sub symbol can be melted into the decoration, and the sub state indicator 3500 and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  Further, the light from the sub state LED 3510 mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 is guided to the sub state display portion 3501 provided at a position away from the back right decorative board 3223 by the light guide pin 3520. As a result, light can be guided to the front end of the sub-state display unit 3501 in a good state to display sub-designs and the like. Further, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the logo decoration part 3211b provided along the outer periphery of the logo part 3211a of the back upper decoration body 3211 is provided. Light can be guided to the position of the sub-state display portion 3501 that constitutes a part, and the sub-design can be blended into the decoration of the backside decorative body 3211 to improve the appearance.

  In addition, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b and the center accessory 2500 for causing the back right decoration body 3213 to emit light on the back right decoration board 3223 on which the sub-state LED 3510 for displaying the sub-pattern and the like is mounted. Since the third LED 3223c for illuminating the first sorting device 2530 and the like is further mounted, a game ball that circulates with the back right decoration body 3213 illuminated or the first sorting device 2530 brightened and circulated. B can be easily seen.

  In the above embodiment, the sub-design for suggesting the special lottery result is displayed by red light and green light. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sub symbol may be displayed by blue light and the sub symbol may be displayed by green light and blue light. Further, the sub symbol may be displayed with only one of red light, green light, and blue light. At this time, the same effect as described above can be obtained by connecting the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element which is not used (not emitting light) in the full color LED and short-circuiting them. Note that it is desirable to connect the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element which is not used to be short-circuited, and then connect to GND (ground), so that static electricity can be dropped to GND and released.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the sub-status display 3500, as shown in FIG. 158, among the three light emitting elements of the full color LED, the anode and cathode of the unused light emitting elements are connected and short-circuited (shorted). Although the example used was shown, it is not limited to this, The decoration body is light-decorated, a predetermined part is illuminated, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are displayed by light emission. The present invention may be applied to such a full color LED. Specifically, for example, when a decorative body that does not transmit light of a specific color or a decorative body that has a portion that does not transmit light of a specific color is illuminated with a full-color LED, Since it is not necessary to emit light, the anode and cathode of the light emitting element of the color are connected and short-circuited. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light emitting decoration of the decorative body from appearing unnatural by emitting light in a color that does not need to be emitted due to malfunction or the like, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above. .

  More specifically, for example, a portion formed in red in the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 in the front front rendering unit 3200 (the main decorative portion 3212a and the main decorative portion 3213a). ) Can transmit only red and green light, and when the full color LED (first LED 3222a and first LED 3223a) provided corresponding to the part emits blue light, the part is blue. The part is not decorated with light emission because it does not transmit light, but the part of the color adjacent to the part is decorated with light emission by the blue light, and the intended effect is achieved by the unintended light emission decoration. There is a risk that it will not be able to fully demonstrate. On the other hand, by connecting the anode and cathode of the blue light-emitting element and short-circuiting the full-color LED provided corresponding to the portion that does not transmit blue light, It is possible to avoid unintentional light-emitting decoration from being performed on a part adjacent to the part due to a malfunction, and to prevent an unnatural light-emitting effect from being performed. The production effect can be exhibited, and the same effect as the above can be achieved.

  In the above embodiment, the sub-state LED 3510 is mounted on the back right decorative board 3223. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board is different from the back right decorative board 3223 (for example, the sub right decorative board 3223). The sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the state display board), or the sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the back decorative board 3221.

[5-9h. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out sphere detection unit 3030 that can be attached to the attachment portion 3155 of the back lower sphere discharge unit 3150 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 163 and the like. 159 (a) is a front view of the out sphere detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out sphere detection unit, and (c) is a rear view of the out sphere detection unit, (d ) Is a perspective view of the out sphere detection unit as viewed from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out sphere detection unit as viewed from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out sphere detection unit from the lower right front position. (G) is the perspective view which looked at the out ball detection unit from the lower right back. FIG. 160 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out sphere detection unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 160 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out sphere detection unit as seen from the back.

  FIG. 161 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and FIG. 161 (b) is a perspective view showing the game panel in a state where the out ball detection unit is in contact with the game panel. FIG. 162 is an enlarged cross-sectional view as seen from the right side after assembling the game board and cutting it up and down at the center of the right sensor of the out port. FIG. 163 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out port from the front in the state assembled to the game board.

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008 is formed so as to be attached to the attachment portion 3155 of the back lower ball discharge unit 3150. When the game board 5 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 of the first embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 may or may not be attached.

  The out-ball detecting unit 3030 is driven into the game area 5a, and includes a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, a large winning port 2005, and an accessory winning port 2006. The game ball B that has not been accepted (the game ball B to which no privilege is given, also referred to as “out ball”) is detected. In the present embodiment, the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is detected.

  The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 from the rear, and a unit main body 3031 attached to the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and an out port left sensor attached to the unit main body 3031. 3032 and an out port right sensor 3033, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit main body 3031 so as to cover the rear side of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033.

  The unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and a partition portion 3031b that divides the inside of the cylindrical portion 3031a into left and right. The flange portion 3031c projecting in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3031a, and the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 that are recessed forward from the rear end side of the cylindrical portion are inserted. Insertion recess 3031d. The cylindrical portion 3031a has a front end that is substantially the same size as the out port 1008 in the front component member 1000, is long in the left and right directions, and is inclined so that the lower inner surface is lowered toward the rear side.

  The partition part 3031b is provided in the vicinity of the rear end of the cylinder part 3031a, and is partitioned to a size that allows one game ball B to pass on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3031b is curved such that the front end side protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so as to move backward as it goes upward so that the front side is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3031a.

  The outlet left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the partition portion 3031b in the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The outlet right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B that has circulated on the right side of the partition portion 3031b in the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

  The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B that has passed through the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 downward, and has a partition plate 3034a at the center in the left-right direction.

  In the out ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit main body 3031 is attached to the attachment portion 3155 on the front surface of the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 (see FIG. 162). In addition, the out-ball detecting unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3031 a of the unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031 c is the game panel 1100. (See FIGS. 161 and 162).

  In the state where the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the front end upper portion of the cylindrical portion 3031 a of the unit main body 3031 protrudes forward from the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (FIG. 162). See). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. Further, the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 162).

  The out-ball detecting unit 3030 has a game ball B guided backward by the out-guiding unit 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component member 1000 in the game area 5a. The gas is supplied into the cylindrical portion 3031a, detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, and then discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed without being brought into contact with the board holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detecting unit 3030 of the present embodiment, the player is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and Since it is possible to detect a game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been received in any of the prize winning holes 2006, for example, the reception of the game ball B into a specific winning hole is continuously detected. In spite of the fact that the “out ball” is not detected, it means that an illegal act is performed for a specific winning opening, and it can be notified that the illegal act is performed.

  Further, since the number can be counted by detecting the “out ball”, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory The ratio of “safe balls” in the pachinko machine 1 can be determined from the number of “safe balls” counted by the detection of the game balls B received in the winning opening 2006 and the number of “out balls”.

  Further, in the out-ball detecting unit 3030, the left and right out-port left sensors 3032 and right-side sensors 3033 are partitioned by the partition portion 3031b, so that the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 Can be guided to the outlet left sensor 3032 side, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the outlet right sensor 3033 side. The game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be mainly detected by the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, it is determined whether the player is prone to “left-handed” or “right-handed” based on the number of game balls B detected by the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 per hour. Based on the determination, it is possible to enter the game that is intended by encouraging the optimal driving operation for the gaming situation.

  Further, since the forward projection of the partition portion 3031b is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over, when a large number of game balls B enter the out port 1008 per time, the relatively game balls of the partition portion 3031b The game ball B can be released to the left or right side where the circulation amount of B is small, and the game ball B can be discharged without stagnation at the out port 1008.

  Further, since the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes downward from the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening. 2005 and the game ball B (“safe ball”) that is received in the prize winning hole 2006 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows back in the out ball detection unit 3030 and the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor. It is possible to prevent detection at 3033, and it is possible to accurately detect only the “out ball”.

  In this embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the out ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1101. And can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  Further, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("all balls") thrown into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("all balls") discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, the out ball detection unit 3030 detects only the “out ball”, so the numbers of “out ball”, “safe ball”, and “whole ball” are compared. Thus, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate rendering unit of the back unit. FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate rendering unit of the back unit. The game board 5 produces the light guide plate effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The unit 3100, the back front effect unit 3200, the back front lower left effect unit 3300, and the back front right lower effect unit 3400 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

  Specifically, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light to decorate the first pattern 3110 with light emission. Thereby, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and behind the back front effect unit 3200, the characters “decision battle” are light-decorated so that the player can be informed of the chance. It is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the game by suppressing the decline in interest.

  In addition, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 as viewed from the front are emitted. Then, the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emission. As a result, a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is lit and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised and has a strong impact on the player. Can be given, and it can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state such as “big hit game” occurs, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  When the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 of the back front rendering unit 3200 are light-emitting decorated when the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed with light emission, the radiation pattern portion of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated. 3122, the back decorative element 3212 and the radial decorative part 3212b and the radial decorative part 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213 appear to be continuous, and they together form one picture (special picture). Therefore, a large picture can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 constituting the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body are provided. Since the decoration of 3213 is located in front of the second pattern 3120, a special design can be given a sense of depth, and the special pattern can be shown three-dimensionally. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special design, the player can be entertained, and what can be done to the player. It can be thought that there is something good, and it can raise the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described light emission effect by the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission effect of the decorative body can be combined as appropriate, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 It can also be combined with an image (display effect). As a result, various combinations of lighting effects, display effects, and the like can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, It can be entertained and it can suppress that a player's interest in a game falls.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167 and the like. FIG. 166 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the connection configuration of each board, motor, etc. in the game board. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting indicator 1310g for displaying a set value and displaying an error, and a game board 5 A display for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a. Includes a Sumonita 1310h, the. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this nonvolatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also includes a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a and forces the main control MPU 1310a to be affected by electrical noise when the register changes to an inconsistent content. It is a circuit to reset. Such forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcedly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and again executes the main control-side power-on processing described later. Will be. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, a reset signal is not output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. "Random number circuit"). The main random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 to 65535 as a minimum value is set in advance as a minimum value), and generates an initial value. The circuit configuration is such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets a clock signal (main control) to the main control MPU 1310a with an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at a high speed on the basis of a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, and within a predetermined numerical range. Once all the values in are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value in the predetermined numerical range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining the big hit It has come to set as.

  The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs the various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2402, the general winning mouth sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning mouth 2001, the normal winning mouth sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the normal winning mouth 2003, and the big winning mouth 2005. The big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, the winning combination prize sensor 2513 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the winning combination prize opening 2006, and the gaming ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007 First V winning opening sensor 2514 to be detected, first lost opening sensor 2516 to detect the game ball B received in the first lost opening 2535, second V entering A second V prize port sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2008, a third lose mouth sensor 2518 for detecting the game ball B received in the third lose port 2555, and a game discharged from the game board 5 Out sensor 664 that detects ball B (or out port left sensor 3032 and out port right sensor 3033), magnetic sensor 2010 that detects unauthorized magnetism in game area 5a, and vibration that acts on game board 5 is detected. A detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003 or the like is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via a main control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are sent via the dispensing control board 633 (via, that is, a dispensing control input circuit and a dispensing control output circuit, which will be described later). If it is input to the main control board 1310 without being routed, it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, main control. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the normal prize opening sensor 2401, the prize winning prize sensor 2513, the big prize opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2010, and the vibration sensor 3003 are the panel relay board 1710. Via the main control board 1310 and indirectly through the main control input circuit to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the start control solenoid drive circuit 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , The drive signals to the prize winning solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the second distribution solenoid 2545 are output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, From the output terminal of the output port, the status indicator of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol indicator, the normal hold indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special reserve number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator Each drive signal to the hold number indicator, round indicator, is output directly without passing through another board. Or, to. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal that indicates that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, a launch permission signal that indicates that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the payout control board 633 is output. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (the launch non-permission logic) is reversed when the launch is not permitted. Set to It should be noted that the logic of the firing permission signal is set as an initial value (default), and after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after power recovery), a firing permission signal setting process in a main control side timer interrupt process described later is started. The hardware including the main control output circuit with the reset function is configured so as to be set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the normal winning port sensor 2401, the big winning port sensor 2403, the bonus winning port sensor 2513, the first V winning port sensor 2514, the first The non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the one lose mouth sensor 2516, the second V winning mouth sensor 2515, the third lose mouth sensor 2518, and the out sensor 664, whereas the general winning mouth sensor 3001 is used. Is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the normal winning port 2003, so the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port. The detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having a high durability and a long life is also used for the special prize opening sensor 2403. In addition, since the game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5, the game balls B are frequently detected by the out sensor 664. Occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether or not the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having a high durability and a long life may be used.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, and will format these various commands and transmit them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be described in detail later.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball for maintenance. A ball removal switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation; It is equipped with.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the apparatus 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball-cut detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  In addition, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 195, and detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that informs permission to launch the game ball B is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies launch condition 1 in which a palm or a finger is touching the handle 195, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are based on the CR connection signal. If the firing condition 2 that is electrically connected is established, and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B Therefore, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 195. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 b includes the launch control unit 633 b that performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 has a launch control unit 633 b. It may be configured. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The power may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 166, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like are on one semiconductor chip. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs a high-quality sound, and sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to And a stored sound ROM.

  In the peripheral control IC, a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC The CPU of the control IC sends the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 to the serial I / O for the lamp driving board. The game board side drive data for the game board decoration drive board is transmitted from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and outputs a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5. Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, operation button lift drive motor 36 , And door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the bump output adjustment drive motor 381, etc., and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 A screen for transmitting door-side drive light emission data composed of the door-side light emission data for outputting to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port or displaying on the effect display device 1600. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) to the effect display control unit 1512 from the serial I / O port for display control unit, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is used as a sound source. Or output to IC.

  A detection signal from the second lose mouth sensor 2517 of the center accessory 2500 provided in the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC. Further, detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the press detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the collision output detection sensor 375 of the presentation operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and is provided with a top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 and the like. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a sound signal) is transmitted to the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4. 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) can be sent to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running away.

  The display command output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control IC CPU to the gaming board 5 side are a plurality of serial input / outputs different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various screen data displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  This display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is being performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to an image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each character is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by pasting a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats main scanning in a direction crossing the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially receives one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 129, FIG. 141 thru | or 145, etc. FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained by the player rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. B, that is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N, so that the game ball The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided in the game area 5a above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in the front view (left side of the front frame upper right portion 2502a). Then, while abutting against the plurality of obstacle nails N, the region on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, the game balls B flowing down the left area of the center accessory 2500 pass through the windmill W, and above or below the plurality of obstacle nails N that are obliquely planted in a line along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. Supplied to either side.

  The game ball B supplied to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely planted in a line along the lower side of the center object 2500 is the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a along the row of the obstacle nails N. When the center portion is discharged below the row of the obstacle nail N, the center portion is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first start port 2002 has a high probability. Accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game balls B supplied to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely planted in a line along the lower side of the center object 2500 are the first start opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 of the start opening unit 2100. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the open big prize opening 2005.

  By the way, the game balls B supplied to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted obliquely in a line along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 are caused by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nails N. There is a possibility that it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction and received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is on the right side (upstream above the front frame upper right portion 2502a) from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500. When entering the space portion 2506), it passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and is released above the normal winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500. Then, after coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the normal winning opening 2003, the winning hole 2003 is accepted with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006, and an entrance opened at a left interval from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is struck with a strength that makes contact with the stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it enters the first guide passage 2521, enters the upstream space 2506, and hits the stopper 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not contact (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right hit), the player enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 depending on the driving strength.

  In the present embodiment, the second guide passage 2522 circulates more than the first guide passage 2521 so that the normal winning opening 2003 is accepted with high probability.

  When the game ball B is received in the normal winning port 2003 and detected by the normal winning port sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of games is issued from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When the ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201 and a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port closed in the attacker unit 2400 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal variation time has elapsed.

  If the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 after the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result may be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is limited to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released on the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 without an opportunity to be received at the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed the left side of the normal winning port 2003 passes between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 and then passes through the big winning port guide shelf 2424. , Passing through the front of the closed big prize opening 2005 and discharged onto the lower right rail 1004.

  Then, when the game ball B passes between the second start port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start port left standing wall portion 2422, the normal lottery result lottered by receiving the game ball B at the normal winning port 2003 is “ When the second start opening door 2411 is moving forward with “normal hit”, the game ball B is guided by the second start opening door 2411 and the game ball B is received in the second start opening 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B that has not been guided by the second start door 2411 falls onto the grand prize opening guide shelf 2424 and passes through the front of the closed big prize opening door 2413 from the left end of the big prize opening guidance shelf 2424 to the right. It is discharged onto the lower rail 1004 and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that has been guided to the second start port 2004 side by the second start port door 2411 but has not been received by the second start port 2004 due to the second start port door 2411 retreating on the way. It enters into the attacker right passage 2430 from the lower third opening 2433 of the start port 2004 and is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing through the front of the closed large winning opening door 2413, and from the out port 1008. It is discharged out of the game area 5a.

  Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second start-up upper guide shelf 2421 and the second opening 2432 of the attacker right passage 2430 is opened, The game ball B that has passed through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged out of the game area 5a from the out-out port 1008 without being involved in the special winning opening 2005.

  As described above, the game balls B that have circulated through the first guide passage 2521 are not so much received in the normal winning opening 2003, and therefore the second starting opening 2004 is received by receiving the gaming balls B in the normal winning opening 2003. The normal lottery result in which is opened is rarely derived, and the game ball B is not received much at the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 is received at the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521. There is a high possibility that a normal lottery result (“normal hit”) in which is opened will be drawn, and there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be received at the second starting port 2004.

  For this reason, since the player performs the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2506. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522. Don't be. Thereby, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by giving a change to the operation of driving the game ball B, and to make the player enter the operation of driving the game ball B and to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit” ”,“ Small hit ”,“ Per time reduction (shorter time) ”), and a lottery of a special lottery result is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). Note that the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 includes “losing”, “first small hit”, “second small hit”, “ “3rd small hit”, “2R big hit”, “15R big hit”, etc. In the present embodiment, the second special lottery result is “small hit” (“first small hit”, “second small hit”, “third small hit”) than the first special lottery result. Is set high.

  If the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is “small hit”, ”Is opened / closed in a predetermined opening / closing pattern (see FIG. 144). Since the winning prize winning opening 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, when “small hit” is drawn, “right-handed”, the first guide passage The game ball B is shot into 2521.

  When “small hit” is “first small hit”, the opening / closing time of the prize winning opening 2006 is short, and the game ball B can hardly be received. In the case of “second small hit” or “third small hit”, it takes a long time for the prize winning opening 2006 to be open, and the game ball B is accepted into the prize winning prize 2006 by “right-handed”. Probability is high. When the game ball B is received in the prize winning hole 2006, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  When the game ball B is received at the prize winning opening 2006 when the “small hit” is “second bonus” or “third bonus”, one of the received game balls B is assigned to the first distribution ball. The device 2530 is housed in the housing portion 2531 a of the sorting rotator 2531. When the “small hit” is “second hit”, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotating body 2531 passes through the second sorting device 2540 and the third sorting device 2550. The third sort table 2554 is supplied to the third sort table 2554. The game balls B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 are bounced by the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third distribution right rotator 2558, and from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the central table 2554a, Roll from the central table 2554a to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, and circulate to either the second V prize opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 provided in the central table 2554a. Sorted. When the game ball B is received (assigned) to the second V winning opening 2008, “15R big hit” is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the third loser opening 2555, “15R big hit” or the like is not executed and the previous state is restored.

  On the other hand, when the “small hit” is “third hit”, the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 is moved to the first V winning opening 2007 side in the second sorting device 2540. Distribution is performed, and “15R big hit” is executed.

  The first special lottery result and the first lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008, and receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 If the result of the 2 special lottery is “2R jackpot” or “15R jackpot”, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, or When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the big prize opening 2005 is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is set) that makes the game balls B unacceptable. A “big hit” game is executed by repeating a predetermined number of times (referred to as one round) (a predetermined number of rounds, for example, two rounds or 15 rounds).

  Since this big prize opening 2005 is mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the player is allowed to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Can do. When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  The guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is easier to perform the driving operation on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side. Since it is less likely to be accepted into the grand prize opening 2005 than the side, it is possible to make the player select which passage is aimed for, and make it difficult for the player to get bored with various games A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when “15R big hit” or “2R big hit” occurs during the short-running state, lottery is performed by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 after the “big hit” game is over. The special symbol variation time for informing the player of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result is made shorter than usual until the predetermined variation number (for example, 100 times) is reached. Accelerate the time until the “win” of the lottery is drawn.

  Further, in the “big hit” game aiming at the big winning opening 2005, the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 exist in the middle of the game ball B reaching the big winning opening 2005. The game ball B is likely to be received at the second starting port 2004, and if the next “big hit” or “small hit” is drawn during the “big hit” game, an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage It will last for a long time and can make the player more entertaining.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a state in which each image sequence is changed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of images are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the image sequences are displayed in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in order, and the respective picture sequences are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture sequences to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, “small hit” game, “big hit” game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. A player participation type effect that operates the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, etc. by using the front effect unit 3200, etc. as appropriate, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the operation to be operated by the player is wrong or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player to that effect.

[8. Main effects of game board]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side is the first in the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. When it is received in the normal winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side through either the guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, a predetermined privilege (with a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out, Normal lottery whether or not to open and close the second starting port 2004) is given, so that the player is allowed to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 having the normal winning port 2003 A game can be performed.

  Since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are twisted so as to be aligned in the front-rear direction in the heavy duty portion 2520a in the middle of the left-right direction, On the upper entrance side, the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 are arranged in the left-right direction, and the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 can be clearly distinguished. The game ball B can be made to be easily struck by the operation of driving the game ball B, and the game ball B can be operated for the desired first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522.

  On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, since the twisted portion 2520a is twisted so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction, It is difficult to discriminate which guide passage is circulating from the player, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game balls B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. it can. The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 make it possible to see the game ball B being guided (distributed) from the front, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are formed of a transparent member. Therefore, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap each other at the portion of the heavy viewing portion 2520a arranged in front and rear, it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at a glance. Can be. Furthermore, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to be aligned in the left-right direction on the exit side below the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly discriminated, they are twisted twice on the upstream side, so that the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the inlet side The relationship with the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the exit side can be discriminated and unclear.

  Therefore, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is difficult to understand where the game ball B comes out when the game ball B is driven (entered) into one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It can be difficult to recognize what the game result will be after the group 2520 is distributed, and the game ball B will be inserted into any of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 so that a normal prize is won. Since it is difficult to know whether the possibility of being accepted into the mouth 2003 is high, when the game ball B is struck, it is possible to care about which guide passage the game ball B circulates and distribute the player The game ball B that is being played can be noted.

  In addition, when a player pays attention to the game ball B circulating in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the guide passage (second guide is likely to be received in the normal winning opening 2003). The player can be thrilled by whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the passage 2522), can increase the expectation for the game, and can also have an unexpected exit (exit of the first guide passage 2521) ) Can be surprised by giving the player a surprise, and the player can be entertained to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 having an exit that is likely to be received in the normal winning port 2003, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. However, it is possible to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. Therefore, a difficulty level can be given to the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to make the player hard to get bored by the change of the driving operation of the game ball B, and to the game ball to the player. B's driving operation can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have a portion of the overlapping portion 2520a aligned in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the left-right direction is allowed at that portion. Since it can be made as narrow as possible, it is relatively easy to secure a space on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the accessory winning prize opening 2006, the first distribution device 2530, etc. are arranged in the secured space. And a pachinko machine 1 that can more entertain the player.

  Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the frame-like shape that partitions the game area 5a into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a into which the game ball B is driven on the front side. Since the center accessory 2500 is attached and a third sorting device 2550 having a front end protruding forward from the game panel 1100 is provided at the lower side of the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500, the third The distribution device 2550 can be conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the third distribution device 2550 can be strongly interested in the distribution of the game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be provided. Further, since the third distribution device 2550 is provided at the lower side of the inner periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that divides the game area 5a, the third distribution apparatus 2550 is provided in the game area 5a. It is possible to enjoy both the game by the game ball B in the game area 5a and the distribution of the game ball B by the third sorting device 2550 in the game area 5a. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In the third sorting table 2554, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is the right table of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c provided on both the left and right sides with the central table 2554a in between. When supplied to the 2554c via the collection table 2554d, it rolls to the lower front side of the right table 2554c and moves to the protruding piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 provided on the front side of the right table 2554c. It will be hit and move to the rear side. At this time, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is hit by the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and the timing at which the game ball B reaches the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the third distribution right The strength and situation in which the projecting piece 2558a of the rotating body 2558 hits the game ball B varies. Therefore, when the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is hit by the projecting piece 2558a to some extent, the game ball B climbs the right table 2554c toward the rear side, passes through the third distribution rotating body 2556, and It will enter into the central table 2554a that is in communication. At this time, in the third distributing middle rotating body 2556, the communication state between the center table 2554a and the right table 2554c (the left table 2554b) is changed by rotation. Even if the game ball B reaches the rear side third rotating body 2556 after being hit by 2558a, the game ball B enters the central table 2554a side depending on the rotation timing of the third distributing body rotary body 2556. Without being returned to the right table 2554c. Further, since the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are provided on both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a, when the game ball B is strongly hit rearward by the protruding piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558, In some cases, the rotating body 2556 may be passed through the three distributions and enter the left table 2554b on the opposite side.

  On the other hand, if the hitting by the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is weak, the game ball B returns without climbing the right table 2554c to the rear side, and the timing of returning to the front side and the third timing. Depending on the timing of the projecting piece 2558a of the sorting right rotating body 2558, the game ball B may be hit again weakly, and the right table 2554c may be moved back and forth between the rear side and the front side. Then, when the game ball B is hit by the projecting piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 and enters the central table 2554a from the rear side through the third distributing middle rotating body 2556, the central table 2554a moves toward the front side. And will be accepted by either one of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third loser openings 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a. Without going through the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a and entering the left side of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the projecting piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 (or again). Then, it is struck by the protruding piece 2557a) of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and moves to the rear side.

  In this way, the game ball B supplied to the third sorting device 2550 is the protrusion 2557a of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 on the front side of the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c or the third sorting right rotating body 2558. When the rear projecting piece 2558a is struck rearward, it enters the central table 2554a from the rear side of the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the third distributing middle rotating body 2556, and the central table 2554a is moved forward. The movement in which the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the central table 2554a, and the recovery table 2554d are circulated in order, such as being supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c again via the recovery table 2554d, The second V prize opening 2008 or the second opened in the table 2554a So that the repeated until it is accepted in any of the loss port 2555.

  Accordingly, the game ball B is hit by the rotation of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 or the third sorting right rotating body 2558, and the second table 2554b or the right table 2554c is passed through the third sorting middle rotating body 2556. Since the game ball B is sent to the central table 2554a in which the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555 are opened, what happens when the game ball B is supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c? It is possible to make it impossible for the player to predict whether or not the game ball B is hit backward, and the player's line of sight is moved back and forth between the left table 2554b, the right table 2554c and the central table 2554a. It is possible to entertain and entertain the game ball B.

  Further, the timing at which the game ball B reaches the third distributed left rotating body 2557 or the third distributed right rotating body 2558, and the third distributed left rotating body 2557 or the third distributed right rotating body 2558 If the conditions such as the timing of hitting and the timing of the third sorting rotating body 2556 at which the game ball B easily enters the central table 2554a are not met, the game ball B is moved from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the central table 2554a. In addition, depending on the strength of the game ball B hitting by the protruding piece 2557a of the third distributed left rotating body 2557 or the protruding piece 2558a of the third distributed right rotating body 2558, the third distribution on the rear side Since it may enter the right table 2554c or the left table 2554b on the opposite side after passing through the middle rotator 2556, the protruding piece 25 of the third sorting left rotator 2557 7a or the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 can make it difficult to predict the movement of the game ball B when the game ball B is hit rearward, and the game ball B is placed on the central table 2554a. Depending on whether or not to enter, the player can be harassed, can be entertained, a premium feeling for the central table 2554a can be given, and for the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a It is possible to entertain the players with a strong interest and interest. At this time, since the game ball B enters the central table 2554a through the third distribution rotating body 2556, the rotation of the third distribution rotating body 2556 when the game ball B enters the central table 2554a. Depending on the position, the game ball B is sent to the center side in the width direction of the central table 2554a or to the end side, and the game ball B can be guided in various directions on the central table 2554a. It is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B that rolls along a simple route, to make the player less tired, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Then, when the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a is received in the second V winning opening 2008 that is open near the front end of the central table 2554a, a privilege that is advantageous to the player (here, “big hit game”) ), The player can strongly hope that the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a from the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, Depending on whether or not the second V prize opening 2008 is accepted, the player can be thrilled and excited to increase the expectation for acceptance to the second V prize opening 2008. It is possible to have a strong interest in the distribution of the game balls B in the device 2550, and it is possible to entertain the distribution of the game balls B and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, unless the game ball B supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c is hit with a certain amount of force by the protruding piece 2557a of the third sorted left rotating body 2557 or the protruding piece 2558a of the third sorted right rotating body 2558, In addition to not reaching the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, depending on the rotational position of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, the second rotating body 2556 may not enter the central table 2554a. If neither the V winning opening 2008 nor the third loser opening 2555 is accepted, it is returned to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d from the front side of the central table 2554a, so that it takes a relatively long time. The game ball B stays in the third sorter 2550, and the conventional pachinko machine Longer than a sorter as down, it is possible to entertain the distribution of game balls B, and reduction of the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the strength at which the game ball B is hit in the third distributed left rotating body 2557 or the third distributed right rotating body 2558 is unpredictable to the player. Further, the number of times the game ball B is hit by the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is not limited to one, and the complicated rolling path After passing through, it will be accepted into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555, so that the player strongly feels that the distribution destination of the game ball B is selected by random transfer. Can do. Accordingly, even if the time (distribution time) until the game ball B is received in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 in the third distribution device 2550 becomes longer, It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and to enjoy the development by selecting a random allocation destination (rolling destination), and to get bored with a strong interest and interest in the game ball B. It can be made difficult to do.

  Also, for a relatively long time, the game ball B rolls so as to circulate between the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the central table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d, and then received in the third loser opening 2555 ( However, as described above, the player can strongly feel that the game ball B is randomly distributed by the third distribution device 2550, and therefore, there is simply no luck. As a result, the distribution result can be easily accepted, and it can be avoided that the player is disappointed and the interest is lowered.

  In addition, the game ball B moves back and forth between the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, or travels between the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the central table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d. Even if it takes a long time to be accepted at either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 and the allocation is confirmed, the second V winning opening 2008 is provided. The player's interest does not decline from the expectation of acceptance, and the player can continue to be entertained, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player being fully enjoyed Therefore, even if it is accepted in the third loser opening 2555, it can relieve disappointment and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. That.

  Furthermore, when the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a and rolled forward is not received in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555, the front end of the central table 2554a Since the player enters the collection table 2554d and is guided to either the left or right left table 2554b or right table 2554c, is the game table B guided to the desired left table 2554b or right table 2554c in the collection table 2554d? The player can be excited by no, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are in contact with the upper side of the center of the game ball B so as to strike. When the game ball B is hit from the three-sort left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right-rotation body 2558, the game ball B can be made difficult to lift from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from jumping out from 2550. Further, the protruding piece 2557a of the third distributed left rotating body 2557 and the protruding piece 2558a of the third distributed right rotating body 2558 are projected into the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c with the same length as the radius of the game ball B. Therefore, the chance that the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a just meets the game ball B can be reduced. And the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a can easily hit the game ball B, so that the game ball B can be made difficult to enter the central table 2554a, and the left table 2554b. In the right table 2554c, the game ball B can easily go back and forth between the rear side and the front side.

  In addition, since the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555 are provided with a protrusion 2554i at the front end, the game balls B are circular openings of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555. Even if it tries to rotate along the edge of the ball, it will come into contact with the protrusion 2554i in the middle, and the contact with the protrusion 2554i can play the game ball B from the edge of the opening to the front side or the inside of the opening. It can be prevented that it jumps out from the edge and is received by the third loser opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a situation where the game ball B is unnecessarily received in the third loser opening 2555 and the player is disappointed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the protrusion 2554i causes the game ball B to go around the edge of the circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third lost opening 2555 and be received by the third lost opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, it is possible to make the acceptance probability to the second V prize opening 2008 substantially the same as the designed one, and the variation in the acceptance probability to the second V prize opening 2008 for each pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and it is difficult to give distrust to the player.

  Further, a third sorting device 2550 is provided on the lower side of the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500, and the rear side is raised with the central table 2554a, the left table 2554b, and the right table 2554c arranged side by side. Since it is inclined, the third sorting device 2550 is below the eye level of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so the central table 2554a of the third sorting device 2550 and the left The table 2554b and the right table 2554c can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball B rolling on the center table 2554a, the left table 2554b, and the right table 2554c can be easily seen, and the second V prize opening 2008 or the second table The pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy the movement of the game ball B distributed to the three loser mouth 2555 can be provided.

  Further, since the central table 2554a is inclined so that the rear side becomes higher, the game ball B that has entered the rear side of the central table 2554a from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c and the pachinko machine 1 are seated in front. Since the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555 are positioned with the player who is playing, it is determined whether or not the game ball B is rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008. The movement of the game ball B that can be easily seen and shown to the player can be more enjoyed, and the player can be made to feel that the game ball B is attracted to the second V winning opening 2008. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for acceptance into the second V prize opening 2008 and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the central table 2554a and the like are tilted so that the rear side becomes higher and the game ball B rolls forward, the central table 2554a is compared with a case where it rolls in the left-right direction. Since the width of the right and left of the game ball B can be widened, the rolling path of the game ball B in the central table 2554a can be made more diverse, and the pachinko machine 1 that can make the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable can be obtained. .

  Further, in the third sorting apparatus 2550, the game ball B is first supplied to the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, and the game ball B is received at the second V winning opening 2008. Since the game ball B is hit by the third sorting right rotating body 2558 as a necessary condition, the right table 2554c of the third sorting device 2550 is stopped when the third sorting right rotating body 2558 is stopped for some reason. Even if the game ball B is supplied to the second V prize opening 2008 illegally and the game ball B is illegally received, the game ball B is not hit by the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558. The game ball B does not enter the table 2554a, and the illegal reception of the game ball B into the second V prize opening 2008 can be prevented.

  Further, the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third rotation rotation sensor 2565 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 via the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 are used. The presence / absence of rotation of the distribution right rotating body 2558 can be detected, and the presence / absence of rotation of the rotating body 2556 during third distribution is detected by the rotation detecting sensor 2563 during the third distribution via the transmission gear 2567. Therefore, it is detected that the rotation of the third sorting left rotating body 2557, the third sorting right rotating body 2558, the third sorting rotating body 2556, etc. has stopped for some reason. Can be notified, and a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like can be notified.

  In addition, the rotation of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 rotated by decelerating the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is changed to the third rotation. It is detected by the minute left rotation detection sensor 2564 or the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 to detect whether the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is rotated. Thus, even if the rotation speed of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 is increased, whether the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are rotated or not is checked. Since the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 for detection are rotated by the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 being decelerated, Third sort left rotating body 2557, third sort Since the rotation speed is slower than that of the rotating body 2558, the rotation of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is reliably detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565. It is possible to detect the presence / absence of rotation of the third distributed left rotating body 2557 and the third distributed right rotating body 2558 via the left rotation detecting gear 2569 and the right rotation detecting gear 2571.

  Further, even if the rotation speed of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is increased (even if it is increased), the rotation speed of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is increased. Is slower than the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558, and therefore the detection period of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 is unnecessary. Therefore, an appropriate detection cycle can be set, and an increase in load on the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are increased in speed (high speed). The third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 that rotate at high speed can surprise the player, and have a strong interest in the distribution of the game balls B by the third distribution device 2550. You can make it. Further, by rotating the third distributed left rotating body 2557 and the third distributed right rotating body 2558 at a high speed, the third distributed left rotating body 2557 and the third distributed right rotating body 2558 hit the game ball B. The timing of the game ball can be made more difficult to predict, and the game ball B can be hit even with a slight position or timing shift of the game ball B, so that the game ball B can be made hard to hit. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above effects can be provided.

  Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, nothing is displayed on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the back provided near the periphery thereof. The decorations of the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 of the front effect unit 3200 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and The pachinko machine 1 is decorated with the back right decorative body 3213 to improve the appearance. In this normal state, when the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are decorated with light emission, the outer peripheral side of the light guide plate 3102 can be decorated with light emission when viewed from the front. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the light emitting decoration of the body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, and the player's attention is given to the back top decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right It can be attracted to the decorative body 3213. On the other hand, when the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed in a light emitting state in a normal state, the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 becomes visible from the player side, and the outer peripheral side Since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are not light-decorated, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 appear dark. Accordingly, the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 looks brighter, and the player's interest can be attracted to the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102.

  Then, when the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is lit and displayed, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are lit and decorated, the second pattern 3120, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3212 of the light guide plate 3102 are displayed. Since a single pattern (special pattern) is formed together with the decoration of the decorative body 3213, a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 constituting the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body are provided. Since the decoration of 3213 is located in front of the second pattern 3120, a special design can be given a sense of depth, and the special pattern can be shown three-dimensionally. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special design, the player can be entertained, and what can be done to the player. It can be thought that there is something good, and it can raise the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 has a radiation pattern portion 3122 reaching the periphery of the light guide plate 3102, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 have a radial pattern portion. 3122 is provided with a radiating decoration portion 3212b and a radiating decoration portion 3213b that are continuously decorated, and in the back unit 3000, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed in a light-emitting manner and the back left decoration. When the body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 (at least the radiation decoration part 3212b and the radiation decoration part 3213b) are decorated with light emission, the radiation pattern part 3122, the radiation decoration part 3212b, and the radiation decoration part 3213b appear to be continuous. Therefore, the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b It is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the game, and the special pattern composed of the second pattern 3120, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can be shown to the player without any discomfort. Such operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, as described above, the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b can enhance the sense of unity of the special pattern. By illuminating the radiant decoration part 3212b and the radiant decoration part 3213b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213, the player can be shown a light emission effect that the second pattern 3120 spreads outward, It can surprise the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on both the left and right sides of the second design 3120, the second design 3120 appears to spread sideways and become a special design. A three-dimensional special picture can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained by the powerful special picture to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 constituting the special pattern are inclined so as to protrude forward as going to the outer peripheral side, the inside of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 The light guide plate 3102 (second pattern 3120) at the back is visible in the back, and the depth feeling of the special pattern composed of the second pattern 3120 and the decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 is further enhanced. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be provided.

  In addition, when the second pattern 3120 is emitted and displayed by cocktail light on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the part of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c in the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 constitutes cocktail light. Since the light is decomposed into light components and emitted in multiple colors, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the second pattern 3120 (first pattern 3110), and to increase the player's interest. Can be attracted. Specifically, for example, when yellow light composed of red light and green light is radiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102 as a cocktail light, a portion excluding the spectral light emitting unit 3102c in the second pattern 3120 In the case where the light is emitted in yellow, yellow light is split into red light and green light in the part of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c in the second pattern 3120, and the red and green light is mixed and emitted in a glittering manner. Thus, the second pattern 3120 is displayed in a light-emitting manner at a portion emitting light in yellow and a portion emitting red and green light. On the other hand, when light of one of the three primary colors of light (for example, red light) is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the light may be further split at the part of the spectral light emitting unit 3102 c in the second pattern 3120. Since this is not possible, light is emitted with the emitted color light, and the entire second pattern 3120 is displayed with light emission in the same color. As described above, since the light emission mode of the second pattern 3120 (first pattern 3110) to be displayed can be changed depending on the color of light applied to the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, more various light emission effects can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more enjoyable and the player can be entertained by the spectral light emitting unit 3102c shining with a plurality of colors. can do.

  In addition, since the spectral light emitting unit 3102c performs spectral separation using a difference in refractive index due to a difference in light color (wavelength), for example, when yellow light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the player Depending on the difference in the position at which the second pattern 3120 is viewed, one point of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c looks red, looks green, or looks yellow between red and green. Since one point of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c in the light guide plate 3102 is very small, one point of the spectral light emitting unit 3102c looks red or green or red and green even with a slight movement of the player. Since the spectral light emitting unit 3102c appears to shine with a plurality of colors, the above-described effects can be obtained. For this reason, when white light including all three primary colors of light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the spectral light emitting unit 3102 c appears to glitter with rainbow colors, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect with a high effect.

  Further, the spectral light emitting unit 3102c is provided in the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 that is continuous with the radiation decoration portion 3212b and the radiation decoration portion 3213b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213. When the cocktail light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the radiant pattern portion 3122 shines in a plurality of colors, so that the radiant pattern portion 3122 emits light from the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213. It becomes a light emission mode similar to decoration, can enhance the sense of unity between the radiation pattern part 3122, the radiation decoration part 3212b and the radiation decoration part 3213b, and reduce the sense of incongruity of the special pattern displayed as a unit. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertained.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 having the light guide plate 3102 is provided behind the game panel 1100, and the outer periphery of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100. The back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front rendering unit 3200 are attached to the front side of the frame-shaped unit base 3101 that holds the light guide plate 3102. In addition, an effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3101 via a back box 3010. Accordingly, in a normal state, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are visible through the opening 1102 of the gaming panel 1100, and the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and Since the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be seen inside the back right decorative body 3213, when the effect image is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the first image 3110 and the second image are displayed on the light guide plate 3102. Even when 3120 is not lit and displayed, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. At the same time, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are illuminated and decorated. Taseru it can, it is possible to attract the interest of the player.

  At this time, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3212 are provided. Even if the decorative body 3213 is decorated with light emission, light from the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 does not pass through the light guide plate 3102 and irradiate forward. The light of the upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, which is emitted by the light emitting decoration, can reduce the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 from shining and floating. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 3102 until the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102 are displayed with light emission. In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are as close as possible to each other. It is possible to make it difficult for irregular reflection of light to occur between the apparatus 1600 and to reduce the appearance of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 shining and floating due to the irregular reflection. Thus, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 3102, the LEDs on the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are caused to emit light and the first pattern on the light guide plate 3102. By displaying the 3110 and the second pattern 3120 in a light-emitting manner, the player notices the presence of the light guide plate 3102 for the first time, and can greatly surprise the player, and there is something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game as if it is present, and it is possible to entertain the first design 3110 and the second design 3120 that are luminescently displayed and to suppress the decrease in interest, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 Can be fully exhibited.

  Further, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate is formed by LEDs of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104. Even if the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of 3102 are displayed in a light-emitting manner, the light does not illuminate the front of the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213. The back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are not seen through the light plate 3102, and the first design 3110 and the second design 3120 can be lit and displayed in a good state. Therefore, as in the conventional case, the back of the light guide plate is brightened by the light emission display of the pattern on the light guide plate, so that the light emission display pattern does not become difficult to see. The pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be viewed and enjoyed in a good state, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 that can be decorated with light emission so as to surround the periphery of the light guide plate 3102 are attached to the front side of the unit base 3101, the back top decorative Since the body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can decorate the periphery of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 displayed on the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be decorated. The design 3120 can be enhanced to attract the player's interest, and the first design 3110 and the second design 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 can be entertained to prevent a decrease in interest, and the back decoration By decorating the body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 as appropriate, the back top decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back Colorful effect in the decorative body 3213 and the light guide plate 3102 can show the player and it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player.

  Further, a back upper decorative body 3211, a back left decorative body 3212, and a back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, and the decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 is provided in the light guide plate 3102. Since the second picture 3120 is displayed in a light emitting manner (or continuous), the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 and the second picture 3120 can be seen together. The second design 3120 to be displayed can be displayed larger, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 outside the second design 3120 are positioned in front of the light guide plate 3102. Therefore, a sense of depth can be given to the second design 3120, and the second design 3120 can be shown in three dimensions. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to raise the expectation for the game by suppressing the decline of interest by making the player think that there is something good. Can do.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, as described above, it is possible to prevent irregular reflection of light between the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to reduce the effect that the front of the effect display device 1600 shines due to irregular reflection and the effect image becomes difficult to see, and the effect image can be visually recognized in a good state. Therefore, both the effect by the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect by the effect image of the effect display device 1600 can be shown to the player in a good state, and the player is entertained. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened when the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are displayed with light emission. The first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be made easier to see, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be sufficiently exhibited. In addition, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image (for example, imitation pattern) of the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 that is displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 3102, or the first image 3110 of the light guide plate 3102 or the first image By displaying an effect image that is integrated with the two patterns 3120, it is possible to present more various effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppressing a decrease in interest. .

  The unit base 3101 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 with the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 therebetween, and the rear side of the unit base 3101. Since the effect display device 1600 is attached via the back box 3010, a back upper decorative body 3211, a back left decorative body 3212, a back right decorative body 3213, and a game panel 1100 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102. In addition, since the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is closed by the effect display device 1600, when the light guide plate effect unit 3100 (the pachinko machine 1 or the game board 5) is handled, the operator also moves from the front side to the rear side. In addition, the light guide plate 3102 can be made difficult to touch, and the light guide plate 3102 can be prevented from being stained or scratched.

  Accordingly, during manufacturing, the light guide plate 3102 can be made less susceptible to dirt and scratches without having to work with great care so that the light guide plate 3102 does not get dirty or scratched. The production unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102) can be easily handled, the workability during production can be improved, the occurrence of defective products during production due to scratches can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall or when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained in the game hall, it is difficult for an operator to touch the light guide plate 3102 so that the light guide plate 3102 is not easily damaged or damaged. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 with the light guide plate 3102 free from dirt and scratches, and the first pattern 3110 displayed on the light guide plate 3102 is displayed. The second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state, and the effect by the light guide plate 3102 can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the transparent center accessory 2500 is attached via the flange portion 2503 to the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a through which the game ball B circulates on the front side. In addition, a frame-shaped rear frame portion 2504 is provided from the flange portion 2503 to the opening portion 1102 of the game panel 1100 along the inner peripheral surface of the opening portion 1102, and the rear frame portion 2504 has a constant cross-sectional shape. Since the decoration is provided with a plurality of projections and depressions extending in the front-rear direction in the circumferential direction of the frame, the light is irregularly refracted by the lens action of the decoration, and the opening 1102 passes through the rear frame portion 2504. The inner peripheral surface of is unclear. In addition, a decoration portion composed of a plurality of projections and depressions includes light from an LED provided in the pachinko machine 1, an effect display device 1600, light in a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and other pachinko machines. The rear frame portion 2504 appears to shine shiningly by reflecting light, etc. As described above, the decorative lens action or reflection action of the rear frame portion 2504 can make the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 difficult to see through the rear frame portion 2504, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance. it can.

  Further, the outside of the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is a game area 5a through which the game ball B circulates, the center accessory 2500 is transparent, and the rear frame portion 2504 is substantially along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102. Therefore, the size of the inner periphery of the rear frame portion 2504 approaches the size of the opening portion 1102, and the range in which the back of the gaming panel 1100 can be seen can be at least as large as the opening portion 1102. Rear visibility can be improved. Therefore, the range in which the front front effect unit 3200, the light guide plate 3102, the effect display device 1600, etc. provided behind the game panel 1100 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be made wider than before. In addition, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the front stage production unit 3200 and the like through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the production effect by the front side production unit 3200 and the like can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In addition, the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 can clearly divide the front surface (the game area 5a) of the game panel 1100 into an area where the game balls B are distributed (outside the frame) and an area where the game balls B are not distributed (in the frame). Therefore, the front-side effect unit 3200, the light guide plate 3102, the effect display device 1600, etc. provided behind the game panel 1100 are distributed in the game area 5a outside the frame of the center accessory 2500. The pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the game by the game ball B in the game area 5a without inhibiting the visibility and can suppress the decrease in the interest of the player can be provided.

  Further, as described above, the decoration provided with a plurality of projections and depressions in the rear frame portion 2504, the light from the LED and the effect display device 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1, the game in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since the light in the hall, the light from other pachinko machines and the like can be reflected, the rear frame portion 2504 and the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 appear to shine shiningly. The appearance of the machine 1 can be improved, and a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's interest can be provided.

  Further, as described above, the inner frame of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100 can be made difficult to see from the player side by the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500. Even if a plywood whose inner peripheral surface (cut surface) is not clean is used, deterioration of appearance can be suppressed. Therefore, a relatively inexpensive plywood can be used as the game panel 1100, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  By the way, if the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is separated from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 to some extent, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 that can be seen through the transparent rear frame portion 2504 is Since it appears to be shifted with respect to the portion 2504, it becomes easier for the player to notice the presence of the inner peripheral surface. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is brought close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the opening 1102 that can be seen through the transparent rear frame portion 2504. The inner peripheral surface of the rear frame portion 2504 appears to substantially coincide with the rear frame portion 2504, and the rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening portion 1102 can be illusioned. By making it difficult to notice the presence of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102, deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  Further, since the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is brought close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 that can be seen through the transparent rear frame portion 2504 is It can be seen that it almost coincides with the portion 2504, and the illusion that the rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 are integrated can be made illusion, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 can be made to the player. Deteriorating the appearance can be suppressed by making it difficult to notice the presence of.

  In addition, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b of the back left decorative board 3222 in the back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 for emitting and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 are provided behind the game panel 1100, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are provided. It is possible to make the inner frame of the opening 1102 difficult to see by the light emission decoration of the rear frame portion 2504 by making the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 light emission decoration together with the back left decorative body 3212 by the light emission of the two LEDs 3222b. In addition, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b can appropriately emit light according to the gaming situation (gaming state), and the rear frame portion 2504 can be decorated to emit light. Entertainers and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b for decorating the rear frame portion 2504 are provided behind the gaming panel 1100, the LED is mounted between the rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102. Compared to the case where a decorative substrate is provided, the rear frame portion 2504 can be made as close as possible to the inner peripheral surface of the opening portion 1102, and therefore the frame without passing through the transparent center accessory 2500. The range that can be seen through the inside can be made wider, and the rear visibility can be improved.

  Further, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b for decorating the rear frame portion 2504 are provided at the rear of the game panel 1100, the light for decorating the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is emitted forward. Therefore, the light of the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b can easily reach the player's eyes, the rear frame portion 2504 can be brightened and decorated, and the rear frame portion 2504. Since the plurality of irregularities forming the decoration of the first LED 3222a extend in the front-rear direction, the first LED 3222a is decorated in addition to the light emitting decoration of the rear frame portion 2504 by the light from the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b. And the light from the second LED 3222b can be guided to the front end of the rear frame portion 2504. 2500 Front and front frame portion 2502 also becomes possible to emit light decorations, it is possible to improve the appearance.

  In addition, since the rear frame portion 2504 has a decoration in which a plurality of irregularities extending in the front-rear direction with a constant cross-sectional shape are arranged in the circumferential direction of the frame, the center accessory 2500 is resin-molded. When removing from the die, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the die simply by removing it in the front-rear direction, so there is no need to use a complicated die for forming the center accessory 2500, and the pachinko machine 1 Such an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in the center accessory 2500 that is partitioned so that the game ball B does not enter the inside on the front side of the game panel 1100 having the opening 1102 penetrating forward and backward. In the frame-like front frame portion 2502 of the center base 2501, a flange portion 2503 extending inward from the rear end of a portion that extends at least vertically and outside the opening 1102 is provided. Since the center object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 by being attached to the panel 1100, anything is extended to the outside (the game area 5a side) at the portion where the flange portion 2503 extends to the inside in the front frame portion 2502. It will not be. Accordingly, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, so that the substantial game area 5a is formed in the front frame portion 2502. Even if the size of the frame-like front frame portion 2502 is the same, the game area 5a can be made larger.

  Further, in the game area 5a, the area where the game ball B mainly circulates downward is the area that is outside (left side) of the portion extending vertically on the left side of the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500. Since the flange portion 2503 extending inward is provided at the portion of the front frame portion 2502, the width in the left-right direction of the region where the game ball B circulates downward (the left outer region of the center accessory 2500) Can be increased. Accordingly, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in the area can cause the game ball B to flow down while moving greatly in the left-right direction. It is possible to lengthen the flow time of the ball B, and to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

  Further, the flange portion 2503 is attached to the front frame portion 2502 by extending the flange portion 2503 from the portion located outside the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the flange portion 2503 is opposite to the game area 5a. Therefore, the game ball B always circulates on the game panel 1100, and the game ball B can be circulated in a stable state without any strange behavior. Specifically, for example, the flange portion attached to the game panel in the center object is extended to the inside of the opening portion of the game panel, and the peripheral wall portion is extended forward from the inner end portion of the flange portion. By doing so, it is possible to enlarge the game area outside the peripheral wall. However, in the case where the above is performed, since there is no gaming panel behind the opening located in the opening of the flange portion, the game medium flows (rolls) through the portion of the flange portion. The part may vibrate and may behave differently from the game media circulating on the game panel, or the flange portion may be fatigued and damaged early due to vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B always circulates on the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B circulates in a stable state without any strange behavior. The game ball B can be prevented from being distrusted by the strange behavior of the game ball B, and the game ball B does not circulate on the flange portion 2503 extended inward. The distribution of the game ball B does not cause fatigue and damage of the portion of the flange portion 2503 at an early stage.

  In addition, since the flange portion 2503 is extended inward from a portion of the front frame portion 2502 that is located outside the opening 1102, the flange portion 2503 can be securely attached to the game panel 1100, as described above. The pachinko machine 1 which has an effect can be provided.

  Further, a part of the flange portion 2503 that attaches the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 is extended inward from the front frame portion 2502, and the game ball B circulates on the portion of the flange portion 2503. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the transparent flange portion 2503 from becoming dirty or scratched by the circulation of the game ball B, thereby reducing the transparency, and preventing the appearance from being deteriorated. The effect by the object 2500 can be exhibited continuously.

  Further, at the portion where the flange portion 2503 extends to the inside of the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the front frame portion 2502 can be reinforced from the inside of the frame by the flange portion 2503. Even if the game ball B contacts (contacts) the part of the front frame portion 2502, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 can be maintained by the flange portion 2503, and the front frame portion 2502 (center accessory 2500) is deformed. And damage can be prevented.

  In addition, as described above, the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion can be increased by the mounting portion, so that when the game medium comes into contact, the peripheral wall portion is elastically deformed so that the game medium is made like an elastic body (rubber or spring). It can be prevented from playing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game medium that circulates in the game area from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion, and preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Thus, the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the front frame portion 2502 can be increased by the flange portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be maintained at the same strength and rigidity as the conventional product, and the center accessory 2500 When the resin is molded and removed from the mold, deformation of the molded product can be prevented, the yield can be increased, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center object 2500 is transparent, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the front frame portion 2502 and the like, so that the player has an illusion that the game area 5a through which the game ball B circulates is large. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 in which the game area 5a can be seen larger can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

  In addition, since the center object 2500 is transparent, light from an LED or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1, light in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other pachinko machines, As a result, the center object 2500 appears to shine shiningly, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting the player's interest is provided. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, even if the front frame portion 2502 is positioned outside the edge of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 is in the same position as the edge of the opening 1102. Thus, the game area 5a in which the game ball B circulates can be made larger than the actual size.

  Further, as described above, since the game area 5a can be enlarged by extending the flange portion 2503 inward, the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 is enlarged and the position where the flange portion 2503 is extended is set. By devising, the inside of the game area 5a can be suppressed from becoming small while the inside of the frame is enlarged. Therefore, the player can see the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the front effect unit 3200, the effect display device 1600, and the like provided in the rear of the game panel from the player through the frame of the center object 2500 and the opening 1102 from the player. And can enjoy both the game by the game ball B in the game area 5a and the effect by the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the front effect unit 3200, the effect display device 1600, etc. Can be provided.

  Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the main decorative portion that can transmit only two of the three primary colors of light to the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) in the back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. Since the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a) is colored in a predetermined color because it has the 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a), the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decoration) Even if the body 3213) is not decorated with light emission, the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be made conspicuous by the color of the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a), and the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back) The first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b) made of full-color LEDs on the right decorative board 3223). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 high player's interest to be able attract an appeal even when you do not have light. Then, when a game is performed in the game area 5a by the player's operation, the plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) according to the change in the game situation, and Since the second LED 3222b (the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b) appropriately emits light and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is light-decorated, the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is illuminated. ) Can be shown neatly, attracting the player's interest and making the player aware of changes in the game situation and thinking that there may be something good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  When the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is decorated with light emission, the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) composed of a full color LED corresponding to the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) Since the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element that emits light that does not transmit the decoration part 3212a (the main decoration part 3213a) are connected and short-circuited, the light emitting element does not emit light due to malfunction. Therefore, due to a malfunction of the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) corresponding to the main decoration part 3212a (main decoration part 3213a), the radiation decoration part 3212b (adjacent to the main decoration part 3212a (main decoration part 3213a)). Since it is possible to prevent the radiating decoration part 3213b) from being light-decorated with an unintended color, the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be securely luminescent decorated with the intended color, The decoration effect by the light emitting decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, in the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) made of a full color LED corresponding to the main decoration part 3212a (main decoration part 3213a), the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element of the color that does not emit light are connected in the one full color LED. Therefore, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being charged in the light emitting element, and the charged static electricity has an adverse effect on other light emitting elements of the same package, and the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) It can be prevented from being damaged, and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be decorated with light emission in a good state.

  Further, since the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) in the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can transmit only two of the three primary colors of light, the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a). The second LED 3222b (second LED 3223b) made of a full-color LED corresponding to the radiation decoration part 3212b (radiation decoration part 3213b) adjacent to the main decoration part 3212a (main decoration part 3213a) is a color that does not pass through. When the light is emitted, the radiation decoration part 3212b (radiation decoration part 3213b) adjacent to the main decoration part 3212a (main decoration part 3213a) can be brightly decorated. Accordingly, the main decorative portion can be provided without providing a partition (for example, a reflector) that blocks light between the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) and the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223). 3212a (main decoration part 3213a) and the adjacent radiation decoration part 3212b (radiation decoration part 3213b) can be clearly divided and decorated with light emission, and the light emission decoration of the back left decoration body 3212 (back right decoration body 3213). Therefore, the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the surface of the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) is white, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a) mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223). In addition, the light from the second LED 3223b) can be reflected by the surface of the white back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223), and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is brightened and decorated. Can be made. Further, since the surface of the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) is white, it is colored like the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) in the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213). The color of the area can be improved, the decorative effect by the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be more easily exhibited, and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213). The back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) can be made inconspicuous from the player side (front), and deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223), all the first LEDs 3222a are mounted. In addition, since the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) can be a full color LED, all the first LEDs 3222a and second LEDs 3222b mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) are provided. By making (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) full-color LEDs of the same type (model number), the cost for manufacturing the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) can be reduced by unifying parts. Can be pachinko machine 1 The increase of such costs can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in the game area 5a into which the game ball B is driven, an effect display device 1600 provided in the center and a first start port capable of receiving the game ball B are provided. 2002 and the center accessory 2500 as a special distribution area in which the game ball B received in the back right decoration body 3213 and the accessory winning prize opening 2006 of the back front effect unit 3200 in the back units 3000 adjacent to each other can be distributed. A first distribution device 2530 and a sub-status display unit 3501 of the sub-status indicator 3500 that is continuous with the logo decoration unit 3211b of the backside decorative body 3211 are provided. When the game ball B driven into the area 5a is received in the first start port 2002 (second start port 2004), a special lottery result (first special lottery result) on the main control board 1310. Or the second special lottery result) and a predetermined privilege is given according to the lottery special lottery result. In order to obtain the privilege, the player aims at the first start port 2002. It is possible to enter the game ball B.

  Then, when the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 (second start opening 2004) and the special lottery result is drawn, the effect display device 1600 provided in the center of the game area 5a is selected. In accordance with the special lottery result, a symbol (also referred to as a main symbol) indicating the special lottery result is displayed, and the sub-state LED 3510 of the back right decorative board 3223 emits light appropriately, and the light is transmitted by the light guide pin 3520. The light is guided to the sub-status display unit 3501, and the sub-symbol is displayed on the sub-status display unit 3501.

  Therefore, in addition to allowing the player to recognize the special lottery result drawn by the main symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub state display unit 3501 (sub state display 3500) on which a predetermined decoration is formed. However, since the sub-symbol indicating the lottery special lottery result is displayed, the sub-symbol is displayed even if the main symbol display is missed or the special lottery result suggestion by the main symbol is not well understood. By looking, it is possible to make the player recognize the lottery result of the special lottery.

  In this sub-status display unit 3501, a predetermined decoration (the same decoration as the logo decoration unit 3211b) is formed, so that the decoration appears to be light-emitting decorated by displaying the sub-pattern. When the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) is drawn, the light emission mode of the decoration changes. It is possible to make the player recognize that the light emission mode is changed in accordance with the special lottery result drawn by the player, and to recognize the sub-design (indication of the lottery special lottery result). At this time, since the sub symbol indicating the special lottery result drawn in the sub state display unit 3501 is decorated, the sub symbol does not look inorganic like a conventional pachinko machine, and the sub symbol is decorated. The sub-state display portion 3501 (sub-state indicator 3500) and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  In addition, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b and the first sorting device 2530 for decorating the back right decorative body 3213 to emit light on the back right decorative board 3223 on which the sub state LED 3510 for displaying the sub symbol is mounted. And the third LED 3223c for illuminating the display etc. is further mounted, so that the back right decorative body 3213 is illuminated and decorated, or the first sorting device 2530 is brightened to make the game balls B in circulation easy to see. can do. In addition, as compared to the case where the sub-state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a, the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c are mounted on separate substrates, only one back right decorative substrate 3223 is required. Since the back right decoration body 3213, the first sorting device 2530, etc. can be enlarged or another decoration body or an accessory can be arranged depending on the secured space, The pachinko machine 1 which can entertain a person can be provided.

  Further, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 on the back right decorative substrate 3223 is guided to the sub state display portion 3501 by the light guide pin 3520, the sub state display portion 3501 is separated from the back right decorative substrate 3223. Even if it is provided at the position, light can be guided to the sub-state display portion 3501 in a good state by the light guide pin 3520 and the sub-design can be displayed. In addition, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the portion where the sub-pattern is displayed can be set to a position according to the shape of the decoration. You can improve the appearance by blending the design into the decoration.

  Further, the substrate surface on which the sub-state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a, the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c are mounted on the back right decorative substrate 3223 is directed to a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (left-right direction). The right decorative substrate 3223 is provided, and the side surface in the thickness direction of the back right decorative substrate 3223 faces the front-rear direction, so that the back right decorative substrate 3223 can be hardly seen from the front, The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved by preventing the appearance from deteriorating by viewing the decorative substrate 3223.

  Further, since the surface of the back right decorative board 3223 is white, the light from the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 and the third LED 3223c is transmitted to the white back right decorative board 3223. It can be reflected by the surface, the back right decorative body 3213 can be brightened and decorated, the first sorting device 2530 of the center object 2500 can be illuminated more brightly, and the back right decorative board 3223 can be It can be made inconspicuous from the front, and deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

  Further, since the back right decorative substrate 3223 is provided between the back right decorative body 3213 and the first sorting device 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first LED 3223a is provided on one substrate surface of the back right decorative substrate 3223. And the second LED 3223b is mounted, and the third LED 3223c is mounted on the other substrate surface, and the light from each is not blocked by the back right decorative substrate 3223 and is not irradiated to the opposite side. When the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are caused to emit light, the first sorting device 2530 is illuminated, and when the third LED 3223c is caused to emit light, the back right decoration body 3213 is not light-decorated. The body 3213 and the first sorter 2530 can be separately decorated and illuminated in a clear state without any discomfort. It is possible to show an effect on the player, the presentation effect by the light emission effect can be exhibited sufficiently, the reduction of interest to delight the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the prize winning opening 2006 and the first sorting device 2530 are provided in the special distribution area, when the third LED 3223c of the back right decorative board 3223 is caused to emit light, the bonus provided in the special distribution area. Since the winning opening 2006 and the first distribution device 2530 are illuminated brightly, the player's interest can be directed to the accessory winning port 2006 and the first distributing device 2530. It is possible to cause the game ball B to be driven to aim at the prize winning opening 2006, assuming that the game ball B is opened to be received. Then, when the bonus ball 2006 can be received and the game ball B is received and sent to the first sorting device 2530, the game ball B is drawn in the first sorting device 2530 according to the special lottery result. Since it is distributed to either the first loser opening 2535 side or the first Atari passage 2536 side, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether it is assigned to the first Atari passage 2536 or not. Can suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, by illuminating the first sorting device 2530 by causing the third LED 3223c to emit light, the game ball B in the first sorting device 2530 can be easily seen, You can entertain.

  Further, the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 in the sub-state LED 3510 are full-color LEDs in which three light-emitting elements of red, green, and blue are combined into one, and the anode of the blue light-emitting element And the cathode are connected to make a short circuit (short), and the anode and cathode of the blue light emitting element that do not need to emit light are connected to make a short circuit. No electricity is supplied to the element, and no light is emitted in that color (blue). Therefore, the sub-symbol is not displayed with a color that does not normally emit light, and it is possible to avoid distrusting the player and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. it can.

  In addition, the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, and in one full-color LED, an anode and a cathode of a light-emitting element of an unused color (blue) are connected and short-circuited. It is possible to prevent the static electricity from being charged, and it is possible to prevent the full color LED from being damaged by adversely affecting other light emitting elements of the same package due to the charged static electricity. Can be displayed.

  Further, in one full-color LED, since the anode and cathode of light emitting elements of unused colors are connected and short-circuited, it is not necessary to connect the light emitting element to an LED driver for driving (emitting) the LED. Therefore, the number of LED driver channels can be saved by the number of short-circuited (connected anode and cathode) light emitting elements. Therefore, by reducing the number of LED drivers with respect to the number of full-color LEDs, the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed, or another LED can be driven by using another channel in the LED driver. It can be used effectively without waste.

  In addition, full-color LEDs are used as the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512, and full-color LEDs are used for the first LED 3223a, the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c. The cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is constituted by two guide passages of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by two or more guide passages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520, after twisting 90 degrees, twisting 90 degrees in the reverse direction, the arrangement of the entrance and the arrangement of the exit are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the entrance line and the exit line may be twisted differently. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted a plurality of times so as to form a spiral.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are provided with the opening 426a and the opening 435a penetrating in the front-rear direction, respectively, and led to the opening 426a and the opening 435a. Although the optical shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are shown inserted, it is not limited to this, and the door frame left side In the decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, recesses that are recessed from the rear are provided in the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a, and the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft The portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a may be inserted. Alternatively, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are obtained by using the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 without the opening 426a and the opening 435a. The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a may be extended forward to the rear surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 428a are guided while the surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 have a clean surface without the openings 426a and 435a. Spot light can be emitted in a spot shape by the optical axis portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is provided with the radiation pattern portion 3122, and the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 are continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 and the radiation decoration portion 3212b. Although the decoration part 3213b is provided and one large picture is displayed by the radiation pattern part 3122, the radiation decoration part 3212b, and the radiation decoration part 3213b, the present invention is not limited to this. 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 may be eliminated, and a light guide plate that is curved so that the left and right ends protrude forward. Thus, by displaying a predetermined pattern on the light guide plate, the special pattern with the outer peripheral side projecting forward with respect to the center side can be displayed with light emission. A high special picture can be displayed in a light-emitting manner, and an extremely strong impact can be given to the player. In addition, since the light guide plate provided in the conventional pachinko machine is flat and not curved, the curve of the light guide plate can greatly surprise the player. Can be attracted strongly and the decline of interest can be suppressed. At this time, it is desirable that the light guide plate be curved in an arc shape or an elliptical arc shape around the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1.

[9. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 166 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 168, and FIG. 170 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process, and FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by initial value update type counter movement, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation The display process will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control, special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, and an initial value for hit judgment used to determine the initial value of this special random number A random number for determination, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not a reach (reach out of reach) is generated when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the second special The random display pattern random number for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the symbol display, and the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating the big hit gaming state For the determination of the symbol random number to be used for the determination of the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display and the initial value of this symbol random number Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece that can accept the game ball B of the second start port 2004, Normal value for determining the initial value of the normal symbol used for determining the initial value of the random number for determination, and the normal value for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A random number for symbol variation display pattern is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another, and extracting all the values within the predetermined numerical range, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again to perform main control. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is supposed to do.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the normal symbol determination random number.

  In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or in various processes stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a in the main control side power-on process described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the information as a numerical value is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When not clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the normal value determination random number per symbol is determined by the main control MPU 1310a from the built-in nonvolatile RAM. The code is extracted, and the same fixed value is always derived from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determination per normal symbol based on the extracted ID code. Perform initial value derivation, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process is executed when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area By doing so, it is prevented from being analyzed by taking a two-stage security measure by the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and the extracted ID code is used as an initial value determining random number for normal symbol determination. For example, an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by a person who intends to illegally acquire the game ball B to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it. Even if the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination and the determination value for the normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is not useful at all on the other game board 5 ', that is, the other pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure occurs at every predetermined interval and the game ball B is passed through the normal winning opening 2003 at every predetermined interval, the movable ball is opened and closed to open the game ball B to the second start port 2004. A gaming state that can be accepted cannot be generated.

[9-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). The main control built-in RAM can be updated by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. It should be noted that since this is a very short time within the period from the start of the main control-side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, in practice, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. The operator operates the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) This is a flag indicating whether or not various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing various information and a value of 0 when not erasing various information. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the setting key into the detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), the setting key cylinder 1311a is turned on for the first time. Is set based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch. In addition, and / or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON by a setting key ON signal, it is determined that a predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S18 that a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S18 that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the first ON operation is performed, and the setting value is changed. The value is set to 1 when permission is allowed, and the value is set to 0 when permission to change the setting value is not allowed. Note that the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Can receive various commands.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S24 again and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When determining in step S24 that the main control MPU 1310a has not received the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when permitting the setting change of the setting value and to a value of 0 when not permitting the setting change of the setting value.

  In the determination in step S25, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. Is determined (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when various information is erased, and a value 0 when various information is not erased. In step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete various information (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a uses the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for the inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally, an error display process is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. The error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Note that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After the first ON operation is performed by turning 60 degrees clockwise, the power-on process of the main control side, which is this routine, is started again by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. In step S18 described above, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch, and sets the key according to the setting key ON signal. By determining that the switch 1311a is set to ON, it is determined that a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, and in step S20A described above, a value 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG. In order to set, in the determination in step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted. Subsequent to the processing in step S38, which will be described later, a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. To release the RAM error by clearing has become possible to proceed a game (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error release method").

  As another method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. The main control side power-on process is started as a routine. In step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A. In the determination of step S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various types of information are to be erased. By removing the RAM error, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (hereinafter referred to as “second RAM error canceling method”).

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, an error display in step S33 is performed, and the main control built-in RAM When there is an abnormality in the content stored in the memory (or the information cannot be trusted), two cancellation methods, a first RAM error cancellation method and a second RAM error cancellation method It can be done by. Thereby, when it is not necessary to change the setting value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method by the RAM clear switch 1310f.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in main control at power recovery. A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which the power is turned on after the power is turned off, a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and an improper means (for example, a fraudulent person at the base of the arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, it will be cleared except for a specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, as will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (ie, 1), that is, when it is permitted to change the setting value. This is performed (step S37). In this setting change process, a detailed description thereof will be described later. On the basis of a detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311, the pressing operation unit of the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is pressed. Each time the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the determination key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The changed set value is determined based on the above signal and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, if it is determined to erase various information, the main control built-in RAM Are cleared except for a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the main control built-in RAM always ends when the setting change processing is terminated. The predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is excluded (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (the area excluding the specific area of all the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the “specific area” is the number of game balls B collected by the set value dedicated area in which the set value is stored and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5 a formed in the game board 5. And an out-sphere counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) is stored. The set value dedicated area stores a set value that is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball count dedicated area is the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 that is counted in the ball count process described later. The count result (total number) of the number of balls is stored.

  The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a is one in which the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs the RAM clear, and when various information is erased, the sum values do not match, or the main control side When the power-off process is not normally terminated, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a random number for normal symbol determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol per-determining random number. Set to the decision random number.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, “ The timer setting value is set in the “WDT control register”), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and time counting is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state is used. The setting such as latching and acquisition is performed, and activation of the hard random number circuit with built-in main control is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at a high speed one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and determined in advance. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The other values are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information by creating a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command To remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various commands are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a. The The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When determining in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a has not received the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs non-winning random number update processing (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination, initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S12 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG, as described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets a RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. When the control cannot be performed, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination of step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off process. Therefore, when a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control-side power-off process, and again executes the main control-side power-on process. . In other words, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control side power-off process at the time of power-off and the checksum calculated in step S28 when a forced reset is applied by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a check sum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be completely erased (cleared).

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  When the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in the determination in step S25, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process in step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area. In the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). In other words, when it is determined that various types of information are to be erased, in the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f), the set value is determined to be changed. When a setting change that can be performed is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of a winning state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information described above before the next business start. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion. In addition, when the setting value is determined to be changed, if the setting changing process is performed (as a result, even if the current setting value is maintained, the setting value obtained by the setting value before the setting changing process is obtained). It is necessary to delete (clear) game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM, as described above, in addition to changing the setting value, Since it is an important key that allows confirmation of the set value, etc., only a limited number of persons including the store manager of the game hall are allowed and limited to 2 to 3. In this embodiment, the set value Even if a change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall needs to erase (clear) the game backup information. Clear switch 13 By performing the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing portion is pressed in 0f, thereby making it possible to erase from the main control chip RAM game backup information (clear).

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 and the subsequent processing is promoted. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged. It is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous power failure. That is, even when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island in the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power supply to the facility is cut off until a time of about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process described later is being performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the island facilities of the game hall In the case where the power supply from is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, a waiting time until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set.) If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the waiting time, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the electric charge charged to is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, whereby the main control side described later Even if timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of power recovery this time, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or power failure. Thereafter, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated in the checksum based on the content of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, all of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by an attendant such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no indication by the attendant such as the game hall clerk that the RAM is cleared, it is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. This prevents the game from progressing. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and stored immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the pachinko machine Even if the power to 1 is cut off, game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) by the progress of this game are supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by supplying power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2. Backup information for storing various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off process constituted by the processes of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop. When the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation value stored in step S64). Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby allowing the contents of the main control built-in RAM to be reset. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the island facility of the game hall is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control side The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as a direct current + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, the determination in step S24 is performed. Returning again, as long as the remain input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game in.

  By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is performed in step S52. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are determined by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting and starting main control timer interruption processing described later. The system adopts a mechanism capable of avoiding updating various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for use. Thus, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment in the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) The various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for the counter), etc.) is completely covered by software so that the main control side power-off process is reliably completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, such as various pieces of information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter), etc., so that it is not changed at all. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are reliably prevented from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is built in as transmission information Store in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, a problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the start solenoid 2412 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, A problem will be described in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored, so that the attacker solenoid 2414 starts to be driven and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will transfer from the state closed by the member to the open state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the In other words, for example, the main winning opening 1 count display command is transmitted, in which the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005 and is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the number of gaming balls B entered into the big winning opening 2005 is notified. Even if the control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of the game ball B that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short-time state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2414 is stopped and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. The main winning circuit 1 close display command from the main control board 1310 for instructing that the state shifts from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 starts). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) in the big hit gaming state, the attack solenoid 2414 is started to open from the state where the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member. To move to the current state (that is, the fifth round of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the five rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time reduction state, and displays it on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, a screen (for example, a game indicating that the movable piece is open) that indicates that the game ball B can be received at the second start port 2004 and is in a game state advantageous to the player. Screen) is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece and starts the second start. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the mouth 2004 is open, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored to start driving the start port solenoid 2412 to The migrating the second start hole 2004 is operated to the state for closing.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and the gaming ball B can be received at the second start port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned to the game, the game state is such that the game ball B can be received at the second start port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen that informs the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball B moves to the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, the player may have forgotten that the game state is acceptable, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power recovery is returned to the game state where the game ball B can be accepted to the second start port 2004. However, the screen for instructing the game in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he plays.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine will misunderstand that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a clumped state, that is, a so-called frozen state when a power failure occurs after a momentary power failure or power failure. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on A counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, as the return destination of the main control board 1310, driving of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening / closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be informed of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the player is in the big hit gaming state and the attacker solenoid 2 14 is started and a screen that indicates that the grand prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. The game ball B is placed in the big prize opening. “Please play the game to enter the game.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will receive a big prize after the power is restored. The game can be instructed to enter the game ball B in 2005, and, for example, in the above-described example, the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a state where the game is in a game state and then power is restored, the drive port solenoid 2412 starts to be driven to open the movable piece as the return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen (e.g., “A movable piece is open. Playing a game so that a game ball B enters the second start port. Please send a message to the player on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player seated on the front surface of the pachinko machine will return to the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. A game of entering the ball B can be instructed.

  Thereby, when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and are always cleared in step S38 except for the specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In these main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands are first sent a power-on state command, followed by a power-on main control return destination command, followed by a power-on main prize ball number. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). When RAM is to be cleared, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), Information indicating which state (probability and time-short state) to return from among the low-probability time-short state, high-probability time-short state, low-probability non-time-short state, and high-probability non-time-short state, and the model code of the pachinko machine And information to be displayed. Here, a problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), What kind of game specifications (for example, when the probability variation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of special symbol variations (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine or the like) in which the probability variation occurs in the state of

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is lost, or it is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), even though the main control board 1310 flows on the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 corresponding to the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, an operator of the manufacturing line can use the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which copyright of the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs when probability fluctuation occurs).

  Thus, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 and the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, an operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on state are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[9-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 168 and 169.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 170 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is changed to the second register bank. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits in addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol and normal electric symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process described later. Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and from the second starting opening sensor 2402. Detection signal, a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the role winning prize sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first V prize opening sensor 2514, a detection signal from the first lose mouth sensor 2516, the second A detection signal from the V prize opening sensor 2515, a detection signal from the third loser mouth sensor 2518, a detection signal from the out sensor 664 (or the out mouth left sensor 3032 and the out mouth right sensor 3033), and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 , Operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), Detection signal from door frame opening switch The payout control board 633 receives a detection signal from the body frame opening switch, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switch button 1311b, a detection signal from the out sensor 664, and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. Each of the payer ACK signals from the payout control board 633 that informs that it has been received normally is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command classified into the other corresponding to this is transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, a corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal, a corresponding start opening command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether or not there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that do not coincide with the result are treated as if there is no entry of the game ball B or if the input is ignored.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal processing) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading to be compared and the twice reading to be compared for the second time to the fourth time, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering or noise. Since it is possible to do so, a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, A detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the accessory winning prize sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first V prize opening sensor 2514, Detection signal from the opening sensor 2516, detection signal from the second V prize opening sensor 2515, detection signal from the third loss opening sensor 2518, detection signal from the out sensor 664, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, RAM clear Operation signal from the switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from the door frame opening switch, detection signal from the main body frame opening switch, signal from the setting key switch 1311a, signal from the setting switch button 1311b, signal from the out sensor 664 It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the detection signal and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal failure monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal trouble monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 whether or not the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal process among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display that indicates that a failure has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the design random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter is incremented. Note that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination and the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The normal value determination random number per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the normal symbol determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random numbers for normal symbol determination, the winning determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update processing. The normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the normal symbol determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are stored in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a ball count process (step S107). In this ball count process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the out-port left sensor 3032 is input, and a game area 5a that is partitioned into the game board 5 is formed. When the out-port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the game, the value is a value of a collected-ball counter that counts the number of game balls B collected by the out-port 1008 A game ball B collected by an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a partitioned by the detection signal from the out port right sensor 3033 and input to the game board 5 while performing an operation of adding (incrementing) 1 Is detected by the outlet right sensor 3033, the count of the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 is counted. The value of the recovered ball counter adds the value 1 (increments) performs computation. That is, in the ball count processing, when the out-port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B collected by the out-port 1008 and the out-port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B collected by the out-port 1008 In this case, the value 2 is added to the value of the collected ball counter. The main control MPU 1310a uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008, and the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM And the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Further, the main control MPU 1310a issues a ball collection command to notify that when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10. Created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 65535), and further adds (increments) the value 1 to the value of the collection ball counter. The counter value overflows to a value of 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out the game ball B is created based on this input information, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Or create a self-check command to confirm the connection state between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. In order to notify that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, Self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  Further, in the prize ball control process in step S108, the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. In such a case, a main prize ball number information output command that is divided into others in order to convey the fact is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main winning ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the general winning port 2001, the normal winning port 2003 provided in the game board 5, Based on the game balls B entered in various winning ports (hereinafter referred to as “various winning ports provided on the game board 5”) such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005. Thus, the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is counted. In the prize ball control process in step S108, the game ball B is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. ing. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls B to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information. When the number exceeds 10 (that is, when the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created and transmitted in order to notify that fact. Information stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeding the value as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is stored as the prize ball schedule information storage in the main control built-in RAM described above. It is adapted to store updates to pass.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, the main control MPU 1310a reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16 bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error canceling navigation command, And frame status 2 command)), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. If it is determined that fraudulent acts due to radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) are being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (incremented). The value of the radio wave counter is incremented every time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process. When the RAM is cleared, a value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) ), A radio wave irradiation gossip command that is classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave got is being performed is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input, the fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as “magnet goto”). And the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by 1 (incremented). The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that radio wave irradiation got is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) .), A magnet goto notification command divided into notification displays to notify that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. In the present embodiment, it is possible to contribute to the fact that an attendant such as a clerk of a game hall can find a magnet goto at an early stage by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism. It has become.

  Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, when input information is read from the input information storage area described above and a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403 is input when not in the big hit gaming state (big prize opening) In the case of occurrence of an abnormal prize winning such as when a game ball B enters in 2005), a winning abnormality display command that is classified into an alarm display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. To do.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goat and / or the magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to 1 as the fraud detection, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet are detected. When no goto is detected, a fraudulent act detection flag FD-FLG is set to 0 as a fraudulent act is not detected. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, a value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. In addition, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning a prize opening, a value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines, based on the value of the above-described cheating detection flag FD-FLG, that the cheating detection flag FD-FLG is 0, that is, that cheating is not detected. Sometimes it is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that this is the detection, the firing permission logic is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. The main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. If the door frame opening switch detects that the main body frame opening switch detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 when a detection signal is input from the main body frame opening switch, As the logic of the firing permission signal, the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic is set, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the firing permission signal is the initial value (default). The firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery) is performed. It is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a firing stop logic (a firing non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic until it is started.

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is outputted to the main random number circuit with built-in main control, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control when the latch signal is inputted, Obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, the obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). It is determined whether or not a game state is to be generated (referred to as “special lottery”)), or a counter value for updating the design random number is extracted and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type or the small hit type. It is determined (determined the hit type) whether or not the hit type determination value matches.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. If it is based on the above, a variety of commands related to special figure 2 tuning effects are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so that the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is entered, various commands classified as jackpot related (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 closing display command, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open / close the opening / closing member When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 The lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp is turned on to turn on the round indicator lamp. The power is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp is turned on to light the 15 round display lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on or off the occurrence of a short time in a predetermined color. Or stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on the input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol per-determination random number described above is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning opening winning information. The data is stored in the normal winning slot winning information storage area of the RAM.

  The ordinary winning opening winning prize information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a third section (four sections). Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, it is normal when the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port. The winning opening winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  The information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening information is set, the normal winning opening information in the first section of the normal winning opening information storage is stored in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the second section of the normal winning opening information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening prize information storage, and the ordinary winning slot winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening prize information storage is in the second section of the normal winning opening prize information storage, respectively. The third section of the normal winning opening prize information storage is shifted to an empty area. For example, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first to second sections of the normal winning slot winning information storage, the normal winning slot winning information in the first winning section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning prize. In the 0th section of the mouth winning information storage, the ordinary winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning mouth winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning mouth winning information storage, respectively. The second section and the third section of the normal winning opening winning prize information storage are vacant areas. Here, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is set as a holding ball and the normal display of the function display unit 1400 Based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal holding indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on the holding indicator, and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Following the normal winning award winning process, the normal winning award winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol is extracted from the read out the normal winning award winning information and main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is to be opened and closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, when the movable piece is in the opened state, it becomes a gaming state in which the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric effect production are generated and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above, while the extracted normal When the random number for symbol determination per symbol does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. , Create various commands that are classified as related to the usual map synchronization production, and store it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as output information To remember. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of normal winning) is ½.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). In this setting value confirmation display process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected. The detection signal from the body frame opening switch and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). ) From the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is sent from the setting key switch 1311a. 2 and the setting key switch 131 is determined by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key is ON, it is determined that a predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch. If the setting key switch 1311a is determined not to be turned on by the setting key ON signal based on the setting key ON signal, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. judge. In the set value confirmation display processing, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. Is output and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends and returns to this routine.

  Subsequent to step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a drive signal is output to the starter solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece when the game is in the big hit game state. 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633. Or a firing permission signal set in the firing permission logic or the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633, or the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 is counted (total number). ) For displaying a setting signal stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM or a lighting signal for displaying on the setting display 1310g. To do.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, and classified as related to the jackpot. Various commands (for example, a winning prize mouth 1 count display command corresponding to a winning prize count command based on a detection signal from the winning prize sensor 2403 when a game ball B that has entered the winning prize opening 2005 is detected. ), Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role effects, various commands classified as notification display, and status display Various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as other (for example, the main control board 1310 is provided in the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls B entered in the various winning openings, the main prize ball number information output signal is used as the main prize ball number information. And the like, a main prize ball number information output command for instructing to transmit to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558, and various commands classified into specific histories (for example, game balls B collected at the out port 1008) Every time the number of balls reaches 10 balls, there is an abnormality (or trust) in the ball collection command to notify that, the setting change command to notify that the setting value has been changed, or the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM An error display command to notify that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area (to be described later) in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is to be confirmed. ON operation command or the like of the setting key) it is stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are configured as main peripheral serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial manager and completes transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. Can be done. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure after the power is turned on, this message is sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In the reservation setting of the command to be performed, in order to notify that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial data is composed of the power-on state command in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value that are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and then constitute the main control return destination command when the power is turned on Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read out from the game backup information in accordance with the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  When the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 each time a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 For each received ball collection command, the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and ball collection information (counted value (that is, out port) stored in a built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is counted. The total number of game balls B collected at 1008) and the updated date / time) are updated. Note that if the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the game hall business hours end without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the outlet 1008). The ball collection information that associates the total number of B balls) with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 stores the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held in a built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball collection history information. The counted value stored and held as the ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. You may use both the counted value and the sum total of the counted value so far.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, when the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started again, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine is output to the peripheral control board 1510. Be able to. That is, the main control board 1310 uses the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 168 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. In the setting of the work area, a power-on state command classified as power-on in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, configure the power-on status command as the main peripheral serial data. Send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value constituting the main control return destination command at power-on, Subsequently, the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command upon power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and thumb value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to display effects. As a result, when a player is playing a game, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. Since the display of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  Also, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for the specific area. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on and a main notification ball count information output judgment counter notification command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As peripheral serial data, configure the power-on status command, send it to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, then configure the power-on main control return destination command, Status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process, followed by the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command when the power is turned on. Status, mode, and sum value In order, it transmits to the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[9-4. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 171 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a obtains the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or extracted, but when extracting the setting value, the extracted setting value is set in a predetermined area.

  Subsequent to step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates various values stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the sum. The checksum is performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process (at the time of power-off) in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG includes game control information such as various information, a checksum value (sum value), and a backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not normally completed. Is done.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When the value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed. In this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is turned off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a obtains the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 in the normal range. It is determined whether or not any of the values is within the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S208 that the main control MPU 1310a is not within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting value 1 that is an initial value to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of the setting values 1 to 6 in which the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is the normal range. However, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and setting value 1 that is an initial value is set for the setting value acquired in step S200. It may be.

  In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main control side power-off process has ended normally, or in the determination in step S208. When it is determined that the MPU 1310a is in the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to light the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

  Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and displays the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switch button 1311b is operated (step S216). In this determination, the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is read, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button 1311b is being operated when the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is input, while the setting switch button when the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is not input. It is determined that 1311b is not operated.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button 1311b has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the setting value and updating the operation (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set to.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g and updates the setting indicator 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination in step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button 1311b is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key is operated (step) S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. When the key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the initial position that is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is set ON) (that is, the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) Rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the rotational position) and turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) by setting the second ON. 1311a is turned on, and the setting key switch 1311a determines When the determination key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the determination key has been operated, while the determination key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a. If not, it is determined that the enter key is not operated.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, the process returns to step S216 to determine whether or not the setting switch button 1311b has been operated. If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button 1311b has been operated, the processing in step S218 and step S220 is performed again, the determination in step S222 is performed, and the enter key is operated. If it is determined that there is not, the process returns to the determination in step S216 again, and if the setting switch button 1311b is operated until the determination key is operated, the setting value is incremented by 1 and updated every time the setting switch button 1311b is operated. If the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting switching button 1311b is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and power is restored until it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the updated set value is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area Therefore, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the processing in step S224, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and power is restored, the set value updated when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Are stored in a set value dedicated area in the specific area.

  Subsequent to step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is a setting key OFF operation (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and sets the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to which the determination key is turned ON (that is, the setting key). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return the switch 1311a to the OFF position (rotating position of the setting key cylinder turning OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by turning OFF the setting key cylinder 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes the setting key is OFF It is determined not to have been created.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a returns to step S226 again and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

  Subsequent to step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

  Subsequent to step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first ON). This is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when the operation is performed, and to permit the setting change of the setting value. The value 1 is set to 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, it is not permitted to change the setting value thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that determined in step S208. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is normal in step S224. It is determined whether or not the value is any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6, which is a range. When it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  In step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 169, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interruption processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. The peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral serial data. This is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by a setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). To do.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that it is not in the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. The error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[9-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 172 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The value 1 is set when the set value is confirmed and displayed. When the value is not confirmed, the value is set to 0.

  In the determination in step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is an operation of opening the body frame 4 and turning on the setting key. Is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 Then, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the first key is turned on, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 to move with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key switch 1311a determines that the setting key is open, and the setting key switch 1311a is set by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch. And / or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON by a setting key ON signal, it is determined that a predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the present routine is terminated as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. Is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a obtains the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). Is determined to be one of the set values 1 to 6 within the normal range, and when it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. To do.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in the determination in step S357 that it is in the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

  Subsequent to step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360). ), This routine is terminated. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the setting key ON operation history information (setting value confirmed) stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is confirmed. Information in which the fact and date / time are associated with each other).

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the above-described ball collection history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information are described above. Thus, a predetermined specific history information display permission condition that allows specific history information to be permitted to be displayed is established. The CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 allows the person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied to rotate the contact operation unit 302 and press the pressing operation unit 303. By performing the above, the display is switched from the image displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information, and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not the value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a has the setting key OFF operation performed. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the determination key turned ON. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by performing the OFF operation, and it is determined by the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, setting key switch 1 Setting key when the signal OFF from 11a is not input is determined not been OFF operation.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a ends this routine as it is. A value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g is stopped. Then, the obtained setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The setting key OFF operation command is set (step S368), and this routine is executed. To the end. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM has been completed). It is a command that tells.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. The display is switched to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 until it is restored.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S357 that the main control MPU 1310a is not in the normal range, the interrupt non-permission setting is performed (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 170, which has been repeated every 4 ms, is stopped.

  Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop that continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop will continue to clear the main control built-in WDT, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started once, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU 1310a, the time measured by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and when the time measured by the main control built-in WDT is started again, the main control built-in WDT performs the main control. The MPU 1310a is not forced to be reset. In addition, this infinite loop maintains the state where the error display processing has been completed, and the game cannot proceed at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off and the power is turned on again. The error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is shut off. If the determination is made, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[9-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 168 (FIG. 171). And the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 172.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 173 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted. When the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal is fired. Can be informed that the launch is permitted, while if the logic is set to the launch stop logic (the launch non-permission logic) that is the reverse of the launch permission logic, the launch can be stopped (not permitted). .

  An error display process that is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168 or a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. When started as (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since permission setting cannot be performed, the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 170 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the fire permission logic.

  Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171), the main control MPU 1310a displays the error display in this routine after power recovery in step S400. Even after the process is started, in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) and the predetermined output port is set. Output from the output terminal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function. That.

  When the error display process which is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 172, the main control MPU 1310a performs the process of step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that the content of the main control built-in RAM is abnormal. The main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting of step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 169, but has already shown in FIG. 172 before the error display processing which is this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process which is this routine is ended, as described above, an infinite loop is entered, so that the main control side shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

  Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 172, the main control MPU 1310a has an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S400. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port It outputs to the discharge control part 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

  Subsequent to step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Subsequent to step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Subsequent to step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display processing that is this routine is processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, and processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168 (FIG. 171). ) And the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 172, respectively, and ends as described above. By this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the serial communication initial setting in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data. 1510.

  The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information in which the error display command is associated with the received date and time) is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ).

  In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, a blue background image appears in the display area of the effect display device 1600, saying “A RAM error has occurred. While controlling to display the message image of white characters, the announcement “RAM error has occurred. Please call me” is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510. Regardless of the volume, it is forcibly set to the maximum volume and controlled from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of notifying the RAM error by the error display command is the process having the highest priority. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to transmit another error and receives the error display command, Error notification is given the highest priority.

[10. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 166 will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the payout control unit is turned on, FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 174, and FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[10-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, a payout control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIG. 174 to FIG. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs the wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch and determines that the RAM clear is not instructed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. The RAM clear switch is determined not to be operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to perform the RAM clear and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is operated.

  If the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (that is, a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU does not operate the RAM clear switch, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prize ball information storage area) The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. This is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to payout of the PRDY signal output setting information and the like to be deleted is set, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is deleted and a value of 0 when the payout information is not deleted. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination at step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete the payout information (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process described later (at power-off). (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has ended normally, the payout control built-in RAM is set as the power recovery. Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the sphere stock number PBS, the real sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “recovery” includes not only the state in which the power is turned off but also the state in which the power is turned on, but also the state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines that when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to delete the payout information, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination in step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as the power failure warning voltage when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage. Is done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  In the determination at step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that the power failure warning signal is not input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. The value is 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and 1 when the time has not elapsed 1 ms. Is set.

  In the determination in step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 (award ball command and self-check command) have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, information on the number of winning balls that the payout motor 584 actually paid out the game ball B, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout is made based on this output information. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584 Or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as the prize ball number information output signal. The output or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls B.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. This prize ball number information output determination counter is actually set by the payout motor 584. The number of game balls B paid out is counted based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process in step S550 described later. The winning ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is updated by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10 balls, an award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeding the number is set). The indicated value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, Read the BRDY signal and CR connection signal, and the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, and input them as input information. Store in the information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, a ball bite determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball bite state caused by the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout vane 589 is not performed, and the determination condition is set when determining whether or not the game ball B in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls B received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 Whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game ball B that is not consistent with the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeatedly paid out When the determination is performed, time management of the determination condition and the inconsistency counter reset determination time set is performed. For example, when the ball scratch determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball scratch determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gummy judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set on the basis of payout information relating to payout (PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set).

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation should be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball B can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit while paying out the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, and then the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit is interrupted and the payout of the game ball B cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. are restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure continues from the time of power recovery. It is, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls B.

  In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of various signal exchanges between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball play operation determination setting process For example, if you are not communicating with the CR unit, The dispensing operation for out There are a PRDY signal informing of a possible logic state (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  Thereby, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a sphere cannot be performed can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. It can be notified that the payout operation of the game ball B by 580 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless rental request signal from the CR unit, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, in order to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible, PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it is informed that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. Note that the logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information. A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball break check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 It is determined whether B is full or the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the above-described ball guide unit 570 based on the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the game ball B in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full is determined from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using the timer interruption period 2 ms. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned off in the last full (2 ms before) full and ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned on from OFF. When the transition is made, the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball shortage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information that informs that the game ball B in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full is stored in the state information storage area. Remember. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is stored in the state information storage area that the game ball B in which the lower tray 202 is stored is informed that it is not full.

  Whether or not the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also checked using the timer interruption period 2 ms. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned on in the processing, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned off in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 When is shifted from OFF to ON, the above-described ball breakage determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball break check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball that informs that the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. While the cut information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is a predetermined number or more. If it is not, the out-of-ball information indicating that is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball play are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. To do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area, and the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number based on this ball piece information, Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error canceling navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays based on the various information are created. To the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball break information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the ball break information, the frame state 1 command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S540, and this power failure warning If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. In step S554, the timer update process is performed. In step S556, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed. In step S558, a command reception process is performed. In step S560, a command analysis process is performed. In step S562, a main operation setting process is performed. Display data creation processing is performed, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU ensures the processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU has received a power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball B is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a payout control unit power-on process upon power recovery thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal. In step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[10-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 174 to 176.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 177 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[11. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 166 will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 182. FIG. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 180 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 181 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on a single semiconductor chip.

[11-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral controller power-on process is performed as shown in FIG. 178 under the control of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting processing, processing for initializing the peripheral control IC itself, determination processing for hot start / cold start, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, processing for transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs). Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC becomes a state in which interrupt permission is set. For example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of game effects output from the main control board 1310 And various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from a built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown), Set calendar information and current time information.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. The CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and is 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to notify that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. Whether or not is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

  In step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, the CPU first sets the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG. Value 1 is set (step S1008). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a rendering operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a press detection sensor 373, an elevation detection sensor 374 provided in the effect operation unit 300, Rotation (rotation direction) and pressing operation of the contact operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300”) such as the bump output detection sensor 375. Various information acquired from the operation of the unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300, and the pressing operation unit 303 Operation history information etc.)) is set based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the 302, is appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the touch operating unit 302 in the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is set according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, based on a lamp pallet setting table composed of a specified luminance value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value, the luminance of the LED used as direct light, and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light, Set each. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one luminance designation value ranging from the luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the maximum luminance, is set, the above-described floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the set luminance designation value is obtained. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the brightness designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. The specified luminance value may be set to one specified luminance value in a 32-step range from the 0th (zero) specified luminance value that is the minimum luminance (off) to the 31st specified luminance value that is the maximum luminance. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the 31st luminance that becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. One luminance designation value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 in the clockwise direction and designates the 0th (zero) luminance designation in which the current luminance is the minimum luminance (lights off). When the first luminance designated value is set to the next highest luminance level after the value, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear) from the first luminance designated value toward the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance is set. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed along the tone curve or the spline curve tone curve), while the touch operation unit 302 is turned off. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness when rotating clockwise, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness) toward the first brightness specified value (for example, Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In the present embodiment, a case where a player (or a staff member of a game hall clerk, etc.) can set the brightness during the production is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or a game hall clerk) Etc.) can be set to a desired luminance by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the effect, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate the desired brightness of the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) as an image. It can be done. In the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

  The normal palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of the 17 levels is selected in steps of 5% from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is a designated value. , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is the luminance designated value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance designated value that is the luminance designated value described above. Of the 32-step range up to the 31st luminance designation value, the value corresponds to the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In this embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance as the normal pallet value for various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Among various decorative boards that are set as the above-described gradation information and are provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light, a palette for a specific decorative board (LED that feels dazzling to the player) (not shown) A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  In the special palette value, the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the gradation information described above. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32-level ranges from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value to the 31st luminance specified value, which are the luminance specified values described above. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize a state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance (light extinction) is obtained. The lowest possible brightness is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. When the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the LED luminance used as direct light, respectively. While being set along the normal palette value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) makes contact operation unit 302 and press operation unit for the luminance of the LED used as indirect light. It is set along the special palette value corresponding to the brightness designated value by the operation 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, direct light is used. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value at which the minimum brightness (lights off) is set), and this is linked. Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance is turned off). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  Moreover, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode associated with the flow of production is set, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert a more effect), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to change the first luminance from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance. Even if one luminance designation value is set up to the luminance designation value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance designation value is set for a specific decorative board. For other decorative boards, the maximum specified palette value (100%) corresponding to one specified luminance value is set, so that the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark) is set. The brightness adjustment can be performed very easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, the indirect light from the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the brightness compared to the direct light, but the special pallet value that is different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) for LEDs used as indirect light. Thus, the brightness can be set. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually managed by the palette value, so that the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of an LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen generated by the VDP of the peripheral control IC that reads image data from the SDRAM and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process described later. One minute (one frame) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. Yes. Although this can prevent a delay in processing time, a so-called frame drop occurs, but various speakers such as a top center speaker, a top side speaker, a main body frame speaker 622, etc. by sound data output processing described later. (Hereinafter, referred to as “various speakers”), it is a mechanism that can give priority to effects produced by effects such as music and sound effects in accordance with various effects.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . Thereby, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the head screen data to the VDP of the peripheral control IC is indicated. The pointer is updated.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, the sound command data that indicates the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, The pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data is output. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to do so. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed every time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be performed, it is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process to be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to holding prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis process, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (Extract) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. The player (or an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the maximum luminance is obtained from the first luminance designated value described above. When one luminance designation value up to the 31st luminance designation value is set, the above-described gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to become the set luminance designation value. It can be done.

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC indicates that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of the start opening winning effect, a normal symbol A variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with a normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4) and a variation display of a special symbol. The command, the symbol memory command that is output when the number of start pending changes, and whether or not it is a one-time display command for the big prize opening 1 that is output every time the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 are analyzed. Recognize whether the game state.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis process, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands. The various commands include various commands classified as related to Special Figure 1 tuned effects, various commands classified as related to Special Figure 2 tuned effects, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Various commands categorized in relation to figure production effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display, various commands categorized in status display, various commands categorized in test relation, and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Thereby, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data are stored in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the peripheral control IC. , And a track number for instructing which track is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning processing, when various commands classified into notification display are included in the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priorities registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transferred. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, hour / minute / second which is time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is converted to the peripheral control ROM. Is read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC, when screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. One minute (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data is It is read from the peripheral control ROM (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the sound command data. Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponds to the rotation position of the sound volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process Output sound data from channels to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value to obtain a value of 0 to 0. The values are converted to 1024 levels up to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The sound from the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 and the music from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound on the main frame 4 And sound effects. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch. It has become.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.

  Specifically, for the production sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment switch is rotated. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. For a certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) Until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative pattern change display is started after the change pattern command is received, or 0.5 seconds elapses after the stop display command is received at the peripheral control unit and after the decorative pattern confirmation display. The operation can be adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) A certain period of time (in this example, surroundings) when the variable symbol display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) From the time when the control unit receives the variation pattern command until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative symbol variation display starts, or after the stop control command is received at the peripheral control unit after the decoration symbol confirmation display 0.5 By operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for the time until the second elapses), the resistance at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process Is converted into seven levels of substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the contact operation unit 302 of the presentation operation unit 300 is further applied to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch. The sub-volume value of the production sound can be adjusted by setting the substrate volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 or It has become.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of sound sources in the peripheral sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4, and serializes the amplified effect sound to obtain audio Output as data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side is amplified by being amplified to the master volume value, The volume that flows from the top side speaker and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4 is set to be an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the volume of the combined performance sound is actually obtained at the top center on the door frame 3 side. It amplifies the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data. Is a sub volume that adjusts the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. And the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually set to the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, Amplification is performed up to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the top side speaker and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound in order to notify the store clerk etc. of cheating, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the subvolume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the subvolume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the produced effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set to the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 6 for the bass of the main frame 4. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 2 to output it as audio data The amplified effect sound and alarm sound and serialized. That is, in reality, only the maximum sound volume notification sound flows from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. At this time, the production sound is muted, so although the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the production sound is the sound described above. Progressing according to the schedule data for generation.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4 only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far, the substrate volume that has been adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is the sub-volume value. (At this time, when the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. So that it flows from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4. Going on.

  As described above, when the production sound flows from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1. When a notification sound is played to notify the store clerk etc. of cheating on the hall, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is for the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass sound of the main body frame 4 Although the silenced effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period of time, and the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side. When the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound starts to flow, Thiine so that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound to the point that has elapsed starting to flow a predetermined period of time.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume from the mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers is reduced, the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the attendant such as the store clerk of the game hall from becoming unaware of the occurrence of the malfunction or the player's fraud by the notification sound.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the content stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the content stored in the SDRAM is provided in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the regular processing backup area.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeatedly performed until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1008, and the value 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. , Step S1014,..., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, the steady process flag SP-FLG is set to 0, and the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC to notify that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC is acceptable. A value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, and therefore the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[11-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 179 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this processing is continued. Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -A value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The value is set to 0 when the part steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In step S1008 in the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process), a value of 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. V blank signal interrupt processing, and in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 178, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 so that the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. To have. In other words, this is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady process cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called process failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 178. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[11-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 178 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. 180 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 178. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. Accordingly, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) ) Is driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 are input, thereby history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original information). Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is based on the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided in the game board 5. The movable position is grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In the effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various sensors (for example, a contact operation unit). 302 (rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 is adjusted, and the door The brightness of various LEDs mounted on a variety of decorative boards provided in the frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the content stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the content stored in the SDRAM is stored in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided. In this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in FIG. 1 and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 178, various processes related to the effects in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. Yes. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the peripheral control unit is started again at step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process by the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control is performed when the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[11-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transfer the main peripheral serial data to one byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is received in the reception buffer, and when this acquisition is completed, an interrupt is generated at this timing, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 181 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, 1-byte information received from the serial I / O port reception buffer of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented). Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data is set. When the value is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with the game balls B from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls B are rubbed against each other and charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and generates noise. It is easily affected by the environment.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Judgment is made. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. Is determined, the received status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), This routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 When it is determined that the sum calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated.

[11-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 182, and whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that a power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. In step S1304, if 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and if a power failure warning signal is not input. When the determination is made, the routine is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the power failure notice signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1304 that the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, has been started and the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed. This is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing the power, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to a steady process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1312 again after determining that the power failure warning signal has not been input or following step S1314, and whether or not the power failure notification signal has been input. Determine whether. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. By continuing to make an infinite determination in this way, in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when determining that the power failure warning signal has not been input. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 178 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It does not take. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the output of the clear signal is interrupted to the external WDT because the WDT clear process is not executed. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. When the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[12. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is on (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 is in an on state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S235). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S235A) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “15R big hit”, 15R A process for controlling opening / closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the big hit gaming state is executed. Also, when the mode suggests “2R big hit”, a process of controlling opening / closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 2R big hit gaming state is executed.

  In the big hit control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the big winning opening 2005, each set process of the time reduction flag and the time reduction number counter is executed. The time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time is short-time state, and the 2R big-hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process at the time of the suspension of the first special symbol during the time-short state has become a mode that suggests “2R big-hit”. Set when ending the state, when exiting the 15R big hit gaming state during the time saving state and during the non-time saving state. The hour / short flag is the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 194 to be described later or the second special symbol stop (not shown) when the next big win or the counter value of the hour / hour counter reaches “0”. Reset by processing.

  In addition, the hourly / counter counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed as the number of times the continuation of the hourly state is continued, and is controlled to the hourly state after the end of the big hit gaming state. In this case, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the number of times of the short state at that time is set. The time-count counter is counted down every time the special symbol fluctuation display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes “0”. In some cases, the counter is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 194 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to “0”).

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S237), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S238), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process concerning the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S232).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S231 that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, FIG. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “4” which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S3 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S244, the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the random number acquired in step S241. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not is a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or the type type of game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S245), the process ends.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S242 that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S243 to S245, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first held state. The command is updated so as to correspond to the stored number, and the command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 stored command 0) is designated in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). ˜4)) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage commands 0 to 4). It is like that.

  FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

  Then, the specified prior determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit or execution According to the type of game effect to be performed), the type of special random number acquired (first special random number), and the number of stored storages (the value of the number of held counters) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the prior judgment command. For example, in the production predetermination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified predetermination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved memory number (first 1 special reserved number counter value) and a first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the value (step S262).

  Then, by transmitting a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), it is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 where the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the start winning that has occurred is a big hit, if the big hit, the type of big hit, if not, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the start of variable display according to the start winning is performed on the advance determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed or the reach effect as the game effect to be executed IC can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the first determination information indicated by the received prior determination command as the first (first) storage area. Store sequentially from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area) Shift the stored prior decision information). Thereby, the preliminary determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information.

  In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, the big display expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). )) In advance, for example, can be notified at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold display. .

  FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S234).

  If it is determined in the process of step S233 that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, the process is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second reservation storage number is based on this counter value. ) Is “1” (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S3 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S254, the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the random number acquired in step S251. To store.

  However, if it is determined in step S252 that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S253 to S254, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second on-hold state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed. A command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 stored command 0) is designated so as to correspond to the stored number and instructing the second reserved stored number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). ˜1)) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1). It is like that.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002 is set to “4”, while the game to the second start port 2004 is played. The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the ball B entering is “1”. Since the second start port 2004 allows a large number of game balls B to enter during the short-time state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state, the second reserved memory number Even if the upper limit of “2” is set to “1”, the second start opening 2004 is continued for a long period when the second special symbol fluctuation display is not performed or for a long period when the second reserved memory number is the upper limit. If a game ball B enters the game, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state such that a chance to win a big hit is not obtained.

  FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). The first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S282)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283).
5. The first special symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop mode. The first special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S284).

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 168).

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S301. As a process of, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first control symbol stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in the first storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  After that, as a process of step S305, a hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. When the two special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special symbol normal processing (step S311).

  The hit determination table shown in FIG. 190A is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). In the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of the jackpot determination values that indicate that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot are different from the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has been won, and the first special random numbers match the loss determination values indicating that the 315 types of first special random numbers are the loss. Are associated (probability of hits; 1/319, probability of hits; 3/319). In this example, in the second special symbol process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, a big hit determination value indicating that one type of the second special random number has been won. A match determination that indicates that 144 types of second special random numbers that are different from the jackpot determination value coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won, and that 174 types of second special random numbers are the above-described losses. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the value (big hit probability: 319 / small hit probability; 144/319). In other words, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second start port 2004 is executed than when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start winning to the first starting port 2002 is performed. This is in a state advantageous to the player.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the random number), when it is determined that the big hit is made (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won is set (step S313), and the hit determination processing is ended.

  In addition, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined that a small hit is made (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win has been won, that is, if it is determined to be lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is the short-time state, and when the gaming state is the non-short-time state, the non-time reduction is used. And a reach determination table in a state. In the reach determination table in the short-time state, the reach reaches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicates that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Each random number is associated.

  In addition, the reach determination table in the non-short-time state matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the short-time state reach, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the non-short-time state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is higher than that in the short-time state.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316) and determines that the reach is lost (step S317), the fluctuation is detected. A reach flag indicating reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S318).

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 191, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether the small hit flag is set (step S324).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 190 (B). The type of jackpot is determined by the above, and the mode at the time of the variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. After the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the prize winning opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have won the big prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is 15 times. By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 15R big hit game state that allows the game ball B to enter the big prize opening 2005 (easy), and after the big hit game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) 15R jackpot that controls to a short state when it is finished if it is not a jackpot before the fluctuation display of 77 is executed 1. An open / close pattern that is closed after the grand prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when ten game balls B have been won in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the grand prize opening sensor 2403 twice. By repeating (2 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state where the game ball B can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and if it is controlled to the short-time state before the start of the 2R big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state After the end of the game, if the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) will not be a big hit 77 times before the display is executed, control is set to a short state when it is ended, before the start of the 2R big hit gaming state If it is controlled to the non-time-saving state, the big hit is determined from either of two types of big hits, 2R big hit, which is controlled to the normal state after the big hit gaming state is finished.

  In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are assigned when 15R jackpot is reached, and 192 judgment values are sorted when 2R jackpot is reached. In other words, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big hit is made with a probability of 4%, and a 2R big hit is made with a probability of 96%. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 196 judgment values are assigned when 15R jackpot is reached, and four judgment values are assigned when 2R jackpot is reached. In other words, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, a 15R big hit is obtained with a probability of 98%, and a 2R big hit is given with a probability of 2%. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared with the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, the probability of being determined as 15R jackpot is higher. The game is executed when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning at the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning at the first starting port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the person.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 reads out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process if the small hit flag is set (step S324) when the big hit flag is not set in step S131. Further, the type of the small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 190C, and when the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is stopped (A stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. An opening / closing pattern for closing the winning combination winning opening 2006 after opening it for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed twice to control the game ball B to enter the winning combination winning opening 2006 (easy) to a small hit gaming state. By accepting all the game balls B won in the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit game state to the first loser hole 2535, the game balls B are received in the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008. 1st small hit that is difficult An opening / closing pattern for closing the winning combination winning opening 2006 after opening it for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed nine times to control the gaming ball B to enter the winning combination winning opening 2006 (easy) to a small hit gaming state. The second V is obtained by guiding one game ball B out of the game balls B won in the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit gaming state to the third sorting device 2550 after closing the prize winning hole 2006. The game ball B can be received in the winning opening 2008, and when the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time after the small hit gaming state (for example, 29 Seconds) or when the game winning ball opening sensor 2005 2 detects that 10 game balls B have won 10 game balls B, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to make the game ball B larger. Winning mouth 20 5 is controlled to 15R big hit game state that can enter the ball (easy), and after the big hit game state is finished, until the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times 2. A second small hit that controls to a short state when it is terminated if it is not a big hit. The game ball B is controlled to a small hit game state in which the game ball B can enter the game game winning port 2006 (easy) by executing an opening / closing pattern for closing the game product winning port 2006 after opening it for a short time (for example, 80 ms). The game ball B of the game balls B won in the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit gaming state is guided to the first V prize opening 2007 after closing the prize winning hole 2006, and the game ball Based on the fact that B is received in the first V winning opening 2007, after the small winning game state, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or 10 gaming balls B are won in the large winning opening 2005. When the winning prize sensor 2403 detects that the opening / closing pattern is closed 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 15R big hit gaming state in which the gaming ball B can enter the winning prize opening 2005 (easy). Shi After the big hit game state is finished, the third small hit is controlled to be short when the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is displayed 77 times until the big win is ended. The big hit is determined from among the three types of small hits.

  In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 199 determination values are distributed when the second small hit is reached, and one determination value is distributed when the third small hit is reached. ing. That is, when a lottery result based on the first special random number is obtained as a small lot, the second small hit is obtained with a probability of 99.5%, and the third small hit is obtained with a probability of 0.5%. We do not win per unit. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 20 determination values are assigned when the first small hit is reached, and 130 determination values are assigned when the second small hit is reached. In the case of the third small hit, 50 judgment values are assigned. That is, when a lottery result based on the second special random number is obtained as a small hit, the first small hit is obtained with a probability of 10%, the second small hit is obtained with a probability of 65%, and the probability is 25%. It becomes the third small hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared with the first symbol random number table compared with the first symbol random number, the prize winning opening 2006 was won. By guiding one of the game balls B to the first V winning opening 2007, the probability of being determined to be the third small hit that always becomes the 15R big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state is increased. The game is executed when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning at the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning at the first starting port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the person.

  Further, when the type of the small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the small hit is determined as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the second small hit is determined, the second small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the third small hit is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol. . In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is determined, the small hit symbol is determined. Is determined as the second small hit symbol, and when the third small hit symbol is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be removed if neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (step S327). After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs either of the lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach out of position, or out of position) as the process of step S328. Is set (step S328) so that a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. ). Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282) as the process of step S329, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 controls display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle Stop display in the order of the decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be synchronized and displayed in the same symbol, and may be stopped and displayed simultaneously). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the small hit as the mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped when the small hit is specified from the received determination result notification command. When the symbol ("final battle") is determined and 2R jackpot is specified, the 2R jackpot symbol (left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same even symbols among the symbols "0" to "9") When the 15R jackpot is specified, the 15R jackpot symbol (the combination in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same odd symbols among the symbols “0” to “9”) is determined. In addition, when a reach deviation is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of the same design with the left and right decorative designs "0" to "9" and a different middle decorative design; reach lose If it is determined to be a symbol, and it is determined that it is out of place, it is determined to be a symbol that does not have reach (a combination of at least the left, right, and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). When the variation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control to the time-short state until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed at most 77 times after the big hit game state. The time reduction state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the shift control. Specifically, after the big hit gaming state, control is made to the short-time state, and after that, when a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) of big hits occurs, without controlling to the short-time state after the end of the predetermined number of big hit gaming states The normal state may be controlled. In addition, even when the number of occurrences of the big hit is less than a predetermined number, the control may be performed in the non-time-short state during the big hit gaming state, and the time-short state control may be performed again after the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 192, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S341), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit according to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the reach fluctuation pattern table (FIG. (No) is selected (step S346), and when neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, when a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect) occurs, a variation pattern table ( (Not shown) is selected (step S347).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. Are obtained from this table, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, the super reach effect of the reach effect is higher in the big hit expectation level than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state is increased.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined in step S351 whether or not the counter value of the time-count counter in which the number of continuations in the time-saving state is set is “0”. To do. If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction control is ended is set (step S354).

  If it is determined in the processing of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in step S353 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, Then, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol random time (first special symbol, second special symbol) is associated with the special symbol fluctuation time information set to about 1 second in the time-short state, In a non-time-short state, a special symbol variation pattern is set in such a manner that the special symbol variation time information set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). . In other words, the fluctuation pattern selected at the time of the short-time state is shorter than the fluctuation pattern selected at the time of the non-time-short state so that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short. The variable time information of the special symbol is set.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 193, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S371. As the above process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variation pattern is set. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 194, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S381. As the process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is controlled. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction end flag (step S384) and resets the time reduction flag (step S385) when the time reduction end flag is set (step S383). As a result, the time reduction control (control in the time reduction state) is terminated when the predetermined number of times of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed (77 times in this example), and the non-time reduction control is performed. (Control in the normal state) starts.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is started (step S387). A waiting time until the start (a time for displaying that the big hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, processing for setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to the jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit number counter is decremented by 1 every time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit number counter reaches “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the prescribed round number. And control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process, which will be described later, until the big hit number counter reaches “0”, the big prize opening opening pre-processing (step S401) and the big prize opening open process (step S402) are repeatedly executed to win the big prize. When the round is finished in the mouth open process (step S402), the big hit number counter is decremented by 1 to become “0”, and then the process proceeds to the big winning opening open post process (step S403) to end the jackpot game. The control to be executed is executed.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a big hit start command (15R big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) according to the big hit type (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process, a big hit start command (15R big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) corresponding to the type of big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is set. It has become.

  The big hit running flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, the big winning opening opening post-processing (step S403) of the big hit control process (step S235A). Opening / closing control of the grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or that 10 game balls B have won the big prize opening 2005) It is reset when it finishes (opening and closing control that repeats the opening and closing pattern that is closed twice or 15 times) when it is detected in (all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game). By resetting the big hit execution flag, the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first of the function display unit 1400 is set. The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S386), if the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. A small hitting start command is set (step S391), and a waiting time until the start of the small hitting game (time for displaying that the small hitting game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of the small hit. In step S391, a small hitting start command (first small hitting start command, second small hitting start command, third small hitting according to the type of small hitting (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) Set the start command. Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit specified by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process, the small hit start command (first small hit per first small hit, second small hit, and third small hit) is selected. The hit start command, the second small hit start command, the third small hit start command) are set.

  Further, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed, when the small hitting game is ended, specifically, the small hitting medium processing (step S411) of the small hitting control process (step S236A) described later. ) Ends the opening / closing control of the prize winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern to be closed after opening the winning prize opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) twice or nine times). It will be reset when By resetting the small hitting execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when the game is lost, the interval time is set to the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variable display is started. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

  When the processing of step S386 to step S394 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. (Step S395), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the big hit game state based on the fact that the display state when the variable display is stopped is the big hit symbol. Waiting until 1510 is performed, or waiting until the next round is started Pre-opening process for a special winning opening (step S401)
2. The special winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened based on the fact that the special symbol variation display stoppage is the big hit symbol, or the special winning opening 2005 is opened based on the start of the next round. Or after closing the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the ten winning ball sensor 2403 detects that ten game balls B have been won in the special winning opening 2005. Processing during opening of the big prize opening (step S402)
3. The post-opening process for the big prize opening that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit gaming state is finished when all rounds are finished (step S403).

  The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. Also, in the above-described process for opening the big prize opening (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the big prize opening 2005 to the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the big prize opening 2005 is closed. At the end of the round controlled by the state, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a jackpot game effect according to the number of rounds designated by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by a device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting control process (step S236A). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start process for executing the setting process for starting the small hit gaming state (step S410)
2. Small hit-medium processing for monitoring the entry and release time of the game ball B in the small hit game state (step S411)

  The small hitting process flag is operated to indicate that the small hitting start process (step S410) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, when the entry of the game ball B to the specific area is detected in the small hit process, the big hit execution flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit game state (15 rounds in this example) is a big hit. Set in the number counter and end the process. As a result, the big hit gaming state is started following the small hit gaming state.

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  If it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal from the normal prize opening sensor 2401 is on and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the normal prize opening 2003, as shown in FIG. Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains a normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S802. Execute the winning prize process.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. A normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the common symbol variable random number.
3. Normal symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “per game”, the second start port door 2411 moves backward to play the game ball B to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of the machine (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 168).

[13. Game in small hit game state]
Next, the game in the small hit game state will be described. As described above, in this example, when the result of the change display of the special symbol is a small hit, the small winning game that executes the opening / closing pattern to be closed after the accessory winning prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) for a predetermined number of times. All of the game balls B that have entered the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit gaming state and are detected by the prize winning prize sensor 2513 are the first lose mouth sensor 2516 and the third lose mouth sensor 2518. , A small hit gaming state when detected by any one of the first V prize opening sensor 2514 and the second V prize opening sensor 2515, that is, when it is discharged from the inside of the prize winning opening 2006 to the rear of the game board 5. Is supposed to end. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit gaming state is received by the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 and received by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning prize. When it is detected by the mouth sensor 2515, it is controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game state, and the game ball B that has entered the bonus winning hole 2006 during the small hit game state is the first lose hole 2535 or the third lose hole. When it is received by 2555 and detected by the first lose mouth sensor 2516 or the third lose mouth sensor 2518, it is controlled to a normal state or a short time state according to the control state before the small hit after the small hit gaming state.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, the first small hit for controlling the game balls B that have won the prize winning hole 2006 to be guided to the first loser opening 2535, and the game that won the prize winning slot 2006. After controlling the game ball B of the balls B to be guided to the third sorting device 2550 and circulating in the third sorting table 2554, the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third losers One game ball B out of the game balls B won in the prize winning opening 2006 is guided to the first V prize opening 2007. In this way, the game is controlled to be either a third small hit or a small hit game state.

  In addition, the number of opening / closing of the prize winning opening 2006 is smaller in the first small hit than in the second small hit and the third small hit, and in addition, all the game balls B won in the bonus winning prize 2006 are awarded the prize. Since the first lost mouth 2535 is guided from the mouth 2006 and detected by the first lost mouth sensor 2516, the execution period of the small hit gaming state (the period from the start of the small hit gaming state to the end) is short, In the third small hit, the first V winning opening 2007 is a distance from the winning winning opening 2535 that is one of the gaming balls B out of the gaming balls B that have won the winning winning opening 2006. , And the first V winning opening sensor 2514 detects it, so that the execution period of the small hit gaming state is short after the first small hit. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one game ball B out of the game balls B won in the prize winning hole 2006 is guided to the third sorting device 2550 which is the farthest from the prize winning hole 2006. After the game ball B guided to the tri-distribution device 2550 is circulated in the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 is detected by the second V winning port sensor 2515. Since the game ball B received in the third lost mouth 2555 is detected by the third lost mouth sensor 2518, the execution period of the small hit gaming state is the longest among the three types of small hits.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, when it is determined that the small hit is based on the first special random number, In the normal state, the second small hit is executed in most cases, whereas in the second special symbol variation display executed in the short time state, the small hit is based on the second special random number. When it is determined that the third small hit is executed higher than the normal state, and in the short time state, the third small hit is executed at a rate of once for every four small hits. .

  That is, in the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit game state, it is advantageous for the player who is in the short time state after the 15R big hit game state. Since the transition to the state is controlled, one game ball B out of the game balls B that have entered the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit game state is circulated in the third distribution table 2554. While paying attention to whether it is accepted at the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 for a certain period of time, the small special game is displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in a short time state. Even if the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the state, it is only controlled again after the 15R big hit gaming state, so that it enters the bonus winning hole 2006. Rather there may decrease the game excitement when one game balls B of gaming balls B was shown visited the first struck partial table 2554. Therefore, in this example, in the variation display of the second special symbol executed in the short-time state, the ratio of the third small hits in the short hit game state execution period is increased, so that the small hit game state is shortened during the short-time state. It is supposed to end in time.

  Further, as described above, when the sorting rotator 2531 rotates from the retractable state to the unaccommodable state in the third small hit, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the allocating rotator 2531 becomes It flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the passage 2536, contacts the upper surface of the closed distribution door 2544, is guided to the right, and enters the first V prize opening 2007. To do. Therefore, in the third small hit, the game balls B distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 as the distribution rotating body 2531 rotates from the accommodable state to the unaccommodable state are discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time. As a result, the player cannot visually recognize. Further, the first V winning opening 2007 can be entered when the sorting door 2544 moves forward above the second loser opening 2543, but the sorting door 2544 operates in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the operating state. That is, the presence of the distribution door 2544 is difficult for the player to recognize (difficult to see), and the game ball B distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 by the distribution door 2544 is quickly transferred to the game board 5. Since it is difficult to recognize the existence of the first V winning opening 2007 together with the discharge to the rear, the player has guided the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007, in other words, the first V winning opening 2007. It is difficult to notice that the game ball B passes. In this way, in order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball B is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 when the third small hit is made in the short time state, The small hit game state is executed without being aware of the lottery (whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007, second V winning opening 2008)). The 15R big hit gaming state can be executed after the state ends. As a result, a small hit gaming state and a 15R big hit gaming state are continuously generated in a short time, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In addition, when the game ball B is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 in the second small hit and the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 in the third small hit, the production is performed. The effects of the small hit gaming state executed on the display device 1600 are different. Specifically, in the case of the second small hit, whether the game ball B distributed to the third sorting device 2550 enters the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555, In contrast, an effect that does not make the user aware of the rotation of the sorting rotating body 2531 when the third small hit is reached (for example, a big hit when the third small hit is reached). The player will realize that the small hit game state will be executed by giving the same notification (such as notifying that the third big hit is a big hit instead of a big hit) As a special bonus chance to win a different prize ball than the prize ball that can be obtained in the big hit gaming state, the same prize ball acquisition opportunity as the small hit gaming state is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state. You may make it perform a production. As a result, the player who recognizes that he has won the 15R jackpot will be able to win a special bonus chance before the start of the 15R jackpot game state and obtain a prize ball different from the 15R jackpot game state. To do.

  If the arrival time at the V winning opening is shorter at the third small hit than at the second small hit, the path until the game ball B guided by the second small winning is received at the V winning opening. The length between the (first route) and the route (second route) until the game ball B guided at the third small spot is received at the V winning opening becomes longer in proportion to the arrival time at the V winning opening. If the time to reach the V winning opening is longer than the third small hit, the path (first path) until the game ball B guided by the second small winning is received in the V winning opening You may make it become shorter than the path | route (2nd path | route) until the game ball B induced | guided | derived by the 3rd small hit is received in V prize opening. For example, by providing a decelerating means for decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball B in the first path, the arrival time at the V prize opening may be made longer than the game ball B passing through the second path.

  In the above-described example, the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are provided with a plurality of V winning openings. In the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the accessory winning opening 2006 One game ball B out of the game balls B won in the second is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 having the second V winning opening 2008, and in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the short-time state By guiding one game ball B out of the game balls B that won the winning opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007, which is next to the first loser opening 2535, the distance from the accessory winning opening 2006 is small. Although the execution period of the winning game state is made different, the distance to the V prize opening, the number of V winning prizes, etc. are not limited to those described above. For example, a gaming machine having only one V prize opening The technical idea of the present invention is also applicable to It is. Specifically, for example, means for obstructing or delaying the reception of the game ball B to the V winning opening such that the game ball B can be received in the V winning opening after traveling in the third distribution table 2554 (obstacles) Etc.) is not provided, and a means for inhibiting or delaying the reception of the game ball B to the V winning opening is not provided (at least as compared with the second small hitting). It is sufficient if the number provided is small) and the third small hit with a short arrival time to the V prize opening, and the normal state (the first special symbol of the first special symbol) according to the arrival time to the common V winning opening You may make it change the execution ratio in a change display) and a time-short state (change display of a 2nd special symbol).

[13-1. Error notification in small hit gaming state]
Next, error notification in the small hit gaming state will be described. In this example, in the small hit gaming state, the time until the game ball B that has won a prize at the prize winning hole 2006 is discharged is monitored, and if it is not discharged after a predetermined period, an error notification is performed. .

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hitting start process (step S411). In the small hit start process, a setting process for starting the small hit gaming state is executed.

  When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process or the second special symbol stop process (step S421). Is timed out (step S422), that is, when a waiting time elapses after the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed until the small hit gaming state is started, the small hit gaming state is started. An initial value “0” is set in the elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time since the previous time (step S423).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects opening / closing pattern data according to the type of small hit being executed (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) (step S424), and selection Based on the opened / closed pattern data, the control of the prize winning opening 2006, the sorting rotator 2531, and the sorting door 2544 is started (step S425), and the process is shifted to the small hit / medium processing (step S411). When the small hit process flag is updated (step S426), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes.

  Note that the opening / closing pattern data is provided for each type of small hit, and indicates the operation mode of each of the accessory winning award 2006, the sorting rotating body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hit gaming state. Is. In this example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the winning combination prize opening 2006, the sorting rotating body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 based on the opening / closing pattern data corresponding to the small hit type selected in step S424. Thus, the prize winning opening 2006, the sorting rotator 2531, and the sorting door 2544 are operated in the mode shown in FIG.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the middle hit process (step S412).

  When the small hit process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to an elapsed timer for measuring an elapsed time since the start of the small hit gaming state, and a discharge monitoring timer to be described later is set. Then, 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the discharge monitoring timer (step S431). When the elapsed timer is incremented by 1, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 opens and closes the open / close pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (elapsed time from the start of the small hit gaming state) among the open / close pattern data selected in step S424 of the small hit start process. The data is read out, and the opening / closing pattern of the prize winning opening 2006, the sorting rotating body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 is controlled based on the read opening / closing pattern data (step S432).

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the bonus winning sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the bonus winning prize 2006 turned on (step S433), that is, in the bonus winning prize 2006. If the game ball B has been accepted, 1 is added to the remaining ball counter that counts the remaining balls that have not yet been discharged from the prize winning port 2006 among the gaming balls B that have won the bonus winning port 2006 (step S434). .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the game ball B for the first time after the small hit game state is started (when the first game ball B enters). (Step S435) is provided corresponding to each of the small hit types as the longest period assumed until all the game balls B that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 including this game ball B are discharged. The assumed maximum period is set in the discharge monitoring timer (step S436).

  In this example, in the case of the first small hit, all the game balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 are not distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 by the sorting rotator 2531, and are all transferred to the second loser opening 2543. In order to enter, the shortest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10,000 ms). Further, in the case of the second small hit, one game ball B out of the game balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 by the sorting rotating body 2531, and the first attrie passage The game ball B that has entered the third sorting device 2550 through 2536 circulates in the third sorting table 2554 and then enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losers 2555. The longest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 180,000 ms). Further, in the case of the third small hit, although one game ball B out of the game balls B received in the accessory prize winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531, Since the game ball B that has passed through the atari passage 2536 is received at the second V prize opening 2008 without entering the third sorting device 2550, the shortest period after the first small hit is set as the assumed maximum period ( For example, 60000 s).

  The discharge monitoring timer is decremented in step S431, and the discharge monitoring timer times out due to a mismatch between the number of game balls B won in the prize winning slot 2006 and the number of game balls B discharged from the prize winning slot 2006. In the case of continuing until later, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has been performed.

  In addition, if the elapsed time from the start of the small hit gaming state is monitored and this elapsed time reaches the assumed maximum period according to the type of the small hit being executed, if any abnormality (error) or cheating is performed The elapsed time from the first opening timing of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the small hit gaming state may be monitored, and this elapsed time may be an estimated longest period according to the small hit type being executed. In such a case, it may be determined that some abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has been performed, or the timing at which the game balls B are actually distributed by the sorting rotator 2531 (in the first small hit) The first sorting solenoid 2 starts from the state in which the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) with the start of the small hit gaming state and the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotating body 2531 faces upward. 32 is in an OFF (non-energized) state so that the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 operates so as to face to the right (first sorting operation timing of the sorting rotator 2531), second small hit Then, after the first sorting operation timing of the sorting rotator 2531, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) again, and the container 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 is directed upward from the first state. The timing at which the sorting solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) and the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 is operated to face right (the second sorting operation timing of the sorting rotator 2531), In the third small hit, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) again after the second sort operation timing of the sort rotating body 2531, and the sort rotation is performed. The timing at which the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) from the state in which the housing portion 2531a of 2531 is facing upward and the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 operates to face right ( If the elapsed time from the third sorting operation of the sorting rotator 2531))) is monitored and this elapsed time reaches the assumed maximum period according to the small hit type being executed, any abnormality (error) or fraud You may make it discriminate | determine that the act is performed.

  Further, when the discharge of the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is detected, that is, when the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is discharged, a first lose mouth sensor 2516, which is detected first. When the game ball B is detected by any of the V winning port sensor 2514, the second V winning port sensor 2515, and the third lose mouth sensor 2518 (step S437), the residual ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S438). ).

  Whether or not the remaining ball counter is “0”, that is, whether the number of game balls B received in the prize winning port 2006 matches the number of game balls B discharged from the prize winning port 2006 (Step S439), and if the remaining number counter is “0”, it is determined that no abnormality or fraud has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S442.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in order to determine whether or not an abnormality or an illegal act has occurred (step S440). . As described above, the discharge monitoring timer is provided corresponding to each of the small hit types as the longest period assumed from the start of the small hit gaming state until all the game balls B are discharged from the prize winning hole 2006. This indicates the remaining period of the assumed maximum period. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes. As a result, when the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114) of the main control side timer interruption process are executed again, the small ball hitting process is executed and the residual ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. It becomes like this.

  Also, if the residual ball counter is not “0” and the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440, it is determined that an abnormality or fraud has occurred, and a discharge error is notified (step S441). The hit process is terminated. For the discharge error notification, an error display on the effect display device 1600, a notification sound output from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like, a predetermined mode such as a lamp / LED provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3 In this example, the display of the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. is performed by displaying “Discharge abnormality” in a part of the area of the effect display device 1600. Is not to be done. That is, the state in which the remaining ball counter is not “0” indicates a minor abnormality such that the gaming ball B that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 is not discharged, and thus the abnormality of the gaming machine is notified. For this reason, the display for making the player uncomfortable or anxious is not performed. After performing the discharge error notification in step S441, the small hit process is terminated without updating the small hit process flag. When S114) is executed, the small hitting process is executed again. That is, all the game balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 are discharged or the RAM clear switch is operated by a game clerk to completely erase the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Until it is done (until it is reset), the discharge error notification is executed without ending the small hit gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is “0”, it is determined whether or not the game ball B has entered the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 (step S442). If the game ball B has not entered the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 in step S442, that is, the game ball B has entered the first loser port 2535 or the third loser port 2555, and the first loser. If detected by the mouth sensor 2516 or the third lose mouth sensor 2518, a small hit end command for instructing execution of the effect at the end of the small hit gaming state is set (step S443), and the small hit start processing (step S411) is performed. ) When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to (step S447), this process is terminated.

  If the game ball B enters the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008 in step S442 and is detected by the first V prize opening sensor 2514 or the second V prize opening sensor 2515, the big hit game is started. Is set in the interval timer (step S444), the small hitting execution flag is reset and the big hitting execution flag is set (step S445). Also, a V winning jackpot start command is set to instruct the execution of the effect at the start of the big hit gaming state based on the reception of the game ball B at the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (step S446). When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the hit start process (step S411) (step S447), the process ends.

  As described above, in this example, when the game ball B is received in the winning award winning port 2006, the value of the residual ball counter is incremented by 1, and each time the gaming ball B is discharged from the winning award winning port 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is counted. By subtracting 1, the number of game balls B remaining without being discharged from the prize winning opening 2006 (center accessory 2500) can be grasped. In addition, the period until the discharge error notification is executed (estimated longest period) is made different depending on the small hit type, in other words, according to the distribution destination of the game balls B, and the game balls B that have passed through the first atari passage 2536 In the third small hit received at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the three sorter 2550, the game ball B is entered into the third sorter 2550 and circulates in the third sort table 2554. The period until the discharge error notification is executed (expected longest period) is shorter than the two small hits. That is, the period until the discharge error notification is executed is shortened for the small hit with a shorter time (distance) to reach the V winning opening.

  Since the game ball B does not normally remain in the prize winning port 2006, if the game ball B remains in the prize winning port 2006 for a long period of time, any abnormality ( It can be determined that an error has occurred. In addition, when it is detected that more game balls B are discharged than the number of game balls B won in the prize winning slot 2006, an illegal act is performed to illegally win the game balls B in the prize winning slot 2006. It can be determined that it may be broken. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent activities is monitored, and when there is a suspicion, a discharge error is notified.

  Further, in this example, it is detected that the game ball B remains in the prize winning port 2006 or that a larger number of game balls B are discharged than the game ball B won in the prize winning port 2006. As a result, even when the discharge error notification is made based on the time-out of the discharge monitoring timer when the remaining ball counter is not “0”, the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed every time the main control side timer interrupt process is executed without stopping the game. The winning ball processing is executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter. If the value of the remaining ball counter is “0”, that is, if the normal ball returns to the normal state, the first V winning opening 2007 and the second The game automatically returns to the state of determining the entry of the game ball B into the 2V winning opening 2008 and ends the small hit game state.

  In this example, even if the residual ball counter value is not “0” after executing the discharge error notification in step S441 of the small hitting process, if a more serious abnormality occurs, The error notification regarding this serious abnormality is executed with priority. As a serious abnormality, for example, when any of the plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 detects magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a (magnetic detection error notification), or when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification) ), When it is detected that the door frame 3 is opened (door opening error notification), there is a high possibility that an illegal act is performed. When such a serious abnormality occurs, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state is terminated, and error notification (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification) related to these serious abnormalities is completed. Etc.), and after the error notification related to the serious abnormality is completed, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state may be resumed, or the error notification related to the serious abnormality is notified to the small hit gaming state. By overwriting the discharge error notification in step S441 in step S441, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. Output, lighting / points of lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 Although it is not reflected (executed so as to be visible / viewable) etc. (executed behind the scenes), the contents of the discharge error notification over time even while performing error notification related to a serious abnormality When the error notification related to a serious abnormality is completed, the display on the effect display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top so that the discharge error notification is visually recognized and viewed with the progressed content. It may be reflected in the output of the side speakers and the lighting / flashing of the lamps / LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 (for example, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state is started). 5 seconds after the error notification related to the serious abnormality is started and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, the error notification related to the serious abnormality is terminated. After the start of the discharge error notification in step S441 is resumed from the content after 35 seconds in Koatari gaming state in).

  Further, the discharge error notification mode may be different depending on whether the remaining ball counter is “1” or more and less than “0” in step S439 of the small hitting process. When the residual ball counter is “1” or more, the game ball B that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 is merely an indication that the ball is not discharged, while the residual ball counter is less than “0”. In this case, it indicates a serious abnormality that the game balls B exceeding the number of game balls B that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 are discharged, and the game balls B are illegally entered into the prize winning slot 2006. There is a possibility. For this reason, when a minor abnormality occurs in which the game ball B that has entered the winning prize winning opening 2006 is not discharged, a discharge error notification 1 is displayed in a partial area of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. It is “abnormal.” And the production sound is continuously output from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., so that no error sound is output and the door frame 3 is provided. When a serious abnormality occurs in which a part of the LEDs are partially lit and more than the number of game balls B into which the game balls B have entered are discharged, a discharge error notification 2 is displayed, for example, in the entire area of the effect display device 1600 "Invalidation!" Is displayed on the screen, and the volume of the production sound is reduced from the body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. The error sound is output at a loud volume, “Injustice is being performed”, and all the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are made to emit light so that the entire door frame 3 emits light. You may make it notify generation | occurrence | production.

  Further, in this example, a detection signal of the second lose mouth sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guiding path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second distribution device 2540 in the second small hit game state performs the third signal. When the game ball B guided to the distribution guiding path 2551 is detected by the second lose mouth sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guiding path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays the effect display device 1600, the body frame speaker. 622, a game ball B that circulates in the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 by controlling the lamps and LEDs provided on the top center speaker, the top side speaker, the game board 5 and the door frame 3 An effect is made to excite which one of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loser opening 2555 is accepted.

  It should be noted that the detection signal of the second lose mouth sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guiding path 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the game ball by the second lose mouth sensor 2517 is used. Whether or not an abnormality has occurred may be determined according to the detection of B. For example, when the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or a losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type in the small hit processing, or depending on the small hit type When there is a possibility of detecting the game ball B at a V winning opening or a loser opening that is different from the planned V winning opening or a lost opening (different from the planned aisle or winning opening depending on the small hit type) When the game ball B is directed to the aisle or the winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 in the small hitting process.

  Specifically, as a V winning opening or a loss opening scheduled according to the small hit type, the first lose opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the first small hit, and the second winning hole in the case of the second small hit. The V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2555 is scheduled, and the first V winning opening 2007 is scheduled for the third small hit. If it is detected that the game ball B is received in any of the first V winning port 2007, the second V winning port 2008, and the third loser port 2555 in the small hitting process in the case of the first small hit, In the case of the second small hit, when it is detected that the game ball B has been received in one of the first loser opening 2535 and the first V winning opening 2007 in the small hit middle process, If it is detected in the processing that the game ball B has been received in any of the first loser opening 2535, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loser opening 2555, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. As shown in 200, the display of the fraudulent occurrence! Is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. As "illegal The distribution error notification is made to notify the occurrence of fraud by outputting the entire door frame 3 by emitting all the LEDs provided on the door frame 3. You may make it perform. In this case, the occurrence of fraud can be notified immediately, and fraud can be detected early.

  In addition, a second distribution detection sensor for detecting the game ball B circulating in the second distribution guide path 2541 is provided in the middle of the second distribution guide path 2541, and a detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor May be input to the main control board 1310. In the case of the first small hit, the game is entered in any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loser opening 2555 in the middle hit process. If there is a possibility that the ball B is accepted, that is, if it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guide path 2541 by detecting the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor, In the case of a small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit processing, but the second lose mouth sensor 2517 cannot detect the game ball B, so that it passes through the second distribution guide path 2541. Game ball B heads to first V prize opening 2007 In the case of the third small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit middle processing, and then the second lose mouth sensor 2517 detects the game ball B. When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the distribution guiding path 2541 is heading toward the third distribution device 2550, the V winning opening or the lost opening is different from the scheduled V winning opening or the lost opening. If there is a possibility of detecting the game ball B, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and a distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when a state in which an illegal act is likely to occur and to detect the illegal act at an early stage.

  Note that the distribution error notification mode may be changed according to the degree of abnormality (incorrect level). For example, when the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the case of the first small hit. When it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second sorting guide path 2541, or in the case of the second small hit, the second allocation detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit middle processing, and the second loss If it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guiding path 2541 is heading toward the first V winning opening 2007 because the game ball B cannot be detected by the mouth sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is high. For example, the display of the fraudulent display device 1600 displays “illegal occurrence!” Or the like, and the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like indicate “fraud is being carried out”. Output with In the case of the second small hit, the second sorting sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit process and the third small hit process in the small hit process. When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second sorting guide path 2541 is directed to the third sorting device 2550 by detecting the game ball B with the second lose mouth sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is For example, it is determined that the level is low, and for example, “Discharge abnormal” is displayed on a part of the area of the effect display device 1600 and the output of the body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. is not performed. You may make it alert | report the generation | occurrence | production of abnormality different from. In other words, when the game ball B passes through a path through which the game ball B enters the V prize opening at a rate higher than a preset rate of entry of the game ball B into the V prize opening according to the small hit type In the case where the V winning expectation is improved over the preset V winning expectation that is set in advance according to the type of small hit being executed, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high and fraud is performed. And the game ball B passes through the path for the game ball B to enter the V prize opening at a rate lower than the pre-set ratio of the game ball B to the V prize opening according to the small hit type. (If the V winning expectation is lower than the V winning expectation set in advance depending on the type of small hit being executed) You may make it alert | report the generation | occurrence | production of abnormality different from. In addition, when the V winning expectation is lower than the V winning expectation preset in accordance with the type of small hit being executed, the player himself suffers a disadvantage, but there is damage to the game store side. Since it does not occur, the distribution error notification may not be performed when the degree of such abnormality is low.

  In addition, the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a lost opening different from the V winning opening or the lost opening scheduled according to the small hit type, or the V winning is planned according to the small hit type. In the period when the distribution error notification is made based on the possibility that the game ball B can be detected at the V winning opening or the lost opening which is different from the mouth or the lost opening, the bonus winning opening at the small hitting process is performed. Even if it is determined that a minor abnormality that the game ball B that has entered 2006 has not been discharged has occurred, the V winning opening or the lost opening that is different from the V winning opening or the lost opening that is scheduled according to the small hit type Based on the detection of the game ball B and the possibility of detecting the game ball B at a V winning port or a lost port different from the V winning port or the lost port scheduled according to the type of small hit Do not end the distribution error notification , It continues to be performed. However, the discharge error notification 1 based on the fact that it has been determined that a minor abnormality has occurred that the game ball B that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 in the small hit processing has not been discharged is in a state where it can be viewed and viewed. Although not executed, it is executed behind the scenes, and the contents of the discharge error notification 1 are advanced with the passage of time. Further, in this case, when the game ball B that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 is discharged and the value of the residual ball counter becomes “0”, the game ball B that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 is not discharged. The discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred ends. In this way, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the period of error notification (in this example, a distribution error notification) based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, an error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality ( In this example, the discharge error notification 1) is not executed so as to be visible / viewable. However, it is executed quietly behind the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (in this example, the distribution error notification), and when the minor abnormality is resolved, the error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality (this In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

  In this example, even in a state where the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state has not occurred, the accessory winning prize sensor 2513, the first V winning prize sensor 2514, the first lose mouth sensor 2516, the second V winning prize sensor 2515, The detection of the game ball B by the third lose mouth sensor 2518 is monitored, and if the game ball B is detected by any of these, it is determined that the cheating is being performed and the occurrence of the cheating is notified. It is like that. In addition, in the state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state has not occurred, the detection of the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor or the second lose mouth sensor 2517 may be monitored. When the game ball B is detected by either the detection sensor or the second losing mouth sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is high, that is, it is determined that an illegal act is performed, and the occurrence of the illegal action is notified. Good. In other words, in a state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state has not occurred, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the game ball B entering the V winning a prize, any path in the bonus winning prize 2006 is played. Even if the ball B has passed, it may be determined that an illegal act is being performed and the occurrence of the illegal action may be notified.

  In the above-described example, the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the lost opening different from the V winning opening or the lost opening scheduled according to the small hit type when the discharge error notification is executed in step S441. And a distribution error notification based on the possibility that the game ball B may be detected at a V winning opening or a lost opening different from a V winning opening or a lost opening scheduled according to the small hit type. In this case, the small ball hitting process is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter, but the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the residual ball counter. Even if the progress of the game is not stopped, the residual ball counter value is monitored, and when the residual ball counter value becomes normal (“0”), the game automatically returns from the abnormal state and makes a small hit. The gaming state may not be terminated. As a result, the occurrence of an abnormality can be reliably grasped.

  In addition, after the distribution error is notified, when the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the loser opening (regular receiving entrance) scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type When the game ball B rolling on the planned route (regular route) is detected (for example, when it is detected by the second loser mouth sensor 2517 in the case of the second small hit), the distribution error notification is terminated. You may make it do. In addition, after issuing a discharge error notification, when a game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a loser opening (regular receiving entrance) scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type When the game ball B rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when it is detected by the second lose mouth sensor 2517 in the case of the second small hit), the discharge error notification is terminated. Also good. Further, the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer that causes the discharge error notification to be executed is detected for the game ball B rolling on the route (regular route) scheduled according to the small hit type (for example, the second small (In the case of a hit, the second losing port sensor 2517 detects it), and in this case, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again after the reset, and the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer is being executed. What is necessary is just to enable discharge error notification when the assumed maximum period according to the small hit type is reached.

[14-1. Volume control]
The volume adjustment switch is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display (first A fixed period (in this example, the variation pattern at the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) on the one special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator) From the time the command is received until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, or from the time the stop display command is received at the peripheral control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed after the decorative symbol is confirmed. Except for the volume of effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4 So that the it can be adjusted by rotating operation. As described above, the volume adjustment switch has a resistance value that is variable by being rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter has a resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch. The voltage divided by the above is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The sound source IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 and music and effects are obtained from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main frame 4. Sound is flowing. In this way, the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch produces effects such as music and sound effects from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4. Sound is flowing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the production sound such as music and sound effects, the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud against the pachinko machine 1 In addition, the content related to the game effect is notified (for example, the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, or the game state is more likely to be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player). Notification sound for the main frame 4 also flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC by a program. It has been cut way.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed from mute to maximum volume in five steps, unlike the substrate volume divided into seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like operates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass frame 4 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 becomes small, when the malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the volume (in this embodiment, , Maximum sound volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special period. A fixed period of time (in this example, peripheral control) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) 0.5 seconds after the display of the decorative symbol is displayed, or 0.5 seconds after the display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition to adjusting the volume of the music and sound effects by turning the volume adjustment switch (except until the elapsed time) Special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) in the period until the end control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) A fixed period when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started or stopped (in this example, 0.5 mm after the variable pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative symbol variable display is started). Until 0.5 seconds elapses or 0.5 seconds elapses after the display of the decorative symbol is displayed after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit), and the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the changing effect. And the operation period of the press operation unit 303 (effective period for accepting operations of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect) ) Or the like, except, thereby making it possible to adjust the volume of the effect sound music and sound effects by operating the touch operating unit 302 and the pushing operation section 303 of the staging operation unit 300. Specifically, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display (first A fixed period when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped in the special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (in this example, the variation pattern command in the peripheral control unit) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of the display of the decorative symbol change, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the stop display command is received at the peripheral control unit and after the final display of the decorative symbol). Operation period of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variation effect (the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect) When the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated except for an effective period in which the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is accepted, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the effect operation. By rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the unit 300, the volume of the effect sound such as music and sound effects can be changed and adjusted to a desired volume (any one from the minimum volume 1 to the maximum volume 5). .

  Specifically, when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated to the right without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 and the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound is 1 When the volume is changed to a stepped level, the contact operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, The volume is changed to a volume lowered by one level.

  FIG. 201 shows the main frame for the bass of the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 according to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300. In the state where the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 622 is set to the volume 5, the effect display device 1600 starts the change effect to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and the press operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed in the middle of the change effect. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example when the unit 303 is pressed and when the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated after that.

  As shown in FIG. 201, without changing the volume of the effect sound from the volume 5 to the volume 4 in the middle of the variation effect executed by the effect display device 1600, without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound is lowered by one step from the volume 5 to the volume 4, and the rotation of the contact operation unit 302 The change according to the operation is immediately reflected in the production sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4. That is, in order to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main body frame 4, the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is changed. The volume after the change is reflected in the output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4 at the timing t1 when the rotation operation is performed. .

  Further, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes its scale according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. As a result, the current set volume can be discriminated visually. In this example, an indicator that is displayed in accordance with the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in which an effect such as a decorative symbol is executed. This indicator is displayed on the outermost surface among images displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, an indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed semi-transparently so that an image such as a fluctuating effect executed on the back portion can be recognized. Note that a sub display device different from the effect display device 1600 in which a fluctuating effect using a decorative design or the like is executed may be provided. In this case, according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The indicator may be displayed on the sub display device. Further, in this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses from the end of the operation of the contact operation unit 302. In addition, after the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. You may make it make it. The above-described indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or a lower right display area that does not overlap with the effect image or the like in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is partitioned, and this right An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on the display device.

  Further, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the effect sound such as music or sound effect are changed by rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as “beep”) corresponding to the volume after the change is changed. Electronic sound) is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4. Thereby, when the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, the effect sound of music and sound effects is generated from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker for the bass sound of the main body frame 4. Even if it is not output from 622, while confirming the actual volume by the specific sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4 The volume can be adjusted. Note that the specific sound may not be output during execution of the variation effect. That is, during the execution of the variation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the content of the variation effect is output, and the actual volume can be confirmed without outputting the specific sound. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the specific sound unrelated to the content of the variation effect is output during the variation effect, thereby inhibiting the variation effect being executed.

  This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the effect sound However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the volume adjustment switch is directly operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect, and the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is adjusted. Adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the board volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the volume adjusted by the volume control switch according to the operation. There are two ways to do this. Since the volume control switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the main body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, only the hall clerk can turn the volume adjustment switch. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the production sound of music and sound effects, or it may be loud for the player to feel the music and sound effect production sounds. is there. Therefore, when the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired sound volume. It is like that. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of music and sound effect to a desired volume, so that the volume of the sound adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the effect sound of music and sound effect. Can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300, and feel the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall to produce the production sound of music and sound effects. When the user feels noisy, the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time and enters a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), The volume adjusted by the player who is sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the effect sound of music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting it, this time the front of the pachinko machine 1 A player who sits on the game and operates the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 can increase the volume to a desired level, or sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time. When a player who has played a game feels the volume adjusted to be loud and feels noisy music or sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time The touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[14-2. Adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added to or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch, In addition to adjusting the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume, the volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted. Specifically, the sound output in a high sound range (a predetermined frequency band or higher) can be suppressed (mute may be performed).

  That is, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display (first special symbol). For a certain period of time when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is started or stopped on the display unit or the second special symbol display unit (in this example, the variation control command is received by the peripheral control unit) Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the decorative symbol display, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit) The operation period of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in (the touch operation unit 302 and the press of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect). When the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is pressed except for the effective period for receiving the operation of the operation unit 303, etc., various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (whether high sound is output, light emission of the LED of the door frame 3) A screen for performing an environment change mode for setting the presence / absence or the like) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the screen for performing the environment change mode, the environments that can be changed (whether high sound is output, whether the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, etc.) are displayed in a list, and any of the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 By operating the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where such an environment setting is selected, a process for changing the environment setting can be executed. In this way, by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 according to the screen of the environment change mode, sound output in a specific frequency band can be suppressed, the volume adjustment switch can be rotated, The output can be performed at a volume set according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. Further, the screen in the environment change mode is displayed on the outermost surface among the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, but is displayed translucently so that the back image can be recognized.

  Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the rendering display device 1600. And the state which suppresses the sound output of a specific frequency band and the specific frequency band by operating the contact operation unit 302 and pressing the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is selected. A screen for selecting the state where the sound output is not suppressed is displayed (for example, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed, and “high-frequency cut-off” or “high-frequency cut-off” is displayed in the mini-character balloon, and touch operation is performed. The display is switched every time the unit 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount of rotation), the state where the touch operation unit 302 is operated again to suppress the sound output in the specific frequency band and the state where the sound output in the specific frequency band is not suppressed With one of these selected, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to change the selected state, and a determination screen is displayed (a volume setting mini-camera). Balloon within the displays either "You there cut of the high-frequency range," or "I no cut of the high range" of). Thereafter, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses, the determination change screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 is disappeared to end the environment change mode. In addition, after the determination screen is displayed, the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be erased based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the determination screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or an effect image or the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A lower left display area that does not overlap with the display of the indicator when adjusting the sound volume may be partitioned, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen may be displayed in the lower left display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and a screen, a selection screen, and a determination screen for performing the environment change mode are displayed on this display device. May be.

  It should be noted that after the screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the contact operation is performed. Even if the unit 302 is rotated, the volume adjustment of the effect sound is invalid, and the indicator is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 after the environment change mode is ended, the volume adjustment of the effect sound is enabled and an indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Will come to be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 201, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is changed in the middle of the changing effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the volume adjustment switch is rotated or the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated. When the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to suppress the volume that is set according to the operation, the contact operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed at the timing t2 when these operations are completed. The change according to the operation of the unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is not reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main frame 4. Then, the decoration symbol is fixedly stopped based on the timing of t3 when the variation effect executed by the effect display device 1600 ends (the stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decoration symbol is received from the main control MPU 1310a). The change according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 performed during the change effect at the timing is reflected, that is, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. And the volume set in accordance with the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300.

  It should be noted that the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is invalid after the timing t2 when the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are completed in the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band in the middle of the changing effect. The Then, when the change in the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected at the timing of t3 when the change effect is finished, The volume adjustment of the effect sound in the frequency band is effective. Further, in this example, even when the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is disabled, the environment in which the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is an environment. Although the screen for performing the change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, volume adjustment in a specific frequency band cannot be selected. It should be noted that the environment change mode is performed even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 during the period in which the volume adjustment of the rendering sound of a specific frequency band is invalid. The screen may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 300 are performed in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band in the middle of the change effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When the unit 303 is operated, changes according to these operations are not reflected immediately, but are reflected after the end of the variable effect executed on the effect display device 1600. Normally, from the start to the end of the variation effect, the effect sound according to the contents of the variation effect is continuously transmitted from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main frame 4. When the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted in the middle of the fluctuation production (the production sound that is continuously output is interrupted for a moment, and then the volume in the specific frequency band is suppressed. For example, the output of the produced effect sound or the effect sound whose volume in a specific frequency band is not suppressed is resumed).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the change effect, the change effect is generated. By reflecting after the end of the variation production without reflecting the change according to this operation until the end, the production sound that continuously flows during the variation production is output with the preset content, After the production is finished and the output of the production sound continuously flowing according to the contents of the fluctuation production is stopped, the volume of a specific frequency band by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 Since the production sound reflecting the adjustment can be output, the player does not feel uncomfortable. In other words, during the changing effect where the effect sound is continuously output, the continuously output effect sound stops without reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, and the next effect sound is output. By reflecting at the switching timing until output, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the period when the change effect is not performed, this operation is performed. The corresponding change is immediately reflected and a production sound whose volume in a specific frequency band is adjusted is output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main frame 4. .

  As described above, the volume adjustment of the effect sound during the changing effect is immediately reflected, while the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is not immediately reflected. In other words, for sound-related information that may have an adverse effect on the effect that is scheduled to be performed during the changing production, such as making the player feel uncomfortable due to the change in the production sound, changes during the production are prohibited and the effect of the production is reduced. It comes to deter.

  Further, when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected, the fact may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the player. For example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band in the middle of the changing production, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is performed. Although it is not reflected immediately, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted by displaying a mini-character for setting the volume on the effect display device 1600 and displaying a standby message such as “Please wait a moment” in the balloon of this mini-character. The player may be informed that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for receiving is normally received. Further, a standby display for notifying the player that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is normally received is specified. For example, a volume setting mini-character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a message “Wait a minute” The player indicates that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 for performing the standby display 1 such as “Ne” and adjusting the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band is normally received. When the remaining time up to the timing of reflecting the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band becomes a predetermined time after the notification to the effect display device 1600 "3" in the balloon of this Minikyara to display the Minikyara for volume setting, "2", may be performed stand-by display 2 to perform a countdown, such as "1". Furthermore, when the timing for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band has been reached, this may be notified. For example, a volume setting mini-character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and Reflection display such as “selection reflection start!” Or the like may be performed in the balloon.

  In the above-described example, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed and the equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed are previously set as the equalizer setting patterns. The volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed by switching between the equalizer setting A and the equalizer setting B by adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band, and the specific frequency. Switching between two levels (on and off), with the band volume being suppressed. Note that a plurality of equalizer settings with different degrees of volume suppression in a specific frequency band are stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and a plurality of levels of volume suppression in a specific frequency band are different by switching between these equalizer settings. You may make it switch to a state. For example, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, the equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and the volume adjustment switch turning operation of the volume adjustment switch or the production operation unit 300 Equalizer setting C (for example, change to volume 3 if the set volume is volume 6) to be suppressed to half the volume set according to the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 of As the setting pattern is stored and the volume of the production sound in the specific frequency band is adjusted, the volume of the specific frequency band is changed by switching to one of the equalizer setting A, the equalizer setting B, and the equalizer setting C. When the volume is not suppressed, the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and the volume of a specific frequency band And while suppressing half the volume of the volume that is set in response to the rotating operation of the touch operating unit 302 of the turning operation and staging operation unit 300 of the switch may be set so as to be switched to three stages of. This makes it possible to perform settings that match the preferences of various players.

  In addition, the production sound of a specific frequency band is not limited to the above, but also includes a sound frequency band, a low frequency range, and the like. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume of speech generated from a character or the like during a fluctuation production. (If there are a plurality of characters, they may be adjusted collectively or individually), or the volume of the low range may be adjusted. Further, it may be possible to adjust a production sound (confirmation sound) for notifying the jackpot confirmation, a payout sound when paying out a prize ball, and the like. Further, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands may be adjusted as a specific frequency band, and for example, the volume of both the high sound range and the low sound range may be adjusted. In this case, each of the high frequency range and the low frequency range may be adjusted together (for example, an operation of switching to one of a state where the high frequency range is not suppressed and a state where the high frequency range is suppressed and a state where the low frequency range is not suppressed are suppressed. The operation to switch to one of the states is collectively performed in one operation), and each is adjusted (for example, the operation to switch to one of the state that does not suppress the high range and the state that suppresses the state and the state that does not suppress the low range are suppressed The operation of switching to one of the states may be performed separately). That is, the player may be able to select any one of a plurality of setting modes (such as high tone cut, payout sound cut, jackpot fixed sound cut). This makes it possible to perform settings that match the preferences of various players.

  Further, when a continuous production sound is output in a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc., the volume control of the production sound is performed for the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. 4 may be reflected immediately on the output from the main frame speaker 622 for low sound, while the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band may be reflected after the end of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state. As a result, the output of the continuous production sound is stopped, and the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is adjusted at the switching timing until the next production sound is output. The top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame 4 is reflected in the output from the main frame speaker 622 for bass, so that the effect sound can be changed according to the adjustment without a sense of incongruity. Note that, during the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the player's attention to the content of the performance is lower than the variation effect, so the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also the same as the volume adjustment of the above effect sound. You may make it reflect immediately in the output from the main frame speaker 622 for the top center speaker of 3 sides, a top side speaker, and the main body frame 4 for the low sound.

  In addition, when a continuous production sound is output in a game state different from the normal state such as during a short time state, the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, The production operation unit 300 is immediately reflected in the output from the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the frame 4 and the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is performed in order to adjust the volume of the production sound of the specific frequency band in the middle of the varying production When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the change effect is reflected after the end of the change effect without reflecting the change according to this operation until the change effect ends. When the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band when there is not 3-side top center speaker, and the top side speakers, may be caused to immediately reflected on the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for low body frame 4. That is, it is specified when the player is not paying much attention by reflecting after the end of the variation effect without reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band during the execution of the variation effect that the player pays the most attention. It is also possible to reflect the volume adjustment in the frequency band of the above and to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without a sense of incongruity.

  Even when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the production sound is actually output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main frame 4. Until it is done, the changed production sound is not output. Therefore, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band in the middle of the change effect, the specific frequency after the change effect ends. Even if the volume adjustment of the band is reflected, the changed effect sound is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4 after the start of the next variation effect. Is done. That is, the actual output is performed after the lottery process (winning determination lottery or the like) for starting the next variation effect is performed. Similarly, when the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the demonstration period in the effect display device 1600. Will immediately reflect the volume adjustment of the production sound in a specific frequency band, but if the production sound is not output as a demonstration, the production sound after the change will be displayed until the next variation production is started. It is output after the start of the fluctuating effect without being output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side, and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4.

  Further, the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time as the volume of the effect sound is initialized. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time and is in a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the front of the pachinko machine 1 is The volume adjusted by the player sitting in the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. At the same time, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed. State).

  Further, in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the execution of the error notification in which the notification sound is output at a high volume (may be the maximum volume), the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 When 303 is operated, whether to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (incorrect level) that caused the error notification may be appropriately set. Good.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 202, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower dish 202 of the dish unit 200 is full of the game balls B. When the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during full tank error notification executed immediately, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately notified. When a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the state where the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound is continued, and the top center on the door frame 3 side is continued. You may make it output the notification sound after a change from the speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. In this example, the sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side as a full tank error notification (for example, “Please pull out the sphere!”) Reflects the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. (For example, when the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, a female voice is output, and when the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, a male voice is output).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 203, the volume of a specific frequency band is set during the door opening error notification that is executed when a serious abnormality (door opening error) is detected such that the door frame 3 is opened. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 is operated for adjustment, or when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the specific frequency band The volume adjustment may not be reflected in the notification sound. In this example, it is possible to adjust the volume of a sound (for example, “the door is open!”) Output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side as a door opening error notification in a specific frequency band. Although there is a serious abnormality (for example, when the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, it is output with a female voice, and when the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, it is output with a male voice) When this occurs, volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is disabled and a notification sound in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 202, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs such that a full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower dish 202 of the dish unit 200 is full of game balls B. While the tongue error is being notified, when the contact operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as effective, but the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound. The volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the changed notification sound is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main body frame 4. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 203, during the door opening error notification when a serious abnormality (door opening error) is detected such that it is detected that the door frame 3 is opened, the rendering operation unit 300 is used to adjust the volume. When the touch operation unit 302 is rotated, the operation is accepted as effective, but the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound, and the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It is like that. As described above, by appropriately setting whether or not the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound in accordance with the degree of abnormality (illegal level) that caused the error notification, it is possible to ensure that a serious abnormality is detected. Be able to discover.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 203, the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 are operated so as to suppress the volume of a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side In the state where the effect sound after the change is output from the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4, when a serious abnormality occurs, a specific change according to the environment change mode or the operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (off), and a notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the output of the production sound is resumed after the notification sound is stopped, a specific sound corresponding to the environment change mode or the operation of the production operation unit 300 is selected. Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that has been forcibly released is set (turned on) again, and the effect sound with the volume of the specific frequency band suppressed on the door frame 3 side. The sound is output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is enabled, and the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected. When the production sound and the notification sound can be output immediately, and without adjusting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 immediately in the production sound output. The case where the effect sound and the notification sound after the change can be output by delaying the timing is appropriately set according to the state of the pachinko machine 1 (game state, error state, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the production effect or to surely find a serious abnormality.

[15. Change of winning probability etc.]
In the pachinko machine 1, an example in which the probability of a big hit or a small hit is changed according to a set value will be described. In the following, it is assumed that operation signals from the setting key on the setting board, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch are output to the payout control board 633. In this example, the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633. However, the setting board may be connected to the power board 630 in the power board cover 631 or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting board may be configured as a part of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the main control board 1310, instead of being an independent board. That is, a setting key, a setting change switch, a setting confirmation switch, and a setting indicator may be mounted on any of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the main control board 1310.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operation state of each switch provided on the setting board and displays the setting value selected or selected. Control the instrument.

  On the setting board, a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and A setting indicator that displays the set or selected setting value is provided, and functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts a setting change operation. As described above, the setting board is provided on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged on the game island in the game store. This makes it possible to change the setting.

  In the present embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key, setting change switch, and setting confirmation switch on the setting board are taken into the payout control unit 633a. The setting indicator is controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The determined setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a corresponds to the setting as a table used in a special lottery or the like (a hit determination table, a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, etc.) Select a table. Note that tables used in special lotteries and the like are provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 204, in this example, the “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, “small hit type”, “ordinary symbol probability”, and “second per type according to common figure” The opening / closing pattern of the start port is set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

  In addition, the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value. “1/309”, the setting value 3 is “1/299”, the setting value 4 and the setting value 6 are “1/279”, and the setting value 5 is “1/289”. In this example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the setting value is, and the larger the setting value is, the higher the probability of jackpot is. In the setting value 6 having the highest setting value, the jackpot probability is lower than the setting value 5. Yes. Note that the jackpot probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set so as to increase as the set value increases from the set value 1 to the set value 6.

  In addition, a small hit probability (ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that winning a small hit in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, The setting value 1 to the setting value 4 is “1/100”, the setting value 5 and the setting value 6 is “1/90”, and in the table used for the special drawing of the second special symbol, the setting values 1 to 1 are set. The setting value 5 is “50/100”, and the setting value 6 is “66/100”. In this example, in the case of a high setting value (setting value 5 or setting value 6), the occurrence frequency of the big hit gaming state is indirectly increased by increasing the small hit probability more than other setting values (low setting value). It has become. In this way, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value is estimated by the winning frequency of the small hit in the normal state by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, while the second special symbol In the table used for the special lottery, the small hit probability is substantially the same for all the set values, so that the continuation of the short time state (Ren-chan) can be enjoyed purely in the short time state.

  In addition, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol executed mainly in the normal state, the small hit probability of the set value 5 and the set value 6 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4. On the other hand, in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol executed mainly in the time reduction state, only the small hit probability of the set value 6 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. Therefore, in setting value 4 and setting value 5, in the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the lottery is performed with a different small hit probability, but in the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the short time state Is a small lottery with the same probability. However, the big hit probability and the determination rate of the small hit type, which will be described later, are set so that the set value 5 is higher than the set value 4, and the set value 5 as a whole is more advantageous than the set value 4. Has been.

  In addition, since the big hit probability in the normal state is high while the small hit probability is low, it is highly possible that the hit as the trigger for the transition control to the short time state as in the setting value 4 is “big hit”. A game that is unlikely to be a big hit via a "small hit" and a low hit as a chance to be controlled to shift to a short time state as in the setting value 5, while a "small hit" is low Providing a new game characteristic that can be realized by changing the set value and guessing the set value according to the type of hit as an opportunity to be controlled to shift to a short time state Can do.

  Note that the small hit probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the small hit probability may be set so as to increase as the set value increases from the set value 1 to the set value 6. . Further, the small hit probability according to some set values among the set values 1 to 6 is lower than the small hit probability according to any one of the set values lower than the some set values. You may make it do. For example, the small hit probability of the setting value 4 may be 1/100, and the small hit probability of the setting value 3 that is lower than the setting value 4 may be 1/90. In this case, by setting the ratio determined for the small hit type (the third small hit in this example) that is advantageous in the case of a small hit so that the set value 4 is higher than the set value 3 The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

  In addition, a determination ratio in the case of determining the type of small hit based on the fact that it is determined to be a small hit as a result of the special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)) is also set in the small hit symbol determination table. Selection ratio), a different value is set for each set value. In this example, when it is decided to make a small hit as a special lottery result of the first special symbol, the setting value 1 to the setting value 3 is decided at the ratio of 9/10 and the second small hit is 10 minutes. The ratio is determined at the ratio of 1 of the third small unit, and at the setting values 4 and 5, the ratio is determined at the ratio of 8/10 to the second small area, and at the ratio of 2/10, the third small area is determined. In the set value 6, the ratio is determined for the first small spot at a ratio of 1/10, determined at the second small ratio at the ratio of 6/10, and determined at the third small ratio at the ratio of 3/10. It is like that.

  In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 are decided at a ratio of three tenths and the first small hit is six tenths. The ratio is determined for the second small unit, determined by the ratio of 1/10 for the third small unit, and set value 3 and set value 4 are determined for the first small unit by the ratio of 2/10. 6 is determined for the second small unit, 2/10 is determined for the third small unit, and the set value 5 and the set value 6 are determined for the first small unit at a ratio of 1/10. The ratio is determined for the second small spot at a ratio of 6/10 and is determined for the third small slot at a ratio of 3/10.

  Further, as described above, the first small hit is for guiding the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006 to the first loser opening 2535, and there is no possibility of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, or the big hit gaming state The possibility of occurrence is extremely low. And in this example, when it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the first special symbol, the first small hit is selected only when the set value is 6, and other set values (set values) 1 to the set value 5) is not selected, and if the set value 1 to the set value 5 is always a big hit game when it is a small hit in a state disadvantageous to the player as compared to the short state of the normal state It is possible to execute the small hit gaming state while generating the second small hit or the third small hit having the possibility of occurrence of the state and expecting the big hit gaming state. That is, in the case of the set value 1 to the set value 5, in the case of a small hit in a state disadvantageous to the player than the short time state of the normal state, while paying attention to the small hit gaming state while expecting the big hit gaming state However, if all the game balls B received in the prize winning hole 2006 are guided to the first loser opening 2535 and there is no possibility of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, the player's discouragement increases. By generating at least the second small hit or the third small hit that has the possibility of generating a big hit gaming state, during the small hit gaming state, it is possible to attract attention with the expectation of the big hit gaming state. Decline can be prevented. On the other hand, although the first small hit may be selected in the case of the set value 6, it can be determined that the set value 6 is the highest set value by executing the first small hit in the normal state. It is possible to give the player more joy than the disappointment that was won in the first small hit, and to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the short time state, the small hit probability is higher than in the normal state, so the small hit gaming state is executed more frequently. For this reason, it is recognized that all the game balls B that have been executed in the first small hit and received in the prize winning hole 2006 are guided to the first loser opening 2535 and there is no possibility of occurrence of the big hit game state. Even do not discourage players. In addition, when it is decided to win a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the low set value (set value 1 or set value 2) increases the determination ratio of the first small hit, and the high set value The decision rate per first small is reduced. That is, when the high set value is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol compared to the low set value, the ratio determined to the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player is reduced. Therefore, the high setting value is more advantageous to the player than the low setting value.

  In addition, as described above, the third small hit is to guide the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007. It is almost the same state as that. In other words, a higher determination ratio for the third small hit is synonymous with an increase in the winning probability for the big hit, and in this example, the determination for the third small hit is made at a high set value (set value 5 or set value 6). Increasing the proportion indirectly increases the probability of generating a big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the winning probability of the normal lottery (the ratio of the normal symbol per unit determination value indicating the normal per unit random number for determination per normal symbol) is set to a different value for each set value. It is “1/2”, and the setting value 6 is “1/2”. Therefore, at the set value 6, when the game ball B is received at the normal winning opening 2003 and the normal lottery is performed, the second start port 2411 always moves forward and the game ball B can be received at the second start port 2004. Therefore, the player is more advantageous than the other set values.

  Also, in this example, when it is decided that the normal lottery results in the normal lottery, A per normal symbol (design A per common symbol) and B per regular symbol (design B per regular symbol (design B1 per standard symbol) It is determined to be one of a plurality of types per normal symbol, such as a symbol B5)) per ordinary symbol and a symbol C per symbol (ordinary symbol C). The mode (design A per universal symbol, symbol B per universal symbol, symbol C per universal symbol) is derived and displayed on a normal symbol display. Further, the opening / closing mode of the second start door 2411 is varied for each set value. More specifically, when the normal symbol is A in the normal state, an opening / closing mode of “execution of 0.1 s once” is executed with all setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6), and the time-saving state When the normal symbol per A is sometimes used, the opening / closing mode of “execute 6s open once” is executed with all set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and when the normal symbol is B per normal symbol The odd number setting value (setting value 1, setting value 3, and setting value 5) is used to execute the opening / closing mode of “execution of 0.1 s twice”, and the even setting value (setting value 2, setting value 4, setting) The value 6) is used to execute the opening / closing mode of “execution of 0.1 s once”. When the normal symbol becomes B per time-short state, “6 s release is executed once for setting value 1 to setting value 3. Execute “open / close mode”, set value 4 and set value 5 execute “open / close 3s twice” open / close mode, and set value In running the "Run once 3s open" opening and closing manner.

  In the case of setting value 1 to setting value 5, the type per normal symbol is determined to one of the two types per normal symbol, A per normal symbol and B per normal symbol. In the case of the set value 6, the type per normal symbol is determined from one of three types per normal symbol: A per normal symbol, B per normal symbol, and C per normal symbol. . When the normal state becomes C per normal symbol, the opening / closing mode of “execute 0.1s 6 times” is executed with the set value 6 and when the normal state becomes C per normal symbol, it is set. An opening / closing mode of “execute 1 s opening 6 times” is executed with a value of 6.

  Thus, the operation mode of the second start port door 2411 (opening / closing mode of the second start port 2004) that opens the second start port 2004 based on the normal lottery result being the normal hit is for each set value. Therefore, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operation mode of the second start door 2411.

  The setting key serves as an opportunity to change to the setting change mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion portion) and maintaining the contact short circuit or open state by turning the key to the setting position. It is a switch that outputs a signal. Note that other switches may be used without providing the setting key. In this case, the setting change mode is started by operating the setting change switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press), and the setting change mode is ended by long pressing the setting change switch in the setting change mode. May be.

  Further, the setting change mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and further continuing the RAM clear switch operation for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Also, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the operation of the RAM clear switch continues for less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by long pressing the RAM clear switch during the setting change mode.

  In this way, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, the operation may be detected at the falling edge of the setting change switch.

  The setting change switch is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the setting value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch is operated when the setting value = 6, the setting value = 1. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch without providing the setting change switch. Note that the set value is not limited to six stages, and may be a smaller stage (for example, two stages) or a larger stage (for example, eight stages).

  Note that the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the probability of hitting a special symbol), where the set value = 1 has a low hit probability and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. Also, depending on the set value, the ratio of probability change big hit, the ratio of short time after big hit (ST), the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of big hits, the probability per regular figure, the prize balls of the general winning opening, starting opening and big winning opening The number of prize balls that a player can acquire may be changed by changing various parameters relating to the game such as the number.

  The setting confirmation switch is constituted by, for example, a momentary switch, and is a switch for confirming a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and inputting the set value to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch may be configured with switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that the switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch may be constituted by a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be constituted by a momentary toggle switch.

  The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch. Moreover, you may determine the setting value selected in response to the operation | movement of the other switch and sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 195, the operation of the single button operation sensor 194, the operation of the ball rental button, the operation of the return button, The selected setting may be confirmed by detecting the winning of the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The operation unit that substitutes the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for gaming) or a switch that is not operable by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

  That is, in order to set the gaming performance in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. .

  Further, the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed using only the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and further continuing the RAM clear switch operation for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Also, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the operation of the RAM clear switch continues for less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch, the setting value can be selected by an operation for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) of the RAM clear switch during the setting change mode, and the predetermined time of the RAM clear switch is set instead of the setting confirmation switch. The set value can be confirmed by the above operation (long press). Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by long pressing the RAM clear switch after the setting is confirmed.

  The setting display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays a setting value selected by operating a setting change switch, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of a setting key). Note that the setting indicator may be configured by a number of LEDs that can be set instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error is provided on the payout control board 633, but this error type indicator and the setting indicator are used together for selection. The set value and the current set value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off in the error type display, and the dot may be turned on in the set value display. Also, the error type may be lit (not blinking) and the set value may be blinked.

[15-1. Setting change process]
Next, processing related to setting change will be described. FIG. 205 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing the set value.

  In this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control side power on process is executed, and when the start condition of the setting change mode is satisfied in the main control side power on process The set value is changed.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process, and then determines the state of the setting key, and the setting key is turned on. If operated, the setting change mode for changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, a setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key is turned on when the setting key operation signal is received. . In addition, the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is operated, the handle touch sensor 192 is detected by touching the handle 195, or a prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (the balance of the prepaid card is present). The setting change mode may not be started when there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, the setting change mode may not be started even when there is a possibility that some sort of fraud is being performed on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a magnetic error is detected).

  When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU 1310a uses data other than the game state (for example, information relating to the probability change state, the short time state, and the winning ball) in the game control area (also referred to as a specific area) of the built-in RAM. Then, a first RAM clear process for clearing data indicating the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 is executed.

  Next, setting value 1 to setting value 6 are switched by performing a setting change operation. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a finishes the first RAM clear process, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a first RAM clear process end command to the payout control unit 633a. As an initial value (for example, setting value 0) blinks, the setting value displayed on the setting display is switched every time the setting change switch is operated (loop between setting value 1 and setting value 6).

  Note that when the main control MPU 1310a executes the first RAM clearing process, the set value is cleared and becomes an unset state. Also, the setting change mode cannot be terminated when the set value is not set. If the power is cut off during the setting change mode with the set value not set, the power is turned on again. Then, the setting change mode is performed. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, a loop process for monitoring the state of the setting key is performed until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode is changed according to the setting key being turned on. To be started.

  Further, the payout control unit 633a checks whether or not the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, that is, whether the main body frame release switch is OFF, and the main body frame release switch is ON (the main body frame 4 is set to the outer frame 2). Is not opened), the loop is repeated until the body frame opening switch is turned off, and the operation of the setting confirmation switch is not accepted. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

  If the setting confirmation switch is operated when the body frame opening switch is turned off or when the body frame opening switch is turned off, the payout control unit 633a confirms and displays the setting value displayed on the setting display ( The flashing display is ended and the lighting is displayed), and a setting change end command indicating the set value determined is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting change end command, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. Thereby, a lottery process or the like according to the determined set value is performed.

  The main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clear process (step S14) when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, when the setting key is turned off.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the set value is changed by the above-described processing.

  When the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a finishes displaying the setting value on the setting display (does not display the setting value). May be. When the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode is finished, the setting change mode is not executed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting display. Thereby, the game clerk can change the set value after grasping the current set value.

  Further, when executing the setting change mode, it may be notified. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is turned on, a setting change mode start command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of starting the setting change mode is transmitted, and the setting change mode start command is received. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform predetermined display (for example, during a setting change) on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when the setting change mode is ended, that is, when the setting key is operated to be turned off, a setting change mode end command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of the end of the setting change mode is transmitted, and the setting is changed. Based on the reception of the change mode end command, the peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display performed on the effect display device 1600. It should be noted that the set value determined as the predetermined display or the set value displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and in this case, it may be deleted at the end of the setting change mode. Good.

  The main control MPU 1310a may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a display of a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all special symbol indicators are turned off or turned on).

  On the other hand, after the initial value setting and activation setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process, the state of the setting key is determined, and if the setting key is not turned on, the step The process after S14 is executed.

  In the main control side power-on process, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, determines that various information is to be erased, or the determination in step S30. When it is determined that the checksum values (sum values) do not match at step S32, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0) in the determination at step S32, that is, the main control side power-off process If it is determined that the game has not been completed normally, in step S38, data other than the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 in the game control area and the game state (for example, information on the probability change state, the short time state, and the prize ball) After executing the second RAM clear process for clearing the data indicating (), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step Flop S40). Thus, unlike the first RAM clear process, the set value information is not initialized in the second RAM clear process. That is, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear process can be executed to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and when the power is turned on, the second RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Information relating to the gaming state (for example, information relating to the probability variation state, the short time state, and the prize ball) can be cleared by executing the process. Also, the first RAM clear process is executed by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clear switch is operated to execute the second RAM clear process. Clear information on the state (for example, information on the probability change state, time reduction state, prize ball), that is, the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the information on the game state (eg information on the probability change state, time reduction state, prize ball) It is possible to clear both. Thus, one or both of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process can be selectively executed according to the information to be cleared.

  In this example, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may determine it. The setting key operation signal transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency) is transmitted, or the power supply voltage is grounded. An intermediate potential signal that is not a voltage may be output. In order to prevent an unauthorized act of starting the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key, a signal relating to the operation of the setting key is issued from the payout control unit 633a by the signal that cannot occur when the terminal is short-circuited. It is because it is preferable to transmit to.

[15-2. Fluctuation production according to the set value]
Next, the variation effect according to each set value will be described. FIG. 206 is a variation pattern table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process).

  In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the variation pattern type selected according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is different. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special figure 1 referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process (see FIG. In FIG. 206 (A)), for example, a setting suggestion mini-character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “may be low?”, “Is one of 1, 2, 3?” Etc. are displayed in the balloon of the mini-character. By doing this, the deviation variation pattern 25 for executing the “low setting suggestion effect” that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is either 1, 2, or 3 can be selected from the set value 1 to the set value 3. For example, a mini-character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “high may?” Or “any of 4, 5, 6” is displayed in the balloon of the mini-character. Off variation pattern 26 for executing the "High Set suggesting demonstration" suggests that the set value of the slave unit 1 is one of 4, 5, 6 are selectable setpoint 4 setpoint 6. For this reason, when the “high setting suggestion effect” is executed in the variation effect, the player can recognize that the setting value is 4 or more at the minimum, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

  Further, for example, a mini-character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “Is it even number?” Or “Is 2, 4, 6?” Or the like is displayed in a balloon of the mini-character, etc. The deviation variation pattern 27 for executing the “even setting suggesting effect” that suggests that the set value is any of 2, 4 and 6 can be selected by the set value 2, the set value 4, and the set value 6, for example. The setting display value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying the setting suggestion mini-character on the effect display device 1600 and displaying “an odd number?”, “One of 1, 3, 5?”, Etc. in the balloon of the mini-character. The deviation variation pattern 28 for executing the “odd setting suggestion effect” that suggests that any one of 1, 3 and 5 is selectable with the setting value 1, the setting value 3 and the setting value 5. Therefore, when the “even number setting suggestion effect” is executed in the variation effect, it is one of the setting value 2, the setting value 4, or the setting value 6, and when the “odd setting suggestion effect” is executed, the setting value 1, the setting value is set. 3 and the player can recognize that the set value is 5. The set value can be estimated by combining the execution history of “low setting suggestion effect” and “high setting suggestion effect”. That is, if the “odd setting suggestion effect” and the “low setting suggestion effect” are executed, the setting value 1 or the setting value 3 is executed, and the “odd setting suggestion effect” and the “high setting suggestion effect” are executed. If the “even setting suggesting effect” and “low setting suggesting effect” are executed, the setting value is 2, and “even setting suggesting effect” and “high setting suggesting effect” Can be inferred to be the set value 4 or the set value 6. As described above, in this example, a new game property is provided in which a set value is estimated by a combination of executed setting suggestion effects among a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

  Further, in this example, for example, a setting suggestion mini character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “highest? The off-set fluctuation pattern 29 for executing the “maximum setting suggesting effect” suggesting that it is 6 can be selected only at the set value 6. Therefore, when the “maximum setting suggestion effect” is executed in the variation effect, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the highest setting, and the gaming interest is improved. Further, in the case of the set value 6, it is possible to select the deviation variation pattern 31 for executing the “highest setting finalization effect” when the reach is not reached or the reach is lost, and the set value is set for the player. It is possible to notify that the setting is the highest setting value 6 and to make the player recognize that the highest setting has been established, thereby improving the gaming interest.

  Further, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table (FIG. 206) referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process. In (B)), for example, a setting suggestion mini character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying “highest setting confirmed!”, “6 confirmed!”, Etc. in a balloon of the mini character. The small hit variation pattern 33 and the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “maximum setting finalization effect” informing that the value is 6 can be selected only with the set value 6. For this reason, when the “maximum setting finalization effect” is executed in the variation effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the highest setting, and the game entertainment is improved. .

  In addition, when the first special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 206 (C )), The big hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “highest setting finalization effect” can be selected only at the set value 6. Therefore, if the “maximum setting finalization effect” is executed in the variable effect when the big win is achieved, the player can recognize that the setting value is the maximum setting value 6, and the jackpot gaming state is executed. As a result, a double joy can be given to the player, so that the gaming interest is improved.

  In addition, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time-short state, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table (FIG. 206) referred to when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the second variation pattern setting process. In (D)), the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “maximum setting final effect” can be selected only with the set value 6. For this reason, when the “maximum setting finalization effect” is executed in the variation effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the highest setting, and further, the prize winning opening Since the game ball B entered in 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 to win the third small hit that generates the big hit game state, double joy can be given to the player. Game entertainment is improved.

  As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, the set value 1 to the set value 4 have a small hit probability “1/100”, whereas the set value 5 and the set value 6 are higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4 “90 minutes”. 1 ”. Similarly, in the short-time state, the set value 1 to the set value 5 have a small hit probability “1/10”, whereas the set value 6 is “1/9” higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. It is said.

  In addition, the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “highest setting finalization effect” that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time-short state is for a long period (155 s). The change time of the change pattern that can be selected with the set value 1 to the set value 5 lower than the set value 6 is longer than the change time. Further, at the set value 6, the selection rate of the small hit variation pattern 20 having a longer variation time than the small hit variation patterns 1 to 3 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5 lower than the set value 6. That is, at the setting value 6 where the small hit probability is higher than the other setting values, the variation time of the variation effect executed in the time reduction state is long. As described above, the set value 6 has a higher hit probability than the set values 1 to 5, and the game ball B that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 when the hit value is further reduced is set to the first V winning opening. Since the ratio determined for the third small hit to generate the big hit gaming state by guiding to 2007 is also set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5, it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of prize balls in a short time. . Therefore, by increasing the selection rate of the small hit variation pattern 20 and the small hit variation pattern 34 in which the variation time is set longer than that of the other small hit variation patterns in the case of the set value 6 from the set value 1 to the set value 5. By suppressing the number of executions of fluctuating effects per unit time, the improvement of gambling is suppressed.

  In this example, the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are distributed in substantially the same manner for all the set values. However, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, the variation pattern peculiar to the set value 6 (the deviation variation pattern 29 to the deviation variation). Since the pattern 31, the small hit variation pattern 33, the small hit variation pattern 34, and the big hit variation pattern 34) are provided, the distribution of variation pattern determination random numbers is different. Therefore, in this example, only the variation pattern determination random numbers distributed to the specific variation pattern (adjustment variation pattern) in the variation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6 are adjusted to distribute the variation pattern determination random numbers. As described above, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6, only the variation pattern determination random numbers distributed to the specific variation pattern are adjusted without changing the distribution of the variation pattern determination random numbers for all the variation patterns. As a result, the load in adding or deleting the variation pattern is reduced, and the design of the gaming machine becomes easy. It should be noted that the specific variation pattern can maintain a certain frequency of occurrence even if the number of distribution of the variation pattern determination random number is reduced, and at least the variation pattern determination random number set in other setting values. It may be adjusted so as to have 60% or more with respect to the number of distributions, and the appearance rate may not be excessively reduced as compared with other set values.

  In this way, in this example, according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the small hit probability and the variation time of the variation effect executed when the special lottery result is the small hit are made different, thereby balancing with gambling. Have taken.

  In addition, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effects (low setting suggestion effects, high setting suggestion effects, even setting suggestion effects, odd setting suggestion effects, highest setting suggestion effects, highest setting finalization effects) are out of the first special lottery results in the normal state Alternatively, it is most easily executed when the reach is out of reach, and there are many types of setting suggesting effects that can be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the second special lottery in the short-time state is out of reach or reach, or the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) in the normal state or in the short-time state is small hit or big hit In this case, it is harder to execute than the case where the result of the first special lottery in the normal state is out of reach or out of reach, and there are few types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. That is, in the short-time state or in the small hit state, the setting suggestive effect is executed less frequently than when the normal state is out of reach or out of reach, so that attention is paid to the reception of the game ball B into the V prize opening. ing.

[16. Guide passage group consisting of a first guide passage and a second guide passage]
[16-1. When the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the case where the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is provided, FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521. FIG. 208 is a specific effect example at the time of executing a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404. .

  As shown in FIG. 207, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance, which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes. That is, when the game ball B is driven with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2506 and abut against the stopper portion 1006 (so-called right hit), the guide passage group 2520 enters the first guide passage 2521. When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hit), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521, so that the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. There is no.

  The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is driven into the first guide path 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 If the passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not in the first guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the manner in which the game ball B is shot (launch strength) in accordance with the game state, and to change the region and the path into which the game ball B is shot. First, during the small hit game, the prize winning hole 2006 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is opened, and the game ball B is inserted into the opened prize winning hole 2006. Is required. For this reason, during the small hit game, the game balls are strong enough to enter the upstream space portion 2506 and abut against the stop portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. It is necessary to drive B (so-called right-handed).

  In addition, during the big hit game, the big prize opening 2005 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is in an open state, and it is required to enter the game ball B into the open big prize opening 2005. However, it is configured such that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520 with a higher probability than the exit of the first guide passage 2521. ing. In addition, during the short-time state, the second starting port 2004 similarly provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is opened based on the ball entering the normal winning opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500. It is required to enter the game ball B into the second start port 2004 that is in the open state, but the second guide passage 2522 is more than the exit of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B is configured to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 with a higher probability that the game ball B is discharged from the exit. For this reason, during the big hit game and in the time-short state, the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520 so as to enter the upstream space portion 2506 and do not contact the stop portion 1006. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with a certain strength (a strength somewhat weaker than that of the right strike).

  Further, during the normal state, it is required to enter the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 provided below the center accessory 2500. For this reason, during the normal state, it is the highest of the outer peripheral surfaces of the center accessory 2500 so as to flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 where the game ball B can enter the first start port 2002. It is necessary to hit the game ball B with a strength to enter the left side of the front view (left side of the front frame upper right part 2502a) rather than the part that has become (so-called left hit).

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the way (launch strength) of the game ball B in accordance with the game state and to change the region and the passage into which the game ball B is shot. When the ball B is not hit, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B when the game ball B is not in a gaming state in which the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. If the detected state continues for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

  First, during the big hit game and the short time state, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is recommended. When the player detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five game balls B in five seconds). When the above is detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be shot into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208 (A), in the effect display device 1600, the first warning effect that notifies the message “please enter the second guide passage” is executed. As a result, during the big hit game and in the time-short state, the way of hitting is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hitting). The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. If the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 has not detected the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the execution of the first warning effect, the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521. Is determined to have been eliminated, and the first warning effect is terminated.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B during the big hit game and the short-time state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer When the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is counted up. Then, after the monitoring timer is started, when the state where the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), When the first warning effect is executed but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the first guidance passage 2521 is entered. The first warning effect is not executed on the assumption that the state in which the game ball B has been shot is eliminated, and information such as a monitoring timer and a count value is cleared. In addition, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the short-time state and the game ball B is no longer in a state to be put into the second guide passage 2522, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. is doing. Then, after the execution of the first warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the first warning effect on the assumption that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, the second guide passage 2522 is also provided when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the short time state. Since the game ball B is no longer in a state to be hit, the first warning effect is finished.

  Further, during the normal state, it is recommended that the game ball B be driven into the left area of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 passes the game ball B through. When detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds) The player is warned that the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the center bonus 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the second display effect is performed in the effect display device 1600 to notify the message “please make a left”. As a result, in the normal state, the way of hitting is changed to the strength of entering the left side of the front view of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 from the highest part (left side of the front frame upper right part 2502a). Thus, the player can grasp that the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500. When the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide path 2521 is resolved. It is determined that the second warning effect has been completed.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and a monitoring timer is started. Each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is incremented. Then, after the monitoring timer is started, when the state where the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), When the second warning effect is executed but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the first warning path 2521 is entered. The second warning effect is not executed on the assumption that the state where the game ball B has been shot is eliminated, and information such as a monitoring timer and a count value is cleared. Also, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the normal state, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared even when the game ball B is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500. is doing. Then, after the execution of the second warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first When the game state is switched from the normal state in addition to ending the second warning effect on the assumption that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been canceled, Since the game ball B is no longer in a state to be hit, the second warning effect is ended.

  As described above, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 passes the game ball B when the game ball B is not in the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. When the detected state continues for a predetermined time, a warning screen (first and second warning effects) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but the content of the warning is changed according to the game state. As a result, even if the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 when the game ball B should not be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the recommended region or path is The player can accurately grasp whether there is any.

  On the other hand, during the small hit game, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is used as the game ball. If the passage of B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The player is warned that the game ball B should be shot into the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208 (C), in the effect display device 1600, the third warning effect that notifies the message “please enter the first guide passage” is executed. Thereby, during the small hit game, the way of hitting is changed to the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2506 and abut against the stop portion 1006, and the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. The player can grasp it. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, and the third warning effect is ended. Like that.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B is not put in the first guide passage 2521 and is monitored. The timer has started. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the third warning effect is executed. If the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated. 3 The warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. In addition, even when the gaming state is switched from the small hit game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is not in a state to be put into the first guide path 2521, information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the execution of the third warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not put in the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the fourth warning effect as having been resolved, the game ball B is no longer in the first guide path 2521 when the game state is switched from the small hit game, Warning production has ended.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 must be present. For example, the position may be a position that passes, for example, an inlet that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet that is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory prize winning port 2006 provided in the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory prize winning port 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the opened prize winning hole 2006. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively and causing a problem in the right detection sensor 2404.

  In the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, the game ball B is displayed in any manner in each gaming state. If you want to make a placement area instruction display (for example, a right-handed display consisting of a right-arrow image or a left-handed display consisting of a left-arrow image) to make the player always know that it should be shot, It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to hinder the driving area instruction display. For example, a “display area for displaying a placement area instruction display” is provided in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is different from that area. It is desirable to provide a “display area for displaying the first to third warning effects” in the upper left part of the screen so that the respective guidance is superimposed and not obstructed.

  In the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, such warnings are realized as voice effects rather than displays. In that case, the priority of assignment to channels that are finitely provided for outputting sound is higher than various effect sounds set during the normal state, the big hit game, or the short-time state. It is desirable that the output be set as much as possible even in a situation where there is no vacant (unused channel) in a finitely provided channel. Thereby, it becomes possible to effectively suppress a player who is unfamiliar with the game performance having various types of game balls B from receiving a disadvantage.

[16-2. When detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the second guide passage 2522 are entered. A case where the left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 209 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and FIG. 210 shows a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. It is a specific example of performance at the time of execution.

  As shown in FIG. 209, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, and the second A left detection sensor 2405 that can detect the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance that is the upper end of the guide passage 2522. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes. That is, when the game ball B is driven with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2506 and abut against the stopper portion 1006 (so-called right hit), the guide passage group 2520 enters the first guide passage 2521. When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

  On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes. In other words, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not contact the stop portion 1006 and does not come into contact with the upstream space portion 2506 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right strike), the game ball B 22 is entered with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

  The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 includes detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. Is entered. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B has been driven into the first guide path 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 and uses the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405 as a detection signal. Based on this, it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 have not detected the passage of the game ball B. Then, it is determined that the game ball B is not in any state in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522.

  In the present embodiment, as described in detail above, it is necessary to change the manner in which the game ball B is struck (launch strength) according to the game state and to change the area and the passage into which the game ball B is shot, When the game ball B is not shot into the area or passage to be played, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the normal game ball B should be shot into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The state in which one of the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B when the state is in a predetermined state. If the time continues, the player can be alerted.

  More specifically, in the normal state, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the left area of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is used for the game ball B. When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521. When the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, It is determined that the game ball B has been put into the second guide passage 2522, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, a game is performed for 5 seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405). When five or more balls B are detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be shot into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 210 (A), in the effect display device 1600, the fourth warning effect that notifies the message “please make a left” is executed. As a result, in the normal state, the way of hitting is changed to the strength of entering the left side of the front view of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 from the highest part (left side of the front frame upper right part 2502a). Thus, the player can grasp that the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500. If the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 It is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been shot has been eliminated, and the fourth warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 detect the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is determined that there is, and a monitoring timer is started, and the count value is incremented every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the monitoring timer is started, if the state where the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds). In the case where the fourth warning effect is executed, if the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), The fourth warning effect is not executed on the assumption that the game ball B is put into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, and information such as a monitoring timer and a count value is cleared. Also, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the normal state, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared even when the game ball B is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500. is doing. Then, after the execution of the fourth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). When the game state is switched from the normal state in addition to ending the fourth warning effect on the assumption that the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 has been canceled In addition, the fourth warning effect is ended because the game ball B is no longer in a state to be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500.

  During the small hit game, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is used as the game ball. If the passage of B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not put in the first guide passage 2521, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 is detected. The player is warned that the game ball B should be shot in. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 210 (B), in the effect display device 1600, the fifth warning effect that notifies the message “please type in the first guide passage” is executed. Thereby, during the small hit game, the way of hitting is changed to the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2506 and abut against the stop portion 1006, and the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. The player can grasp it. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, and the fifth warning effect is ended. Like that.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B is not put in the first guide passage 2521 and is monitored. The timer has started. And when the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, for 5 seconds), the fifth warning effect is executed. If the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated. 5 The warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. In addition, even when the gaming state is switched from the small hit game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is not in a state to be put into the first guide path 2521, information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the execution of the fifth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not put in the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the fifth warning effect as having been resolved, the game ball B is no longer in the first guide path 2521 when the game state is switched from the small hit game to the fifth guidance effect. Warning production has ended.

  On the other hand, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the short time state, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 is recommended. If it is not detected that the game ball B has passed, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 210 (C), in the effect display device 1600, the sixth warning effect that notifies the message “please enter the second guide passage” is executed. As a result, during the big hit game and in the time-short state, the way of hitting is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hitting). The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. If the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been eliminated, and the warning effect is ended. ing.

  More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during the big hit game and the short-time state, it is determined that the game ball B is not put into the second guide passage 2522. And the monitoring timer is started. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state where the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the sixth warning effect is executed, If the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been eliminated. 6 Warning production is not executed, and information such as a monitoring timer is cleared. In addition, after the start of the monitoring timer, information such as the monitoring timer is cleared even when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the short-time state and the game ball B is no longer in the second guide path 2522. . After execution of the sixth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not put in the second guide passage 2522. In addition to ending the sixth warning effect as having been resolved, it is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in the second guide path 2522 when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the short-time state. The sixth warning effect has ended.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 must be present. For example, the position may be a position that passes, for example, an inlet that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet that is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 (in the vicinity of the entrance), but the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes. Any position may be used, and for example, an inlet that is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, an outlet that is the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, and the second guide passage 2522 may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory prize winning port 2006 provided in the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory prize winning port 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the opened prize winning hole 2006. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from being defective due to excessive passing of the game ball B.

  In the present embodiment, the detection sensors (the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520. One detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the passage group 2520 always passes. For example, the game ball B that has entered the upstream space portion 2506 is provided with one detection sensor in a path closer to the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 than the first guide path 2521, thereby providing guidance. Whether or not the game ball B enters the passage group 2520 can be detected by one detection sensor. That is, when one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage group 2520, and one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B. Otherwise, it is possible to determine that the game ball B has not been driven into the guide passage group 2520. Even in such a case, when the game ball B is in a normal state in which the game ball B should be shot into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, if the state where one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time, By alerting the player, it is possible for the player to know whether or not the game ball B should be shot into at least the left area of the center accessory 2500.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, the game ball B is displayed in any manner in each gaming state. If you want to make a placement area instruction display (for example, a right-handed display consisting of a right-arrow image or a left-handed display consisting of a left-arrow image) to make the player always know that it should be shot, It is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to hinder the driving area instruction display. For example, a “display area for displaying a placement area instruction display” is provided in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is different from that area. It is desirable that a “display area for displaying the fourth to sixth warning effects” is provided in the upper left part of the screen so that the respective guidance is superimposed and not obstructed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings are realized as voice effects instead of display. In that case, the priority of assignment to channels that are finitely provided for outputting sound is higher than various effect sounds set during the normal state, the big hit game, or the short-time state. It is desirable that the output be set as much as possible even in a situation where there is no vacant channel (unused channel) in a limited number of channels. Thereby, it becomes possible to effectively suppress a player who is unfamiliar with the game performance having various types of game balls B from receiving a disadvantage.

[16-3. When the ball clogging hole is provided in the overlap area where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are arranged in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the overlapping portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, a sphere that can eliminate clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side. A case where the clogging clearance hole 2523 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 and 212. 211 and 212 are explanatory views showing an embodiment in which a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  Although the details have been described above, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in a front-rear direction by being lined up in the front-rear direction at a portion extending vertically on the left side of the accessory winning port 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. It has a double-view portion 2520a that appears to overlap. In the overlapping portion 2520a, the second guide passage 2522 is located on the rear side of the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIG. 211 and FIG. 212 (A), a predetermined rod-like member is placed from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 in the overlapping portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging elimination hole 2523 that can be inserted and that can remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side by inserting the rod-like member is provided. Specifically, a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided in the front side of the first guide passage 2521 and the portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent. Further, a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in a portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 as viewed from the front. It is located so as to coincide with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 and is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Thereby, the rod-shaped member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. That is, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, so that the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B packed in the ball, and the ball-shaped blockage in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-rear direction.

  When a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 including the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member is also visually recognized from the front, What is necessary is just to make it the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in the position which corresponds with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in the front side of 2521. Thereby, when a ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

  Further, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. Thereby, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. . That is, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the clogging in the second guide passage 2522 is easily removed by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-rear direction but also in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. be able to.

  Further, a plurality of ball clogging holes 2523 are provided at a predetermined interval in a portion where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 extend vertically above and below the overlapping portion 2520a where they are aligned in the front-rear direction. As a result, even if the clogging occurs at any position of the second guide passage 2522 in the overlapping portion 2520a, the rod-shaped member may be inserted from the clogging elimination hole 2523 provided at a location near the position. , Clogging of the balls in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

  In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 is bent only in the left-right direction, whereas the second guide passage 2522 is complicated in that the passage is bent not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction. The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be clogged with the ball than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the overlapping portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction is either an inlet that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, or an outlet that is the lower end. Since it is a part after bending from the entrance and the exit, even if the rod-like member is inserted from the entrance or the exit, the stick-like member does not reach the part. In this regard, a bar-like member may be inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 in the overlapping portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A possible ball clogging hole 2523 is provided. Accordingly, when not only the clogged ball in the first guide passage 2521 on the front side but also the clogged ball in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side in the overlapping portion 2520a, by inserting the rod-shaped member, Ball clogging can be easily removed.

  In the above, in the overlapping portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the ball is penetrated in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Although the clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided, the following shows another example of the clogging elimination hole 2523 capable of removing the clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side.

  As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 212 (B), on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 in the overlapping portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, A predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and a ball clogging hole 2523 that can remove clogging in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting the rod-shaped member is provided. May be. In such a case, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-like member is inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, so that the game ball B clogged in the second guide passage 2522 is rod-shaped. The members can come into contact with each other, and the clogged ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed by moving the rod-like member in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, a transparent light guide plate 3102 is provided on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 including the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and allows a rod-like member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being blocked by the light guide plate 3102.

  As a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 212 (C), the overlap portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction has a front side of the first guide passage 2521. The ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction toward the second guide passage 2522, but the shape of the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is not a circular shape but a slit shape extending in the vertical direction. It may be formed. In such a case, when the rod-like member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-like member can be moved greatly in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be moved. The clog can be easily removed.

  Further, in the vicinity of the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction. As a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 212 (D), a predetermined rod-shaped member is placed in the second guide passage 2522 at a location where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging hole 2523 that can be removed from the left side of the first guide passage 2521 and can be removed by inserting the rod-shaped member may be provided. That is, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521 in the left-right direction. In such a case, when ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2521, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, so that the ball clogs in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side). The bar-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B that has been played, and the blockage of the ball in the first guide passage 2521 can be removed by moving the bar-shaped member in the left-right direction.

  In addition, when the ball clogging clearance hole 2523 is provided on the left surface side of the second guide passage 2522 as in the first and third other examples, the ball clogging clearance hole is formed from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. It is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting a rod-like member through 2523, but the light guide plate 3102 is provided at a position adjacent to the rear of the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, when the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, the rod-shaped member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102. If the light guide plate 3102 is scratched by the rod-shaped member, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting pattern (first pattern 3110, second pattern 3120), there are also parts that are not related to the pattern. Although the light is guided (light is reflected), there is a problem that if the damaged part overlaps the pattern, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the pattern. For this reason, it is desirable not to provide the light guide decoration area | region where a pattern is exposed in the right area part of the light guide plate 3102 which is a part adjacent to the 2nd guide channel | path 2522. FIG. The light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate 3102 is manually moved to the left so that the light guide plate 3102 is separated from the second guide passage 2522. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position where it does not contact the light guide plate 3102 as a previous step. May be. Further, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, there is a movable member that can move to a position where the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 is concealed and a position where it is not concealed. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging hole 2523, the movable member may be configured to move to a position where the ball clogging hole 2523 is not concealed as a previous step. In such a configuration, when it is not necessary to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is located at a position where the ball clogging hole 2523 is hidden, and the player visually recognizes the ball clogging hole 2523. There is an advantage that the decorativeness as a whole including the second guide passage 2522 is not impaired.

[16-4. About the ball clogging prevention structure near the exit of the first guide passage and the second guide passage arranged in parallel]
As described with reference to FIG. 142 (a), the game ball B is struck with a strength that abuts against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a ( When the ball is hit to the right, the game ball B abutting against the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning port door 2511 that closes the accessory winning port 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide passage group It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the game unit 2400 and the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430. The player is guided to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the left portion of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability.

  On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 142 (b), when the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward. Then, after being aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction in the overlap portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and discharged from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is placed on the left side of the normal winning port 2003 or the normal winning port 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted with the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to enter any one of the parts, and in rare cases, it is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharge opening 2435 that is lower than the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008.

  At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, since the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 are located on the right side and the outlets of the second guide passage 2522 are located on the left side, the respective first outlets are arranged side by side. In the vicinity of the exits of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a large amount of the game balls B discharged from the exits flow in a short time, and clogging of the balls is likely to occur below the exits. In this regard, a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and the first opening 2431 is provided. When the game ball B enters, the player is guided to the outlet 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430. Thereby, in the vicinity of the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a part of the game ball B discharged from these exits is guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is difficult for the game ball B to stay near the exit of the ball and it is possible to prevent the ball from becoming clogged. Even if ball clogging occurs below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B discharged from these outlets is guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008. Thus, the game balls B can be prevented from being stacked up to the insides of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As described above, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and the position thereof is the exit of the second guide passage 2522. Rather, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is provided closer. An inside of the first guide passage 2521 is provided with an accessory winning opening 2006 that is opened during the small hit game, but due to a clogged ball below the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, When the game ball B is stacked up to the position of the prize winning hole 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521, the game ball B more than expected flows into the opened prize winning hole 2006, and the player is illegal. Will be able to get a good profit. In this regard, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided so that the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is closer to the outlet of the second guide passage 2522. Even if a ball clogging occurs below the exit of the two guide passages 2522, the game ball B near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being stacked up to the position of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the one guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is below the exits of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, and the right side of the attacker who can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, an out-port different from the out-port 1008 is provided in the attacker right passage 2430 so that the game ball B entered from the first opening 2431 You may make it discharge | emit out of the game area | region 5a from an out port. Even in such a case, a part of the game ball B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is efficiently guided out of the game area 5a from an out port different from the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from staying in the vicinity of their exits, and to prevent the balls from becoming clogged.

  Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, an attacker right passage that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 at a position near the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Although the first opening portion 2431 of 2430 is provided, the passage where the game ball B can be guided to the out port 1008 and the outside of the game area 5a are also located near the exit of the second guide passage 2522. An out port different from the out port 1008 from which the game ball B can be discharged may be provided. Even in such a case, a part of the game ball B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided outside the game area 5a, and in the vicinity of these exits. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying and to prevent the ball from clogging.

  In the above, near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 is provided. However, in the vicinity of the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B can be discharged out of the game area 5a, a passage where the game ball B can be guided to the out port 1008, or the like. An out port different from the possible out port 1008 may be provided. In the following, another example of the case where a second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided in the vicinity of the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 will be described. Show. FIG. 213 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided in the vicinity of the inlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As shown in FIG. 213, it is possible to discharge the game ball B outside the game area 5a between the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance that is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that enters the upstream space portion 2506 and abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. Part of the game ball B that has been placed enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not contact the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hit), the player enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the game ball B that has been placed enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game ball B that is driven to enter the upstream space portion 2506 enters the second out port 1013. As a result, one of the game balls B that are driven to enter the upstream space portion 2506 when the player aims at either the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. Since the portion is guided out of the game area 5a from the second out port 1013, the number of game balls B entering the inside from those entrances is reduced, and the ball is inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is possible to prevent clogging.

  In addition to the above, the out port 1008 that can discharge the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a only when a ball clog occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. Another out port may be provided. Hereinafter, another example of the case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521 will be described. FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided in the vicinity of the outlet inside the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIG. 214 (A), slightly above the outlet, which is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, is in front of the game area 5a (game board 5), which is flush with the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. A second out port 1013 is provided that is open and capable of discharging the game ball B out of the game area 5a. Further, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided an accessory winning port 2006 that is opened during the small hit game, but the second out port 1013 is located on the downstream side of the accessory winning port 2006. It is provided in the position. In such a configuration, when a ball clog does not occur below the second out port 1013, such as below the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the second out The ball passes through the front of the second out port 1013 without entering the mouth 1013.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214 (B), when ball clogging occurs below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game reaches the position of the second out port 1013. When the balls B are stacked, the game balls B that have further circulated through the first guide passage 2521 enter the second out port 1013. That is, in the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is not stacked up to a position above the second out port 1013. As described above, the prize winning opening 2006 that is opened during the small hit game is provided inside the first guide path 2521. However, the ball is clogged near the exit of the first guide path 2521. As the game ball B is piled up to the position of the prize winning hole 2006 provided in the first guide passage 2521, more than expected game balls B flow into the opened prize winning hole 2006, Players will be able to earn fraudulent profits. In this regard, the game ball B is discharged out of the game area 5a only when a ball clogging occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 on the downstream side of the bonus winning prize opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521. Since the second out port 1013 is provided, even if a ball clogging occurs near the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the accessory winning prize port 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 Before the game ball B is stacked up to the position, the game ball B can be discharged from the second out port 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, and the player can obtain an illegal profit. Can be prevented.

[17. About detection of outlet when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after turning on the power, to a ball entrance provided on the game board 5 (first start port 2002, second start port 2004, grand prize port 2005, prize winning port 2006, etc.). When the game ball B enters and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of the respective balls is counted to perform a predetermined calculation, and the calculation result is used as information about the pachinko machine 1. The information is displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, base monitor 1310h). In addition, when an abnormality occurs, whether to continue the operation or stop (stop) depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. Stop (stop). An execution state of calculation when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an execution state of the operation when an abnormality occurs.

  First, in the main control board 1310, as a ball opening provided on the game board 5, a general winning port 2001, a normal winning port 2003, a first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004, a large winning port 2005, an accessory When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the prize winning combination, respectively. The mouth sensor 2513 detects the game ball B and adds it to the corresponding number-of-entry counters. With such a number-of-entries counter, it is possible to know the number of game balls B that have entered the respective entrances among the game balls B that have been put into the game area 5a.

  On the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 is used as the game ball B. Both are added to the out number counter. By this out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 out of the game balls B driven into the game area 5a.

  In the main control board 1310, a predetermined calculation is performed using the number-of-balls counter and the number-of-out counter. As a specific example, the total number of game balls B that have entered the entrance provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a by adding all of the number of entrance counters. Can be calculated. Further, the total number of game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding all the number-of-ball counters and the out-number counter.

  The above calculation results are displayed on a predetermined display device as information related to the pachinko machine 1. However, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the number of game balls B that have entered the respective entrances and out entrances 1008 based on the respective entrance number counters and out number counters as they are. It is also possible to output. Examples of the predetermined display device include an effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5, a hall computer managed by the hall side outside, and the like. Further, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and displayed on the monitor (base monitor 1310h). Among these, when information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it can be grasped at a position where both the player and the hall can see, whereas the hall computer or the main control board 1310 is monitored. When information is displayed on the (base monitor 1310h), it can be grasped at a position where only the hall side can visually recognize.

  Further, as information displayed on a predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B that have entered the entrance provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 are displayed. In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not the degree of the game ball B entering the entrance or the out entrance 1008 is within a normal numerical range based on the ratio. When a normal game is being performed, the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a enter the entrance at a predetermined rate. If the total number of game balls B that have entered the entrance is too high, you can suspect that you are entering the entrance by fraudulent acts. On the other hand, if the total number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 is too high, it can be suspected that the player has entered the out port 1008 by an illegal act.

  In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the payout detection sensor 591 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout counter. With this payout number counter, the number of game balls B paid out to the player can be grasped. Since the total number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a, calculated by all of the number-of-entry counters and the out-number counter, is the total number of game balls B used by the player, By calculating the difference from the paid-out number of game balls B, the net increase of the game balls B can be calculated, and such a net increase of the game balls B is displayed on a predetermined display device. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the entrance or the out-out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 and the pachinko machine 1 A frame-side out-port sensor is provided that can detect the game ball B passing through the ball discharge port 629 that is discharged to the rear outside (the island facility side of the game hall) (see FIG. 93). . When the frame-side outlet sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball outlet 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B enters the entrance or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the joined game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the frame-side out sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame-side out number counter. With this frame-side out number counter, the number of game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a can be determined.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction path 580b of the payout device 580 is also the upper ball extraction path 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower full ball. After passing through the lower bulb extraction passage 610c of the path unit 610 and being released from the downstream end opening of the lower bulb extraction passage 610c to the bulb extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629. Are discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall) and discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 as well as the game ball B driven into the game area 5a. The played game ball B is also configured to be detected by the frame side outlet sensor. Here, in consideration of the purpose of grasping the number of game balls B that have been thrown into the game area 5a, the number of game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is as follows. It is anxious to make various calculations by eliminating (invalidating). In response to this, in the configuration in which the game side ball outlet sensor 580 detects the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580, the frame side out port sensor is further upstream than the frame side out port sensor. A ball removal detection sensor (not shown) is provided, and the ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and further detects by this ball removal detection sensor. It is desirable that the number of played game balls B is subtracted from the out number counter. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor and once subtracted from the out number counter, and then detected by the frame side outlet sensor. The number of game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially not reflected in the out number counter. In addition, in such a form, when the game ball B is released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not energized (when the ball removal action of the payout device 580 is performed). However, there is no problem because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side outlet sensor can detect itself, but a game is played downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 while the pachinko machine 1 is energized. When the ball B is released (when the ball-drawing action of the payout device 580 is performed) or when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is released downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580. However, the problem is solved when the pachinko machine 1 is energized in the middle of the ball removal (although the ball removal operation of the payout device 580 has been performed). Further, the pachinko machine 1 is located behind the pachinko machine 1 through separate paths without joining the game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a and the game ball B that has been released downward from the ball extraction path 580b of the payout device 580. A configuration may be adopted in which the frame-side outlet sensor can detect only the game ball B that has been ejected to the outside (island facility side of the game hall) and is driven into the game area 5a. In such a configuration, a configuration in which the number of game balls B detected by the above-described ball removal detection sensor is subtracted from the out number counter becomes unnecessary.

  As described above, the number of game balls B thrown into the game area 5a can be grasped by the frame-side out number counter, but the game thrown into the game area 5a can also be grasped by the out number counter. The total number of spheres B can be calculated. That is, in a state where no game is performed and the game ball B is not shot in the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter matches the value of the out number counter. On the other hand, in the state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided at the entrance or the out port 1008, the frame side out is separated by a predetermined distance. Since it passes through the mouth sensor, the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entrance counters and the out-number counter is slightly increased as compared with the frame-side out-number counter.

  In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the addition to the counter or the calculation is continued or stopped (stopped) differs depending on whether the abnormality is minor or severe. As shown in FIG. 215 (A), when a slight abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are continued without being stopped (stopped). As this mild abnormality, the game ball B is full on the upper plate 201 and the game ball B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580, or the game ball B should be shot into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The state that is not right-handed. In these states, an effect that warns the player to guide the game ball B on the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 and an effect that warns the player to strike right are executed. Further, in these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not opened from the outer frame 2, and the entrance and the out port 1008 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are compared. Thus, the game ball B cannot be artificially entered. For this reason, if a slight abnormality occurs, the number of entered balls and the number of out counters will not increase due to fraudulent action, and addition to the counter or calculation will be continued without being stopped (stopped). Yes.

  On the other hand, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped). As this serious abnormality, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open from the outer frame 2. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2, and artificially with respect to the entrance and the out port 1008 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this state, the game ball B can be entered. For this reason, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped) so that the number-of-entry counter and the out-number counter do not increase due to an illegal act.

  In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped), but the detection sensors provided at the entrance and the exit 1008 pass the game ball B. Detected. Further, when a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical values of the counters such as the number-of-entrance counters and the out-number counter before the occurrence and the calculation result are held, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are retained by the outer frame 2. Addition to the counter and computations are resumed after a severe abnormality has been resolved. In addition, when a serious abnormality has occurred and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped), the addition or calculation to the counter is performed by image display on a predetermined display device or sound output from the speaker. An effect at the time of cancellation to notify that it has been canceled is being executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 215 (B), the occurrence of a severe abnormality occurs in addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter. Until the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued without being stopped (stopped), and when the predetermined time elapses, the out number counter The calculation related to addition to or the out counter is stopped (stopped). As a result, when a serious abnormality occurs such as the door frame 3 being opened from the outer frame 2, the number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 can be grasped until a predetermined time elapses. .

  For example, when the game ball B becomes a grape shape in the game area 5a and the ball is clogged, normal game cannot be performed. However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B flows into the out port 1008 at the lower end as it is. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is a game ball B that has a high possibility of being discharged from the out port 1008 if it does not become grape-like. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to remove the grape-like game ball B, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are performed until a predetermined time elapses. Since it is continued without stopping (stopping), the number of balls that the grape-like game ball B has flowed into the out port 1008 can be grasped, and the reliability of the information regarding the out port 1008 can be improved. Note that it is unlikely that the grape-like game ball B will flow into the out port 1008 after a predetermined time has elapsed, and it is suspected that the ball has entered the out port 1008 by an unauthorized act. The calculation related to the addition to or the out number counter is stopped (stopped).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 215 (C), regarding the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter, a serious abnormality occurs. Until the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) from the hour, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation relating to the out number counter are continued without being stopped (stopped), but the predetermined time elapses. Even before, if the out-port left sensor 3032 or the out-port right sensor 3033 detects a large number of game balls B in a short period of time, the addition to the out-number counter or the out-number counter at that time The operation related to is stopped (stopped). In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, there is a possibility that more than the number of balls that are assumed to flow into the out port 1008 when the grape-shaped game ball B is removed flows into the out port 1008. Since it is suspected that the ball has entered the out mouth 1008 due to an illegal act, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 215 (D), when the door frame 3 is opened in the case where a serious abnormality has occurred, the output to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 is performed. For addition and calculation related to the out number counter, addition to the out number counter and calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the door frame 3 is opened. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). This is because when the door frame 3 is opened, it may be opened for the purpose of removing the grape-like game ball B in the game area 5a, whereas when the main body frame 4 is opened, the game area 5a is opened. This is because the main body frame 4 that does not need to be opened for the purpose of removing the grape-like game ball B is opened. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as removing the ball clogging on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so addition to the out number counter and computation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). To do.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after the game ball B has entered the entrance and the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. The frame-side out sensor detects the game ball B. However, as shown in FIG. 215 (E), the frame-side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out sensor As for the addition and the calculation related to the frame side out number counter, the addition to the frame side out number counter and the calculation related to the frame side out number counter are stopped (stopped) when a serious abnormality occurs. Therefore, when the person on the hall opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, the out-out corresponding to the detection by the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 in a predetermined period. While the addition to the number counter is performed, the addition to the frame side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame side out port sensor is not performed. Based on the difference between the added numerical value and the numerical value of the frame-side out number counter, the number of entering the grape-shaped game balls B removed when the door frame 3 is opened can be grasped. In addition, about the number of entrances of such a grape-like game ball B, it is possible to display on a predetermined display device as information on the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, as described above, in a state where no game is being performed and the game ball B is not shot into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter includes all the number-of-balls counters, the out number counter, Will be the same as the value obtained by adding. On the other hand, in the state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided at the entrance or the out port 1008, the frame side out is separated by a predetermined distance. Since it passes through the mouth sensor, the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entrance counters and the out-number counter is slightly increased as compared with the frame-side out-number counter. In this way, as long as a normal game is played, the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entry counters and the out-number counter may cause a difference of a predetermined number or more compared to the frame-side out-number counter. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a normal game is being performed by monitoring whether or not a predetermined number of differences or more have occurred.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216, when a difference of a predetermined number or more is generated with respect to the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entrance counters and the out-number counter, compared to the frame-side out-number counter, It is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and addition to the counter and computation are stopped (stopped). In addition, when a special abnormality occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped, the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped by image display on a predetermined display device or sound output from the speaker. A stop-time effect that notifies the user of the event is being executed. Then, when a difference of a predetermined number or more is generated with respect to the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entrance counters and the number-of-outs counter compared to the frame-side number-of-out counter, for example, on the game board 5 by an illegal act An object other than the game ball B is allowed to pass only through the provided entrance / out port 1008, or after the game ball B passes through a detection sensor provided at the entrance / out port 1008. It is possible to suspect that the ball is clogged until it passes through the frame side outlet sensor. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage that a fault such as an illegal act or a clogged ball has occurred, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the state which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 were open | released from the outer frame 2 was illustrated as a serious abnormality, it is not limited to this, The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 Even if the game is not released from the outer frame 2, if it is detected that the game is progressing in an unauthorized manner, the addition to various counters and the calculation are stopped (stopped). It may be. For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) on the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that a normal game is not being performed. Then, the addition to various counters and the calculation can be stopped (stopped). Moreover, either when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when illegal magnetism or vibration is detected in the state where the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2. In addition, although the addition to the various counters and the calculation are stopped (stopped), the fraud is detected only when illegal magnetism or vibration is detected in a state where the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2. It may be determined that the progress of the game including the launch of the game ball B may be stopped immediately.

[17-1. About Out Exit Detection When Multiple Out Exits are Provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, apart from the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, a second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side, and a third out port 1014 is provided on the midstream side. A case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the discharged game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218. FIG. 217 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 and a third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG. 218 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of calculation when the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008.

  As shown in FIG. 217, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a between the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance that is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that enters the upstream space portion 2506 and abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. Part of the game ball B that has been placed enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and does not contact the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hit), the player enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the game ball B that has been placed enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game ball B that is driven to enter the upstream space portion 2506 enters the second out port 1013.

  Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003. A third out port 1014 different from the out port 1008 is provided, and the game ball B that has entered from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the effect that the second out port 1013 is provided in the vicinity of the inlets of the first guide channel 2521 and the second guide channel 2522 in the guide channel group 2520 and the third out port 1014 is provided in the vicinity of the outlet. Although the details of the above-mentioned effect have been described above, the provision of the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 makes it possible to block the balls inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the second out port sensor capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013 and the game ball B discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014 are detected. And a third out port sensor capable of detecting this. When this second out port sensor detects a game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, whereas the third out port sensor When the game ball B that has entered the out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged from the second out port 1013, the second out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. The number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is grasped by the second out number counter, whereas the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 by the third out number counter. The number of balls entered can be grasped.

  Note that the main control board 1310 performs a predetermined calculation using not only the incoming ball number counter and the out number counter, but also the second out number counter and the third out number counter. As a specific example, by adding the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, out of the game balls B that are driven into the game area 5a, the first number provided on the game board 5 is provided. The number of game balls B discharged to the outside can be calculated without entering a ball entrance such as the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Further, the total number of game balls B thrown into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding the number-of-balls counter, the number-of-out counter, the second-out number counter, and the third-out number counter.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the game ball B is driven into the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) is the second out. It is designed not to enter the mouth 1013. For this reason, in the short-time state or the big hit game state, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time using the second out number counter. It is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 218 (A), when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is issued to warn that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game by sound output from a speaker. The warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, if the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the ingress on the downstream side of the second out port 1013 in the right area of the game area 5a. There is less opportunity for the game ball B to enter the ball opening (the normal winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the bonus winning opening 2006), which is disadvantageous for the player. It becomes. In this regard, if the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is arranged so that the game ball B can easily enter the second out port 1013. It is possible to suspect that 5 has been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to detect early that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the above description, whether or not the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time in the short-time state or the big hit game state is monitored. The number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 and the ingress port (out port 1008, third out port 1014) on the downstream side of the second out port 1013 A ratio of the number of game balls B to the number of entered balls may be calculated, and it may be monitored whether the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined rate. Even in such a case, it can be determined that a normal right-handed game is difficult to perform if the rate of entry of the game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high.

  Similarly, in a state in which the game ball B is driven into the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more (for example, 30 or more of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) per unit time is the third out port 1014. It is designed not to enter the ball. For this reason, in the short-time state or the big hit gaming state, the third out number counter is used to determine whether or not the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014 is a predetermined number or more per unit time. It is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 218 (B), when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is issued to warn that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game by sound output from a speaker. The warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, if the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the input on the downstream side of the third out port 1014 in the right area of the game area 5a. There is less opportunity for the game ball B to enter the ball opening (the normal winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005), which is disadvantageous for the player. In this regard, when the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is arranged so that the game ball B can easily enter the third out port 1014. It is possible to suspect that 5 has been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to detect early that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the above description, whether or not the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time in the short-time state or the big hit game state is monitored. The ratio between the number of game balls B that entered the third out port 1014 and the number of game balls B that entered the out port 1008 and the game port B that is downstream of the third out port 1014 May be calculated to monitor whether the ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio. Even in such a case, it can be determined that a normal right-handed game is difficult to perform if the rate of entry of the game balls B entering the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time in the short-time state or the big hit game state, The addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued, but when the predetermined number or more per unit time is reached as in the above-described embodiment. Alternatively, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter or the third out number counter or the calculation related to the out number counter may be stopped. In such a configuration, even if the game ball B enters the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 by an illegal act, the second out number counter or the third out number counter does not increase. The reliability of the information regarding the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the game area 5a, but when the game ball B is shot into the right area of the game area 5a, The game ball B may enter the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014. For this reason, in the normal state, when the second out-port sensor or the third out-port sensor detects the game ball B, the right-handed to the left-handed by the image display on a predetermined display device or the sound output from the speaker An instruction effect is instructed to change to

[18. About light emission history after light production using light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 displays a variation of the decorative symbol. During the variation display, the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The light guide plate 3102 provided in front of the display area is decorated with light emission a plurality of times, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise at the plurality of times, thereby suggesting a big hit expectation degree for the variable display. Production can be performed. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the back upper decoration body 3211 of the front front effect unit 3200 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3010), the back left decoration The body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 emit light in the same light emission color as that of the light guide plate 3102. However, even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed. It is possible to execute a history effect that causes the back decorative body 3211 and the like to continuously emit light in the immediately preceding emission color.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis processing in step S601, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. To decide. In addition, when it is determined that the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is to be executed, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect is determined by referring to the light emission color pattern table based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. One of a plurality of types of light emission color patterns set over a plurality of times is determined.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 changes the light emission color of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side thereof, so that the first one of white, green, blue, and red is used. It is possible to decorate the pattern 3110 (see FIG. 165) with light emission. However, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is given three times with the light emission color set in the light emission color pattern. The lighting is decorated at the timing. Further, the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), and the light is turned off until the next time the light decoration is performed after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. The time is longer. In addition, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is only one, but the light guide plate 3102 may be decorated with light emission a plurality of times at each timing.

  In addition, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal change before the reach is formed during the decorative symbol change display, but at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed. For example, one to three out of three times of light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate 3102 may be executed at a timing during reach production after reach formation.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 can emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 to decorate the first pattern 3110. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second picture board 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can be made to emit light to decorate the second picture 3120, but a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 Then, the first pattern 3110 is decorated with light emission. Thereby, it is possible to clearly grasp that the three light emission decorations of the first pattern 3110 in the light emission effect are a series of effects.

  Next, a light emission color pattern table in which the light emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to FIG. The emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 219 is a light emission color pattern table in which the light emission color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are set.

  As described above, a plurality of types of light emission color patterns are set in the light emission color pattern table. The light emission color patterns include the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 as many times as the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated. How it changes is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 219, the light emission pattern is set in the light emission color pattern table so that it can be changed twice after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a predetermined light emission color.

  Further, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 set to the light emission color pattern is set so as to be decorated with light emission in any of four colors of white, green, blue, and red. Then, when determining the light emission color pattern from the light emission color pattern table, as a result of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end, the big hit expectation is set in the order of white → green → blue → red. Has been. That is, when the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a big hit, a light emission color pattern having a high emission expectation color (for example, red) as a big hit expectation is determined with high probability as the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102. When the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), a light emission color pattern having a low emission expectation color (for example, white) as a final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 has a high probability. We are going to decide. As a result, when the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color having a high expectation level of jackpot, the player's expectation for the big hit is increased.

  The light emission color pattern is one in which the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 does not change in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red. Is set so that the luminescent color is maintained or the luminescent color has a high expectation degree of jackpot. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color with a low expectation level for jackpots, there is still a possibility of changing to a light emission color with a high expectation level for jackpots unless the timing of the light emission effect is completed three times. Therefore, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 can be expected with attention until the light emission effect ends.

  The light emission color pattern does not necessarily change in the order of green → blue → red after the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with white light emission. It is also set to change the next emission color by skipping the above emission colors (for example, changing from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color with a low degree of expectation of big hit, it cannot be predicted which light emission color will change to the next light emission plate, and the light guide plate until the light emission effect ends. The luminescent color 3102 can be noticed with expectation.

  Next, the back decorative body 3211 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the front front effect unit 3200 surrounds the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, that is, surrounds the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. The back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, in the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 on both the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600, each includes three radial decorative portions 3212 b and 3213 b. It is divided into four parts. Here, these will be collectively referred to as a decorative body 3210. Therefore, the four decorative bodies 3210 are provided on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. In addition, behind these decorative bodies 3210, a decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light is mounted is provided. In addition, in the plurality of decorative bodies 3210, the light emission decoration can be performed in any of white, green, blue, and red, similarly to the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102.

  When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 emit light in the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102. Further, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at a predetermined timing. Even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing, a plurality of decorative bodies The light emission of 3210 is maintained. As described above, when a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed, a history effect in which a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 continuously emit light with the light emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 is used as the light emission color history of the light guide plate 3102. Running.

  Specifically, at the first or second timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emitting effect, the next time after the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102 and the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. The light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the timing of light emission decoration. In addition, at the third timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the variation display of the decorative pattern is terminated. Until then, the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained. As a result, the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at a single timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102 is performed. By maintaining the above, even if the light emission color is missed when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the light emission color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are provided in a number corresponding to the number of luminescent colors that can illuminate the light guide plate 3102 with a light emission effect. Further, the number of lights emitted from the decorative body 3210 is different depending on the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210. In order from the lower side of the decorative body 3210, the number of light emitted from the decorative body 3210 is set to increase. Specifically, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 that is decorated with the light emission effect is white, which is the light emission color with the lowest expected degree of jackpot, each of the four on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 Of the decorative bodies 3210, one lower decorative body 3210a is set to emit white light. Further, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. Further, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. In addition, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the light emission color with the highest expectation level, the four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are all set to emit light in red. As a result, even when the big hit expectation cannot be grasped from the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, the big hit expectation can be easily grasped from the number of the decorative bodies 3210 emitting light.

  The plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are positioned behind the light guide plate 3102 and can emit light toward the front. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, but the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102. The light guide plate 3102 is irradiated with light not only by the plurality of LEDs for emitting and decorating the first picture 3110 on the light guide plate 3102 but also by the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light. Thereby, the first pattern 3110 that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 becomes more emphasized, and the effect using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more conspicuous.

  In addition, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal change before the reach is formed during the change display of the decorative design, but during the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102, Another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is not newly started. That is, another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is started at a timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission. As a result, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not hinder the visibility of other notice effects, and other notice effects are started. As never to be missed. That is, it is possible to cause the player to firmly grasp the light emitting effect that decorates the light guide plate 3102 and the other notice effect.

  Next, a specific effect example in the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 at the time of executing the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 is a specific effect example of the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 when the light emission effect is executed. In FIG. 221, as the second pattern 3120, the eyes (pupils) of a predetermined character are shown in an enlarged pattern.

  FIG. 221 illustrates a case where a light emission color pattern in which the light emission color that decorates the light guide plate 3102 with a light emission effect changes from white to green to red is determined. First, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), the decorative display variable display is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), at the first timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 in white, and the effect display device 1600 Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the lower one of the decorative bodies 3210a emits light, and the emission color is white, which is the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. . Then, as shown in FIG. 221 (C), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decorative body 3210a already emitting white light is The white light emission is maintained until the second timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 221 (D), at the second timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the second pattern 3120 is light-decorated in green on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are increased to emit light, but the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. The green light is emitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 221 (E), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but already has a decorative body 3210 that emits green light. For 3210b, the green light emission is maintained until the third timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 221 (F), at the third timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the second design 3120 is light decorated on the light guide plate 3102 in red, and the effect display device 1600 Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are all increased to emit light, but the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It emits red light. Then, as shown in FIG. 221 (G), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decoration 3210 that has already emitted red light. As for 3210d, as shown in FIG. 221 (H), the light emission in the red color is maintained until the decorative symbol variation display is finished.

  In the present embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102. However, at that time, the light guide plate does not emit light. A plurality of light emitters may emit light in the light emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 from the time when the light emitting decoration 3102 is turned off. Even in such a case, the light emission color can be grasped after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the number of light emitted from the decorative body 3210 varies depending on the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the larger the number of light emitted from the decorative body 3210, the higher the expected color of the jackpot. This indicates that the number of times that the light guide plate 3102 is already decorated with light emission among the three timings when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission may be indicated. For example, at the first timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the lower one of the four decoration objects 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is caused to emit light. In the second timing, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b emit light, and in the third timing, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c emit light. Good.

  In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at a predetermined timing three times for light emission effects, but the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first timing, but at the second and third timings. Alternatively, a pattern that does not decorate the light guide 3102 or a pattern that does not decorate the light guide plate 3102 at the third timing may be provided. In such a case, it is not possible to know how many times the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 continues in the light emission effect, and it can be noted how many times the chance that the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes is obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the decorative symbol variation display, a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is performed as an effect indicating the degree of big hit expectation for the variation variation display of the decoration symbol. Alternatively, light emission using the light guide plate 3102 is performed over a plurality of variations from when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 (starting condition is established) until the decorative symbol variation display by the entering ball is performed. An effect may be executed. For example, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (start condition is established), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command. Is received, based on the variation pattern specified from the prior determination command, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 when it is determined to execute the light emission effect. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may determine. Further, in such a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at a predetermined timing among a plurality of variations, and the light guide plate 3102 is turned off even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off. What is necessary is just to comprise so that light emission of a several light-emitting body may be continued with the luminescent color immediately before 3102. FIG. In such a case, it can be expected to notice how the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes until the light emission effect ends over a plurality of variations.

  In the present embodiment, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side are caused to emit light, and the first pattern 3110 is illuminated. However, in the event that a plurality of LEDs stop emitting light due to a failure or the like, the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission, and the jackpot expectation indicated by the emission color is grasped. I can't. In this regard, after the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, so even if the light guide plate 3102 cannot be decorated with light emission, The expected degree of big hit can be grasped by the emission color of the decorative body 3210.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect for notifying that the abnormality has occurred is executed with priority over other effects. For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) on the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that a normal game is not being performed. Then, the warning effect is executed. In this regard, if an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing of performing the light emission effect and performing light emission decoration on the light guide plate 3102, the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission of the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are given priority over the warning effect. However, when the abnormality is resolved after the timing of illuminating the light guide plate 3102 (before the end of the decorative pattern change display), the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 start to emit light. Yes. As described above, even when the warning effect is executed with priority over the light emission effect, the big hit expectation can be grasped by the light emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 after the abnormality is solved.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit expectation is suggested by the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 in the light emission effect and the history effect. And the setting value may be suggested by the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when the light emission color pattern is determined from the light emission color pattern table, the set value is high in the order of white → green → blue → red as a result of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end. It may be set to suggest. That is, as the high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, a light emission pattern in which the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red is executed, and as the low setting suggestion effect, the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is What is necessary is just to perform the light emission pattern used as white. As a result, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 or the light emission color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 suggests that the setting value is high, the player's response to the high setting value (setting value 6) Expectation can be raised.

[19. About image production similar to light-emitting decoration of light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, the light guide plate 3102 is not only light-decorated with a predetermined pattern, but is also guided in the display area of the effect display device 1600. By displaying a pattern that is a visual aspect similar to the pattern that is illuminated and decorated on the light plate 3102, it is possible to perform an imitation effect that makes it appear as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation effect, a pattern that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally one of the patterns is displayed. The reach production executed afterwards is made different.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis processing in step S601, the variation pattern is identified from the variation pattern command, but the variation pattern for executing the first reach effect is identified. In this case, a pattern that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern that is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the pattern that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is imitated. By executing the production, the process proceeds to the first reach production thereafter. On the other hand, when the variation pattern for executing the second reach effect is specified, the pattern illuminated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. In this way, the imitation effect that finally displays the pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed, and then the process proceeds to the second reach effect.

  In addition, the above-described imitation effect is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the first reach effect of the reach effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the second reach effect. As a result, in the imitation effect during normal fluctuation, when the pattern is finally decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102, the process proceeds to the first reach effect with a high expectation of jackpot. It can be noted whether or not to decorate with light emission.

  Next, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 shows pictures displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. In FIG. 222, the second pattern 3120 is indicated by a pattern composed of characters “CHANCE!”.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the light guide plate 3102 during execution of the imitation effect has a second pattern 3120 with a letter “CHANCE!” In the center and an effect pattern on the periphery thereof. . Note that the light guide plate 3102 can emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the upper side thereof, and the first pattern 3110 can be decorated with light emission. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can be made to emit light to decorate the second pattern 3120, but the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102 In this case, only the light emitting decoration of the second pattern 3120 is used.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 222 (B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during execution of the imitation effect, as the imitation image 1600a, the character “LUCKY!” Is displayed in the center and the effect image is provided in the vicinity thereof. it's shown. Although a moving image can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a still image is displayed like the above-described imitation picture 1600a during execution of the imitation effect.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 illuminates and decorates the characters “CHANCE!” As the second pattern 3120, whereas the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the characters “LUCKY!” As the imitation pattern 1600 a. However, the character of the imitation pattern 1600a has the same line thickness, font type, and size as the character of the second pattern 3120. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the character forms are the same, it is difficult to grasp which one of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  The light guide plate 3102 illuminates and decorates the effect pattern as the second pattern 3120, while the effect display is displayed as the counterfeit pattern 1600 a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect pattern that is a part is the same as the effect pattern that is a part of the second pattern 3120. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the effect pattern that is shared as a part of the pattern is displayed, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  In addition, the second design 3120 is decorated with a single color by a plurality of LEDs on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation design 1600 a is similarly displayed in a single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emission, the light emission decoration of the second pattern 3120 is shaded depending on the distance from the plurality of LEDs, but the display area of the effect display device 1600 is imitated. The pattern 1600a is displayed so as to produce a shading. When the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102, a black image without any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image. Thus, in the imitation effect, since the visual appearance of the pattern is the same as a whole, it is difficult to grasp which one of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  The light guide plate 3102 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The area where the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated in 3102 is substantially the same as the area where the imitation pattern 1600 a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the areas where the patterns are displayed are substantially the same, it is difficult to grasp which one of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. About time, all are the same time. In addition, during the execution of the imitation effect, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker at the timing of displaying each of the second image 3120 and the imitation image 1600a, or around the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. A complex effect is performed in which the provided member is operated in a predetermined operation mode (for example, lighting of a lamp provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 or operation of a movable member). Even if it is the timing which displays this pattern, the common effect is performed as the compound effect. However, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, although the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are both turned on, the emission color is turned on in a different color. May be. Thus, in the imitation production, there is no production difference between the case where the second design 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the case where the imitation design 1600a is displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600. It can be made difficult to grasp which one of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Next, a specific effect example in the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a specific effect example in the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. In FIG. 223, the second pattern 3120 is a pattern composed of characters “CHANCE!”.

  In FIG. 223, a variation pattern for executing either the chance reach effect as the first reach effect or the lucky reach effect as the second reach effect is determined, and the imitation effect is performed before the reach effect is executed. The case of executing will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), when the imitation effect is started, the light guide plate 3102 has an effect pattern on the periphery thereof as a second pattern 3120 with a character “CHANCE!” In the center for a predetermined time ( For example, the lighting decoration is red. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (C), when the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a character “LUCKY!” In the center as a counterfeit picture 1600a. The effect picture is displayed in blue around the predetermined time (for example, less than 1 second). Note that the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for lighting and decorating the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102.

  As described above, the second design 3120 is illuminated with red light on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation design 1600 a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this way, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are displayed when the second image 3120 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and when the imitation image 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it is difficult to grasp which one of the two is used, it is possible to grasp which of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed from the display color.

  Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated a plurality of times (for example, five times). Although it is displayed, after repeating a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and a black image without displaying any information is displayed. Yes. Thereby, as a result of the imitation effect, it is made to pay attention to which one of the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops. it can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), when the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out and then the second pattern 3120 is illuminated with red light on the light guide plate 3102, the display of the decorative pattern is changed and displayed. Then, as a reach effect corresponding to the second pattern 3120, a chance reach effect (first reach effect) is advanced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the decorative display is changed. After the reach is formed, the process proceeds to the lucky reach effect (second reach effect) as the reach effect corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. Also, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 223 (F) is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 in FIG. 223 (E). (For example, 3 seconds).

  In the present embodiment, characters and effect designs are displayed with the second design 3120 that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation design 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is only necessary to display a pattern with a similar visual appearance so as to match the elements of, for example, a pattern of a character with a similar style.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second pattern 3120 that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, However, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, neither the second picture 3120 nor the imitation picture 1600a is displayed, and the first reach effect and the second You may set the pattern which does not advance in any of reach production. In such a case, as a result of the imitation effect, it is possible to pay more attention to what result is notified after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the imitation production, the second design of the second design 3120 that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation design 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it starts from the light emitting decoration 3120, a pattern starting from the display of the imitation pattern 1600a may be set. Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated with red light on the light guide plate 3102, whereas the imitation pattern 1600 a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but any or all of them are displayed. For color development, a pattern to be executed with a different color may be set. As described above, when the imitation effect is executed with a display or a color different from the normal one, the light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate 3102 is performed by setting so that the expectation level of the big hit with respect to the variation display of the decorative design is increased. Not only which of the two pictures 3120 and the imitation picture 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops, but also the effect contents can be noted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of performing the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, an effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed in addition to the imitation effect. For example, as an effect other than the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, the effect of suddenly emitting and decorating the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 without displaying the imitation pattern 1600 a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed. can do.

  In the present embodiment, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 is lit in red on the light guide plate 3102, whereas the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to such a pattern, the second design 3120 is illuminated with blue light on the light guide plate 3102 so as to invert the color, whereas the imitation design 1600a is displayed in red on the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is set. In these patterns, red is a color indicating that the degree of expectation of jackpot is higher than that of blue. For example, when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, it is larger than in blue. When the expectation level is high, similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the big hit expectation level is higher than that displayed in blue. In this way, in the imitation effect, since it is possible to display in blue and red on any of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, any of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 can be displayed. It can be difficult to grasp whether or not you are using.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By automatically displaying one of the patterns, it suggests the reach effect to be executed later, but by executing the imitation effect as the setting suggesting effect described above, and finally displaying any one of the patterns The setting value may be suggested. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, an imitation effect in which the second pattern 3120 is lit in red on the light guide plate 3102 is finally executed. In other words, an imitation effect that displays the imitation pattern 1600a in blue on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be executed. As a result, when the imitation effect is executed, the player's expectation for the high set value (set value 6) can be increased when the second pattern 3120 is finally decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to cause the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the light guide plate 3102 to emit light and decorate the first pattern 3110 with light emission. On the other hand, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can be made to emit light, and the second pattern 3120 can be decorated to emit light. The player can change the setting by operating the pressing operation unit 303. That is, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be low, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 has a dark display mode, whereas the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is increased. When set, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 becomes a bright display mode. In the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3120 that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3120 that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 has a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. As described above, in the imitation effect, the effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to any of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a. Therefore, any of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is performed. It can be difficult to grasp whether or not you are using. When adjusting the brightness, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303, the settings of both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs with respect to the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. Also good.

[20. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, some commands among various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 226. FIG. 224 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIGS. 225 and 226 show the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. It is a table.

[20-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 224 to 226, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 224 to 226, various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display , Status display, and others.

[20-1-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
Special figure 1 tuning production related is based on the detection signal from the first start sensor 3002, and the classification is related to the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 as shown in FIG. 1 consists of commands named “Start of synchronized production”, “Special symbol 1 designation”, “Special figure 1 synchronized production end”, and “Change state designation”. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command (variation pattern command) is an instruction to start the special figure synchronous production with the production pattern (variation pattern) designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is off, specific jackpot, A non-specific big hit is designated, the special figure 1 synchronized production end command is for instructing the special figure 1 synchronized production end, and the change state designation command is for instructing the gaming state. The gaming state is composed of a short-time state instructing that it is a short-time state, a probability-changing state instructing that it is in a probability-changing state, and a normal state instructing that neither the time-shorting state nor the probability-changing state is in effect. Has been.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special figure 1 synchronization effect end command are provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the main control MPU 1310a uses the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. A command corresponding to the stored setting value is selected and transmitted. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is made different by changing the modes of the special figure 1 tuning production start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning production end command used conventionally. The set value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, the set value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is like that.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect is started. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[20-1-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, and the classification is related to the special special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 as shown in FIG. 2 is composed of commands with names of “synchronization effect start”, “special symbol 2 designation”, and “special symbol 2 synchronization effect end”. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronous production with the production pattern (variation pattern) designated in the mode. A non-specific big hit is designated, and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  Similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 1 synchronized effect start command (variation pattern command) and special figure 1 synchronous effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronized effect start command (variable pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronized effect end command are the pachinko machine 1 Provided when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special figure 2 synchronization effect end command. A command corresponding to the set value stored in the set value dedicated area is selected and transmitted. It should be noted that the special figure 2 synchronization effect (the second special symbol variation effect based on the ball entering the second start port 2004) is mainly executed in the probability variation state and the short time state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the modes of the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command that have been conventionally used, the peripheral control board 1510 has a pachinko machine. The set value information of the machine 1 can be transmitted, and the set value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the probability variation state and the short time state, and the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted on the peripheral control board 1510 side. The setting value of can be grasped.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Fig. 224, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closing display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the winning prize opening 1 opening N-th display command is starting during the 1st to 15th round winning opening 1 opening (the Nth round of the winning prize opening 2005) The winning prize opening 1 closing display command indicates that the winning prize opening 1 is closed during the round (the closing of the winning prize opening 2005 during the closing or the closing start). The winning prize 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls B having a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (the gaming ball that has entered the winning prize 2005 detected by the winning prize sensor 2403). B number of balls), the jackpot ending command is for instructing the start of jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is the jackpot symbol display command It is an indication of the broadcast display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening (during opening of the bonus winning prize opening 2006 or at the start of opening). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium / large prize winning prize winning effect (when the game ball B that has entered the bonus winning prize 2006 during the small hit is detected by the bonus winning prize sensor 2513 The V passing command is a V winning opening winning effect (the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006 during the small hit is the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008). The small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending. Note that a V passing command corresponding to each of the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 (first V winning port command when the game ball B is detected by the first V winning port 2007, second A second V prize opening command when the game ball B is detected by the V prize opening 2008 may be provided.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the winning prize opening 1 opening Nth display command is the opening of the winning prize opening 1 of the first to fifteenth rounds (in the winning prize opening 2005). The first prize opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the first prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the big prize opening 2005), and the first prize opening 1 count display command is Sent when the winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the big winning opening 1 is changed (when the winning opening 2005 is opened and when the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403). The jackpot ending command is transmitted when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is displayed when the jackpot is opened (when the jackpot 2005 is opened). It is sent to.

  Also, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (at the time of the small hit, when the bonus winning prize opening 2006 is opened), and the small hit count display is performed. The command is transmitted at the time of winning a small winning medium winning prize opening (when the game ball B that has entered the bonus winning prize opening 2006 is detected by the winning prize winning sensor 2513 during the small hitting), the small hitting ending command Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 225, the power-on category includes the names of power-on state, power-on main control return destination, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, and error display command. It consists of commands. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is used when the power-on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. When the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) 2), information indicating which state is to be restored from among the normal state, the short time state, and the certainty change state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  In addition, the model code of the pachinko machine, for example, what kind of game copyright (for example, the probability variation is) when creating so-called Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, respectively. When the game happens, the game will continue until the next jackpot game state is generated, and the game where the probability variation occurs when the number of changes in the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is specified whether it is a specification (so-called ST machine, etc.), whether there are a plurality of set values for a pachinko machine, or only one set value. In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to specify the series code for identifying which type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type indicating the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, and the probability change with a limited number of special symbol changes) Is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) that occurs and a set value code indicating whether the pachinko machine 1 has one or more set values.

  The power-on main control return destination command indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414 and the accessory prize winning port solenoid 2512.

  The setting key ON operation command instructs to confirm the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the control built-in RAM. This indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area has been confirmed.

  The setting change command is used to instruct that the setting value has been changed and that the setting value has been changed. In this example, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by changing the mode of the setting change command. The set value of the machine 1 can be grasped. The setting change command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the setting value is changed. If the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on, the current setting value is A setting notification command instructing may be transmitted. Thus, the latest set value can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

  The error display command is used to instruct that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal.

  The transmission timing of these commands is transmitted when the main control board is turned on (including when power is restored and when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control built-in RAM is transmitted by setting a reservation for a command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side game control main process. The information is stored in the information storage area, and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-5. General drawing related production]
The general pattern synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, and, as shown in FIG. 225, the general pattern synchronization effect on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started. , Command design, general pattern synchronization end, and variable state designation commands. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command (general pattern variation pattern command) instructs the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode (normal pattern variation pattern). A big hit and a non-specific big hit are designated, the ordinary figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the ordinary figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the gaming state. Note that, as described above, the gaming state includes a time-short state instructing that it is a time-short state and a normal state instructing that it is not in a time-short state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the normal symbol variation start time, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is It is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is fixed), and the variable state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect related is related to the second start door 2411 that is advanced and retracted by driving the start solenoid 2412. As shown in FIG. And a command named ending per usual map. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is the start during open general power (the second start port door 2411 protrudes forward by driving the start port solenoid 2412). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the second start door 2411 drives the start opening solenoid 2412). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 226, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type prefetch, variation pattern prefetch 1, variation pattern prefetch 2, variation pattern It consists of commands named Prefetch 3, Variation Pattern Prefetch 4, Variation Pattern Prefetch 5, Variation Pattern Prefetch 6, Normal Winner Winning, and Normal Symbol Storage. These various commands are assigned “9 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002. And the start of the production when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, respectively. The special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 holding command of 0-4 pieces (the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002). Then, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 transmits the number of spheres (the number of balls that are not yet used for the variable symbol display) (the number of reserved balls), and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol. 0 to 4 reserves (the number of balls (the number of reserves) that the game ball B has entered into the second starting port 2004 and has not yet been used to display the special symbols on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400) The special symbol type pre-read command is used to pre-read the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to display the special symbol. The first special symbol display based on the display results (out-of-order symbol, jackpot symbol) and the special symbol 2 hold before the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is used to display the variation of the special symbol Then, the display result (small hit symbol, big hit symbol) by the second special symbol display based on the special symbol 2 reservation is designated respectively.

  The variation pattern prefetch command 1 to the variation pattern prefetch command 6 are pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The change pattern used in the change display of the special symbol based on the 1 hold, and the special symbol 2 hold before the second special design display of the function display unit 1400 is used for the change display of the special symbol, the pre-read The variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on the symbol 2 hold is designated respectively. The variation pattern prefetch command 1 is a command corresponding to the set value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern prefetch command 2 Is a command corresponding to the set value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern prefetch command 3 corresponds to the set value 3 of the pachinko machine 1. The variation pattern prefetch command 4 is a command according to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern prefetch command 5 is a command according to the setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern prefetch command 6 Is a command corresponding to the set value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

  It should be noted that the commands including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 described above (special figure 1 tuning production start command, special figure 1 tuning production end command, special figure 2 tuning production start command, special figure 2 tuning production end command, setting change command ) Is an example, and other commands may be provided for each set value.

  In addition, the normal winning opening winning command is an instruction to accept the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal symbol storing command is 0-4 pieces of normal symbol holding (the gaming ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003). Then, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls not yet used for the normal symbol variation display (the number of holdings).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, When the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, the fact is mainly notified by voice from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change has been confirmed (after the lapse stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is sent to the special symbol 1 1 When the number of held balls is changed (when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 and the number of held balls increases, or the number of held balls is changed to a special symbol display on the first special symbol display. The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 and the holding number increases). Or when the number of reserves is reduced using the second special symbol display to display the change of the number of special symbols on the second special symbol display), the special symbol type look-ahead command is reserved for special symbols 1 and 2 Sent when the number of balls increases (when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the number of holdings increases), the variation pattern prefetch command is immediately after the transmission of the special symbol type prefetch command Sent to. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  Further, the normal winning opening winning command is transmitted when the game ball B is received into the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal symbol storing command is received when the number of the normal symbol operation holding balls is changed (the gaming ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003). When the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the normal symbol display to change the number of held symbols). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given at the start opening winning (when the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, To notify the main center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 mainly by voice when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 uses the start opening prize command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of a specification that is used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud in addition to notifying from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker 622 by voice. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify the voice from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622.

[21. Setting information error notification]
Next, processing to notify when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal based on the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 among the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting information determination process executed when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the received command analysis process (step S1022).

  When starting the setting information determination process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not a setting abnormality notification flag described later is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when a setting value abnormality is notified. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that the setting value abnormality is notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. If the setting abnormality notification flag is not set in step S1500, the setting value abnormality is detected. Is not notified, and the process proceeds to step S1501.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the received command is the setting change command (step S1501). If the setting change command is received, the pachinko machine indicated by the setting change command Based on the set value information of 1, the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the set information storage area (step S1502), and the process ends. Thereby, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 set at the time of power-on is stored in the setting information storage area, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

  If the received command is not the setting change command (in this example, the special figure 1 tuning production start command, the special figure 1 tuning production end command, the special figure 2 tuning production start command, the special figure 2 tuning production end command, the variation pattern When the prefetch command 1 to the variation pattern prefetch command 6 are received), the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502. (Step S1504), if it does not match, a notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information (step S1504), and a setting abnormality notification flag indicating that the abnormality in the setting value information is being notified. Then, the process is terminated (step S1505).

  If it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, if the setting value information abnormality notification is in progress, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the setting in step S1502 are set. It is determined whether or not the set value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507). If the set value information does not match, the abnormality notification of the set value information is continued.

  On the other hand, if the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is terminated (step S1508). Then, the setting abnormality notification flag is reset and the process is terminated (step S1509).

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by transmitting a command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is set on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If there is an abnormality in the setting value information indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310, specifically, normal processing (setting value change processing) has not been performed. Nevertheless, when the set value is changed, a process for determining that an error or fraud has occurred and notifying the fact is executed. It should be noted that the game proceeds even while the set value information is informed of an abnormality, and the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect or the like. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the set value information is performed so as not to hinder the execution of the fluctuating effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, control for displaying “setting abnormality!” Or the like in a region that does not overlap with the variation effect executed in the effect display device 1600, and the change effect executed in the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. Control to display “setting abnormality!” Etc. in a semi-transparent display in the area overlapping with the fluctuation effect, control to output “setting abnormality has occurred” from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker 622, game board 5 Or a lamp / LED provided on the door frame 3 in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking red), one or a plurality of controls are executed in combination.

  When there is an abnormality in the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the abnormality notification of the set value information is performed without executing the abnormality notification of the set value information. In addition, an effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 described later is not executed, and if an effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is being executed, the execution of this effect is stopped. It may be. That is, the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like, and the set value information indicated by this command is changed to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510 The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 because the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area has changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise or the like. If there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, if an effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, the reliability of this effect is increased. descend. For this reason, in such a case, an effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may not be executed, and if the effect is being executed, the reduction in reliability may be suppressed by stopping the effect. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information. In this case, the game is stopped when an abnormality has occurred in the set value information. It may be. For example, when the set value is changed by the set value change process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is set in a reference area different from the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Also stores the setting value after the change, and the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area and for reference at an arbitrary timing (for example, the timing for transmitting the special figure 1 tuning production start command or the special figure 2 tuning production start command). It may be determined whether or not the set value stored in the area matches, and when it is determined that the set value does not match, the game may be stopped to notify the set value information of abnormality.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after the abnormality notification of the setting value information is started, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is automatically terminated without any operation by the game shop clerk when the abnormality is resolved. Therefore, when the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like and the set value information is changed to an abnormal value, the command is stored in the set information storage area. If the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state after starting the abnormality notification of the setting value information because it does not match the setting value information, it is set immediately. Anomaly notification of value information can be terminated.

  In the above example, when the setting value is changed in the setting change process, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value instructed by the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side. Is configured to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information according to whether or not it matches the stored setting value, but whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information The determination method is not limited to this. For example, when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 received last time It may be determined whether or not the values match, and if the values do not match, the abnormality notification of the set value information may be performed. In this case, when the setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received based on the change of the setting value, the abnormality notification of the setting value information may not be performed.

  In addition, a command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted a plurality of times from the main control board 1310 in relation to the variation effect, and when at least a part of the commands does not match, an abnormality notification of the set value information is issued. You may make it perform. Specifically, it is indicated by the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special figure 1 synchronized effect start command and the special figure 2 synchronized effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronized effect end command, and the special figure 2 synchronized effect end command. It may be determined whether or not the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches.

  In the above-described example, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, and the variation pattern look-ahead command are set to the set values of the pachinko machine 1. Although what is provided for each is shown, if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to be notified is provided separately from the special figure 1 tuning production start command, the special figure 1 tuning production end command, the special figure 2 tuning production start command, the special figure 2 tuning production end command, and the variation pattern look-ahead command. Whenever a command is sent from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 or when a specific command is sent, Command for notifying the setting information of the Nko machine 1 also may be transmitted. For example, setting notification commands 1 to 6 for notifying setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 are provided, and a setting notification command (setting value 1) corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 at an arbitrary timing from the main control board 1310 is provided. If so, the setting notification command 1 may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. If the setting value is 2, the setting notification command 2... With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one with a plurality of setting values and one with only one setting value), and the design effort can be saved.

  Further, in this case, commands (for example, special figure 1 synchronized production start command, special figure 1 synchronized production end command, Commands not related to the effects executed by the effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal prize opening prize command, etc.), not only when transmitting the special figure 2 synchronous effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronous effect end command, the variation pattern prefetch command, etc. ) Also transmits a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1, and the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 It may be determined whether or not there is an abnormality. With this configuration, it is possible to frequently determine whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, and avoid problems due to noise or the like. Can be further improved.

[22. Hold notice effect]
Next, the hold notice effect will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, the command (first hold A number designation command 0-4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600, and based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004. When the second reserved memory number changes, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) indicating the second reserved memory number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 The second reserved memory number is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, or based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402. When the special symbol type prefetch command and the variation pattern prefetch command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the special symbol type prefetch command and the variation pattern prefetch command are received. The special lottery result is changed by changing the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special lottery result for which the start of suggestion is held based on It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot at the time of executing the suggestion.

  In this example, the first reserved memory number specified by the first reserved number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second reserved memory number indicated by the second reserved number memory command, the change pattern prefetch command and the special Peripheral control board 1510 according to each of the pre-determined information instructed by the symbol type look-ahead command (which may notify the type of big hit such as loss, small hit, big hit, etc., or even a promiscuous big hit or normal big hit). Is provided with a hold notice determination table for determining the presence or absence of a hold notice and the type of hold notice pattern when executing the hold notice.

  Then, the decision to execute the hold notice is made, and when the hold notice pattern type to be executed is decided, the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are different from normal ones. Displayed in a display mode (in this example, a display color different from normal). In this example, the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memories 1701a are usually displayed in white as the basic color, and when executing the hold notice, they are displayed in blue, green, red, or a ladybug pattern. To do. The display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memories 1701a are set so that the big hit expectation is increased in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

  In addition, when the lottery result is identified as a big hit as prior determination information, a hold notice pattern that has a high expectation level (for example, red or ladybug pattern) as a final hold display mode is determined with a high probability. When the lottery result is determined to be losing as the determination information, the final hold display pattern is determined with a high probability by determining a hold notice pattern having a low jackpot expectation aspect (for example, blue) as the final hold display form. When an aspect with a high jackpot expectation level is displayed as an aspect, the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  In addition, each time the reserved notice pattern is suggested (decoration display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) during execution of the hold notice effect, the effect display is displayed. It is set how the display modes of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the device 1600 change. It should be noted that in the hold advance notice pattern, the display forms of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are opposite to the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. It is set so that it does not change in order (that is, the expectation of jackpot won't drop), and every time a suggestion of special lottery results (decoration display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) is made (hold is digested) The display mode of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or is a mode with a high expectation degree of jackpot. Is set to For this reason, even if the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low expectation degree of jackpot, the suggestion of the special lottery result that is the subject of the hold notice is started. Until this is done, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode with a high expectation level for jackpots, and it is possible to draw attention to the hold display mode with expectation to the end.

  Moreover, it is not always necessary to change the order of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a in white (basic color) in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern in the reserved advance notice pattern, Starting from an intermediate display mode (for example, based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the first hold memory 1700 c is displayed in red based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002. ) And change to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result The first hold memory 1700d changes from white to a ladybug pattern when the first hold memory 1700d is moved to the first hold memory 1700c. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (the number of holding | maintenances) that the display mode of the 1st reservation memories 1700a-1700d and the 2nd reservation memories 1701a change, the 1st reservation memories 1700a-1700d and the 1st Two hold storage 1701a can be displayed. Further, even if the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low expectation degree of jackpot, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next, and the first With respect to the display modes of the hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a, attention can be paid to the end.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the display mode different from the above-mentioned hold notice in addition to the above-described hold notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree or the display form of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a alone. By changing to the setting value holding suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be executed.

  In this example, according to the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the variation pattern prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the presence / absence of the set value hold suggesting effect and the set value hold suggesting effect. A setting value hold suggestion determination table for determining a set value hold suggestion pattern type in the case of performing. Then, the decision to execute the set value hold suggesting effect is made, and the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the set value hold suggesting pattern type to be executed is determined. Are displayed in an unusual display mode (in this example, an unusual shape).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228 (A), when the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are normally displayed as circles that are basic shapes, and the set value hold suggesting effect is executed. Displayed by one of the square shown in the first reserved memory 1700c in FIG. 228 (B), the triangle shown in 1700c in FIG. 228 (C), and the star shown in 1701a in FIG. 228 (D). In addition, the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a have a high degree of expectation with respect to the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (expected degree with respect to the high set value) in the order of circle → square → triangle → star. Is set to

  Further, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6 based on the change pattern prefetch command, the set value hold that becomes a mode with high expectation for the high set value (for example, a star) as the final hold display mode When the suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the set value is a mode (for example, a triangle) in which the degree of expectation for the high set value is medium as the final hold display mode A setting value that determines a hold suggestion pattern with a high probability and has the lowest expectation for a high set value (for example, a square) as the final hold display mode when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2. By determining the hold suggestion pattern with a high probability, when a mode with a high expectation for the high set value is displayed as the final hold display mode, Player's expectations is adapted to increase that.

  In addition, every time a suggestion of special lottery results (decoration display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) is performed during the execution of the preset value hold suggestion effect (every time the hold is consumed) ), How the display modes of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 change is set. In the set value hold suggestion pattern, the display modes of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in an order reverse to the order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the expectation for the high setting value does not decrease), and every time a special lottery result is suggested (decoration display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) The display mode of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change) or the degree of expectation for the high set value It is set to be a high aspect. For this reason, even if the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for the high set value, a special target that is an execution target of the set value hold suggesting effect Until the suggestion of the lottery result starts, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode with a high expectation for the high set value, and the mode of the hold display can be watched with expectation to the end. it can.

  The set value hold suggestion pattern does not necessarily change in the order of square → triangle → star after the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are displayed as circles (basic shapes). Starting from the display mode (for example, the first hold memory 1700d is displayed in a square based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002). Changes to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed as a square, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts. Accordingly, the first hold memory 1700d is changed from a square to a star when the first hold memory 1700d is moved to the first hold memory 1700c). For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (the number of holding | maintenances) that the display mode of the 1st reservation memory | storage 1700a-1700d and the 2nd reservation memory | storage 1701a changes, the 1st storage memory | storage 1700a- 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a can be displayed. Moreover, even if the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memories 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low expectation for the high set value, it is impossible to predict which display mode will change next. The display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memories 1701a can be watched with expectation to the end.

  Further, since the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion are determined separately, the second display displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. The display modes of the one hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are changed to a mode with a high expectation for the high set value, and displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggesting pattern of the set value hold suggesting effect. When the display modes of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. The display modes of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memories 1701a While changing to a mode with high waiting, the display mode of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggesting effect is maintained. And setting the setting value hold suggesting effect while maintaining the display modes of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. There is a case where the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed to a mode with high expectation for the high set value based on the value hold suggestion pattern.

  For example, when the display mode of the hold notice effect is “white” and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is “maru”, the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 are displayed. When moving the two hold storage 1701a, the display mode “white” of the hold notice effect is changed to “red” and the display mode “circle” of the set value hold suggesting effect is changed to “square” (the color and shape are changed). The first hold storage 1700a displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the hold is digested when the display mode of the hold notice effect is “red” and the display mode of the set value suggestion effect is “maru”. The display mode “Round” of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed to “Square” while maintaining the display mode “Red” of the hold notice effect when changing to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a. (The color is changed and the shape is changed), and when the display mode of the hold notice effect is “white” and the display mode of the set value suggestion effect is “triangle”, the hold is digested and displayed on the effect display device 1600 When the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are moved, the display mode “white” of the hold notice effect is changed to “blue”, while the display mode “triangle” of the set value hold suggesting effect is changed. May be maintained without changing (the color is changed to maintain the shape).

  That is, in this example, the determination process of the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect and the setting value hold suggestion pattern determination process of the set value hold suggesting effect are performed separately, and the special lottery result suggestion ( The display of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 every time the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) is performed (every time the hold is digested). The mode is maintained (the display mode is not changed), or the mode is changed to a mode with high expectation for the high set value.

  In addition, the final display mode of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect is determined separately, and the change scenarios of the display modes of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a according to the determination results are shown. Any one of a plurality of types of change patterns may be executed.

  Further, the start timing of the set value hold suggesting effect (timing for displaying the display mode in a mode different from the normal mode) is based on the fact that the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Not only the timing of displaying the hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a, but the subsequent timing (timing after displaying in the basic shape, for example, the suggestion of the special lottery result is finished and the next special lottery result is started. In response, for example, when the first hold memories 1700b to 1700d are moved to the first hold memories 1700a to 1700c). Thereby, even if the set value hold suggesting effect is not executed, the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a can be watched with expectation to the end.

  The execution frequency of the set value hold suggesting effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect. In other words, the hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, and the content of the hold notice effect is reset when the special lottery result based on the result of the lottery based on the hold memory that is executing the hold notice effect is suggested. On the other hand, since the contents of the set value hold suggesting effect continue without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value hold suggesting effect is lower than that of the hold notice effect. The setting prevents the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

  Further, as shown in the first hold memory 1700c in FIGS. 228 (A) and 228 (B) and the second hold memory 1701a in FIG. 228 (D), the set value hold suggesting effect is executed simultaneously with the hold notice effect. In some cases, as shown in the first hold memory 1700c of FIG. 228 (C), the set value hold suggesting effect may be executed independently. Note that the hold notice pattern may include a change pattern of the display mode of the set value suggestion effect, and in this case, it may be provided as a hold notice determination table for each set value of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 229, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is provided with a plurality of types of image data that combine the display mode of the above-described hold notice effect and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect. The target hold memory is displayed based on the image data corresponding to both the pattern and the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the hold notice effect of the target hold storage and the shape as the display mode of the set value hold suggesting effect, a display mode is generated by combining these, and the combined display mode Is displayed as pending storage.

  Specifically, in the example of FIG. 229A in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the hold memory in which the set value hold suggesting effect is not executed is displayed, the first hold memories 1700a and 1700b are set to “composite pattern white 1”. ”Based on the image data of“ Composite pattern blue 1 ”. In addition, in the example of FIG. 229 (B) in which the hold memory in which both the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggesting effect are executed is displayed, the first hold memories 1700a and 1700b are stored as image data of “composite pattern white 1”. The first reserved storage 1700c is displayed based on the image data of “composite pattern blue 2”. In addition, in the example of FIG. 229 (C) in which both the hold memory in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the hold memory in which only the set value hold suggesting effect is executed are displayed, the first hold memory 1700a is set to “composite pattern”. The first reserved memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of “Composite pattern white 1”, and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of “Composite pattern white 3”. Is displayed.

  Also, in the second hold memory 1701a, a hold notice effect and a set value hold suggesting effect are executed, and a hold memory in which both the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggesting effect are executed is displayed (FIG. 229 (D)). In this example, the second reserved storage 1701a is displayed based on the image data of “composite pattern red 4”.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the hold notification effect and the pachinko machine 1 suggesting the big hit expectation degree by controlling the display of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a in a different manner from the normal. A setting value hold suggesting effect that suggests a setting value can be executed. Note that the hold notice effect is executed based on the advance determination information, while the set value hold suggestion effect is not based on the advance determination information. That is, the hold notice effect can be executed by acquiring the reserved special lottery result in advance, while the set value hold suggesting effect can be executed without acquiring the reserved special lottery result in advance. is there.

  In addition, the special lottery in which the suggestion is being executed is not limited to the result displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d or the second reserved memory 1701a. The on-hold storage corresponding to the result may also be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the on-hold storage. In this case, the final display mode of the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect may be displayed in the on-hold hold memory, and the special lottery result may be suggested by configuring in this way. Until it is executed, attention can be given to the big hit value or the high setting value by paying attention to the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggesting effect.

  In the above example, the display color of the hold memory is changed as the display mode of the hold notice effect, and the shape of the hold memory is changed as the display mode of the set value hold suggesting effect. It is not limited to the above as long as it can be determined that it is being executed. For example, the display color of the hold notice effect is changed as the display mode of the hold notice effect, and the numerical value or the hold memory according to the set value that suggests without changing the shape of the target hold memory as the display value of the set value suggestion effect Additional information such as an effect mode around (such as a sparkling effect or a flame effect) may be displayed in association with the reserved storage.

  Further, when the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d are displayed based on the game ball B having entered the first start port 2002, or based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004. When displaying the hold memory 1701a, when updating and displaying the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a based on the fact that the hold has been consumed (the first hold memories 1700b to 1700d are displayed as the first hold memories 1700a to 1700a). 1700c, or when the first hold memory 1700a or the second hold memory 1701a is moved to the on-hold hold memory), the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested by outputting a sound effect. . For example, when suggesting that the set value is “1”, a sound effect (for example, “beep”) corresponding to the set value “1” is output from among a plurality of types of sound effects, and the set value is “2”. When it is suggested, the sound effect corresponding to the set value “2” (for example, “beep”) is output among a plurality of types of sound effects, and the set value is indicated as “5”. If a sound effect is output, a sound effect corresponding to the set value “5” is output from among a plurality of sound effects (for example, “Pipipipipipi”). You may make it output the sound effect (for example, "Pampakapan") according to setting value "6" among sounds.

  Further, when the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree or the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is set according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. In this case, after displaying on the effect display device 1600 an operation instruction image instructing the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. The jackpot expectation and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. In addition, the operation instruction image may be shared between the case of maintaining the jackpot expectation level or the suggested setting value and the case of further increasing the jackpot expectation level or the suggested setting value. It is impossible to determine whether or not the jackpot expectation level or the suggested setting value is increased by an effect (an effect that displays an operation instruction image) that is a precursor to the execution of the hold suggesting effect. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be actively operated.

  Further, during the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player), it may be possible to select the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the presence / absence of the set value hold suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suits the player's preference, and a hold notice effect or a set value hold suggesting effect is executed even for a player who does not want to suggest the jackpot expectation, the set value of the pachinko machine 1, etc. It is possible to suppress the jackpot expectation and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 being suggested.

  In addition, the explanation about the mode suggested by the set value hold suggesting effect (the mode that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and not the mode that suggests the big hit expectation degree) is demonstrated (the player enters a waiting state) It may be executed at the time of execution of the demonstration effect) or the suggestion of the special lottery result (during the decorative symbol variation display). Thereby, it can suppress that it is mistaken as a big hit expectation degree when the setting value reservation suggestion effect is executed, and the expectation for the big hit is improved.

  Further, during execution of the short-time state or the certainty-change state, prior determination instructed by a variation pattern prefetch command and a special symbol type prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002. Prior determination instructed by a change pattern pre-read command and a special symbol type pre-read command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 without executing a hold notice effect based on information Only the hold notice effect based on the information may be executed. Further, the set value is held in association with the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 even during execution of the time-saving state or the probability change state. You may make it perform suggestion production. Thereby, even when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 during the short-time state or the certainty-change state, it is possible to have an expectation for the set value hold suggesting effect.

[23. Set value suggestion effect]
Next, the setting value continuous suggestion effect will be described. In this example, the setting value continuous suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be executed over a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays. Note that the decorative symbol variation display is not limited to being performed once for one variation display of a special symbol, but is performed multiple times for one variation display of a special symbol (so-called pseudo-continuous). Variation).

  In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 continuously suggests a set value according to the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special figure 1 tuning production start command and the special figure 2 tuning production start command transmitted from the main control board 1310. There is provided a set value continuous suggestion effect table for determining the presence / absence of the effect and the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern type when executing the set value continuous suggestion effect. When the set value continuous suggesting effect pattern type is determined and the set value continuous suggesting effect pattern type to be executed is determined, the set value is displayed each time the decorative display variable display is started on the effect display device 1600. One of the plurality of setting suggesting characters 1702 having different display modes is caused to appear.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 230A, when the decorative display variable display is started on the effect display device 1600, “1” is drawn on the head as the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 1. The set suggestion character 1702 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 230C, when the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, “3” is drawn on the head as the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 3. The setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed, and when the next variation display of the decoration symbol is started on the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. A setting suggesting character 1702 having “4” drawn on the head is displayed.

  Further, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as “6” based on the special figure 1 synchronized production start command and the special figure 2 synchronized production start command, as a final mode for setting suggestion according to the set value “6” A setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern to be the character 1702 is determined with high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1, the setting to be the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value “1” as the final mode When the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the high setting value is displayed as the final setting suggesting character 1702 by determining the value continuous suggestion effect pattern with a high probability, the player's expectation for the high setting value is displayed. The degree is getting higher.

In addition, in the setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern, what is the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the decorative symbol variation display is started during execution of the setting value continuous suggestion effect. It is set whether to change to. In the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 ( That is, the expectation for the high set value is not lowered), and the display mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained every time the decorative symbol variation display is started. (The display mode does not change) or the mode is set so as to correspond to the high set value. For this reason, even if the setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to the low set value, the mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 remains at the high set value until the set value continuous suggesting effect ends. There is still a possibility of changing to a mode according to the above, and the mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 can be watched with expectation to the end.

  Further, the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern does not necessarily need to be changed in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 after the setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed in a mode corresponding to the set value “1”. (For example, the setting suggestion character 1702 is first displayed with the setting value “2” after the setting value continuous suggestion effect is started), and the display mode is changed to the next display mode without going through the intermediate display mode. (For example, when the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value “2” is displayed, the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to “4” is displayed in response to the start of the next variation display of the decorative symbol. It is also set so that For this reason, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the low setting value, it cannot be predicted which display mode will change next, and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 Can be noticed with expectation to the end.

  It should be noted that the execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion effect is set lower than the hold notice effect similarly to the set value hold suggestion effect. In other words, the hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, and the content of the hold notice effect is reset when the special lottery result based on the result of the lottery based on the hold memory that is executing the hold notice effect is suggested. On the other hand, since the contents of the set value continuous suggestion effect continue without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion effect is lower than that of the pending notice effect. The setting prevents the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting value continuous suggestion effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by displaying the setting suggesting character 1702 over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol. To get. In addition, since the set value continuous suggestion effect is not based on the advance determination information like the set value hold suggestion effect, it can be executed without obtaining the special lottery result in advance.

  The set value continuous suggestion effect that causes the setting suggesting character 1702 to be displayed can be executed exceeding the upper limit of the reserved memory number (the upper limit of the first reserved memory number is 4 and the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is 1). You may make it (for example, over 5 fluctuations of a decorative design). In addition, when the number of reserved memories becomes 0 during execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect, the decoration pattern changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the display is started, the setting value continuous suggestion effect may be resumed to display the setting suggestion character 1702. In this case, the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed until the setting value continuous suggestion effect is resumed. The display may be continued on the effect display device 1600. This allows the player to recognize that the set value continuous suggestion effect is continuing and continue the game, and even if the player quits the game, the set value continuous suggestion effect being continued for a new player The game can be directed to play with the game machine.

  Further, the set value continuous suggestion effect may be executed in parallel with the set value hold suggestion effect. Thereby, the new game which makes the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 guess from both the production | presentation aspect in a setting value holding | maintenance suggestion production and the production | presentation aspect in a setting value continuous suggestion production can be provided. Further, a plurality of setting suggesting characters 1702 may be provided, and any one of the setting suggesting characters 1702 may be displayed according to the big hit expectation.

[24. Use of surplus settings other than big hit probability and small hit probability]
In the present embodiment, the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b in a state where the setting values can be changed. Yes, as a table used in the special lottery or the like (a hit determination table, a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, etc.), a table corresponding to the determined set value is used. In the above-described embodiment, the table corresponding to each setting value includes “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, “small hit type”, “ordinary symbol probability”, and “normal hit type”. The combination of the “Opening and closing pattern of the second starter” is set differently. As another example, the “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” and “small hit probability” are the same as the “big hit probability” and “small hit probability”. Information other than the “attack probability” may be set so that the monitoring system of fraud is different.

  As described above, various frauds are monitored in the fraud detection process in step S112. Specifically, various winning awards and gates (gates) provided in the game board 5 by changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed in the game board 5 by bringing the magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 ) Is provided, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraud based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors the fraud by the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5 a formed in the game board 5 to change to the game board 5. The main control MPU 1310a determines the presence / absence of fraud based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003 by providing a vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraud such as entering various winning holes and a gate (gate). And monitoring fraud by vibration. In this example, as a system for monitoring fraud, the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud is changed, or the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud. ) Can change the part (target area) that is determined to be fraudulent, or change the conditions for canceling the error state when it is determined to be fraudulent and the error state is entered. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 231, in this example, “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, and “fraud act monitoring system” are set values 1 to 3 and set values 1 ′ to 3 ′, respectively. Correspondingly set.

  Specifically, as the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won in the hit determination table), the setting value 1 and the setting value 1 ′ are “1/319”, the setting value 2 and the setting value. “1/309” is set in 2 ′, and “1/299” is set in setting value 3 and setting value 3 ′. In this example, each of the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 1 'to 3' is set such that the larger the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability.

  In addition, as a small hit probability (a ratio of a small hit determination value indicating that a small hit is won in the hit determination table), in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set values 1 to 3, the set value 1 “1/3” is set for each of “˜3”, whereas in the table used for the special drawing of the second special symbol, each of the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′. Is set to “50/100”. Each of the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 1 'to 3' may be set so that the small hit probability increases as the setting value increases.

  Further, as a fraud monitoring system, “fraud monitoring A” is set to the setting values 1 to 3 and “fraud monitoring B” is set to the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′. In this example, “fraud monitoring A” is set to be stronger than “fraud monitoring B”.

  In this example, setting value 1 and setting value 1 ′, setting value 2 and setting value 2 ′, setting value 3 and setting value 3 ′ are the same setting values for “big hit probability” and “small hit probability”. However, the fraud monitoring system is set to either “fraud monitoring A” or “fraud monitoring B”. For example, if it is possible to set six setting values on the setting change board 1311 provided with the setting key switch 1311a and the like, it is necessary to set only three types of “big hit probability”. In addition to the three setting values corresponding to the “big hit probability”, three surplus setting values are generated. As described above, when the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is also used in other gaming machines, a surplus setting value may be generated. However, as in this example, the surplus setting value is generated. By using the value to change the monitoring system of fraudulent activity, the surplus setting value can be used effectively, and the changes on the program can be minimized.

  As the display mode of the selected set value at the time of the operation related to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, “1”, “2”, and “3” are displayed on the setting display 1310g configured by a single 7-segment LED display. In addition, while the 7-segment LED is displayed so as to blink normally, in the settings 1 ′ to 3 ′, “1”, “2”, and “3” are displayed on the setting display 1310g. The segment LED is displayed so as to flash rapidly (flashing faster than the settings 1 to 3). Thereby, when the operator changes the setting value, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting value being changed is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1 ′ to 3 ′. However, when the setting value is determined after the setting value has been changed, the 7-segment LED normally blinks or is displayed at high speed as the setting value display mode in any of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 1 'to 3'. It stops blinking and is displayed with normal lighting. For this reason, when the operator determines the setting value after changing the setting, it is unclear whether the setting value is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1 'to 3'.

  As another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected set value during the operation related to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, “1” and “2” are displayed on the setting display 1310g configured by a single 7-segment LED display. "3" is displayed, but in the settings 1 'to 3', "1.", "2.", "3." are displayed on the setting display 1310g as compared with the settings 1 to 3. You may add dots. In such another example, even if the 7-segment LED is normally blinked during the change, it is clearly distinguished whether the setting value being changed is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1 ′ to 3 ′. be able to. Further, when the setting value is determined after the setting value is changed, the determined setting value is set to 1 even if the normal blinking of the 7-segment LED is terminated and the normal lighting is displayed as the setting value display mode. It is possible to clearly distinguish whether it is ˜3 or setting 1′-3 ′.

  Next, specific monitoring systems of “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B” include the first to fifth specific examples. In this example, any one or more of the first specific example to the fifth specific example may be executed as “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B”. First, as a first specific example, a case where the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010 and vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud are made different will be described below.

  As a first specific example, in “fraud monitoring A”, the detection sensitivity (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud is increased, whereas in “fraud monitoring B”, fraudulent behavior is detected. The detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) to be detected is lowered. If the detection sensor that detects fraud is excessively detected due to individual differences in the pachinko machine 1 or the location of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the excessive detection by selecting “fraud monitoring B”. be able to. On the other hand, when the detection by the detection sensor for detecting the fraud is dull, it is possible to prevent the dull detection by selecting “fraud monitoring A”. In addition, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasure against the magnet goto or the vibration goto, by selecting “fraud A”, the monitoring of the cheating by the magnet goat or the vibration goto can be strengthened.

  In “fraud monitoring A”, when a detection signal is input from a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraud, when the detection signal is input for a short time, Even if the number of times that the detection signal is input is small, it is determined that it is a fraudulent act. On the other hand, in “Unauthorization monitoring B”, when the detection signal is input for a long time or the number of times the detection signal is input When there are many, you may make it judge that it is fraud. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above, which is a case where the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor for detecting fraud is varied.

  Next, as a second specific example, a case where the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud varies from a part (target region) that is judged to be fraud will be described below.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraud by a magnet, a setting operation unit that can detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Depending on the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, it is monitored whether the magnet has approached the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting is performed by a person other than the person who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation. Monitors fraudulent activities such as changes and confirmations. On the other hand, depending on the game area unit magnetic sensor, it is monitored whether the magnet has approached the area in front of the game area 5a, and the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is changed to provide various types of games provided on the game board 5. It monitors for illegal activities such as entering a winning gate and a gate (gate).

  Similarly, as a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraud due to vibration, a setting operation unit vibration capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 A sensor and a game area portion vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. Depending on the setting operation unit vibration sensor, it is monitored whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value Monitors fraudulent activities such as changing settings or displaying confirmations. On the other hand, depending on the game area vibration sensor, it is monitored whether or not vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, and the path of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 is changed to change the second V prize opening 2008. Monitors illegal acts such as having a game ball B enter.

  As a second specific example, in “fraud monitoring A”, all detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud are used to increase the number of parts determined to be fraud. In “fraud monitoring B”, the fraudulent act is detected using only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor which are part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud. The number of parts to be judged is reduced. That is, in the “illegal monitoring A”, not only the occurrence of magnetism in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is detected, but also the game area located on the front side of the game board 5 While it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism and vibration in front of 5a, in the “illegal monitoring B”, the magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 It is possible to detect only the occurrence of vibration. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the gaming area magnetic sensor and gaming area vibration sensor and fraudulent acts are not performed, such detection sensor frequently detects “fraud monitoring B”. By selecting, the frequent detection can be prevented. In addition, if you want to strengthen countermeasures against magnets and vibrations, select “Unauthorized Monitoring A” to monitor fraudulent activity in front of the game area 5a, and conduct illegal acts by magnets and vibrations. Monitoring can be strengthened.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, that is, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area unit magnetic sensor, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting an illegal act by a magnet. It is possible to specify 1 (whether it is in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5) Two magnetic sensors 2010 may be provided. Similarly, as the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraud due to vibration, there are provided two vibration sensors 3003, that is, a setting operation part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor. 5 or the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5). It is also possible to provide one vibration sensor capable of Even in such a case, in the “illegal monitoring B”, only when it is determined that magnetism or vibration has occurred around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the gaming board 5, By determining that there is, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Next, as a third specific example, a case where the condition for canceling the error state when the state is determined to be an illegal act and the error state is shifted will be described below.

  As a third specific example, in the case of “illegal monitoring A”, it is possible to cancel the error state by turning on the power again when it is judged that it is an illegal act and the error state is entered. “Unauthorized monitoring B” makes it possible to automatically cancel an error state after a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed when it is determined that it is an unauthorized act and the state shifts to an error state. ing. In other words, in the “fraud monitoring A”, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, the hall clerk performs the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a. The error state cannot be canceled unless the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the state shifts to an error state and is output from an image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. Thus, an abnormality occurrence effect for notifying that the state is abnormal due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is executed, and it is difficult to normally grasp the progress of the game. For this reason, if “fraud monitoring A” is selected, it is necessary for the hall clerk to grasp the fraudulent behavior when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered. Therefore, the deterrence against fraud can be increased. In addition, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasure against the magnet goto or the vibration goto, the monitoring of the fraud by the magnet goat or the vibration goto can be strengthened by selecting “fraud monitoring A”.

  Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and an error state is entered, information on the error state is provided on the hall installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The case where the output to the computer is made different will be described below.

  As a fourth specific example, in the “illegal monitoring A”, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and an error state is entered, information relating to the error state is sent to the game hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. Is output to the hall computer installed on the side, whereas “Unauthorized Monitoring B” outputs information about the error status to the hall computer even if it is determined to be an illegal act and shifts to an error status. I try not to. In other words, in the case of “fraud monitoring A”, it is determined that it is a fraudulent act, and when a transition is made to an error state, the hall clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent act without being on the spot. Deterrence can be increased. In addition, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasure against the magnet goto or the vibration goto, the monitoring of the fraud by the magnet goat or the vibration goto can be strengthened by selecting “fraud monitoring A”.

  Next, as a fifth specific example, when it is determined that it is an illegal act and the state is shifted to an error state, whether or not the information regarding the error state is notified externally by an output from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or a speaker. The case where these are made different will be described below.

  As a fifth specific example, in “fraud monitoring A”, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and a transition is made to an error state, the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is generated by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the speaker. While the information about the error state is notified externally, such as by performing an anomaly production effect to notify that the abnormal state is caused by “Unauthorized monitoring B”, it is determined that it is an illegal act and the error state Even if it shifts to, the information regarding the error state is not externally notified. In other words, in the “fraud monitoring A”, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and an error state is entered, the fraudulent person is warned by external notification of information on the error state, and the deterrence against the fraudulent act is increased. can do. In addition, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasure against the magnet goto or the vibration goto, the monitoring of the fraud by the magnet goat or the vibration goto can be strengthened by selecting “fraud monitoring A”.

  In this example, “fraud monitoring A” is set to the setting values 1 to 3 and “fraud monitoring B” is set to the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting toward the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting information about the value as a command, it is possible to determine on the peripheral control board 1510 side whether to wait in “fraud monitoring A” or “fraud monitoring B”. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a transmits information on the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined that it is an illegal act and shifts to an error state, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, It is possible to determine whether or not to notify the information regarding the error state externally.

  In the “illegal monitoring B”, when it is determined that it is an illegal act and an error state is entered, information regarding the error state is externally notified. At that time, the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 is used. May be executed in a mode in which the output is suppressed (not conspicuous) as compared to “fraud monitoring A”. For example, in “illegal monitoring B”, when information about an error state is externally notified, output from a lamp or a speaker may be stopped and only an image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above, which is a case where whether or not the information regarding the error state is externally notified.

  In the above description, the case where the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is used and only three types of “big hit probability” need be set, and three surplus setting values are generated has been described. That is, in the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′, the fraud monitoring system is set to “illegal monitoring A” even though the setting values 1 to 3 and the “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” are the same setting values. Although “fraud monitoring B” is set for the setting values 1 to 3, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, setting values 1 to 5 corresponding to five types of “big hit probability” are set. If one surplus setting value occurs, the monitoring system for fraud may be made different from that one surplus setting value. For example, in the setting value 1 ′ that is one surplus setting value, the setting value 1 out of the setting values 1 to 5 and the “big hit probability” or “small hit probability” are the same setting values, but monitoring of fraud What is necessary is just to set "fraud monitoring B" with respect to the setting values 1-5 which set the system to "fraud monitoring A". Even in such a case, the surplus setting value can be used effectively.

  In addition, in the above, one of “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B” is set as the fraud monitoring system, but “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B” are different. ”Or“ Unauthorized Monitoring C ”may be set. It should be noted that the monitoring of fraud is strengthened in the order of “fraud monitoring C”, “fraud monitoring B”, and “fraud monitoring A”. For example, when setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of “big hit probability” are set and four surplus setting values are generated, setting for setting the monitoring system of fraudulent activity to “illegal monitoring A” For the values 1 and 2, the “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” are the same set values, but the setting values 1 ′ and 2 ′ set to “illegal monitoring B”, “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” The setting values 1 ″ and 2 ′ ″ set in the “fraud monitoring C” even though the “probability” is the same setting value may be set as the surplus setting values. Even in such a case, the surplus setting value can be used effectively.

  In the above, although the case where the “big hit probability” and the “small hit probability” are set to the same value, but the monitoring system for fraud is set differently, the “big hit probability” and the “small hit probability” Other information may be set so that all or some of the operating systems of the plurality of items (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are different. A case will be described below as a sixth specific example in which a part of the operating system (movable object) provided in the game board 5 or the door frame 3 is set to have different operating systems.

  As shown in FIG. 232, in the sixth specific example, the operation system of the specified combination (specific movable object) among the plurality of combinations (movable objects) provided in the game board 5 or the door frame 3 is set. The value 1 to 3 is “special actor action is present” and the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′ are set to “no special actor action”. It is different from the specific example to the fifth specific example. That is, in the sixth specific example, the “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” are respectively set value 1 and set value 1 ′, set value 2 and set value 2 ′, and set value 3 and set value 3 ′. Even though the set values are the same, the operation system of the specified accessory (specific movable object) is set to either “with specified agent operation” or “without specified agent operation”. Note that the plurality of actors (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can be operated using a drive source such as a drive motor and a solenoid, respectively. The accessory includes the effect operation unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 described above, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved up and down by the operation mechanism described above. Since the effect operation unit 300 can be operated by direct contact with the player, there is a high possibility that a failure or a malfunction will occur as compared to other bonuses. In the case of “with specific action,” the control is performed so that the specific action is operated at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific action (the production operation unit 300 moves up and down). On the other hand, in the case of “no specific character action”, control is performed so that the specific character does not operate without executing a movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific character. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the action mechanism of a specified accessory and the specified accessory does not operate normally, the operation of the specified accessory can be stopped halfway by selecting “No specified feature operation”. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult to continue the game.

  In this example, when a variation pattern in which execution of a movable object effect accompanied by a motion of a specific accessory is determined among a plurality of variation patterns is determined, Control is performed so that the specified accessory moves at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the action, while the “no specified character action” executes the movable object effect accompanied by the action of the specified accessory. Without being controlled, the specific actor is controlled so as not to operate. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between “with specific character operation” and “without specific character operation”. For example, with “with specific character operation” Among the plurality of variation patterns, it is possible to determine a variation pattern in which execution of a movable object effect accompanied by a motion of a specific accessory is set. Control may be performed so as not to determine a variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanying the above operation is set. Even in such a case, in the case of “no specific actor action”, the same effect as described above can be obtained by performing control so that the specific accessory does not operate without executing the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific actor. Can be obtained.

  Further, in this example, when the operation system of the specified accessory (specific movable object) is set to the setting values 1 to 3 where “the specified accessory operation is present”, the specified agent is set when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). When an initial action of an object is performed, when the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′ are set to “no specific accessory action”, the initial action of the specified accessory is performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). It is not done. Thereby, it can be made to recognize anew that the specific combination (specific movable object) of the plurality of combinations (movable object) is excluded from the operation target. In addition, regarding the operation of the specified accessory (specific movable object), it is possible to confirm whether or not the setting value is intended by the worker, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the setting value is not intended by the worker. be able to.

  Unlike the above, when priority is given to checking for the presence or absence of defects related to the operation of a specific accessory (specific movable object), the "special accessory operation is present" and "no specific accessory operation is" Regardless of which of these is set, the initial action of the specific accessory may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed).

  In addition, it can be confirmed from the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g whether “specific action is present” or “no specific action is set” is set, but other than the setting display 1310g. However, you may make it alert | report. For example, when the setting change of the set value is completed, the notification of “set with specific feature action / set without special feature action” is output by an image, lamp, or speaker output of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not a specific combination (specific movable object) among a plurality of combinations (movable objects) is a target of operation, for example, as a standby screen during a period when no game is performed I can recognize.

  Also, in this example, it is possible to set either “with specified feature action” or “without specified feature action” by changing the setting value set by the operator. After the setting, the player may be able to change the initial setting to another setting. For example, while the standby screen is displayed during a period when no game is being performed, it may be possible for the player to change to either “with specific character operation” or “without specific character operation”. That is, “specific action is present” is set in the setting values 1 to 3, “no specific action is present” is set in the setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′, and the main control MPU 1310 a is set toward the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting information about the value as a command, one of the settings is executed as an initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side. However, if the player changes to another setting after the initial setting, On the peripheral control board 1510 side, the setting changed by the player is prioritized and executed over the initial setting.

  In addition, the specific combination (specific movable object) of the plurality of combinations (movable objects) is not limited to the production operation unit 350 in the production operation unit 300, but is provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3, The effect display device 1600 may operate from the front of the screen toward the front of the screen. In addition, in this example, by changing the setting value, it is possible to change the operation system of a specific accessory (specific movable object) out of a plurality of actors (movable objects). It is possible to change the operation system of multiple items (movable items) or all of the items, and set the target item to be either “actual operation” or “no operation” You may do it. In addition, the accessory (movable object) may be provided not only in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 but also in the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the operating system can be changed for such an accessory. It may be a target to

[25. Fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various frauds are monitored in the fraud detection process of step S112 described above. Specifically, various winning holes and gate portions (gates) provided in the game board 5 by changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 by bringing the magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 ) Is provided, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraud based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors the fraud by the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5 a formed in the game board 5 to change to the game board 5. The main control MPU 1310a determines the presence / absence of fraud based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003 by providing a vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraud such as entering various winning holes and gates (gates) provided. And monitoring for fraud by vibration. About monitoring of these fraudulent acts, the mode of monitoring is different between the normal time and the state where the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is performed.

[25-1. About unauthorized monitoring during normal times]
First, monitoring of fraudulent behavior during normal times will be described below. Here, the normal time is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed and a setting value setting change or a setting value confirmation display is not performed, such as symbol variation, big hit game, small hit game, etc. The state where it is possible to play games.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraud by a magnet, a setting operation unit that can detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. And normally, the fraudulent act with respect to the predetermined area | region of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is monitored using the setting operation part magnetic sensor. In other words, in the normal state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor causes magnetism that should not occur to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are provided (magnetism due to unauthorized access). ) Has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching), and unauthorized activities such as setting change or confirmation display other than those who perform setting change or confirmation display are monitored. Examples of fraudulent acts on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet include, for example, a metal fraudulent instrument in an island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed) A magnet for indirectly operating a metal fraudulent instrument is charged, and a magnet and a metal fraudulent instrument are passed through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility or an opening that has destroyed a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to act to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by operating. In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, a fraudulent act using a magnet is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. Judging that it is done.

  Similarly, at the normal time, the gaming area portion magnetic sensor is used to monitor an illegal act on a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, during normal times, the game area magnetic sensor monitors whether or not magnetism (magnetism caused by unauthorized access) that should not have occurred in the area ahead of the game area 5a has occurred (whether the magnet has approached). The illegal action such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and entering the various prize holes and gate portions (gates) provided in the game board 5 is monitored. In the cheating detection process in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the game area magnetic sensor, it is determined that cheating using a magnet is being performed on the area in front of the game area 5a. ing.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, that is, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area unit magnetic sensor, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects an illegal act by a magnet. The part magnetic sensor and the game area part magnetic sensor may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2010 are configured by a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and have a directivity that is highly sensitive in the direction perpendicular to the side surface on one side. Magnetic detection in the region and magnetic detection in the second magnetic detection region having a directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to the other side surface, which is the opposite side, can be performed. ing. “High sensitivity in the vertical direction” means that the sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The game area magnetic sensor is arranged such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area that are emitted from the side surface of such a sensor body spread in the left-right direction or the vertical direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1, A wide range on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a plurality of winning ports such as a first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004, a normal winning port 2003, a large winning port 2005, etc., and other main parts of the ball channel) ) Can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is configured such that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region emanating from the side surface of the sensor body expand in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1, and Are arranged so as to include the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

  In addition, it can also be set as embodiment which does not have the same performance with two setting operation part magnetic sensors and game area part magnetic sensors. For example, instead of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the game area unit magnetic sensor, a place where magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the game board 5 It may be possible to provide one magnetic sensor 2010 that can specify whether the game area 5a is located in front of the game area 5a. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet has approached the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided or whether the magnet has approached the area in front of the game area 5a. .

  In this example, as the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraud due to vibration, a setting capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. An operation part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration in the vicinity of the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided in the game board 5 are provided. In normal times, fraudulent acts are monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. In other words, during normal operation, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether vibration that should not occur (vibration due to unauthorized access) is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. In addition, a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value monitors for illegal activities such as setting change or confirmation display. Note that in the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal from the setting operation unit vibration sensor is input, an illegal act due to vibration is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. Judging.

  On the other hand, during the normal hit game only during the small hit game, the game area portion vibration sensor is used to monitor the fraudulent act. Other than the small hit game, the game area portion vibration sensor is not monitored. This is because, in the small hit game, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second V winning port 2008 side by the second distributing device 2540 is either the second V winning port 2008 or the lost side. However, when vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, the path of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 is changed, and the game ball is placed in the second V prize opening 2008. This is because it becomes possible to enter B and prevent such illegal acts. In other words, during the small hit game during normal time, the game area portion vibration sensor monitors whether vibration that should not occur (vibration due to unauthorized access) is applied to the third sorting device 2550. Then, an illegal act such as changing the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 and causing the game ball B to enter the second V winning opening 2008 is monitored. In the cheating detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the game area vibration sensor is input, it is determined that the cheating by the vibration is being performed on the third sorting device 2550.

  In this example, two vibration sensors 3003 of a setting operation part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor are provided as vibration sensors 3003 for detecting fraudulent acts due to vibrations. (Is it around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5)? One vibration sensor 3003 that can be specified may be provided. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, respectively. it can.

  Further, at the normal time, in the launch permission signal setting process in step S113, the logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted is set. When the handle 195 is operated, the game ball B can be launched.

  In normal times, when the game ball B wins a winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, or the big winning opening 2005, detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors are detected. Is input by the main control MPU 1310a so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective. Specifically, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the design variation is not performed and the game ball B In the case where the detection of the game ball B is made effective, when the game ball B wins a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the symbol variation is performed. In addition, the game ball B can be paid out.

  In addition, during normal times, except for the period in which the effect using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is being performed, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member can be adjusted. Specifically, after the adjustment operation image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, the volume and the light amount can be adjusted by rotating the contact operation unit 302. In addition, during the period in which the effect using the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 is being executed while the symbol is changing, it waits for the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 to be operated for the effect. Since it is in a state, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the prohibition period in which the volume and the light amount cannot be adjusted is set.

[25-2. Unauthorized monitoring while changing setting values]
Next, monitoring of fraud during changing the setting value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 is a time chart illustrating a monitoring state of fraud during changing the setting value.

  When changing the setting value, first, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (a state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off). Work is performed (timing t1), and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), the setting value can be changed (change permission state). In such a change-permitted state, the set value (set values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, and then the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise. Turning the setting key switch 1311a toward the original position by turning the setting key switch 1311a toward the original position by turning the setting key switch 1311a toward the original key. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return (timing t4). That is, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value is changed. It becomes a state where it is impossible to change the setting (change impossible state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), it is possible to play a game. Become.

  In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 168 and 169), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Until this time, the setting change process in step S37 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, The prohibition of setting the interrupt permission in step S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Since the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 170) is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, and the fraud detection in step S112. The process, the launch permission signal setting process in step S113, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. That is, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change-permitted state). However, the illegal act is not monitored, and the game ball B In addition to not permitting the launch, a special period during which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the winning opening is set. In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, information related to the setting value being changed is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , So that the hall clerk can grasp that the setting is being changed.

  Specifically, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and monitoring of cheating using the game area magnetic sensor as a whole Not to run. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and a non-authorized worker who changes the setting value sets a magnet. This is because there is no room for cheating using. In addition, when a setting change is made to a set value, even if an authorized worker who changes the setting has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Inhibition of regular setting change work can be suppressed.

  Similarly, in the change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and monitoring of cheating using the game area vibration sensor as a whole are executed. I try not to. This is because, in the change-permitted state, an authorized operator who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button 1311b, and unauthorized personnel other than the authorized operator who changes the setting are improper due to vibration. This is because there is no room for action. In addition, even when a regular operator who changes the setting value makes a vibration when the setting value is changed, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to vibration. Inhibition can be suppressed.

  Also, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted is not set. The launch of the game ball B is prohibited. Thereby, even if the regular worker who performs setting change of the set value touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and inhibition of the regular setting change work can be suppressed. Further, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the change permission state, the game ball B cannot be launched.

  In addition, in the change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, winning gates such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, the big winning port 2005, and various gate units (gates) ), When the game ball B enters, the main control MPU 1310a does not input detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the game ball B may not be detected by the detection sensor, or may be treated as invalid while a detection signal from the detection sensor is input. Thus, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation, Even if any of the payouts is not performed, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during a regular operation for changing the setting value. The game progress by it can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from a detection sensor corresponding to each of a winning opening, a gate portion (gate), and the like in a change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU 1310a so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Thus, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008, for example, for the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change-permitted state, measurement by the base monitor 1310h described above is performed. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a ball clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in a change-permitted state and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid a situation in which measurement is performed (added to the out number counter).

  In the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the screen of the lamp or the effect display device 1600, and the like The amount of light output from the light emitting member cannot be adjusted.

  In the change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is set by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. An in-setting change notification (setting change related notification) for notifying that the change is in progress is executed. As a setting change notification, a sound that repeats “setting change”, a message “setting change!”, And lamp emission in a color corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 in the selection operation process are executed. It is said. This notification during setting change is a notification (effect) performed only in the change-permitted state, and is executed with priority over the body frame release notification performed when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release notification (such as “open frame” display or voice) is normally performed, but in the change permission state, the main body frame release notification is performed. It is assumed that notification during setting change is executed with the highest priority without performing the above. Note that the body frame release notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, and the setting change notification has priority over the body frame release notification, and the body frame release notification is performed after the setting change notification ends. A form can also be illustrated.

  In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, notification by the function display unit 1400 is also given as the above-described setting change notification. Running. Specifically, in the function display unit 1400, although not shown, a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special indicator In addition to the design indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change-permitted state), A confirmation display indicator that includes one LED for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state) is provided. In the change permission state, only the LEDs of the display unit during setting change in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other display units are turned off. Thereby, in a change permission state, it can grasp | ascertain that a game does not advance by the notification by the function display unit 1400. FIG.

  Also, at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 168 and 169) is terminated (the setting key is changed in step S222 of the setting change process). It is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned OFF), and the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed. Then, the main control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 170) can be started. In the main control timer interrupt process, the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the launch permission signal setting in step S113. Processing will be performed. However, in the present embodiment, until the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t5), the detection is performed when the game ball B wins permission to play the game ball B or wins a winning opening. The signal input is not possible, and the state where the game cannot be started is maintained. In other words, the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5 is a period in which a detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is won at the prize opening due to fraud, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility of receiving the impact of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, monitoring of fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, fraud using the game area unit magnetic sensor The monitoring, the monitoring of the cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the monitoring of the cheating using the game area unit vibration sensor are in a standby state as unexecuted.

  In addition, the game ball B can be launched from the time t5 when the operation of closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and it is possible to perform games such as symbol variation, big hit games, and small hit games. In this state, the monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started with the contents described in [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal time] described above.

  Further, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the game display is waiting for the start of the game on the screen of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying this is displayed (game standby notification). Then, after the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a predetermined period from the timing t5, a game such as symbol variation, big hit game, and small hit game is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600. An image (game start notification) notifying that it has become possible is displayed.

  In this example, the game ball B is fired during a period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). Although the logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that permission is set is not set, in consideration of performing the check of the launch operation by the handle 195 in the change permission state, The logic of the launch permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period in which the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 is included (the change permission state may be a period from timing t3 to timing t4), the permission until the game ball B is released is limited. It is desirable to prevent a detection signal from being input even if a game ball B is inserted into various winning gates or gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed unreasonably. .

  In this example, the game ball B is emitted during a period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that permission is not set is set, and the game ball B is fired from the time t5 (may be timing t4). Although it is in a possible state, when the handle 195 is operated (contacted with the handle 195) for the first time after the change permission state is ended and the launch of the game ball B is permitted, the setting value is changed in the change permission state. The notification after the setting change which notifies that is performed. As a notification after the setting change, the voice of “setting changed”, the message “setting changed”, and lamp emission are executed. Further, the notification after the setting change is performed by operating the handle 195 for the first time after the setting value is changed (handle) even when a person other than an authorized worker who changes the setting value changes the setting value by an illegal act. 195 is touched). As a result, if a regular operator who changes the setting value does not change the setting value, but the notification is made after the setting change, the setting value setting is changed due to fraud. It will be known to the outside, and the deterrence against fraudulent acts can be increased.

  In this example, the game ball B is emitted during a period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that permission is not set is set, and the game ball B is fired from the time t5 (may be timing t4). If the handle 195 is operated (contacted with the handle 195) from the time before the game ball B is permitted to be released, the contact with the handle 195 is once released after the game ball B is permitted to be released. The game ball B is not fired unless the handle 195 is contacted (operated) again (with contact detection turned OFF). In other words, even if the contact of the handle 195 has been turned ON before the timing t5, as long as the contact detection with respect to the handle 195 is not detected from OFF to ON after the timing t5, the continued handle 195 is continued. Is disabled so that the game ball B is not fired. As a result, even if a regular operator who changes the setting value is in contact with the handle 195 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is moved with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game is closed, the game ball B is not inadvertently fired, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from losing.

  Further, unlike the above, in consideration of speeding up the game start based on the end of the change permission state, when the handle 195 is operated from the time before the game ball B is permitted to be fired, While continuing the contact, the contact with the handle 195 that is continued may be made effective so that the game ball B can be launched from the time when the game ball B is permitted to be launched. In such a case, before the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the handle 195 is operated to prepare for the launch of the game ball B, and immediately after the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. You can start playing.

  In this example, the game ball B can be launched from the time t5 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and games such as symbol variation, big hit games, and small hit games can be played. Although it is in a state where it can be performed, it may be in a state in which a game can be performed immediately at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. In other words, from the time point t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the game ball B can be launched, and a game such as symbol variation, big hit game, and small hit game can be performed. The fraud monitoring may be performed with the contents described in “Unauthorized monitoring at the time”. In such a configuration, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5. However, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, symbol variation, big hit game, small You may make it display the image (game start notification) which notifies that it became possible to start games, such as a hit game.

  As another example, after turning on the power, before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113. You may comprise so that a corresponding process may be performed in advance. In such a configuration, the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 is a state in which the setting value is changed (change-permitted state). B may not be permitted to be fired, and the detection signal may not be input effectively when the game ball B wins a prize opening.

  In the other example described above, the change permission state (which may include a change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5) that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4 may be the magnetic sensor 2010 or the like. While monitoring the dishonesty using the vibration sensor 3003, it may be configured not to notify the abnormal state when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected. In addition, normally, when it is determined that an illegal act due to a magnet or vibration is performed, the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter is incremented by 1 but from timing t3 to timing t4. Even if it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is performed in the change permission state (period in which the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 may be included), You may comprise so that the value of a goto counter or a vibration goto counter may not be added. Even in such a configuration, even when a regular operator who changes the setting value changes the setting value, even if the magnet is brought close to or applied with vibration, fraud due to the magnet or vibration There is no notification or addition as an action, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of fraud from becoming an obstacle when changing the setting value.

  Note that the various processes related to the change permission state described above may have various needs depending on the environment of the game arcade and the like, and may be selected and set for each game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on with an operation of a normal RAM clear switch instead of the change permission state, a state in which the operator of the game hall can select which setting is set for various processes regarding the change permission state, Thereafter, when the change permission state is generated, various processes related to the change permission state are executed with the selected setting. Thereby, in the game hall A, the fraud monitoring is not monitored in the change permission state, but the contact with the handle 195 is set to be valid, and in the game hall B, the fraud monitoring is performed in the change permission state. It can be set to be non-monitoring and the touch to the handle 195 can be invalidated, and whether or not it is desired to check the launch operation with the handle 195 in the change permission state, etc. Can be adapted to.

[25-3. Unauthorized monitoring during confirmation of setting value]
In the above, it was explained that fraud monitoring during setting value setting change is not monitoring fraud during setting value setting change, but regarding fraud monitoring during setting value confirmation display, You may make it comprise either the state which is not monitoring the illegal act during the confirmation display of a setting value, and the state which is monitoring the illegal act partially. First, a case where an illegal act is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraud when the fraud is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value.

  When performing the confirmation display of the set value that is currently set, first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and check that there is no symbol variation (no hold). Then, the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t5), and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the clock is changed in the same manner as the setting change. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by setting the first key ON by rotating 60 degrees in the direction (timing t6). At this time, the setting indicator 1310g displays the current set value (the set value from the set value 1 to the set value 6 when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON). To do. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (timing t7). The state where the set value is displayed with respect to 1310g is switched to the non-display state. That is, during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the setting value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state), and after the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value confirmation is performed. The display is not performed (confirmed state). Then, by removing the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), it is possible to play a game. Become.

  Note that at the time point t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless the game ball B such as a prize ball is not paid out. ing. Also, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the first ON operation is performed by rotating the setting key 60 degrees clockwise, the game ball B such as a prize ball is paid out. If it has been released, the setting key switch 1311a may not be set to ON (the setting key is OFF), or after the game ball B such as a prize ball has been paid out, the setting key switch 1311a May be configured to display the current set value on the setting display 1310g with the setting key ON.

  As another example, when the confirmation display of the currently set value is performed, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on) is the same as when the setting value is changed. In the cut-off state), the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON and the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1 so that the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). May be. In addition, when the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, the setting value can be changed (change permission state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, it may be configured to shift to a state where the confirmation display of the set value can be performed (confirmation display state). In such a configuration, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, the state shifts to a state in which the setting value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state). The state (confirmation display state) in which confirmation display of the set value is performed corresponds to the period from timing t6 to timing t7.

  In this example, during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the setting value confirmation display is being performed (confirmation display state). And a special period during which the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the winning opening. In the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, information related to the confirmation display of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , So that the hall clerk can grasp that the confirmation is being displayed.

  Specifically, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and monitoring of cheating using the game area magnetic sensor as a whole Not to run. This is because, in the confirmation display state, an authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and an unauthorized act using a magnet is performed by a person other than the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display of the setting value. This is because there is no room to perform. In addition, when performing a confirmation display of the set value, even if a legitimate worker performing the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Inhibition of regular confirmation display work can be suppressed.

  Similarly, in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and monitoring of cheating using the game area vibration sensor as a whole are executed. I try not to. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a regular operator who performs confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is a room for a person other than the regular worker who performs the confirmation display to perform fraud due to vibration. This is because there is not. In addition, even if the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display adds vibration when performing the confirmation display of the set value, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act due to vibration, and the regular confirmation display work Inhibition can be suppressed.

  Further, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is not set. The launch of the game ball B is prohibited. Thereby, even if the regular worker who performs the confirmation display of the set value touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and the inhibition of the regular confirmation display work can be suppressed. In addition, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B cannot be launched.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, the big winning port 2005 and other winning ports and various gate parts (gates) ), The detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid even if the main control MPU 1310a inputs the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor when the game ball B enters. Note that the detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor itself may not be performed, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. Thus, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation, Any of the payouts will not be performed, so that even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular operation of confirming and displaying the set value, The game progress by it can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from a detection sensor corresponding to each of a winning opening, a gate portion (gate), and the like in a confirmation display state that is a period from timing t6 to timing t7. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU 1310a so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Thus, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008, for example, the game monitor B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a ball clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state, and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid a situation in which measurement is performed (added to the out number counter).

  Further, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, or the like The amount of light output from the light emitting member cannot be adjusted.

  In the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. A notification during confirmation display (confirmation display related notification) for notifying that the display is in progress is executed. As a notification during confirmation display, a sound that repeats “confirmation display”, a message display of “confirmation display!”, And lamp emission in a color corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 in the confirmation process are executed. Yes. This notification during confirmation display is notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the body frame opening notification performed when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release notification (such as “open frame” display or voice) is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame release notification is performed. The notification during confirmation display is executed with the highest priority without performing the above. The body frame release notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, and the confirmation display notification is given priority over the body frame release notification, and the body frame release notification is performed after the confirmation display notification is completed. A form can also be illustrated.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, in addition to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, notification by the function display unit 1400 is also given as the above-described confirmation display notification. Running. Specifically, in the function display unit 1400, although not shown, a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special indicator In addition to the design indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change-permitted state), A confirmation display indicator that includes one LED for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state) is provided. In the confirmation display state, only the LEDs of the display during confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other displays are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it can be grasped that the game does not proceed by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

  Further, in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing t6 to timing t7 (which may be a period that includes the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the first start port 2002 and the second start port are included. Even when the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from a corresponding detection sensor when the game ball B wins a winning port such as 2004, the normal winning port 2003, or the big winning port 2005, the detection of the gaming ball B However, when such a detection signal is input, the launch of the game ball B is not permitted by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the speaker. A warning effect that informs that the game ball B has won a prize illegally even though the game ball B has not won a prize at the prize opening. Running. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the notification during confirmation display and the body frame release notification. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the notification during confirmation display or the main body frame opening notification.

  Also, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the game ball B is not permitted to be launched, and the detection signal can not be input when the game ball B wins the winning opening. Although it cannot be started, the state is maintained until the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed thereafter (timing t8). In other words, the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8 is a period in which a detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by an illegal act, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. Moreover, since there is a possibility of receiving an impact of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, monitoring of fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, fraud using the game area unit magnetic sensor Monitoring, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and monitoring of cheating using the game area vibration sensor are in a standby state as unexecuted.

  In addition, the game ball B can be launched from the time t8 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and games such as symbol variation, big hit games, and small hit games can be performed. In this state, the monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started with the contents described in [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal time] described above. The game ball B can be launched before the timing t6 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. It is assumed that a game such as a game or a small hit game can be performed, and the monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started with the contents described in the above-mentioned “Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times”.

  Further, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the game display is waiting for the start of the game on the screen of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying this is displayed (game standby notification). Then, after the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a predetermined period from the timing t8, a game such as symbol variation, big hit game, and small hit game is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600. Is displayed (game start notification).

  Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in a state where the setting key is ON, but when such a setting key is in the ON state. In this case, warning effects A and B for notifying that the setting key is turned on illegally by the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are executed. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON state (timing t1) while the symbol variation is performed at the normal time, the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. The warning effect A is executed until (timing t2). Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the ON state (timing t3) when the symbol variation is not constantly performed, the setting key switch 1311a is returned to the setting key OFF state. During the period (timing t4), the warning effect B is executed. The warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effect being executed. In other words, when the warning effects A and B are executed, the current effects are stopped and the warning effects A and B are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is being performed. The warning effects A and B are executed in the same manner, but may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

  In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during a period of monitoring illegal acts due to magnets or vibrations, the magnetism or vibrations are output over a predetermined period by the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the speaker. An anomaly production effect that notifies that the state is abnormal due to the occurrence of an anomaly is executed. Also, in the abnormality occurrence effect, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area unit magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality (whether magnetic or vibration) Whether the occurrence is detected), the part where the abnormality is detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, It is a notification of the surrounding area). The abnormality occurrence effect is executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, when the abnormality occurrence effect is executed, the effect being executed is stopped and the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

  In this example, the game ball B is fired during a period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7). Although the logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that permission is set is not set, considering that the launch operation is inspected by the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, The logic of the launch permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195. However, in the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the permission until the game ball B is released is limited. It is desirable to prevent a detection signal from being input even if a game ball B is inserted into various winning gates or gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed unreasonably. .

  In this example, the game ball B is emitted during a period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7). The logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that permission is set is not set, and the launch of the game ball B from the point of time t8 (may be timing t7). However, when the handle 195 is operated (contacted with the handle 195) from the time before the game ball B is permitted to be released, the contact with the handle 195 is temporarily performed after the game ball B is permitted to be released. The game ball B is not fired unless it is released (contact detection is turned off) and the handle 195 is contacted (operated) again. In other words, even if the contact of the handle 195 has been turned ON before the timing t8, the contact to the continued handle 195 is continued as long as the contact detection for the handle 195 is not detected from OFF to ON after the timing t8. Is disabled so that the game ball B is not fired. As a result, even if a regular operator who confirms and displays the set value touches the handle 195 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is moved with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game is closed, the game ball B is not inadvertently fired, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from losing.

  Unlike the above, in consideration of speeding up the start of the game based on the end of the confirmation display state, when the handle 195 is operated from the time before the launch of the game ball B, the handle 195 is moved to. The contact with the handle 195 may be made effective while the contact of the game ball B is continued, so that the game ball B can be launched from the time when the game ball B is permitted to be launched. In such a case, before the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the handle 195 is operated to prepare for the launch of the game ball B, and immediately after the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. You can start playing.

  Further, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from the time t8 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and games such as symbol variations, big hit games, and small hit games can be played. Although it is in a state where it can be performed, it may be in a state in which a game can be performed immediately at the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. That is, from the time point t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be launched, and a game such as symbol variation, big hit game, and small hit game can be performed. The fraud monitoring may be performed with the contents described in “Unauthorized monitoring at the time”. In such a configuration, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8. However, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the symbol variation, the big hit game, the small game You may make it display the image (game start notification) which notifies that it became possible to start games, such as a hit game.

  As another example, in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing t6 to timing t7 (may be a period that includes a confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor. While monitoring the fraud using 3003, it may be configured not to notify the abnormal state when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected. In addition, normally, when it is determined that an illegal act due to magnets or vibration is performed, the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter is incremented by 1 but from timing t6 to timing t7. Even if it is determined that fraudulent acts due to magnets or vibration are performed in the confirmation display state (period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8) that is a period of You may comprise so that the value of a goto counter or a vibration goto counter may not be added. Even in such a configuration, even when a regular operator who confirms the set value displays a confirmation of the set value, even if the magnet is brought close to or applied with vibration, fraud due to the magnet or vibration There is no notification or addition as an action, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of fraud from becoming an obstacle when performing a confirmation display of the set value.

  Note that the various processes related to the confirmation display state described above may have various needs depending on the environment of the game hall and the like, and may be selected and set for each game hall. For example, when the power is turned on with an operation of a normal RAM clear switch instead of the confirmation display state, a state where an operator of the game hall can select which setting is set for various processes regarding the confirmation display state, Thereafter, when the confirmation display state is generated, various processes related to the confirmation display state are executed with the selected setting. As a result, in the game hall A, the fraud monitoring is not monitored in the confirmation display state, but the contact with the handle 195 is set to be valid, and in the gaming hall B, the fraud monitoring is performed in the confirmation display state. It can be set to be non-monitoring and the touch to the handle 195 can be invalidated, and whether or not it is desired to check the firing operation with the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, etc. Can be adapted to.

  Next, a case where an illegal act is partially monitored during the confirmation display of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraud when a part of the fraud is monitored during the confirmation display of the set value. Here, the points different from the case where the fraudulent act is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value described above will be described below.

  In this example, during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the setting value confirmation display is being performed (confirmation display state), but the launch of the game ball B is not permitted and the game ball is placed in the winning opening. A special period during which the detection signal input is not validated when B wins, and only fraudulent acts in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored. Yes.

  Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the gaming area unit magnetic sensor is not monitored for fraud, but the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used. To monitor for fraudulent activity. In the confirmation display state, a regular operator who performs confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a with the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but the setting value A person other than a regular operator who performs the confirmation display of the user performs an illegal act to bring the magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the game ball B is won at the winning opening by cheating, a detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period during which it is not possible, it is not necessary to monitor fraud using the game area magnetic sensor.

  The setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in a period until timing t8 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. To monitor the misconduct. In other words, regarding the monitoring of fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, it is normal time, whether the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Regardless of the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored.

  Similarly, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the illegal action using the game area portion vibration sensor is not monitored, but the illegal operation using the setting operation portion vibration sensor is not performed. I try to monitor the behavior. In the confirmation display state, a regular operator who performs confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but the set value A person other than a regular operator who performs the confirmation display of the user performs an illegal act so as to apply vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the game ball B is won at the winning opening by cheating, a detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period during which it is not possible, it is not necessary to monitor fraud using the game area vibration sensor.

  The setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in a period until timing t8 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. To monitor for fraudulent activity. In other words, the monitoring of fraud using the setting operation unit vibration sensor is in a normal state, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Regardless of the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored.

  Further, in the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), an illegal operation using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is performed. Action monitoring and fraud monitoring using setting operation unit vibration sensors are performed, but when those sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the magnetism or vibration is displayed according to the image of the effect display device 1600. An abnormality occurrence effect A for notifying that there is an abnormal state due to the occurrence of is generated. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected) or abnormality is detected depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The site (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) is notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at the time t7 (may be the time t8) at the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF. The abnormality occurrence effect A is forcibly ended. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a regular operator who performs confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, the regular worker who performs the confirmation display of The possibility of unintentionally bringing the magnet closer or adding vibrations cannot be excluded. For this reason, even when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence effect A being executed is forcibly It is going to end.

  As described above, during the period in which the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 is included, the fraud monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the fraud monitoring using the setting operation unit vibration sensor are performed. Even during normal times other than that period, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring of cheating using the game area magnetic sensor, using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Monitoring of cheating and monitoring of cheating using game area vibration sensors. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is generated over a predetermined period by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. The abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying the existence is being executed. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurs. The production is performed in a manner that is less conspicuous than the production B. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the person who performs the confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when performing the confirmation display of the setting value, the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display is not intentional. This is because it is impossible to exclude the possibility that the magnet has been moved closer or the vibration has been applied. In the abnormality occurrence effect B, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area unit magnetism, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area unit vibration sensor detects an abnormality, either the content of the abnormality (magnetic or vibration) Whether the occurrence is detected), the part where the abnormality is detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, It is a notification of the surrounding area).

  In addition, as described above, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 that is a period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, the outer frame 2 is output by an image from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or a speaker. The main body frame opening notification for notifying that the main body frame 4 is open is executed. In the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. A notification during confirmation display (confirmation display related notification) for notifying that the display is in progress is executed. And after performing the operation | work which opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, it transfers to a confirmation display state by setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame release notification If the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state, the body frame opening notification is given. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed in preference to the notification during confirmation display.

[25-4. Modification of fraud monitoring during setting value setting change]
In the above, it has been explained that fraud monitoring during setting value setting change is not monitoring fraud during setting value setting change, but it may be configured to partially monitor fraud Good. A case where an illegal act is partially monitored while the setting value is changed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraud when a part of the fraud is monitored during setting value setting change. Here, the points different from the case where the fraud is not monitored during the setting value setting change described above will be described below.

  In the above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 168 and 169), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. The setting change process in step S37 is not terminated until it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process. In the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the following steps are performed. The prohibition of setting the interrupt permission of S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is delayed compared to the normal power-on. That is, since the main control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 170) is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process, and the fraud detection in step S112. The process, the launch permission signal setting process in step S113, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. On the other hand, after the power is turned on, before starting the setting change process in step S37, it corresponds to at least a switch input process in step S104, an illegal act detection process in step S112, and a launch permission signal setting process in step S113. You may comprise so that a process (same process) may be performed in advance. In this example, with such a configuration, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value setting is changed (change-permitted state), but the launch of the game ball B is not permitted. In addition, a special period during which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the winning opening is made, and in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided in the illegal act. Only fraudulent activity is monitored.

  Prior to the start of the setting change process in step S37, the process corresponding to the fraud detection process in step S112 (the same process) is performed in advance, and among the fraudulent acts, the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch In the case where only the fraudulent act for the area provided with 1311a is monitored, in the process, similar to the fraudulent act detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor 3003 is input, It is determined that an illegal act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). However, in the main control power-on process, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 and the setting change process in step S37 is completed (the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change process). After the determination, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. For this reason, even if it is determined that fraudulent acts due to magnets or vibration are being performed in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are added (incremented). When the RAM is cleared at the end of the change permission state, the value 0 (zero) is set (initialized) as the initial value to the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter. Thus, at the end of the change permission state, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are initialized. However, in the change permission state, the person who changes the setting value sets the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b. When the setting value is changed, it is impossible to exclude the possibility that the person who changes the setting unintentionally brings the magnet closer or adds vibration. For this reason, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act due to magnets or vibration is being performed, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are initially set. It is going to become.

  Specifically, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the gaming area unit magnetic sensor is not monitored for fraud, but the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used. To monitor for fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b. However, a person other than a regular operator who changes the setting value performs an illegal act to bring the magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction such as being performed.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the game ball B is won at the winning opening by cheating, a detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period during which it is not possible, it is not necessary to monitor fraud using the game area magnetic sensor.

  Note that the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in a period until timing t5 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. To monitor the misconduct. In other words, regarding the monitoring of fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, it is normal or whether the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Regardless of whether the change is permitted or not, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored.

  Similarly, in the change-permitted state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the fraudulent act is not monitored using the game area vibration sensor, but the illegal operation using the setting operation section vibration sensor is not performed. I try to monitor the behavior. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b. However, a person other than a regular operator who changes the setting value performs a fraudulent act to add vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the setting value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction such as being performed.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the game ball B is won at the winning opening by cheating, a detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period during which it is not possible, it is not necessary to monitor fraud using the game area vibration sensor.

  Note that the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4 but also in a period until timing t5 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. To monitor the misconduct. In other words, the monitoring of fraud using the setting operation unit vibration sensor is in a normal state, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Regardless of whether the change is permitted or not, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored.

  In the change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is set by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. An effect during setting change for notifying that the change is in progress is executed. It should be noted that in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 (may be a period that includes the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even when the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from a corresponding detection sensor when the game ball B wins a winning port such as 2004, the normal winning port 2003, or the big winning port 2005, the detection of the gaming ball B However, when such a detection signal is input, the launch of the game ball B is not permitted by the output of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the speaker. Warning effect for notifying that the game ball B has won a prize illegally in spite of the period when the game ball B does not win the prize port. Running. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the setting change notification and the main body frame release notification. That is, at the time of executing the warning effect C, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification or the main body frame opening notification.

  Further, in the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (may be the change permission state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), an illegal operation using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is performed. Action monitoring and fraudulent behavior monitoring using a setting operation unit vibration sensor are performed. When these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the magnetism or vibration is displayed according to the image of the effect display device 1600. An abnormality occurrence effect A for notifying that there is an abnormal state due to the occurrence of an error is executed. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected) or abnormality is detected depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The site (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) is notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at the time point t4 (which may be the time point t5), which is the end time of the change permission state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF. The abnormality occurrence effect A is forcibly ended. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and changes the setting when the setting value is changed. The possibility that a legitimate worker has unintentionally brought the magnet closer or applied vibration cannot be excluded. For this reason, even when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence effect A being executed is forcibly It is going to end.

  As described above, during the period in which the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 is included, the fraud monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the fraud monitoring using the setting operation unit vibration sensor are performed. Even during normal times other than that period, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring of cheating using the game area magnetic sensor, using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Monitoring of cheating and monitoring of cheating using game area vibration sensors. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is generated over a predetermined period by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. The abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying the existence is being executed. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurs. The production is performed in a manner that is less conspicuous than the production B. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and changes the setting when the setting value is changed. This is because it is impossible to exclude the possibility that a legitimate worker unintentionally brought the magnet closer or added vibration. In the abnormality occurrence effect B, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game region unit magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game region unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality (whether magnetic or vibration) The third distribution device 2550, whether it is a region where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311 a is provided, or a region in front of the game region 5 a. Is the area around the area).

  In addition, as described above, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 that is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t5 after the power is turned on, an output from the effect display device 1600 or an output from the lamp or the speaker The main body frame opening notification is performed to notify the outer frame 2 that the main body frame 4 is open. In addition, in a change permission state that is a period from timing t3 to timing t4 after power is turned on, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 A setting change notification (setting change related notification) for notifying that the setting value setting is being changed is executed. Then, after the work for opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key ON to shift to the change-permitted state. If the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change-permitted state, the main body frame is used. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed in preference to the opening notification or the setting change notification.

[26. Modification of setting change such as winning probability]
In the above example, control is made to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the result of the special lottery, and the game ball B is received in the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 during the small hit game state. In the case, the one for changing the setting of the winning probability or the like is shown for the one controlled to shift to the big hit gaming state, but as shown in FIG. 237, the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 are not provided. Or, even if the game ball B is received in the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 during the small hit gaming state, the winning probability or the like may be changed in the setting that is not controlled to shift to the big hit gaming state. Good. Hereinafter, a modified example of a setting change such as a winning probability in a pachinko machine in which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not provided will be described as a second embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment is replaced with the accessory prize winning port 2006 (the first V prize winning port 2007 and the second V prize winning port 2008 are arranged inside) of the pachinko machine 1 of the above-described example, The second grand prize opening 2006A (the first V prize opening 2007 and the second V prize opening 2008 are not arranged therein) is provided, and the other configurations are the same.

[27-1. Game contents of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”) that is advantageous to the player. , A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “small hits”, “per time reduction (shorter time)”, “per probability variation (probability change)”) is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time). In the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the second special lottery result according to the reception to the second start port 2004 is preferentially suggested (derived). To do. Note that the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 without giving priority to suggesting (derived) the special lottery result according to the acceptance to the second start port 2004 (priority change). The special lottery results may be suggested (derived) in the same order (sequential variation), or the first special lottery results according to the acceptance to the first start port 2002 and the acceptance to the second start port 2004 The second special lottery result may be suggested (derived) in parallel with the same period (simultaneous variation).

  In addition, the special lottery results that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R positive change big hit”, “15R positive change big hit”. ”,“ 15R normal big hit ”, etc. In the present embodiment, the second special lottery result includes “small hit”, while the first special lottery result does not include “small hit”. In addition, both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result include “small hit”, and the second special lottery result wins “small hit” than the first special lottery result. The probability may be set high.

  If the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is “small hit”, After a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s) has elapsed after the two major winning openings 2006A are in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, a “small hit” game in which the game ball B is closed in an unacceptable state. Executed. Since the second big prize opening 2006A is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, when “small hit” is drawn, “right-handed” and first guide A game ball B is driven into the passage 2521. In addition, in the small hit game of the second embodiment, although the period during which the second big winning opening 2006A is in the open state is shorter than that in the big hit game, it is possible to continue hitting the game ball so as to flow down the first guide passage 2521. For example, at least one game ball B can enter the second big prize opening 2006A in one small hit game. During the small hit game, the game state before the start of the small hit game state (such as a probability change state or a short time state described later) is maintained, and after the small hit game, the game state before the start of the small hit game state continues. .

  The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are “15R probability variable big hit” or “15R normal big hit”. In some cases, a predetermined time (for example, 29 s) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is opened to accept the game ball B, or a predetermined limit number (for example, ten pieces) to the special winning opening 2005 is reached. If any of the conditions for accepting the game ball B) is satisfied, an open / close pattern that makes the game ball B unacceptable (a single open / close pattern is called one round) is repeated 15 times. A game is executed. If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are “15R normal big hit”, after the big hit game is finished, the lottery is received by accepting the game balls B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The change time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion combined) The control is shifted to the “short-time state” in which the time until the next “winning” is drawn is shortened until it reaches 100 times). In addition, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are “15R probability variable big hit”, after the “big hit” game ends, until the next big hit, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B of the player will be shortened to a shorter time than usual for suggesting the player with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. Transition control is performed to a “probability change state (high probability state)” that improves the probability that the special lottery result is “winning”.

  If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result lottered by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are “2R probability variation big hit”, the second big winning port 2006A is When a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 s) elapses after the game ball B is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, an open / close pattern in which the game ball B cannot be received in a closed state (one open / close pattern is 1 round) The “big hit” game is repeated twice. In addition, after the “big hit” game is over, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the next “big hit” is reached. "Probability change state (high probability state) that shortens the variation time of the special symbol to suggest the result to the player, and improves the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be" win " ) ”.

  Since the second big prize opening 2006A and the big prize opening 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center bonus 2500, the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center bonus 2500 Can be made to the player. If the game ball B is received in the second big prize opening 2006A and the big prize opening 2005 when the second big prize opening 2006A and the big prize opening 2005 are in the open state, the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the second big prize opening 2006A and the big prize opening 2005 can receive the game ball B, the game balls B are received by the second big prize opening 2006A and the big prize opening 2005, so that many game balls B can be received. Can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  The guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is easier to perform the driving operation on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side. Since it is less likely to be accepted into the grand prize opening 2005 than the side, it is possible to make the player select which passage is aimed for, and make it difficult for the player to get bored with various games A decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, only the game ball B that has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 side can be received at the second grand prize winning opening 2006A.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are received between the start of the special lottery and the result of the special lottery being suggested. When the game ball B is received at the start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time. In the following, the blinking of the LED for a predetermined time for informing the player of the first special lottery result will be referred to as “change display of the first special symbol” and to indicate the second special lottery result to the player. The blinking of the LED for a predetermined time is sometimes referred to as “variable display of the second special symbol”, and the LED lighting combination pattern that suggests the first special lottery result to the player is the “stop symbol of the first special symbol”. The LED lighting combination pattern that suggests to the player the second special lottery result may be referred to as a “second special symbol stop symbol”.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a state in which each image sequence is changed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of images are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the image sequences are displayed in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in order, and the respective picture sequences are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture sequences to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, “small hit” game, “big hit” game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. A player participation type effect that operates the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, etc. by using the front effect unit 3200, etc. as appropriate, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the operation to be operated by the player is wrong or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player to that effect.

  When the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, a lottery of a normal lottery result as to whether or not the second start opening door 2411 is opened in a predetermined pattern is performed on the main control board 1310. Then, the selected lottery result is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as normal variation time) on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time for suggesting the player the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 is set to “6000 s” in the normal state, while the probability variation state. In the short time state, “0.1 s” is set.

  In addition, the probability per base (probability that the normal lottery result will be “normal hit”) is “10/11”, and when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, “normal” The second start port door 2411 is opened. In addition, when the normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the period during which the second start door 2411 is opened is set to “0.1 s” in the normal state, while “2” in the probability variation state and the short time state. .0s ". Therefore, in the normal state, the second start port 2411 is opened only at intervals of 6000 seconds at the shortest, and the period during which the second start port 2411 is open is extremely short. It is difficult to. Thereby, the fraudulent act aiming at game ball B acceptance to the 2nd starting port 2004 in a normal state can be suppressed. On the other hand, in the certain change state, the second start port 2411 is not only frequently opened, but also the open period is long, so that it is easy to receive the game ball B in the second start port 2004. . The probability of hitting a normal map may be different between a normal state (low probability non-short state) and a short time state (low probability short state) or a probabilistic state (high probability short state). The probability per base figure is set to “1/11”, the probability per base figure is set to “10/11” in the short-time state or the probability-changed state, and the game ball B is extremely accepted into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, by making it easier to receive the game ball B in the second start port 2004 during the short-time state or the probable change state, the game ball B can be received into the second start port 2004 during the short-time state or the probable change state. You may make it suppress the fraud act aiming at game ball B reception to the 2nd starting port 2004 in a normal state, making it generate | occur | produce frequently. In addition, the probability per base figure is set to zero (0/11) in the normal state (low probability non-short state) so as not to be won. And “11/11” may be used to further suppress fraud aimed at accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in a normal state.

  As described above, in the normal state, the game ball B is hardly received at the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result based mainly on the game ball B received at the first start port 2002 (the first Special symbols). On the other hand, in the probability variation state and the short-time state, the game ball B is driven to aim at the right side of the center accessory 2500, so that the game ball B is frequently received at the second start port 2004, mainly the second The suggestion of the result of the second special lottery based on the reception of the game ball B at the start port 2004 (the change display of the second special symbol) is performed.

  In addition, if the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 from the start of the normal lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the result of the normal lottery result is suggested. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the normal lottery result previously drawn is completed. The maximum number of the regular lottery results to be held is limited to four for the normal prize opening 2003, and for more than that, even if the game ball B is received in the normal prize winner 2003, the normal lottery result is held. Without destroying it. Instead of this example, the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 from the start of the normal lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 until the result of the normal lottery is suggested. In this case, the normal lottery result may be discarded without being held. This further prevents the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the normal winning port 2003 and the second starting port 2004 in the normal state, and the second special lottery is performed in the normal state to reduce the small hit. Occurrence can be prevented, and fraud aimed at accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state can be further suppressed.

  In addition, the suggestion of the normal lottery result lottery by accepting the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a normal lottery result. The suggestion of the normal lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the LED different from the LED that suggests the special lottery result is turned on and off repeatedly for a predetermined time, and then the normal lottery is performed depending on the combination of the LEDs that are lit. Suggest results.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the normal state, the game ball B is driven toward the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the first special is based on the reception of the game ball B to the first start port 2002. Suggestion of lottery result (change display of first special symbol) is performed. In addition, when the result of the first special lottery becomes “15R normal big hit” in the normal state, the transition to the short time state is controlled after the big hit game ends, and the game ball B is aimed at the right side of the center accessory 2500. The suggestion of the result of the second special lottery based on the reception of the game ball B at the second start port 2004 (display of the variation of the second special symbol) is performed. If the specified number of fluctuations (the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery is 100 times) is reached without a big hit in the time-shortened state, the time-shortened state ends and the normal state The game ball B is once again aimed at the left side of the center actor 2500, and the first special lottery result based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 (first special lottery result) Symbol variation display) is performed.

  In addition, when the result of the first special lottery becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” in the normal state or in the short time state, the transition control to the probability variation state (high probability state) is performed after the big hit game ends, and the center role The game sphere B is aimed at the right side of 2500 and the second special lottery result based on the reception of the game sphere B into the second start port 2004 is suggested (variation display of the second special symbol). The probability change state is continuously executed until the next big hit, and when the second special lottery result becomes “15R normal big hit” at the time of the probability change state, the transition control is performed to the short time state after the big hit game ends, and the big hit occurs in the short time state. If the predetermined number of fluctuations (the suggestion number of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery is 100 times) is reached, the time reduction state is terminated and the transition control to the normal state is performed.

  Further, when the second special lottery result becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” in the probability variation state, the transition control to the probability variation state (high probability state) is performed again after the big hit game is finished. In this way, the probability variation state continues until “15R normal big hit” is reached, and when it becomes “15R normal big hit”, the transition control is made to the short-time state after the big hit game ends.

  In addition, when there is no second special lottery result being held and only the first special lottery result is being held, or there is no second special lottery result being held, the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 Is accepted, the suggestion of the first special lottery result (change display of the first special symbol) is also performed in the short-time state or the probable variation state. When the first special lottery result becomes “15R normal big hit” at the time-short state or the probability change state, the transition to the time-short state is controlled after the big hit game ends, and the first special lottery result is “15R at the time-short state or the probability change state”. When it becomes “probable big hit” or “2R probable big hit”, the transition control to the probable state is performed after the big hit game is over.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of “small hit” as the second special lottery result (small hit probability) is set to be very high compared to the big hit probability (for example, the big hit probability of 10 in the probability variation state). About twice). In addition, during the short-time state or the probable change state, the game ball B is frequently received at the second start port 2004 and the second special lottery is performed, so that the small win frequently occurs and the second big prize is won. The mouth 2006A is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s).

  In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the short-time state or the probable change state, a small hit frequently occurs in the second special lottery, and even if it does not become a big hit, a winning ball exceeding the shot amount is obtained. It becomes possible, and the more prize balls can be obtained as the time-short state or the probabilistic state lasts longer. Therefore, not only the game ball B does not decrease in the short time state or the probable change state, but also the player's possession ball can be increased by the winning ball acquired by the generated small hit. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball B is consumed in a normal state, and the player's ball is not consumed even if the game ball B is less consumed or a small hit occurs due to the occurrence of a small hit. The game can be controlled to be completely different from the game executed in the short state and the probability change state as time increases.

[27-2. Change of setting such as winning probability of second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the probability of the big hit or the small hit changed according to the set value will be described.

  Also in the second embodiment, a table corresponding to a set value is selected as a table used in special lottery or the like (a winning determination table, a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, etc.) as in the example described above. Note that tables used in special lotteries and the like are provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (A), in this embodiment, “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” are set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

  In addition, the jackpot probability that is common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value. The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state and the short time state (low probability state) is “1/319” at the set value 1, “1/309” at the set value 2, and the set value 3 Is “1/299”, the setting value 4 is “1/289”, the setting value 5 is “1/279”, and the setting value 6 is “1/269”. The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probability variation state (high probability state) is “1/30” at the set value 1, “1/40” at the set value 2, and the set value 3 Is “1/50”, the setting value 4 is “1/60”, the setting value 5 is “1/70”, and the setting value 6 is “1/80”.

  As described above, in the normal state and the short time state (low probability state), the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability becomes higher. The probability of big hits is getting lower. That is, in the normal state and the short time state, the jackpot probability of the set value 6 is the highest, while in the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the set value 1 is the lowest. Note that the jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional or inversely proportional to the set value, and for some cases, the jackpot probability set to a setting value lower than the set value is larger than the jackpot probability set to an arbitrary set value. You may make it set so that it may become high.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (A), the small hit probability in the first special lottery (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit in the hit determination table is won) is “0” for all set values. It is difficult to win a prize ball by small hits in the normal state and short-time state (no wins in small hits), while the small hit probability in the second special lottery (small hits in the hit determination table) The ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the player has been won) is a common “one third” for all set values and is a very high probability compared to the big hit probability. Wins occur frequently, making it easy to win prize balls.

  In the probability variation state, the big hit probability is the lowest at the set value 6, so that the big hit is less likely to occur than the low set value (delay), and this causes the probability variation state to continue for a long time, so the set value is high. The number of small hits that occur before the big hit is increased. That is, the higher the set value, the more winning balls can be obtained by the small hit, and the next big hit is also promised. The higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage. In other words, in the probability variation state, the next big hit is promised at any set value, but the expected value of the number of award balls that can be obtained other than the big win is different for each set value, and the higher the set value, the bigger the win The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be earned outside is increasing.

  In addition, without changing the duration of the probable change state to the next big hit, the predetermined number of fluctuations as in the normal state and the short-time state (the suggestion number of 100 times including the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery) When the setting value is reached, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the set value becomes higher, so that the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage by increasing the occurrence frequency of the jackpot. It is also good (so-called frequency change probability change). In this case, although the next big hit is not promised, the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained other than the big hit for each set value is made different, and the higher the set value, the more the number of winning balls that can be won other than the big hit Although the expected value is increased, it is possible to realize a game property that is expected to generate a big hit before the end condition of the probability variation state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest. In order to realize such a game, the probability of winning in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the short-time state should not be set (equal to 1/319), and the probability change Only the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state may be set as described above.

  Further, in realizing the gameability of the second embodiment, in the case of a setting value lower than a specific setting value, while making the big hit probability in the probability variation state higher than the small hit probability in the second special lottery, When the set value is higher than the specific set value, the big hit probability in the probability variation state may be set lower than the small hit probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the short time state (low probability state) is set to “1/250” at the set value 1 and “240” at the set value 2. 1/230, 1/230 for setting value 3, 1/180 for setting value 4, 1/170 for setting value 5, 1/160 for setting value 6, The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probability variation state (high probability state) is “1/25” at the set value 1, “1/24” at the set value 2, and “ “1/23”, “1/18” for setting value 4, “1/17” for setting value 5, and “1/16” for setting value 6; An example in which the winning probability (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit in the hit determination table is won) is set to “1/20” common to all set values. It can be.

  In the case of such a configuration, with the setting values 1 to 3, since the small hit probability in the second special lottery is lower than the big hit probability in the probability variation state, the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability variation state On the other hand, while the number is relatively small, with the setting values 4 to 6, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of winning a big hit in the probability variation state. The number of balls will be relatively large. In particular, if the set value is 4 or more, the probability of big hits is lower than the probability of small hits in the probability variation state, and it is difficult for big hits to occur. It is possible to create a game that gives a sense of expectation that a ball can be acquired. Further, the history information of the probability of the big hit that occurred in the probability change state after power-on and the probability of the small hit that occurred in the probability change state is stored in a predetermined storage area (such as a RAM) of the peripheral control unit 1511. If various hit probability information based on the history information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the player can be aware that the probability of the small hit is higher than the probability of the big hit in the probability variation state. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that “the set value may be 4 or more”, and to provide new enjoyment and fun that have not been achieved in the past while the game is in a probabilistic state. In addition, the player feels that “the set value may be 4 or more” by the player experiencing that the probable state continues for a long period of time and that a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a small hit in the probable state. It can also be recognized, and even in this respect, it can add new enjoyment and fun. As described above, with a specific setting value (setting value 4 in the present embodiment) as a boundary, by changing to a game characteristic that allows a large number of prize balls to be obtained by small hits, the gaming promotion effect Can be further improved.

  As another embodiment, the higher the set value in the probability variation state, the higher the probability of winning in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, and the higher the set value, the second special lottery. The small hit probability at may be increased. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 238 (B), the big hit probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the short time state (low probability state) is the small hit probability is a set value 1. “1/319”, “1/309” for setting value 2, “1/299” for setting value 3, “1/289” for setting value 4, “1/279” for setting value 5 The setting value 6 is “1/269”. Further, the small hit probability in the probability variation state (high probability state) is “one third of 31.9” at the set value 1, “one third of 30.9” at the set value 2, and “29.9 minutes at the set value 3. No. 1 ”, the setting value 4 is“ 1 / 28.9 ”, the setting value 5 is“ 1 / 27.9 ”, and the setting value 6 is“ 1 / 26.9 ”. Thus, in the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of all the set values is increased 10 times compared to the normal state and the short time state.

  In addition, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is “1/7” at the setting value 1, “1/6” at the setting value 2, “1/5” at the setting value 3, and “1/5” at the setting value 4. “1/4”, the setting value 5 is “1/3”, and the setting value 6 is “1/2”. For this reason, with the setting value 1, only one small hit occurs every time the second special lottery is performed seven times, whereas with the setting value 6, the small bonus is 1 every time the second special lottery is performed twice. The frequency of occurrence per hit increases. In other words, the set value 6 is more frequent than the set value 1, and it is easier to acquire a prize ball by the small hit, and the higher the set value, the more award that can be acquired in the probability variation state or the short time state The expected number of balls is increasing.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned change of setting of the big hit probability and the small hit probability, or without changing the setting of the big hit probability and the small hit probability, etc., the advantage degree can be increased by changing the determination ratio of the big hit type for each set value. It may be changed. As described above, the second special lottery is mainly executed in the probability variation state and the short time state and a small hit can be generated, whereas in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and the small hit cannot be generated. For this reason, the degree of advantage changes according to the duration of the probability variation state or the short time state.

  Also, in the probability variation state, as in the normal state and the short time state, when the set value becomes higher, the big hit probability becomes higher, and when the set value becomes higher, the small hit probability becomes higher. In other words, a so-called falling lottery may be performed in which, when the special lottery result becomes “out of” during the probability variation state, whether or not the probability variation state is terminated is determined. In this case, the falling probability (probability of ending the probability variation state) may be made different for each set value, or the falling probability may be made different for each set value.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 238 (C), the fall probability in the high probability state may be “one hundredth” common to all set values, and in this case, the fall lottery result ends the probability variation state. Although the probability of indicating a big hit is not different for each set value, as shown in FIG. 238 (B), the jackpot probability is improved as the set value is higher. The degree of advantage is changed so that the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage.

  Further, the fall probability in the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. 238 (D), the fall probability is “1/80” for the set value 1 and the set value 2, “1/90” for the set value 3 and the set value 4, the set value 5 and the set value. A value of 6 may be “1/100”.

  In this case, with the setting value 1, the jackpot probability is “11.9”, whereas the fall probability is “1/80”, and the jackpot probability is about 2.5 times higher than the fall probability. On the other hand, in the setting value 6, the jackpot probability is “16.9th”, whereas the fall probability is “1/100” and the jackpot probability is about 3.7 of the fall probability. Doubled. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage. Yes.

  If a falling lottery result that ends the probability variation state is obtained during the probability variation state, the second special lottery is performed while the jackpot probability is returned from the probability variation probability (high probability) to the normal state probability (low probability). The control to shorten the variation time of the special symbol for suggesting the result to the player may be continued. In this case, the variation number after the end of the big hit game is a predetermined number (for example, the first special variation). The control may be terminated based on the fact that the suggestion number of the sum of the suggestion of the lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery is reached 100 times, and the transition control to the normal state may be performed. In other words, when a falling lottery result for ending the probability variation state is obtained during the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be terminated and the transition control to the short time state may be performed. In addition, when the falling lottery result for ending the probability variation state is obtained, the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is a predetermined number of times (for example, the suggestion number of 100 times including the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery) ), The transition control to the normal state may be performed without controlling the transition to the short time state after the probability variation state is terminated.

  In addition, if a falling lottery result that ends the probability variation state during the probability variation state is obtained, the big hit probability is returned from the probability of the probability variation state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery result is You may make it return the fluctuation | variation time of the special symbol for suggesting to a player to normal fluctuation | variation time. That is, when a falling lottery result for ending the probability variation state is obtained during the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be terminated and the transition control to the normal state may be performed. Also, in this case, the falling lottery may be performed even during the time-short state, and when the falling lottery result for ending the time-short state during the time-short state is obtained, the time-short state is terminated and the normal state is entered. You may make it control.

  In the example shown in FIG. 238 (E), after the jackpot game is over, the transition to the probability change state is controlled, and then the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type that will cause the probability change state to end when the special lottery result becomes “big hit”. By changing it, the degree of advantage is changed. Specifically, when the first special lottery result that is mainly executed in the normal state (low probability non-short-time state) is “big hit”, the occurrence rate of the big hit type is the same for all set values, "2R Probability Change", which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, but has a smaller number of winning balls than the "15R Probability Big Hit" The occurrence ratio of “big hit” is set to “40/100” respectively, and a predetermined number of fluctuations after the big hit game is finished (for example, the suggested number of 100 times including the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery) The rate of occurrence of “15R normal big hit” that is controlled to shift to the short time state until reaching 20 is set to “20/100”.

  On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the probability variation state and the short time state is “big hit”, the occurrence rate of the big hit type differs for each set value. The rate of occurrence of “15R probability variable big hit” that is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is “45/100”, and the number of winning balls that are controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set. The rate of occurrence of “2R probability change big hit” is less than “15R probability change big hit” is “15/100”, and the transition control to the short time state is reached until the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached after the big hit game ends. The generation ratio of “15R normal big hit” is “40/100”.

  With the setting value 2, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variable big hit” which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends is “46/100”, and the transition control to the high probability state after the jackpot game ends is a prize for The occurrence ratio of “2R probability variation big hit”, which is less than “15R probability variation big hit”, is set to “19/100”, and a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, suggesting the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R normal big hit” that is controlled to be in a time-saving state until reaching the suggestion number 100 times including the suggestion of the second special lottery is set to “35/100”.

  With the setting value 3, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variable big hit” that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game is ended is “47/100”, and the transition control to the high probability state is ended after the jackpot game ends. The occurrence ratio of “2R probability variation big hit”, which is less than “15R probability variation big hit”, is set to “23/100”, and a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, suggesting the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R normal big hit”, which is controlled to be in a time-saving state until reaching the suggestion number 100 times including the suggestion of the second special lottery, is set to “30/100”.

  With the setting value 4, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variable big hit” that is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game is ended is “48/100”, and the transition control to the high probability state is ended after the jackpot game is ended. The rate of occurrence of “2R probability variation big hit” in which the number of balls acquired is less than “15R probability variation big hit” is “27/100”, and a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, suggesting the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R normal big hit” that is controlled to shift to a short time state until reaching the suggestion number 100 times including the suggestion of the second special lottery is set to “25/100”.

  With a setting value of 5, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variable big hit” that is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is “49/100”. The occurrence ratio of “2R probability variation big hit”, which is less than “15R probability variation big hit”, is “31/100”, and after the big hit game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, suggesting the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R normal big hit” that is controlled to be in a time-saving state until reaching the suggestion number 100 times including the suggestion of the second special lottery is set to “20/100”.

  With the setting value 6, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variable big hit” that is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game is finished is “50/100”, and the transition control to the high probability state after the jackpot game is finished is an award. The occurrence ratio of “2R probability variation big hit”, which is less than “15R probability variation big hit”, is set to “35/100”, and a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, suggesting the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R normal big hit” that is controlled to shift to a short time state until reaching the suggestion number 100 times including the suggestion of the second special lottery is set to “15/100”.

  As described above, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the probability variation state and the short-time state is “big hit”, the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second special lottery) Change the occurrence ratio of “15R normal big hit” that is controlled to shift to the short time state until reaching the number of suggestions (100 times including the special lottery suggestions), and the higher the set value, the more “15R normal big hit” occurs. By reducing the ratio, it is difficult to end the probability variation state. As a result, the higher the set value, the harder the end of the probability variation state once the transition control to the probability variation state is made, the number of jackpots can be increased, and the prize ball based on the small hits generated during the probability variation state can be increased. Can be acquired. In other words, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the probability variation state.

  The higher the set value, the lower the rate of occurrence of “15R normal big hit”, while the rate of “2R probability big hit” is higher than “15R probability big hit” to reduce the number of winning balls. It can be suppressed that it becomes excessively advantageous to the person.

[27-3. Setting value suggesting effect of the second embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is configured such that the expected value of the winning ball that can be acquired in the probability variation state and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won differ for each set value. Specifically, in FIG. 238 (A), since the big hit probability of the probability variation state of the setting value 1 is “one third” and the small hit probability is “one third”, after the big hit game is finished The expected value of the number of small hits that can be won from the control to the probable change state until the next big hit is “9 times”. In addition, since about one game ball B can enter the second big prize opening 2006A in one small hit game, the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained in one small hit game Becomes “15 balls”. In other words, when the setting value is 1, the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability variation state is “135 balls” of “9 times × 15 balls”. Similarly, when the set value is 2, the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probability variation state is “195 balls” of “13 times × 15 balls”, and when the set value is 3, the winning value is obtained by the small hit in the probability variation state. The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained is “240 balls” of “16 times × 15 balls”, and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by small hitting in the case of the setting value 4 is “19 times × 15 balls”. The expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probability variation state when “285 balls” is set to 5 is “345 balls” of “23 times × 15 balls”, and the small hit in the probability variation state when the setting value is 6 The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the above is “390 balls” of “26 times × 15 balls”.

  In FIG. 238 (B), the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probability variation state when the setting value is 1 is “60 balls” of “4 times × 15 balls”, and the probability variation state when the setting value is 2. The expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained by small hit is “75 balls” of “5 times × 15 balls”, and when the setting value is 3, the expected value of the winning ball that can be acquired by small hit is “5 times” In the case of “75 balls” of “15 balls” and a setting value of 4, the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probability variation state is “105 balls” of “7 times × 15 balls”, and when the setting value is 5. The expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained by small hits in the probable state is “135 balls” of “9 times × 15 balls”, and the expected value of the winning ball that can be acquired by small hits in the probable state is “ 13 times x 15 balls "" 195 balls ".

  In this way, the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained by small hits in the probability variation state and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won differ depending on the set value (in FIG. 238 (B), the expected values are partially the same). Therefore, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game, it is possible to estimate the set value according to the number of winning balls won in the small hit game or the number of wins for the big hit until the next big hit it can. An effect that suggests a set value (a set value suggestion effect) may be executed according to the number of winning balls won in the small hit game, the number of wins per small hit, or the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 239, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays a gauge unit having six scales 1600d of 1 to 6 so as to correspond to the six-stage setting values on the effect display device 1600 as a setting value suggesting effect, The scale of the gauge section is colored according to the number of winning balls (the number of payouts) by winning the second big prize opening 2006A, and the gauge section starts from the initial display mode as the number of winning balls in the small hit increases. It is possible to suggest that a high setting value is obtained by coloring all the graduations of the gauge section (increase the coloration display between the graduations). Specifically, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 239 (A), the scale 1600d of the initial display mode, the character 1600b, and the balloon 1600c on which the character lines are displayed are displayed. Displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this initial display mode, on the assumption that the number of acquired winning balls is “0”, only the leftmost scale of the six scales is colored and displayed as a setting value corresponding to the set value. In addition to suggesting that the value is 1 or more, the balloon 1600c displays “set value is ...?” To indicate to the player through the character 1600b that the gauge portion suggests the set value. .

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 1 and falls within the expected value range at the set value 2. In the gauge section, it is possible to further display from the left side to the second scale by coloring (the first and second scales from the left side are colored and displayed). As well as suggesting, “1 or more?” Is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a dialogue of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the setting value is 2 or more (FIG. 239 (B)).

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 2 and falls within the expected value range at the set value 3. In addition, by displaying the 6th scale in the gauge part from the left side to the 3rd scale in a colored manner (in the state where the 1st to 3rd ones are colored and displayed from the left side), it is “set value 3 or more”. As well as suggesting, “3 or more?” Is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a dialogue of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the setting value is 3 or more (FIG. 239 (C)).

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 3 and falls within the expected value range at the set value 4. In addition, it is indicated that “set value 4 or more” is obtained by further color-displaying from the left side to the fourth scale among the six scales in the gauge section (in a state where the first to fourth colors are displayed from the left side). As well as suggesting, “4 or more !?” is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a dialogue of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the setting value is 4 or more (FIG. 239 (D)).

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 4 and falls within the expected value range at the set value 5. , Out of the six graduations in the gauge section, from the left to the fifth graduation is further colored and displayed (the first to fifth are colored and displayed from the left) to be “set value 5 or more” At the same time, the message 1600b displays “1 over 5?” On the balloon 1600c to more clearly suggest that the setting value is 5 or more (FIG. 239E).

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 5 and falls within the expected value range at the set value 6. Further, among the six scales in the gauge part, the display from the left side to the sixth scale is further colored and displayed (a state in which all the scales are colored and displayed), which suggests that it is “setting value 6” and the character 1600b As a dialogue, the message 1600c is displayed in the balloon 1600c to indicate more clearly that the setting value is 6 (FIG. 239 (F)).

  And after the state where all six graduations in the gauge section are colored and displayed from the left to the sixth graduation (the state where all graduations are colored and displayed), the final stage display has already been reached, so it is a big hit The display of the gauge part is not changed according to the number of winning balls paid out in the small hit game after the game, and the end condition is satisfied if the next big hit game is started or there is an end condition of the probability change state Until then, all the scales are colored and displayed.

  In addition, in the state where all the six scales in the gauge portion are colored and displayed, further setting suggestion may be performed separately. For example, in the state where all the six scales in the gauge portion are colored and displayed, the big hit game When paying out a prize ball in a subsequent small hit game, based on the detection of the ball entered at the second big prize opening 2006A, the highest setting is confirmed to definitely notify the player that it is the highest setting (setting value 6). You may make it perform the special effect lottery for performing an effect. Specifically, in a state where all six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed, a special production lottery that wins at 1/1000 each time a ball is detected at the second big prize opening 2006A, By winning, the voice output of a special mode (message voice of congratulations of setting 6), various lamp lights of the door frame 3 in a special mode (lamp lights in rainbow colors using seven colors), the effect display device 1600 It is possible to exemplify performing the highest setting finalization effect consisting of a special display (a message of congratulations on setting 6) at the same time. In this way, by executing the highest setting finalization effect in a state where all the scales are colored and displayed, after giving satisfaction with the effect related to the setting suggestion performed earlier, it is possible to further update without making the player bored. Satisfaction can be given to the player, and the game entertainment can be further improved.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the big hit is made before all the scales are colored and displayed, the display mode of the gauge portion is cleared after the big hit, thereby generating a big hit and generating a big hit game Every time when the transition control is performed to the probability change state, the set value suggesting effect is executed to suggest the set value of the pachinko machine 1, so that the actual set value is estimated by statistics of the set value suggested in the set value suggesting effect. Will be able to. In other words, if the probability variation state is executed only once, the number of prize balls acquired by small hits during this probability variation state may differ from the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained according to the set value. Although it is difficult to determine the number of prize balls obtained by small hits for each probable state of big hits, the ratio near the number of specific prize balls will increase, so the number of specific prize balls will be the expected value. By comparing, the set value can be estimated. In this example, it can be estimated that the setting value with the highest suggested ratio in the setting value suggestion effect executed a plurality of times is the actual setting value.

  Note that the display mode of the gauge unit may be taken over until the probability change state is completed without clearing the display mode of the gauge unit in the case of a big hit. Further, in this case, the six scales in the gauge section are set to 1 as the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained in one probability variation state or the number of small hits that can be generated in one probability variation state according to the set value. It is possible to prevent all the scales from being colored in the probability variation state. Thereby, since the set value can be suggested based on the number of winning balls and the number of small hits acquired in a probabilistic state over a long period of time, the reliability of the suggested set value can be improved.

  In addition, the various setting value suggestion effects described above are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the winning ball obtained by the small hit game executed in the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game until the next big hit is started. Since it is based on the number and not on the actual setting value, the suggested setting value may be different from the actual setting value. Note that information (setting value information) related to the setting value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, as a setting value suggesting effect, a prize obtained in the small hit game after the big hit game In addition to the number of balls, a setting value may be suggested based on setting value information. Specifically, when the number of winning balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the suggested mode of the set value suggesting effect should not be changed. Alternatively, when the number of winning balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game is less than the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the set value or set value information indicated by the set value information by lottery or the like You may make it change to the suggestion aspect of the setting value suggestion effect according to the setting value below the setting value shown by. By configuring in this way, the reliability of the setting value suggesting effect can be increased, and the setting value suggested by the setting value suggesting effect can be noted.

  Further, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game, and the peripheral control unit 1511 when the total number of prize balls exceeds the expected value at each set value. However, the setting suggestion in the probability variation state is not limited to such a form, but may be as follows.

  For example, when there is a six-stage gauge portion as described above, each time the peripheral control portion 1511 determines that the prize ball paid out by the small hit has reached a certain value, one scale 1600d is colored. The player may be suggested that the setting is high by achieving the coloring of the scale 1600d at the final stage. In this case, it is preferable to achieve the coloring of the final scale 1600d with reference to the expected value of the number of winning balls to be paid out in the small hit game after the hit game at the set value 6, for example, the setting When the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small hit game after the hit game is “195 balls” with a value of 6, the payout of “195 balls + α balls (α <195)” is colored at the final scale 1600d. The achievement timing can be exemplified.

  Also, based on the peripheral control unit 1511 determining that the number of times that the result of the second special lottery has been a small hit result has reached a certain value, not based on the prize ball paid out by the small hit, 1 Coloring one scale 1600d and achieving the final scale 1600d coloring (for example, the number of times that the result of the second special lottery is a small hit result reaches 80 times) You may make it suggest to a player that there is. In this case, the difficulty of achievement changes depending on the relationship between the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the probability variation state at the actually set value. And depending on the display status of the gauge part (for example, the situation where the final stage is reached by coloring one more scale), the result of the second special lottery may be smaller than the big hit in anticipation of setting value suggestion. It is also possible to provide a new game property that pays attention to.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a new game in which the set value is estimated according to the number of winning balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game and the number of winning of the small hit game when controlled to the probability variation state. Can provide sex.

[28. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The production operation unit unit 350 of the production operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a protruding member of the present invention, and the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body main body 358 of the present embodiment are detection means of the present invention. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is the advance / retreat means of the present invention, the elevating spring 365 in the present embodiment is the projecting spring of the present invention, and the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 in the present embodiment is the projecting output of the present invention. As the changing means, the lifting / lowering spring holding member 385 in the present embodiment corresponds to the spring holding member of the present invention.

[39. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the production operation unit 350 changes, the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 using the contact detection sensor main body 358. Can be detected. When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward by the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 350 protrudes in a state where the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, the player abuts (collises) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. Thus, when the production operation unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present to the player an effect based on physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player due to the performance that the conventional pachinko machine does not have, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly to the performance operation unit 350, and to the player Protrusion of the production operation unit 350 can be surely noticed.

  When the effect operation unit 350 is projected, if the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projecting output adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction (upward) on the upper end side of the lifting spring 365, the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. Thus, the urging force can be increased, and if the urging force is moved away from the upper end side of the lifting spring 365 (downward), the compression of the escaping spring 365 is weakened and the urging force can be decreased, and the lowering of the lifting spring By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the effect operation unit unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the production operation unit 350 can be projected with various collision outputs, it is possible to increase variations in production due to physical power, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and production operations. The production by the projection of the unit unit 350 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the sudden output of the production operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, the production operation unit unit with a strong force when the player brings a finger or the like closer to or in contact with the production operation unit 350. When 350 comes into contact, a strong impact is given to the player, which can make a player strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage) It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 350 is a push operation unit 303 capable of performing a push operation, when the player participation type production is executed, the player is caused to press the production operation unit unit 350 to perform a game. A player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the depressing of the effect operation unit 350 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 350 can be pressed, a player who places a finger or the like on the production operation unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) can be operated at any time. Then, when a player participation type effect that presses the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit unit 350 is caused to protrude by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, so that the player participation type is provided by an effect image, sound, or the like. Even without guiding the execution start of the production, the player can promptly recognize the start of the execution of the player participation type production, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the production operation unit unit 350 is enhanced to perform the player participation type production. You can entertain even more.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 is projected by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected using a drive motor. Thus, the production operation unit 350 can be easily protruded vigorously, and the above-described operational effects can be easily achieved.

  Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity varies depending on the distance between the production operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and cause the production operation unit 350 to protrude with different sudden output for each threshold. It becomes. Accordingly, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the presentation operation unit unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, and accordingly, according to each stage. By projecting with a sudden output, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 350 is provided so that the player can advance and retreat by popping up by executing the player participation type effect. In addition, when the player approaches or contacts, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button main body 351 with which the player of the effect operation unit 350 contacts is changed. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the production operation unit unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the contact due to the approach or contact of the player. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, by the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the advancement / retraction (pressing) of the effect operation unit unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320, the button outer decorative substrate 355, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, the sudden output adjustment mechanism 380, the effect display device 1600, and the like perform a predetermined effect. That is, the player can entertain the player by performing the predetermined effect by moving the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaching or contacting the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of the player.

  At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the production operation unit 350, the production is executed, and therefore the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) is replaced by the production operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). Can be made to function. On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit 350 can function as an effect operation unit (press operation unit). As a result, the player can perform a variety of performance operations, and by performing a player-participation-type performance that allows the player to perform a performance operation, a variety of performance operations can be enjoyed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to make the player entertain the player participation type effect, and to suppress the lowering of interest in the player's game.

  In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 provided near the portion of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 where the player contacts (below the upper surface portion 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance threshold values for executing a predetermined effect are provided. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Accordingly, since it becomes possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the effect operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, the effects are presented according to each stage. Thus, a variety of effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult to get bored of the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a predetermined effect is executed by the player's detection by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, an effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 (non-contact operation, An operation feeling can be given to the contact operation), and the player can more enjoy the production operation.

  Furthermore, it includes an effect operation unit 350 that allows the player to advance and retreat (can be pressed), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the player makes an operation to advance / retreat the production operation unit 350 (press operation), and an operation to bring a finger or the like closer to or in contact with the production operation unit 350 (non-contact operation, contact operation) ) Etc. can be requested, and the player's willingness to participate in the player-participation-type production can be enhanced by the variety of operations, making it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation-type production. Can do. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type production, it is possible to make the player less tired by various operations using the production operation unit unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain a player-participation-type production, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the production operation unit 350 to the engagement part 371c of the elevating cam member 371 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the production operation unit unit 350 is locked so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the production operation unit unit 350 is advanced or retreated, the production operation unit unit 350 is made unmovable by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. It is possible to prevent 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to avoid causing the player to feel distrust or anxiety due to the movement or shaking of the production operation unit 350, and the production by the production operation unit 350 is more enjoyable. Can be made.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, so that the contact detection sensor having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult to see from the player, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC or an output circuit for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separated. Since the shape, material, and the like of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor main body 358, the shape, form, specification, etc. of the button main body 351 of the presentation operation unit unit 350 can be selected. The pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized with certainty.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the button main body 351 or the surface member covering the non-button decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395 in the rendering operation unit 300 of the door frame 3. When the player makes a finger or the like approach or contact 396, the contact detection body 352 provided between the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395, or The capacitance of the contact detection body 397 changes, and a predetermined effect in which light is emitted to the player side by the outside decoration board 355, the inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395 is executed according to the change. The player's attention is strongly attracted to the off-button decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395 by the light irradiated to the player side. It is possible, it is possible to entertain the player by directing executed. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 and the non-button decoration board 355 or the button inside decoration board 364 or the decoration body 395 is replaced with the button main body 351 or Since it is formed so as to follow the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, the player can make the illusion of the contact detecting body 352 or the contact detecting body 397 like a part of the decorative portion. It can be made unrecognizable to the person that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting a player. In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is compared with the button outside decoration board 355 or the button inside decoration board 364 or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 395 (production) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give the player an uncomfortable feeling. Therefore, it is possible to show the player in a good state the effect by the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is removed. Since the effect of irradiating light to the player side is executed on the decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is attached to the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). 302) and a player can be given an operational feeling by light. Therefore, for example, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the button main body 351 or the surface member 396, and the finger or the like is approached by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397. By detecting the contact, an effect is executed by the non-button decorative board 355, the in-button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player joins the player. You can entertain the type production.

  Further, since the player's approach or contact to the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc. Depending on the distance to the button, the effect by the decorative board 355 outside the button, the decorative board 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 395 can be varied, so that the decorative board 355 outside the button depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers and the like. It is possible to change the presentation by the decorative board 364 or the decoration body 395 in the buttons and the decoration body 395, and to show the player a variety of presentations, and to make the player difficult to get bored by the various presentations. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interests.

  Further, a change in electrostatic capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the outer decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395 changes, a game to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is performed. It is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a person's finger or the like, and it is possible to reliably implement the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects.

  In addition, since the change in capacitance is detected by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be a conductive member. When the contact detector 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and it looks like a part of decoration by making the vapor deposition film thick and having a metallic luster. Can do. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are punched metal having a design shape such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are shown as a part of decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397 that cannot be recognized from the player side can be obtained, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the presentation operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). The capacitance changes, and due to the change, the effect presentation means such as the button outside decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projecting output adjustment mechanism 380, the effect display device 1600, etc. The touch detection body 395 and the like (including the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body left 390L, the contact detection body right 390R, the contact detection body 393, the contact detection body 397, etc.) The pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detection body 395 itself, so that it looks good for the player. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. Further, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and an effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395 Since a predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351, the contact detector 395, and the like by the means, a predetermined effect is presented according to the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351. Thus, the button main body 351 can function as the effect operation unit 301. And since the contact detection body 395 etc. which can be seen through the button main body 351 have design properties, the production operation unit 301 will appear to have design properties, and the production which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the operation unit 301 can have a strong impact on the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 having design properties can give a strong impact to the player, so that the interest in the contact detection body 395 (button body 351) can be strongly expressed. It is possible to enhance the expectation for the operation of the button main body 351 (the production operation unit 301), and to enjoy the operation of the button main body 351 when the player participation type production that operates the button main body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, the decoration detection body 395 for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape having a design property. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button main body 351 is first displayed by the contact detection body 395 or the like by urging the player to approach or touch the button main body 351. It can be noticed that it is the operation unit 301, and a player participation type effect can be more enjoyed by giving an unexpectedness to the player. Alternatively, when a player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button main body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, Since the electric capacity changes and the presentation is presented by the presentation presentation means, the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained by the presented presentation and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the effect presentation means presents the effect according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 etc., the player's finger etc. to the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 etc. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized. In addition, since the presentation is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 and the like, contact is made from the approach of the player's fingers and the like to the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 and the like. It is possible to detect the distance (distance) in multiple stages, so by presenting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player. It is difficult to get tired of, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the contact detector 395 having conductivity, The design can be imparted to the contact detection body 395 and the like, the deterioration of the appearance due to the contact detection body 395 and the like can be prevented, and the contact detection body 395 and the like can be made conspicuous, and the above-described effects can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily implemented.

  In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design having design characteristics without forming the contact detection body 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can have a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detection body 395 or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drinks does not adhere to the contact detection body 395 and the like, and the effort required for cleaning is easy. Can be. More specifically, since the contact detector 395 or the like has an uneven surface such as a punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the uneven surface, and it is troublesome to clean the soil. However, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button main body 351, the button main body 351 may be used even if the contact detection body 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal. As a result, it is possible to prevent adhesion of dirt, and the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as easy to clean.

  Further, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection body 359 or the like. In the case of using a material with improved design properties such as foil stamping, it is possible to prevent the player from wearing out at an early stage by touching, and the durability of the contact detector 395 and the like can be improved.

  Further, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the player does not directly touch the contact detection body 395 and the like by the transparent button body 351. Since it is possible to use a sensing object 395 or the like that feels uncomfortable or something that causes discomfort to the player, the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact sensing element 395 can be increased, The contact detector 395 and the like can be formed from a corresponding material.

  Further, when the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like is changed by bringing a player's finger or the like to approach or contact the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button main body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the etc., the player brings a finger or the like closer to or in contact with the button main body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. Can be recognized intuitively, and the player can enjoy the movement of fingers and the like.

  Further, an effect is presented to the player via the button main body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc., and by the approach or contact of the player's fingers etc. to the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. Since the presentation presented to the player is executed via the button body 351, the contact detector 395, etc., the button body 351 can function as a contact operation unit, and the operational feeling can be provided by the presented presentation. Can be provided, and an operation (player participation type production) using the button body 351 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player brings his / her finger or the like closer to or in contact with the button body 351, When the contact detection body 352 (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area, the button illuminates by the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 355a on the non-button decoration board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a on the button inside decoration board 364. A light emitting effect in which light is emitted to the player through the main body 351, an effect of vibrating the player's finger or the like in contact with (via) the button main body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and a button main body 351 by the effect operating unit lifting mechanism 360 Providing impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player through (via) the button body 351 by protruding upward, etc. To be executed, it is possible to function button body 351 as the contact operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player. At this time, since the player is provided with effects such as light, vibration, shock, push-up and wind pressure through the button body 351, the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. It is possible to increase the willingness to operate the button body 351. Then, with the player's finger or the like touching the button body 351, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303 by appropriately moving the finger or the like and pressing the button body 351 downward. The player can entertain the player with a variety of performance operations by the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like with the button 352 and the pressing operation of the button main body 351. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is constituted by a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact main body 351 causes the button main body 351. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a, and the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like is configured by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit. Can be disposed on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button main body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be disposed at a less noticeable part, and the pachinko machine The appearance of 1 can be improved.

  In addition, since the button outside decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (downward) of the button body 351, the player can transmit light or light through the button body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure can be easily provided, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 200 Dish unit 300 Production operation unit 301 Production operation unit 302 Contact operation unit 303 Press operation unit 350 Production operation unit unit (protruding member)
351 Button body 352 Contact detector (detection means)
358 Contact detection sensor body (detection means)
360 Production Operation Unit Elevating Mechanism (Advance / Retreat Unit)
361 Lifting mechanism base 365 Lifting spring (protruding spring)
367 Operation button lift drive motor 368 Lift drive gear 369 Drive gear 370 Lift cam drive gear member 371 Lift cam member 373 Press detection sensor 374 Lift detection sensor 375 Projection output detection sensor 380 Projection output adjustment mechanism (projection output changing means)
381 Projection output adjustment drive motor 382 Pinion gear 383 Transmission gear 384 Adjustment screw 385 Lifting spring lower holding member (spring holding member)

Claims (1)

A projecting member provided so as to be able to advance and retreat;
Detection means capable of detecting the approach or contact of the player to the protruding member;
Advancing / retreating means capable of projecting the projecting member toward the player by detection of the sensing means;
A gaming machine comprising: a projecting output changing means capable of changing a projecting output of the projecting member by the advance / retreat means.

Images